HR Aruba Adult Pool Project Manual PDF

PROJECT MANUAL
Issued for Construction
Hyatt Aruba Adult Pool

BLUR Project No: 17025
Palm Beach, Aruba
PREPARED FOR:
HYATT INTERNATIONAL
By BLUR Workshop, LLC
February 28, 2019
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division 01 - general requirements

011000 - Summary ............................................................................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 4
012500 - Substitution Procedures ................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 3
012600 - Contract Modification Procedures .............................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 3
012900 - Payment Procedures ....................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
013100 - Project Management And Coordination.................................... 2/26/2019 ... ....... 10
013200 - Construction Progress Documentation........................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
013233 - Photographic Documentation ...................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 5
013300 - Submittal Procedures ...................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 9
013516 - Alteration Project Procedures........................................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 8
014000 - Quality Requirements ...................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 7
014150 – Threshold Inspection ...................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 5
017300 - Execution ........................................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ....... 10
017700 - Closeout Procedures ....................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
019113 - General Commissioning Requirements ....................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 2
Division 02 - existing conditions

024119 - Selective Demolition ........................................................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 7
Division 03 - concrete
033000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete ................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 7
034840 - Precast Concrete Countertops ..................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 4
035300 - Concrete Topping ........................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
Division 04 - masonry
042200 - Concrete Unit Masonry ................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ....... 14
047300 - Manufactured Masonry Veneer ................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
Division 05 - metals
055000 - Metal Fabrications ........................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 9
Division 06 - wood, plastics, and composites

061000 - Rough Carpentry ............................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
061053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 7
061533 - Decorative Wood Decking ............................................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 5
061600 – Wood Sheathing .............................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 4
061753 – Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses ..................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 5
064400 - Ornamental Woodwork .................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
Division 07 - thermal and moisture protection

071326 - Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing ............................................. 2/26/2019 ... ....... 11
071700 - Bentonite Waterproofing ................................................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 4
072419 - Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation And Finish System (Eifs) ..... 2/26/2019 ... ....... 11
072600 - Vapor Retarders ............................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 2
075423 - Thermoplastic Polyolefin (Tpo) Roofing ....................................... 2/26/2019 ... ....... 14
076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim....................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ....... 14
079200 - Joint Sealants .................................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 9
Division 08 - openings
081113 - Hollow Metal Doors And Frames ................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 7
081416 - Flush Wood Doors ............................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
088300 - Mirrors ................................................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 5
Division 09 - finishes
092900 - Gypsum Board .................................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ....... 11
093013 - Ceramic Tiling ................................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 8
099113 - Exterior Painting ................................................................................ 2/26/2019 ... ......... 8
099123 - Interior Painting ................................................................................. 2/26/2019 ... ......... 9
099653 - Elastomeric Coatings....................................................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
Division 10 - specialties
102800 - Toilet, Bath, And Laundry Accessories ......................................... 2/26/2019 ... ......... 6
Division 13 – special construction

131100 – Swimming Pool and Water Feature ………………………………..2/26/2019…….234
Hyatt Regency Aruba Adult Pool Issued for Construction 02/26/2019
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Project information.
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.
3. Access to site.
4. Coordination with occupants.
5. Work restrictions.
6. Specification and Drawing conventions.
7. Miscellaneous provisions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures
governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.
1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION
A. Project Identification: Hyatt Regency Aruba: Adult Pool Construction.
1. Project Location: LG Smith Boulevard #85, Palm Beach, Aruba.
B. Owner: Hyatt Development.
1. Owner's Representative: Brad Marman.
C. Architect: BLUR Workshop, LLC as consultant to EDSA.
D. Architect's Consultants: Architect has retained the following design professionals who
have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1. Mechanical, Electrical Plumbing: Beach Engineering Solutions Team.

2. Structure: PES Structural Engineers.
E. Other Owner Consultants: Owner has retained the following design professionals who
have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:
1. Landscape: EDSA
2. Civil: BK Consult
3. Pool: Aquatic Design and Engineering
SUMMARY 011000 - 1
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:
1. Construction of 4500 SF Pool, pool deck, bathroom and shower facilities, 5 double
cabanas, towel hut and Pool mechanical and service area associated with Adult
Pool. The site is approximately 45,000 SF and includes an event lawn. Connection
to existing building may require minimal renovation and other Work as indicated
in the Contract Documents.
B. Type of Contract:
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
1.5 ACCESS TO SITE
A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as
indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this
Section.
B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to Work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of
Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1. Limits: Confine construction operations to Balashi Pool bar and kitchen area.
2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways loading areas, and
entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees,
and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for
storage of materials.
a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by

construction operations.
b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by

construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period.
Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the premises during entire construction
period, with the exception of areas under construction. Cooperate with Owner during
construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the
Work so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. Maintain existing exits unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or

used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or
used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's
operations.
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS
A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.
SUMMARY 011000 - 2
1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of
8:00a.m. to 6:00p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Weekend Hours: As arranged with Operations team.

2. Early Morning Hours: No loud work or work that creates noxious odors.
3. Hours for Core Drilling or loud work: Late afternoon is preferable.
C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner
or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.
D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise
and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.
1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive
operations.
2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.
E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.
F. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on

Project site is not permitted.
G. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on

Project site. Require personnel to use identification tags at all times.
1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in
particular situations. These conventions are as follows:
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on
the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically
stated otherwise.
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the

Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings

are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on
Drawings to identify materials and products:
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms
used in the individual Specifications Sections.
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as
part of the U.S. National CAD Standard.
SUMMARY 011000 - 3
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes

referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY 011000 - 4
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction

from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to
changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory
changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that
are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer
advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation

method cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed
to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and
separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with
those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction
cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of
purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract
Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution
request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for
applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution
to produce indicated results.
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.6 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the

approved substitutions.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of

need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will

produce indicated results.
b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that
specified product provided for compliance with LEED requirements.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform
and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all
contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received
within 30days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be
considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,

energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may
include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services,
increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.
b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform
and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all
contractors involved.

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and

processing Contract modifications.
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710.
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of

proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to
stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit
a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract
Time necessary to execute the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,

with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish
survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and
amounts of trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total
float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to

the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to
Architect.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the
change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.
Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the
Contract Time.
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect
of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.
1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS
A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures

for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect
actual costs of allowances.
B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for
preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect
measured scope of unit-price work.
1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change
Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on

AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed
with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the

Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work

required by the Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
1.8 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive on

EJCDC Document C-940 . Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It

also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum
or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work

required by the Work Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data

necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and

process Applications for Payment.
1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures

for handling changes to the Contract.
2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative
requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's
construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the

Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing
Contractor's Applications for Payment.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of

Contractor's construction schedule.
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative
forms and schedules, including the following:
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.

b. Submittal schedule.
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's
construction schedule.
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later
than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for
Payment.
3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring
separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated
with each phase of payment.
4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction
schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing
values coordinated with each element. Subscheduled element examples would
be "Meeting Rooms", "Ballroom", and "Guestroom floor levels" individually
scheduled.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line
items for the schedule of values. Generally, provide at least one line item for each
Specification Section unless this adds confusion to cost tracking. Where a single
subcontract encompasses multiple specification sections, indicate the values for each
section individually. Provide sub-schedules for all guestroom floors for applicable trades.
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of

values:
a. Project name and location.

b. Name of Architect.
c. Architect's project number.
d. Contractor's name and address.
e. Date of submittal.
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate
the following for each item listed:
a. Related Specification Section or Division.

b. Description of the Work.
c. Name of subcontractor.
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
e. Name of supplier.
f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to
nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
1) Labor.
2) Materials.
3) Equipment.
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with
Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal
subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for
Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the
Contract Sum and subcontract amount.
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.
a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include
evidence of insurance and location of stored material.
7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for
each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of
the Work.
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and
profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the
schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at
Contractor's option with owner approval.
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives
result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be
consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid
for by Owner.
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial

Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered
by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for
review by Architect and Owner.
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as
form for Applications for Payment.
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a

person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architectwill return
incomplete applications without action.
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment,
whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work
completed at time of Application for Payment.
3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued
before last day of construction period covered by application.
4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested
project acceleration.
E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or
equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate
between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.
1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and

consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.
2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid
invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation;
do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.
3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:
a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of

previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous

Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for
Payment.
c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment
and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.
F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for
Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall
include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording
appropriate information about application.
G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of
mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application,
after deduction for retainage, on each item.
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full
waivers.
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must
submit waivers.
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.
H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede
or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1. List of subcontractors.
2. Schedule of values.
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).
4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final)
incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of
schedule by each Contractor.
5. Products list (preliminary if not final).
6. Schedule of unit prices, if any.
7. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).
8. List of Contractor's staff assignments.
9. List of Contractor's principal consultants.
10. Copies of building permits.
11. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for
performance of the Work.
12. Initial progress report.
13. Report of preconstruction conference.
14. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
15. Performance and payment bonds.
16. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
I. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate
of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent
completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete

and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
3. Include Certificate of Occupancy issued by Authority have Jurisdiction.

J. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data
as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and
assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.



SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1. General coordination procedures.

2. Coordination drawings.
3. Requests for Information (RFIs).
4. Project Web site.
5. Project meetings.
1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and

submitting Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation
and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control
points.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.
4. Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work
with Owner's Commissioning Authority.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by, or
clarifications of, the Contract Documents.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for
each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment
fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A or form acceptable to Owner and
Architect. Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or

supplying products.
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of
key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance
at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and
telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail
addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as
alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project
Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.
1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on
each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results

where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other
components, before or after its own installation.
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance
and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of
attendees at meetings.
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of

their Work is required.
C. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried

out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged
materials that are designated as Owner's property.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to

requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely
shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if
coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or
installed by more than one entity.
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough

to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard
printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination

drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe
relationship of various systems and components.
b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.
c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated
replacement of components during the life of the installation.
d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed
dampers, valves, and other controls.
e. Indicate required installation sequences.

f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions

that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating
proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult
installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural
elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical
Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical
ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to
adequately represent the Work.
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems,
mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components
within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on
Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms
showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm,
and electrical equipment.
4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all
disciplines.
5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and
locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing
plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and
housekeeping pads, and similar items.
6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:
a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including
insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.
b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access
doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.
c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.
7. Electrical Work: Show the following:
a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.
b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other
fire-alarm locations.
c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and
motor control center locations.
d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center
lines.
8. Fire-Protection System: Show the following:
a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler
heads.
9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is
being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are
Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are
not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient,
Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and
resubmit.

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the
following requirements:
1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and
operating system as original Drawings.
2. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable
Data File (PDF) format.
3. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate coordination drawing files into
Building Information Model established for Project.
a. Perform three-dimensional component conflict analysis as part of

preparation of coordination drawings. Resolve component conflicts prior to
submittal. Indicate where conflict resolution requires modification of design
requirements by Architect. The Architect will participate in coordination
meetings or web-based sessions to assist resolution of conflicts prior to
submission.
4. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of Drawings for use in
preparing coordination digital data files.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of

digital data files as they relate to Drawings.
b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in Revit 2015 .
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA
Document C106 or Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect.
1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or

interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in
the form specified.
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by

Contractor with no response.
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information
or interpretation and the following:
1. Project name.
2. Project number.
3. Date.
4. Name of Contractor.
5. Name of Architect.
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.
7. RFI subject.
8. Each RFI should have a single question or questions about a single subject. Do not
submit RFI's with multiple, unrelated questions.
9. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.
10. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
11. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
12. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts
the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
13. Contractor's signature.

14. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to
fully describe items needing interpretation. Provide identification of attachments
to include RFI number and an alpha suffix.
a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of

affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.
C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same
content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and
respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received
by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:
a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.
c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional
information.
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal
according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architectin writing within 10 days of receipt
of the RFI response.
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI
number. Submit log weekly. Use software log that is part of Project Web site.
1. Project name.
2. Name and address of Contractor.
3. Name and address of Architect.
4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.
5. RFI description.
6. Date the RFI was submitted.
7. Date Architect's response was received.
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI
response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if
Contractor disagrees with response.
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change

Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. If follow-up questions are generated on the same subject, the RFI should be
re-submitted with the same number with a decimal postscript: ex:RFI 101.1.
1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE
A. Provide, administer, and use Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing
project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site
shall include the following functions:
1. Project directory.
2. Project correspondence.
3. Meeting minutes.
4. Contract modifications forms and logs.
5. RFI forms and logs.
6. Task and issue management.
7. Photo documentation.
8. Schedule and calendar management.
9. Submittals forms and logs.
10. Payment application forms.
11. Drawing and specification document hosting, viewing, and updating.
12. Online document collaboration.
13. Reminder and tracking functions.
14. Archiving functions.
B. Provide up to 12 Project Web site user licenses for use of the Owner, Architect, and
Architect's consultants. Provide up to eight hours of software training at Architect's
office for Project Web site users if system is non-typical.
C. On completion of Project, provide one complete archive copy(ies) of Project Web site
files to Owner and to Architect in a digital storage format acceptable to Architect.
D. Provide one of the following Project Web site software packages under their current
published licensing agreements:
1. Autodesk, Buzzsaw.
2. Meridian Systems, Prolog.
3. Similar software that is agreeable to Owner and Architect.
E. Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties granted access by Contractor to Project

Web site shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106 or
Agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect.
1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose

presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and
Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited
attendees.
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant
discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to
everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the
meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference

before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later
than 30 days after execution of the Agreement.
1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other
concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the
Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the
following:
a. Tentative construction schedule.

b. Phasing.
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.
e. Lines of communications.
f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
g. Procedures for RFIs.
h. Procedures for testing and inspecting.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
j. Distribution of the Contract Documents.
k. Submittal procedures.
l. Preparation of record documents.
m. Use of the premises and existing building.
n. Work restrictions.
o. Working hours.
p. Owner's occupancy requirements.
q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
r. Procedures for moisture and mold control.
s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.
t. Construction waste management and recycling.
u. Parking availability.
v. Office, work, and storage areas.
w. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
x. First aid.
y. Security.
z. Progress cleaning.
4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute
meeting minutes.
C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before

each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators

involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with
other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the
meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner of scheduled meeting dates.
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a. Contract Documents.
b. Options.
c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.
f. Deliveries.
g. Submittals.
h. Review of mockups.
i. Possible conflicts.
j. Compatibility requirements.
k. Time schedules.
l. Weather limitations.
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.
n. Warranty requirements.
o. Compatibility of materials.
p. Acceptability of substrates.
q. Temporary facilities and controls.
r. Space and access limitations.
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.
u. Installation procedures.
v. Coordination with other work.
w. Required performance results.
x. Protection of adjacent work.
y. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,

including required corrective measures and actions.
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other
parties requiring information.
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at

a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 45 days prior to the
scheduled date of Substantial Completion.
1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to

Project closeout.
2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other
concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be
familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout,
including the following:
a. Preparation of record documents.

b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for
final inspection for acceptance.
c. Submittal of written warranties.
d. Requirements for completing sustainable design documentation.
e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.
f. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.
g. Requirements for demonstration and training.
h. Preparation of Contractor's punch list.
i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial
Completion and for final payment.
j. Submittal procedures.
k. Coordination of separate contracts.
l. Owner's partial occupancy requirements.

m. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.

n. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.
4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.
E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.
1. Schedule weekly Web-based meetings to include at least Architect, Owner and

Contractor for early construction phase.
2. Coordinate dates of monthly meetings with preparation of payment requests.
3. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, and
Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned
with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of
future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the
meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating
to the Work.
4. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule,
or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule.
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be
completed within the Contract Time.
1) Review schedule for next period.
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the
following:
1) Interface requirements.
2) Sequence of operations.
3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts.
4) Status of submittals.
5) Status of sustainable design documentation.
6) Deliveries.
7) Off-site fabrication.
8) Access.
9) Site utilization.
10) Temporary facilities and controls.
11) Progress cleaning.
12) Quality and work standards.
13) Status of correction of deficient items.
14) Field observations.
15) Status of RFIs.
16) Status of proposal requests.
17) Pending changes.
18) Status of Change Orders.
19) Pending claims and disputes.
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.
5. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each

progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each
meeting.

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the

progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1. Startup construction schedule.

2. Contractor's Construction Schedule.
3. Construction schedule updating reports.
4. Daily construction reports.
5. Material location reports.
6. Site condition reports.
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:
1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.

2. PDF file.
B. Startup construction schedule.
1. Submittal of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute

approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.
C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire

schedule for entire construction period.
1. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled
to comply with requirements for submittals.
D. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.
E. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.
F. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with

requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review
methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and
Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.

2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.
3. Discuss constraints, including interim milestones and partial Owner occupancy.
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.
5. Review submittal requirements and procedures.
6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.
7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and
inspecting agencies.
8. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.
9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.
10. Review procedures for updating schedule.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, submittal

schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from
entities involved.
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and
schedule them in proper sequence.
1.6 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program

that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.
1. Use Microsoft Project or Primavera for current Windows operating system.
B. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and

reporting using CPM scheduling.
1. In-House Option: Owner may waive requirement to retain a consultant if

Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and
reporting techniques. Submit qualifications.
2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project
progress, alleged delays, and time impact.
C. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date
of Substantial Completion.
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that

shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
D. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each
main element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless

specifically allowed by Architect.
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following
long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 30 days, as
separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not
limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.
a. Food Service Equipment

b. Custom Millwork.
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in

Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review
times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 10days for startup and testing.
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 20 days for completion of
punch list items and final completion.
E. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract

Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is
affected.
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each
contract.
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work
performed by Owner.
4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product.
Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates
indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include
delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.
6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a. Coordination with existing construction.

b. Limitations of continued occupancies.
c. Uninterruptible services.
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.
e. Use-of-premises restrictions.
7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of
the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Subcontract awards.
b. Submittals.
c. Purchases.
d. Mockups.
e. Fabrication.
f. Sample testing.
g. Deliveries.
h. Installation.
i. Tests and inspections.
j. Adjusting.
k. Curing.
l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.
8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major
portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area
must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for
the following:

a. Structural completion.
b. Permanent space enclosure.
c. Completion of mechanical installation.
d. Completion of electrical installation.
e. Substantial Completion.
F. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule,

including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final
completion.
G. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and

actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work
performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.
1. See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment
procedures.
H. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to

occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the
following issues:
1. Unresolved issues.
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.
4. Notations on returned submittals.
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.
I. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to

reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each
regularly scheduled progress meeting.
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions
have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the
report of each such meeting.
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,
but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and
activity durations.
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.
J. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 10or more calendar
days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule
indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.
Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, equipment required to
achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.
K. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate

contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor
with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.
1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.

2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and
post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have
completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in
performance of construction activities.

1.7 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal,

Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established
for the Notice to Proceed.
1. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information

received since the start of Project.
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first

workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete,

indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within
time bar.
1.8 REPORTS
A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1. List of subcontractors at Project site.

2. Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
3. Equipment at Project site.
4. Material deliveries.
5. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence
of rain or snow.
6. Testing and inspection.
7. Accidents.
8. Meetings and significant decisions.
9. Unusual events.
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
11. Emergency procedures.
12. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
13. Change Orders received and implemented.
14. Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
15. Services connected and disconnected.
16. Equipment or system tests and startups.
17. Partial completions and occupancies.
18. Substantial Completions authorized.
B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list
of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing
materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement
of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or
stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:
1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.

2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and
installed.
3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site

conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit
with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,
together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

D. Unusual Event Reports: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special
report. List chain of events, persons participating, responses by Contractor's personnel,
evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in
advance when these events are known or predictable.
1. Submit unusual event reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an

occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
2. Periodic construction photographs.
3. Preconstruction video recordings.
4. Web-based construction photographic documentation.
1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic

documentation.
2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation
as project record documents at Project closeout.
3. Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for photographic documentation
before selective demolition operations commence.
A. Qualification Data: For photographer.
B. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points
marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of
construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic
documentation.
C. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.
1. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in

file metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Date photograph was taken.
c. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass
point), and elevation or story of construction.
D. Web-Based Photographic Documentation: Submit time-lapse sequence video

recordings simultaneously with recording.
A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a

professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years.
PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

B. Web-Based Photographic Documentation Service Provider: A firm specializing in

providing photographic equipment, Web-based software, and related services for
construction projects, with record of providing satisfactory services similar to those
required for Project.
1.5 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited
reproduction of photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with
minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by
2400 pixels.
B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video disc in format

acceptable to Architect.
2.2 WEB-BASED PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
A. Project Camera: Provide fixed exterior camera installation, mounted to provide

unobstructed view of construction site from location approved by Architect.
1. Provide 2 fixed-location camera(s), with the following characteristics:
a. Remotely controllable view with mouse-click user navigation for horizontal

pan, vertical tile, and optical zoom of 500 percent minimum.
b. Capable of producing minimum 3.0 megapixel pictures.
c. Provide power supply, active high-speed data connection to service
provider's network, and static public IP address for each camera.
B. Web-Based Image Access: Password-protected access for Project team administered

by Contractor, providing current image access and archival image access by date and
time, with images downloadable to viewer's device.
1. Provide public viewer open access to most recent project camera image.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs.
B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in
focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be
accepted.
1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each
photographic location.

C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital
camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing
software.
1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at
Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same
manner as those submitted to Architect.
D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project

site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction,
from different vantage points, as directed by Architect.
1. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs.

2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before
starting the Work.
3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to
accurately record physical conditions at start of construction.
4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of
adjacent structures, pavements, and improvements.
E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the

cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to
show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
F. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs as indicated, to

show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
1. Frequency: Take photographs weekly, with timing each month adjusted to

coincide with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment.
2. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Architect and Contractor,
photographer to select vantage points. During each of the following construction
phases, take not less than two of the required shots from same vantage point
each time to create a time-lapse sequence as follows:
a. Above-grade structural framing.

b. Exterior building enclosure.
c. Interior Work, through date of Substantial Completion.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS
A. Video Recording Photographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record

construction video recordings.
B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording unless otherwise

necessary to show area of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At
start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or
television and the actual temperature reading at Project site.
C. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting construction, record video recording

of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by
Architect.
1. Show existing conditions adjacent to Project site before starting the Work.
2. Show existing buildings either on or adjoining Project site to accurately record
physical conditions at the start of construction.

3.3 WEB-BASED CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
A. Live Streaming Construction Site Images: Provide Web-accessible image of current site
image from fixed location camera(s), updated at 15 minute intervals during daytime
operation.
B. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Site Recordings: Provide video recording from a

fixed-location camera to show status of construction and progress.
1. Frequency: Record one frame of video recording every 15 minutes, from same
vantage point each time, to create a time-lapse sequence of construction
activities.
2. Timer: Provide timer to automatically start and stop video recorder so recording
occurs only during daylight construction work hours.
C. Maintain cameras and Web-based access in good working order according to

Web-based construction photographic documentation service provider's written
instructions until final completion. Provide for service of cameras and related networking
devices and software.


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and
other submittals.
1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and
the schedule of values.
2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules
and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and
from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet
protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within
which internal and external users are able to access files.
B. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe
Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display
resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order

by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional
time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.
1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values,

and Contractor's construction schedule.
2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include
submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals
required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early
because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of
Contractor's construction schedule.
a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and

timing for submittals.
4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

a. Scheduled date for first submittal.

b. Specification Section number and title.
c. Submittal category: Action; informational.
d. Name of subcontractor.
e. Description of the Work covered.
f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
g. Scheduled date of fabrication.
h. Scheduled dates for purchasing.
i. Scheduled dates for installation.
j. Activity or event number.
1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be
provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.
1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the
Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record
drawings.
a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of

digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.
b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in
Revit 15.
c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of
Agreement form acceptable to Owner and Architect.
d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate
discipline:
1) Floor plans.
2) Reflected ceiling plans.
3) Revit files as needed .
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance

of construction activities.
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.
2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently
unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved
submittal schedule.
3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same
Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.
4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work
so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals
concurrently for coordination.
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional
time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise
Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same
manner as initial submittal.
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's
consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of
each submittal.
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that
submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's
consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned
to Architect before being returned to Contractor.
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal

file as follows:
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating

submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with
links enabling navigation to each item.
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision
identifier.
a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number
followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g.,
GTE-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another
decimal point (e.g., GTE-061000.01.A).
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and

approval markings and action taken by Architect.
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from
electronic project management software electronic form acceptable to Owner,
containing the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
g. Category and type of submittal.
h. Submittal purpose and description.
i. Specification Section number and title.
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed if not clearly indicated in the
submittal.
l. Related physical samples submitted directly.
m. Indication of full or partial submittal.
n. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.
o. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
p. Other necessary identification.
5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic

submittal file metadata:
a. Project name.

b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

c. Manufacturer name.
d. Product name.
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.
F. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on

Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other
than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from
requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations.
Include same identification information as related submittal.
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.

2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent
of revision.
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's
action stamp.
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,

fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for
performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
I. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final
action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by

individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual
Specification Sections.
1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site
specifically established for Project.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as
an electronic Project record document file.
2. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.
a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as
an electronic Project record document file.
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes

signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign
documents on behalf of that entity.
a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted

certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of
construction and type of product or equipment.
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard

published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product
Data.
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are
applicable.
3. Include the following information, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

b. Manufacturer's product specifications.
c. Standard color charts.
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:
a. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on

accompanying Shop Drawings.
5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.

6. Submit Product Data in the following format:
a. PDF electronic file.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not

base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed
data.
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the

following information, as applicable:
a. Identification of products.
b. Schedules.
c. Compliance with specified standards.
d. Notation of coordination requirements.
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 11 x 17 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42
inches.
3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:
4. BIM File Incorporation: Develop and incorporate Shop Drawing files into Building
Information Model established for Project.
a. Prepare Shop Drawings in the following format: Same digital data software
program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings.
b. Refer to Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for
requirements for coordination drawings.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories

together in one submittal package.
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the
following:
a. Generic description of Sample.

b. Product name and name of manufacturer.
c. Sample source.
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.
e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for

quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction
associated with each set.
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units
or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available.
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated,
prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in
manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for
use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples
include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or
fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of
repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color
range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.
E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written

summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.
Include the following information in tabular form:
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the
Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.
2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.
3. Submit product schedule in the following format:
F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100

"Project Management and Coordination."
G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section

013200 "Construction Progress Documentation."
H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in
Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."
I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply
with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements"Closeout Submittals
and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section
017700 "Closeout Procedures."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and

experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and
addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
K. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead

certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
L. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced
by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports
on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing
agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
M. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code
in effect for Project. Include the following information:
1. Name of evaluation organization.

2. Date of evaluation.
3. Time period when report is in effect.
4. Product and manufacturers' names.
5. Description of product.
6. Test procedures and results.
7. Limitations of use.
N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed
before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the
Contract Documents.
O. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on

testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
P. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests
performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final
location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.
Q. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not
limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations,
and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria
and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and
version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by

a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract
Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and
design criteria indicated.
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,

submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,

and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper
copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each
product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a
design professional.
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria
in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in
performing these services.
C. BIM File Incorporation: Incorporate delegated-design drawing and data files into
Building Information Model established for Project.
1. Prepare delegated-design drawings in the following format: Same digital data

software program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to
Architect .
B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section

017700 "Closeout Procedures."
C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include
Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number,
name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that
submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the
Contract Documents.
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate
corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with
an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.
B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to
appropriate party.
C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial
submittals has received prior approval from Architect .
D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be

returned for resubmittal without review.
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect
without action.


SECTION 013516 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes special procedures for alteration work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alteration Work: This term includes remodeling, renovation, repair, and maintenance
work performed within existing spaces or on existing surfaces as part of the Project.
B. Consolidate: To strengthen loose or deteriorated materials in place.
C. Design Reference Sample: A sample that represents the Architect's prebid selection of
work to be matched; it may be existing work or work specially produced for the Project.
D. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using

gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing
of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled.
E. Match: To blend with adjacent construction and manifest no apparent difference in

material type, species, cut, form, detail, color, grain, texture, or finish; as approved by
Architect.
F. Refinish: To remove existing finishes to base material and apply new finish to match
original, or as otherwise indicated.
G. Repair: To correct damage and defects, retaining existing materials, features, and
finishes. This includes patching, piecing-in, splicing, consolidating, or otherwise reinforcing
or upgrading materials.
H. Replace: To remove, duplicate, and reinstall entire item with new material. The original
item is the pattern for creating duplicates unless otherwise indicated.
I. Replicate: To reproduce in exact detail, materials, and finish unless otherwise indicated.
J. Reproduce: To fabricate a new item, accurate in detail to the original, and from either
the same or a similar material as the original, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Retain: To keep existing items that are not to be removed or dismantled.
L. Strip: To remove existing finish down to base material unless otherwise indicated.
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 - 1

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Alteration Work Subschedule: A construction schedule coordinating the sequencing and

scheduling of alteration work for entire Project, including each activity to be performed,
and based on Contractor's Construction Schedule. Secure time commitments for
performing critical construction activities from separate entities responsible for alteration
work.
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain best Work

results.
2. Coordinate sequence of alteration work activities to accommodate the following:
a. Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building.

b. Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
c. Other known work in progress.
d. Tests and inspections.
3. Detail sequence of alteration work, with start and end dates.

4. Utility Services: Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. Coordinate
shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
5. Use of elevator and stairs.
6. Equipment Data: List gross loaded weight, axle-load distribution, and wheel-base
dimension data for mobile and heavy equipment proposed for use in existing
structure. Do not use such equipment without certification from Contractor's
professional engineer that the structure can support the imposed loadings without
damage.
B. Pedestrian and Vehicular Circulation: Coordinate alteration work with circulation

patterns within Project building(s) and site. Some work is near circulation patterns and
adjacent to restricted areas. Circulation patterns cannot be closed off entirely and in
places can be only temporarily redirected around small areas of work. Access to
restricted areas may not be obstructed. Plan and execute the Work accordingly.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS FOR ALTERATION WORK
A. Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work: Before starting alteration work, conduct
conference at Project site.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Operator and Owner, Architect, and

Contractor, testing service representative, specialists, and chemical-cleaner
manufacturer(s) shall be represented at the meeting.
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress of alteration
work, including review of the following:
a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Discuss and finalize; verify availability of

materials, specialists' personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
b. Fire-prevention plan.
c. Governing regulations.
d. Areas where existing construction is to remain and the required protection.
e. Hauling routes.
f. Sequence of alteration work operations.
g. Storage, protection, and accounting for salvaged and specially fabricated
items.
h. Existing conditions, staging, and structural loading limitations of areas where
materials are stored.

i. Qualifications of personnel assigned to alteration work and assigned duties.

j. Requirements for extent and quality of work, tolerances, and required
clearances.
k. Embedded work such as flashings and lintels, special details, collection of
waste, protection of occupants and the public, and condition of other
construction that affects the Work or will affect the work.
3. Reporting: Record conference results and distribute copies to everyone in

attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from
conference.
B. Coordination Meetings: Conduct coordination meetings specifically for alteration work

at weekly intervals. Coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for
other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Operator and Owner, Architect, and

Contractor, each specialist, supplier, installer, and other entity concerned with
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of alteration work
activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
alteration work.
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous coordination
meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress of
alteration work. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a. Alteration Work Subschedule: Review progress since last coordination

meeting. Determine whether each schedule item is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule. Determine how construction behind
schedule will be expedited with retention of quality; secure commitments
from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are
required to ensure that current and subsequent activities are completed
within the Contract Time.
b. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Alteration Work Subschedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to schedule have been made
or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each
meeting.
c. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including review
items listed in the "Preliminary Conference for Alteration Work" Paragraph in
this article and the following:
1) Interface requirements of alteration work with other Project Work.

2) Status of submittals for alteration work.
3) Access to alteration work locations.
4) Effectiveness of fire-prevention plan.
5) Quality and work standards of alteration work.
6) Change Orders for alteration work.
3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in

attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each
meeting.
A. Preconstruction Documentation: Show preexisting conditions of adjoining construction

and site improvements that are to remain, including finish surfaces, that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by Contractor's alteration work operations.

B. Alteration Work Program: Submit 30 days before work begins.
C. Fire-Prevention Plan: Submit 30 days before work begins.
A. Alteration Work Program: Prepare a written plan for alteration work for whole Project,
including each phase or process and protection of surrounding materials during
operations. Show compliance with indicated methods and procedures specified in this
and other Sections. Coordinate this whole-Project alteration work program with specific
requirements of programs required in other alteration work Sections.
1. Dust and Noise Control: Include locations of proposed temporary dust- and
noise-control partitions and means of egress from occupied areas coordinated
with continuing on-site operations and other known work in progress.
2. Debris Hauling: Include plans clearly marked to show debris hauling routes, turning
radii, and locations and details of temporary protective barriers.
B. Fire-Prevention Plan: Prepare a written plan for preventing fires during the Work,
including placement of fire extinguishers, fire blankets, rag buckets, and other fire-control
devices during each phase or process. Coordinate plan with Owner's fire-protection
equipment and requirements. Include fire-watch personnel's training, duties, and
authority to enforce fire safety.
C. Safety and Health Standard: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6.
1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF SALVAGED MATERIALS
A. Salvaged Materials for Reinstallation:
1. Repair and clean items for reuse as indicated.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing; cushion against damage during
handling. Label contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new
materials and equipment unless otherwise indicated. Provide connections,
supports, and miscellaneous materials to make items functional for use indicated.
B. Existing Materials to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage

and soiling from construction work. Where permitted by Architect, items may be
dismantled and taken to a suitable, protected storage location during construction work
and reinstalled in their original locations after alteration and other construction work in
the vicinity is complete.
C. Storage: Catalog and store items within a weathertight enclosure where they are
protected from moisture, weather, condensation, and freezing temperatures.
1. Identify each item for reinstallation with a nonpermanent mark to document its
original location. Indicate original locations on plans, elevations, sections, or
photographs by annotating the identifying marks.
2. Secure stored materials to protect from theft.
3. Control humidity so that it does not exceed 85 percent. Maintain temperatures 5
deg F or more above the dew point.
D. Storage Space:

1. Owner will arrange for limited on-site location(s) for free storage of salvaged
material. This storage space includes security and climate control for stored
material.
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions that affect the Work by use of
preconstruction photographs.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic

Documentation."
B. Discrepancies: Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and

Drawings before proceeding with removal and dismantling work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Protect persons, motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants,
and surrounding buildings from harm resulting from alteration work.
1. Use only proven protection methods, appropriate to each area and surface being
protected.
2. Provide temporary barricades, barriers, and directional signage to exclude the
public from areas where alteration work is being performed.
3. Erect temporary barriers to form and maintain fire-egress routes.
4. Erect temporary protective covers over walkways and at points of pedestrian and
vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during alteration work.
5. Contain dust and debris generated by alteration work, and prevent it from
reaching the public or adjacent surfaces.
6. Provide shoring, bracing, and supports as necessary. Do not overload structural
elements.
7. Protect floors and other surfaces along hauling routes from damage, wear, and
staining.
8. Provide supplemental sound-control treatment to isolate demolition work from
other areas of the building.
B. Temporary Protection of Materials to Remain:
1. Protect existing materials with temporary protections and construction. Do not

remove existing materials unless otherwise indicated.
2. Do not attach temporary protection to existing surfaces except as indicated as
part of the alteration work program.
C. Comply with each product manufacturer's written instructions for protections and
precautions. Protect against adverse effects of products and procedures on people
and adjacent materials, components, and vegetation.
D. Utility and Communications Services:

1. Notify Owner, Architect, authorities having jurisdiction, and entities owning or

controlling wires, conduits, pipes, and other services affected by alteration work
before commencing operations.
2. Disconnect and cap pipes and services as required by authorities having
jurisdiction, as required for alteration work.
3. Maintain existing services unless otherwise indicated; keep in service, and protect
against damage during operations. Provide temporary services during
interruptions to existing utilities.
E. Existing Drains: Prior to the start of work in an area, test drainage system to ensure that it
is functioning properly. Notify Architect immediately of inadequate drainage or
blockage. Do not begin work in an area until the drainage system is functioning
properly.
1. Prevent solids such as adhesive or mortar residue or other debris from entering the
drainage system. Clean out drains and drain lines that become sluggish or
blocked by sand or other materials resulting from alteration work.
2. Protect drains from pollutants. Block drains or filter out sediments, allowing only
clean water to pass.
F. Existing Roofing: Prior to the start of work in an area, install roofing protection.
3.2 PROTECTION FROM FIRE
A. General: Follow fire-prevention plan and the following:
1. Comply with NFPA 241 requirements unless otherwise indicated.

2. Remove and keep area free of combustibles, including rubbish, paper, waste,
and chemicals, unless necessary for the immediate work.
B. Heat-Generating Equipment and Combustible Materials: Comply with the following

procedures while performing work with heat-generating equipment or combustible
materials, including welding, torch-cutting, soldering, brazing, removing paint with heat,
or other operations where open flames or implements using high heat or combustible
solvents and chemicals are anticipated:
1. Obtain Owner's approval for operations involving use of open-flame or welding or

other high-heat equipment. Notify Owner at least 72 hours before each
occurrence, indicating location of such work.
2. As far as practicable, restrict heat-generating equipment to shop areas or outside
the building.
3. Do not perform work with heat-generating equipment in or near rooms or in areas
where flammable liquids or explosive vapors are present or thought to be present.
Use a combustible gas indicator test to ensure that the area is safe.
4. Use fireproof baffles to prevent flames, sparks, hot gases, or other
high-temperature material from reaching surrounding combustible material.
5. Prevent the spread of sparks and particles of hot metal through open windows,
doors, holes, and cracks in floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and other openings.
6. Fire Watch: Before working with heat-generating equipment or combustible
materials, station personnel to serve as a fire watch at each location where such
work is performed. Fire-watch personnel shall have the authority to enforce fire
safety. Station fire watch according to NFPA 51B, NFPA 241, and as follows:
a. Train each fire watch in the proper operation of fire-control equipment and
alarms.

b. Prohibit fire-watch personnel from other work that would be a distraction

from fire-watch duties.
c. Cease work with heat-generating equipment whenever fire-watch
personnel are not present.
d. Have fire-watch personnel perform final fire-safety inspection each day
beginning no sooner than 30 minutes after conclusion of work in each area
to detect hidden or smoldering fires and to ensure that proper fire
prevention is maintained.
e. Maintain fire-watch personnel at each area of Project site until two hours
after conclusion of daily work.
C. Fire-Control Devices: Provide and maintain fire extinguishers, fire blankets, and rag
buckets for disposal of rags with combustible liquids. Maintain each as suitable for the
type of fire risk in each work area. Ensure that nearby personnel and the fire-watch
personnel are trained in fire-extinguisher and blanket use.
D. Sprinklers: Where sprinkler protection exists and is functional, maintain it without

interruption while operations are being performed. If operations are performed close to
sprinklers, shield them temporarily with guards.
1. Remove temporary guards at the end of work shifts, whenever operations are
paused, and when nearby work is complete.
3.3 PROTECTION DURING APPLICATION OF CHEMICALS
A. Protect motor vehicles, surrounding surfaces of building, building site, plants, and
surrounding buildings from harm or spillage resulting from applications of chemicals and
adhesives.
B. Cover adjacent surfaces with protective materials that are proven to resist chemicals
selected for Project unless chemicals being used will not damage adjacent surfaces as
indicated in alteration work program. Use covering materials and masking agents that
are waterproof and UV resistant and that will not stain or leave residue on surfaces to
which they are applied. Apply protective materials according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agents or adhesives to painted or porous
surfaces. When no longer needed, promptly remove protective materials.
C. Do not apply chemicals during winds of sufficient force to spread them to unprotected
surfaces.
D. Neutralize alkaline and acid wastes and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
E. Collect and dispose of runoff from chemical operations by legal means and in a manner
that prevents soil contamination, soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations,
damage to landscaping, or water penetration into building interior.
3.4 GENERAL ALTERATION WORK
A. Have specialty work performed only by qualified specialists.
B. Ensure that supervisory personnel are present when work begins and during its progress.
C. Record existing work before each procedure (preconstruction), and record progress
during the work. Use digital preconstruction documentation photographs. Comply with
requirements in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."

D. Perform surveys of Project site as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from
alterations.
E. Notify Architect of visible changes in the integrity of material or components whether

from environmental causes including biological attack, UV degradation, freezing, or
thawing or from structural defects including cracks, movement, or distortion.
1. Do not proceed with the work in question until directed by Architect.

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction

activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in
those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services
required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by
provisions of this Section.
4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and

during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and
substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and
after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work
and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include
contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate
aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review
coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and
to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not
Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by
which the Work will be judged.
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a
testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source,
e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.

Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require

that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized
individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having

successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and
extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality
levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that
are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall
be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly
with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within
reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are
minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
A. Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations,
indicating materials and size of mockup construction.
1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.

2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities

and responsibilities.
B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"

Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications
in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
authority.
D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
3. Description of test and inspection.
4. Identification of applicable standards.
5. Identification of test and inspection methods.
6. Number of tests and inspections required.
7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to

Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in
format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions,
tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and
quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained

and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control
procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements

through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of
personnel responsible for submittal review.
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of

Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed

tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and
Contractor-elected tests and inspections.
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the
"Statement of Special Inspections."
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection

during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to
testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to
bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract
requirements and approved mockups.
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of
approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming
or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into
compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
10. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
11. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified
in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making

report.
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of
product.
3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information

documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and
inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service

representative making report.
2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements.
3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed
performance complies with requirements.
4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents,
established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of
the Work.
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification

levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems

similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those

indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or

assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is
acceptable to authorities.
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program.
G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative

of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those
indicated for this Project.
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction

testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and

construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with
performance requirements.
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and
mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to
Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for
each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements,
using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Notify Architect days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ
workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.
4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or
construction.
6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard
for judging the completed Work.
7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300
"Submittal Procedures."
B. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's

technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical
representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences,
examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of
Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written
reports.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were

Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the
Contract Documents.
D. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required

quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity
of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar
quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of
Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's
construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses.
1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency or special

inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual
Specification Sections.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the
following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access
to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams
that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document
requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing

execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Construction layout.
2. Field engineering and surveying.
3. Installation of the Work.
4. Cutting and patching.
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.
6. Progress cleaning.
7. Starting and adjusting.
8. Protection of installed construction.
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site.

2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.
3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with
Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from
indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.
4. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for demolition and removal of selected
portions of the building.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or

performance of other work.
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions
after installation of other work.
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and
elevation of improvements comply with requirements.
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to
the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and
patching.
EXECUTION 017300 - 1
2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes

to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building
appearance and other significant visual elements.
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will
perform patching work.
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that
cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems
that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate
length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during

interruption of permanent services and systems.
D. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
land-surveying services of the kind indicated.
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and
patching of construction elements.
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify

Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect
before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting
and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could
change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related
components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as
intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety. Operational elements include the following:
a. Primary operational systems and equipment.

b. Fire separation assemblies.
c. Air or smoke barriers.
d. Fire-suppression systems.
e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.
f. Control systems.
g. Communication systems.
h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.
i. Electrical wiring systems.
3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements
or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that
results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other
construction elements include but are not limited to the following:
a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.

b. Membranes and flashings.
c. Sprayed fire-resistive material.
d. Equipment supports.
e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
f. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed
construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's

written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the
fullest extent possible.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and
functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical
and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground
electrical services, and other utilities.
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public
utilities serving Project site.
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component

of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual

locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems
are to be installed.
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with
existing finishes or primers.
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:
1. Description of the Work.

2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.
4. Recommended corrections.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are
indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field
measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the

need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions
outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect
according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies
are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.
C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,
building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for
mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with
control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required
lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and
tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property
corners.
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar
reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent
benchmarks and control points during construction operations.
1. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly.

Base replacements on the original survey control points.
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on

Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with
authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked,
provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey
showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a
certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of
Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.
1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by

or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct
alignment and elevation, as indicated.
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90
inches in unoccupied spaces.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing

products in applications indicated.
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging

operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of
occupancy.
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of

construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with
indicated requirements.
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of
attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount

components at heights directed by Architect.
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to
form hairline joints. Where control joints are not indicated, provide them at industry
standard intervals or consult design team for spacing frequency.
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not
considered hazardous.
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without
delay.
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or

performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore
surfaces to their original condition.
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with
materials so as not to void existing warranties.
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent

damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project
that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.
E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or

interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and
patching according to requirements in Section 011000 "Summary."
F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing

services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such
services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.
G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and
similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements
retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original
Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings
when not in use.
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed
surfaces.
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or
a diamond-core drill.
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections
where required by cutting and patching operations.
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to
be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to
prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are
complete.
H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements
specified in other Sections, where applicable.
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize
evidence of patching and refinishing.
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other
finishing materials.
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished
area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space.
Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance.
Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if
necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply

primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the
patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing
the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an

even-plane surface of uniform appearance.
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure
to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building
enclosure.
I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.
Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials
and debris.
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or
three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other

waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to
regulations.
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other
contractors are working concurrently.
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary
for proper execution of the Work.
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum
the entire work area, as appropriate.
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning
materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and
that will not damage exposed surfaces.
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the
space.
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary
to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste
materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in
Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Section 017419 "Construction
Waste Management and Disposal."
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary

through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with

requirements in Section 019113 "General Commissioning Requirements."
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper
operation without binding.
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000

"Quality Requirements."
3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,

including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Substantial Completion procedures.

2. Final completion procedures.
3. Warranties.
4. Final cleaning.
5. Repair of the Work.
1. Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion

construction photographic documentation.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site.
3. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record
Specifications, and record Product Data.
A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.
B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.
C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.
C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items

specified in other Sections.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be

completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on
the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10

days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List
items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having

jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project
record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion
construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,
property surveys, and similar final record information.
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific
warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including
tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location
designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number
where applicable.
a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of

maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of
each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain
Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.
5. Submit test/adjust/balance records.

6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,
and maintenance.
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10

days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List
items below that are incomplete at time of request.
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.
3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.
4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial
Completion.
5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video
recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."
6. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local
emergency responders.
7. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
8. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
9. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate
visual defects.

D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion

a minimum of 21days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on
Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or
corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final
completion.
1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining
final completion, complete the following:
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment

Procedures."
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),
endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage
complying with insurance requirements.
4. Submit pest-control final inspection report.
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a

minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final
inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate
for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be
completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous

inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
Use CSI Form 14.1A or a form acceptable to Owner and Architect.
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas firstand
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories
for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name of Architect.
d. Name of Contractor.
e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:
a. MS Excel electronic file or file format generated by project website for this
purpose. Architectwill return annotated file.
b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.
1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated

portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial
Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's
rights under warranty.
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents
of Project Manual.
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf

binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive
8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and
the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete
warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of
contents at beginning of document.
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance

manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer

or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are
potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to

comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and
antipollution regulations.
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for

certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated
portion of Project:
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction

activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste
material, litter, and other foreign substances.
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and
other foreign deposits.
c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material
from Project site.
d. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective
surfaces to their original condition.
e. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar
spaces.
f. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
g. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains
remain.
h. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,
vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to
scratch surfaces.
i. Remove labels that are not permanent.
j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator
equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and
mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.
k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including
stains resulting from water exposure.
l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean
exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
m. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during
construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on
inspection.
n. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full
efficiency.
o. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section

017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for

determination of Substantial Completion.
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing

defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,
and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot
be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating
components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,
and other damaged transparent materials.
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair
or restoration.
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including
mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required
labels and identification.
3. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and

defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.

SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning

without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and
product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory
requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative
descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.
B. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of

resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.
C. OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional

requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated.
These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations,
benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.
D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used
together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and
components.
1.4 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on

behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the
commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall
consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of Contractor, including Project
superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists.
B. Members Appointed by Owner: Representatives of the facility user and operation and
maintenance personnel.
1.5 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in

commissioning team activities.
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 1

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf
and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration

with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend
corrective action.
2. Attend commissioning team meetings held on a variable basis.
3. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction
schedule.
4. Complete electronic construction checklists as Work is completed.
GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 2

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure to include:

a. Exterior site structure and constructions
b. Mechanical and Gas Connection
c. Electrical Connections
d. Concrete Floors
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.
1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises,

Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.
2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to

prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and
reinstall where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently

removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged,
or removed and reinstalled.
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.

2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of

materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make
progress and avoid delays.
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates
exposed by selective demolition operations.
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
6. Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire Protection and low voltage consultants
should be included to advise on methods and extent of systems to remain to
support guestrooms above demolition area..
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the
measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental
protection , for dust control and , for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and
construction of barriers.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and
ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site
operations are uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building
and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior
to start of demolition.
E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.
F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician

responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was
recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include
name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.
G. Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after
completion of selective demolition.
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill

facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved

certification program.

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition

area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by

Owner as far as practical.
C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before

proceeding with selective demolition.
D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in

the Work.
1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately

notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner
under a separate contract.
E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them
against damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation

verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit
documentation at Project closeout.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before

beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective
demolition operations.
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent
of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with

intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and
extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing

any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of
structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective
demolition activities.
F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings.
1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic

Documentation."
2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.
Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage
caused by salvage operations.
3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of
measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact
reproduction.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and

protect them against damage.
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in

Section 011000 "Summary."
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,

disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical
systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by

Contractor.
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that
maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed

and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment.
c. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed
and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively

demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to

prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition

area and to and from occupied portions of building.
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective
demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to
prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.
3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or
that are exposed during selective demolition operations.
4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been
removed.
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of
construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled
movement or collapse of construction being demolished.
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective

demolition.
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level.

Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before
disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,
not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.
Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents
of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch
and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials
and promptly dispose of off-site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to
avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as
not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Reuse of Building Elements: Project has been designed to result in end-of-Project rates
for reuse of building elements as follows. Do not demolish building elements beyond
what is indicated on Drawings without Architect's approval.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items:
1. Clean salvaged items.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for
new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous
materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be
removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and
cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations
are complete.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to

remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
B. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up

and remove.
C. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to

recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient
Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.
D. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by
new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight.
1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories.

2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate.
3. Replace roofing material per existing roof system until new construction is in place
so that permanent repair can be made.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or

otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from
Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent
surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of
them.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by
selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.

RFI#29 Response from BLUR Workshop dated 06/20/19 added Sections 031000, 032000, 033000
SECTION 031000 - CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Form-facing material for cast-in-place concrete.

2. Form liners.
3. Insulating concrete forms.
4. Shoring, bracing, and anchoring.
1. Section 321313 "Concrete Paving" for formwork related to concrete pavement

and walks.
2. Section 321316 "Decorative Concrete Paving" for formwork related to decorative
concrete pavement and walks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Form-Facing Material: Temporary structure or mold for the support of concrete while the
concrete is setting and gaining sufficient strength to be self-supporting.
B. Formwork: The total system of support of freshly placed concrete, including the mold or
sheathing that contacts the concrete, as well as supporting members, hardware, and
necessary bracing.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.
1. Review the following:
a. Special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field
quality control.
b. Construction, movement, contraction, and isolation joints
c. Forms and form-removal limitations.
d. Shoring and reshoring procedures.
e. Anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances.
A. Product Data: For each of the following:
1. Exposed surface form-facing material.

2. Concealed surface form-facing material.
3. Forms for cylindrical columns.
CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 031000 - 1

4. Pan-type forms.
5. Void forms.
6. Form liners.
7. Insulating concrete forms.
8. Form ties.
9. Waterstops.
10. Form-release agent.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Product Data: For recycled content, indicating postconsumer and preconsumer

recycled content and cost.
2. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material

manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material.
Include distance to Project and cost for each regional material.
3. Environmental Product Declaration: For each product.
4. Health Product Declaration: For each product.
5. Sourcing of Raw Materials: Corporate sustainability report for each manufacturer.
6. Product Certificates: For indigenous materials, indicating location of material
Include distance to Project, means of transportation, and cost for each
indigenous material.

8. Product Certificates: For regional materials, indicating location of material
Include distance to Project, means of transportation, and cost for each regional
material.

11. Third-Party Certifications: For each product.
12. Third-Party Certified Life Cycle Assessment: For each product.
13. Laboratory Test Reports: For [liquid floor treatments] [and] [curing and sealing
compounds], indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials.
C. Shop Drawings: Prepared by, and signed and sealed by, a qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support
of forms.
1. For exposed vertical concrete walls, indicate dimensions and form tie locations.
2. Indicate dimension and locations of construction and movement joints required to
construct the structure in accordance with ACI 301.
a. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.
3. Indicate location of waterestops.

4. Indicate form liner layout and form line termination details.
5. Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping of forms, shoring removal,
and reshoring installation and removal.
6. Indicate layout of insulating concrete forms, dimensions, course heights, form
types, and details.
D. Samples:
1. For waterstops.

2. For Form Liners: 12-inch by 12-inch sample, indicating texture.
A. Qualification Data: For testing and inspection agency.
B. Research Reports: For insulating concrete forms indicating compliance with International
Code Council Acceptance Criteria AC353.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.
A. Testing and Inspection Agency Qualifications: An independent agency,[ acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction,] qualified in accordance with ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329
for testing indicated.
B. Mockups: Formed surfaces to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture,

tolerances, and standard of workmanship.
1. Build panel approximately [100 sq. ft.] <Insert area> in the location indicated or, if
not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part

of the completed Work.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Form Liners: Store form liners under cover to protect from sunlight.
B. Insulating Concrete Forms: Store forms off ground and under cover to protect from
moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.
C. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and
other contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Concrete Formwork: Design, engineer, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork,
shores, and reshores in accordance with ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and
dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support
such loads, so that resulting concrete conforms to the required shapes, lines, and
dimensions.
1. Design wood panel forms in accordance with APA's "Concrete Forming

Design/Construction Guide."
2. Design formwork to limit deflection of form-facing material to 1/240 of
center-to-center spacing of supports.

a. For architectural concrete specified in Section 033300 "Architectural

Concrete," limit deflection of form-facing material, studs, and nailers to
0.0025 times their respective clear spans (L/400).
B. Design, engineer, erect, shore, brace, and maintain insulating concrete forms in
accordance with ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and
construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads, so that
resulting concrete conforms to the required shapes, lines, and dimensions.
1. Design cross ties to transfer the effects of the following loads to the cast-in-place
concrete core:
a. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
1) Horizontal Deflection Limit: Not more than [1/240] [1/360] [1/600]

[1/720] <Insert ratio> of the wall height.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. As-Cast Surface Form-Facing Material:
1. Provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces.

2. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.
3. Acceptable Materials: As required to comply with Surface Finish designations
specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete, and as follows:
a. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

b. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with
DOC PS 1, and as follows:
1) APA HDO (high-density overlay).

2) APA MDO (medium-density overlay); mill-release agent treated and
edge sealed.
3) APA Structural 1 Plyform, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
4) APA Plyform Class I, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.
B. Concealed Surface Form-Facing Material: Lumber, plywood, metal, plastic, or another

approved material.
1. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced

plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with [gradual or abrupt irregularities]
[without spiral or vertical seams] not exceeding specified formwork surface class.
1. Provide forms with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without
detrimental deformation.
D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic

concrete loads without detrimental deformation, with [straight] [or] [tapered] end forms.
E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally
sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Form Liners:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following:
a. Architectural Polymers, Inc.

b. Fitzgerald Formliners.
c. Sika Corporation.
d. Spec Formliners, Inc.
e. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
2. Size: <Insert dimensions>.

3. Face Pattern: [Smooth] [Ribbed] [Stone] [Brick] [Wood] <Insert pattern>.
2.3 INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS
A. Insulating Concrete Forms: Concrete-forming system complying with ASTM E2634,

consisting of two panels of insulation connected with cross ties.

a. Amvic Incorporated.
b. BuildBlock Building Systems, LLC.
c. Nudura Corporation.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
2. Insulation: ASTM C578, Type II, expanded polystyrene.
a. Thickness: Not less than 2-1/2 inches <Insert thickness> each face.
b. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E84; testing by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
1) Flame Spread: 25 or less.

2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Recycled Content of Insulation: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than <Insert value> percent.
1. Cross Ties: Polypropylene, with integral reinforcement supports, designed to allow

passage of concrete during placement.
2. Core Thickness: [4 inches] [6 inches] [8 inches] [10 inches] [12 inches].
2.4 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513,[ with
factory-installed metal eyelets,] for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids
through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

a. Williams Products, Inc.

b. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Profile: [Flat dumbbell with center bulb] [Flat dumbbell without center bulb]
[Ribbed with center bulb] [Ribbed without center bulb] [As indicated] <Insert
profile>.
3. Dimensions: [4 inches by 3/16 inch thick] [6 inches by 3/8 inch thick] [9 inches by
3/8 inch thick] <Insert dimensions>; nontapered.
B. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber

waterstops[ with factory-installed metal eyelets], for embedding in concrete to prevent
passage of fluids through joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory
fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

a. JP Specialties, Inc.
b. Sika Corporation.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
profile>.
3/8 inch thick] [9 inches by 3/16 inch thick] [9 inches by 3/8 inch thick] <Insert
dimensions>; nontapered.
C. Flexible PVC Waterstops: U.S. Army Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572,[ with factory-installed
metal eyelets,] for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints.
Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

a. BoMetals, Inc.
b. Sika Corporation.
c. Vinylex Waterstop & Accessories.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
profile>.
3/8 inch thick] <Insert dimensions>; nontapered.
D. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,

butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding
to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.

b. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company.
c. Concrete Sealants Inc.
d. Henry Company.
e. JP Specialties, Inc.
f. Sika Corporation.

g. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
E. Self-Expanding Rubber Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,

bentonite-free hydrophilic polymer-modified chloroprene rubber, for adhesive bonding
to concrete, 3/8 by 3/4 inch.

a. Adeka Corporation.
b. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company.
c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
d. Kryton International Inc.
e. Sika Corporation.
f. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet.
Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.
B. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with
bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of
concrete or debris.
C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.
D. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.
E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond
with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Kaufman Products, Inc.; [FormKote OTC] [FormKote Emulsion] [KleenLease 28 OTC]
[SureForm 20] or a comparable product from manufacturers listed.
a. Cresset Chemical Company.

b. Euclid Chemical Company.
c. <Insert manufacturer’s name>.
2. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC): 250 g/L or less per EPA Test Method 24; with a
test report demonstrating compliance dated within the past 12 months.
3. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.
4. Form release agent for form liners shall be acceptable to form liner manufacturer.
F. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or

metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to
prevent spalling of concrete on removal.
1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of
exposed concrete surface.
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch in diameter in
concrete surface.
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive
dampproofing or waterproofing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF FORMWORK
A. Comply with ACI 301.
B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 and to comply with
the Surface Finish designations specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for
as-cast finishes
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities as follows:
1. Surface Finish-1.0: ACI 117 Class D, 1 inch.

2. Surface Finish-2.0: ACI 117 Class B, 1/4 inch.
3. Surface Finish-3.0: ACI 117 Class A, 1/8 inch.
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
1. Minimize joints.
2. Exposed Concrete: Symmetrically align joints in forms.
E. Construct removable forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against
concrete surfaces.
1. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete

surfaces.
2. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.
3. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and other accessories, for easy removal.
F. Do not use rust-stained, steel, form-facing material.
G. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces.
1. Provide and secure units to support screed strips

2. Use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.
H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of
formwork is inaccessible.
1. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent
loss of concrete mortar.
2. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
I. [Chamfer] [Do not chamfer] exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed
concrete.
J. At construction joints, overlap forms onto previously placed concrete not less than 12
inches.
K. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work.

1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on
Drawings.
L. Construction and Movement Joints:
1. Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
2. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations
indicated or as approved by Architect.
3. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.
4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans.
a. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a
beam-girder intersection.
5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams,
and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
6. Space vertical joints in walls [as indicated on Drawings] <Insert spacing>.
a. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed
locations where possible.
M. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning

and inspection.
1. Locate ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location,

to allow flushing water to drain.
2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight-fitting panels, flush with inside face
of form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete
surfaces.
N. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
O. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
P. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.
1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished

with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.
3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in

outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,
shelf angles, and other conditions.
4. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures, as indicated on Drawings.
5. Clean embedded items immediate prior to concrete placement.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated to form a
continuous diaphragm.
1. Install in longest lengths practicable.

2. Locate waterstops in center of joint unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Allow clearance between waterstop and reinforcing steel of not less than 2 times
the largest concrete aggregate size specified in Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place
Concrete."
4. Secure waterstops in correct position at 12 inches on center.
5. Field fabricate joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using heat
welding.
a. Miter corners, intersections, and directional changes in waterstops.

b. Align center bulbs.
6. Clean waterstops immediately prior to placement of concrete.

7. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work.
B. Self-Expanding Strip Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations

indicated on Drawings, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, by
adhesive bonding, mechanically fastening, and firmly pressing into place.
1. Install in longest lengths practicable.

2. Locate waterstops in center of joint unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
3. Protect exposed waterstops during progress of the Work.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATING CONCRETE FORMS
A. Comply with ACI 301 and manufacturer's instructions.
B. Construct formwork, so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Install forms in running bond pattern.
1. Align joints.
2. Align furring strips.
D. Construct forms tight to prevent loss of concrete mortar.
E. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and
bulkheads required in the Work.
1. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

2. Obtain written approval of Architect prior to forming openings not indicated on
Drawings.
F. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning

and inspection.
1. Locate ports and openings in bottom of vertical forms, in inconspicuous location,

to allow flushing water to drain.

2. Close temporary ports and openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face
of form, and neatly fitted, so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete
surfaces.
G. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
H. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
I. Shore insulating concrete forms to ensure stability and to resist stressing imposed by
construction loads.
3.5 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not
support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than
50 deg F for [24] <Insert number> hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard
enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection
operations need to be maintained.
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that
support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved[ at least 70
percent of] its 28-day design compressive strength.
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms
without loosening or disturbing shores.
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work.
1. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are

unacceptable for exposed surfaces.
2. Apply new form-release agent.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints.
1. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.

2. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by
Architect.
3.6 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ACI 318 and ACI 301 for design, installation, and removal of shoring and
reshoring.
1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is

complete.
B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories

to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded
or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.
C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate
and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or
deflection.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a [special inspector] [and] [qualified testing and
inspecting agency] to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and
inspections and to submit reports.
C. Inspections:
1. Inspect formwork for shape, location, and dimensions of the concrete member
being formed.
2. Inspect insulating concrete forms for shape, location, and dimensions of the
concrete member being formed.

SECTION 032000 – CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes concrete reinforcement.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 031100, Concrete Formwork
B. Section 033000, Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ACI: American Concrete Institute:
1. ACI SP-66: ACI Detailing Manual.

2. ACI 318: Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary.
B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials:
1. ASTM A82: Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A185: Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,
for Concrete.
3. ASTM A615: Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
1.4 SUBMITTAL OF SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit complete bar schedule, bar details, and erection drawings in accordance with
ACI SP-66.
B. Show each type of bar marked with identification corresponding to identification tag on
bar.
C. Erection drawings shall be clear and easily legible and to a minimum scale of:
1. 1/4 inch - 1 foot.

2. 1/8 inch - 1 foot if bars in each face are shown on separate drawings.
D. Erection drawings shall show size and location of all openings.
1.5 REINFORCEMENT STEEL STORAGE
A. Store reinforcing steel blocked up off the ground and in orderly stacks.
B. Each stack shall only contain bars with the same identifying label.
CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
A. Reinforcement Bars:
1. No. 4, or larger, bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60.

2. No. 3 bars shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 40.
B. Welded Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM A185 using bright basic wire meeting ASTM A82.
C. Bolster, Chairs, and Accessories:
1. Conform to ACI SP-66.

2. Provide all spacers, bolsters, chairs, ties, and other devices necessary to properly
space, place, support, and fasten reinforcement in place.
3. Metal accessories shall be galvanized or plastic-protected where legs will be
exposed in finished concrete surfaces.
4. Do not use rocks, broken bricks, wood blocks, or concrete fragments for
reinforcing support.
D. Testing: Perform at the mill for each heat. Submit certified test results, if required.
2.2 FABRICATION OF BARS
A. Fabricate with cold bends conforming to the recommended dimensions shown in ACI
318, Chapter 7.
B. Field fabrication will be allowed only if the Contractor has equipment to properly
fabricate steel.
C. Attach metal tags for identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING METAL REINFORCEMENT
A. Place in accordance with ACI 318, Chapters 7 and 12.
B. Tie securely with 16-gauge or larger annealed iron wire.
C. Place steel with concrete cover in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 7, Paragraph 7.7,
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Splice steel not less than 30-bar diameter for ASTM A615, Grade 40, and 43-bar diameter
for ASTM A615, Grade 60, unless otherwise indicated. For plain bars, splice not less than
twice that for deformed bars.
E. Lap welded wire fabric not less than the length of one mesh.
CONCRETE REINFORCING 032000 - 2

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Cast-in-place concrete, including concrete materials, mixture design, placement

procedures, and finishes.
1. Section 031000 "Concrete Forming and Accessories" for form-facing materials,

form liners, insulating concrete forms, and waterstops.
2. Section 032000 "Concrete Reinforcing" for steel reinforcing bars and welded-wire
reinforcement.
3. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of
specially finished formed concrete.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of

the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and
silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.
B. Water/Cement Ratio (w/cm): The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.
1. Review the following:
a. Cold and hot weather concreting procedures.

b. Forms and form-removal limitations.
c. Methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness.
d. Concrete repair procedures.
e. Concrete protection.
f. Initial curing and field curing of field test cylinders (ASTM C31/C31M.)
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1

A. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture, include the following:
1. Mixture identification.
2. Minimum 28-day compressive strength.
3. Durability exposure class.
4. Slump limit.
5. Air content.
6. Nominal maximum aggregate size.
7. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site if
permitted.
8. Include manufacturer's certification that permeability-reducing admixture is

compatible with mix design.
9. Include certification that dosage rate for permeability-reducing admixture
matches dosage rate used in performance compliance test.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to

construct the structure.
A. Comply with ASTM C94/C94M and ACI 301.
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 306.1 and as follows.
1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be
caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
2. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for
three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within
the temperature range required by ACI 301.

3. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

4. Do not place concrete in contact with surfaces less than 35 deg F, other than
reinforcing steel.
5. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture
designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 305.1, and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete temperature at time of discharge to not exceed 95 deg F.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement sheet vapor

retarder/termite barrier material and accessories for sheet vapor retarder/ termite barrier
and accessories that do not comply with requirements or that fail to resist penetration by
termites within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301.


2.2 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, in accordance with ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture
designs, based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Admixtures: Use admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of concrete forms, accessories,

and reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required
inspections have been performed.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide reasonable auxiliary services to accommodate field testing and inspections,

acceptable to testing agency, including the following:
1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Secure facilities for storage, initial curing, and field curing of test samples, including
continuous electrical power.
4. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at
Project site.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
Work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete.
1. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished

with items to be embedded.
2. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with
tolerances in Section 7.5 of ANSI/AISC 303.
3. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in

outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels,
shelf angles, and other conditions.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construct joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B. Construction Joints: Coordinate with floor slab pattern and concrete placement
sequence.

1. Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations

indicated on Drawings or as approved by Architect.
2. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement.
a. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise

indicated.
b. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors
and slabs.
3. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.
4. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders at third points of spans. Offset
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder
intersection.
5. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams,
and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.
6. Space vertical joints in walls [as indicated on Drawings] <Insert spacing>. Unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings, locate vertical joints beside piers integral with
walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.
7. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
8. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against
hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C. Control Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: Form weakened-plane control joints, sectioning

concrete into areas as indicated. Construct control joints for a depth equal to at least
[one-fourth] <Insert depth> of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form control joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of control joints after
applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form control joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when
cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before
concrete develops random cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Ground: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch
below finished concrete surface, where joint sealants, specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants," are indicated.
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one
length is required, lace or clip sections together.
E. Doweled Joints:
1. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated on Drawings.
2. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel bar length to prevent concrete
bonding to one side of joint.

F. Dowel Plates: Install dowel plates at joints where indicated on Drawings.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, embedded

items, and vapor retarder is complete and that required inspections are completed.
1. Immediately prior to concrete placement, inspect vapor retarder for damage

and deficient installation, and repair defective areas.
2. Provide continuous inspection of vapor retarder during concrete placement and
make necessary repairs to damaged areas as Work progresses.
B. Notify Architect and testing and inspection agencies 24 hours prior to commencement
of concrete placement.
C. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless
approved by Architect in writing, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the
concrete delivery ticket.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing

admixtures to mixture.
D. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject
to limitations of ACI 301, but not to exceed the amount indicated on the concrete
delivery ticket.
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing

admixtures to mixture.
E. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness.
1. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as

indicated.
2. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
3. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design
pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.
4. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment in
accordance with ACI 301.
a. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms.

b. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to
rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer.
c. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose
plasticity.
d. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate
concrete, and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.
F. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within
limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.
1. Do not place concrete floors and slabs in a checkerboard sequence.

2. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
3. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.
4. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.
5. Level concrete, cut high areas, and fill low areas.
6. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.
7. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and
open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface.
8. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.
3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. As-Cast Surface Finishes:
1. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-1.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing
material.
a. Patch voids larger than 1-1/2 inches wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1 inch.
c. Tie holes do not require patching.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class D.
e. Apply to concrete surfaces [not exposed to public view] <Insert locations>.
2. ACI 301Surface Finish SF-2.0: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing

material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of
seams.
a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1/4 inch.
c. Patch tie holes.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class B.
e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces [exposed to public view,] [to receive
a rubbed finish,] [or to be covered with a coating or covering material
applied directly to concrete] <Insert locations>.
3. ACI 301 Surface Finish SF-3.0:
a. Patch voids larger than 3/4 inch wide or 1/2 inch deep.
b. Remove projections larger than 1/8 inch.
c. Patch tie holes.
d. Surface Tolerance: ACI 117 Class A.
e. Locations: Apply to concrete surfaces [exposed to public view,] [to receive
a rubbed finish,] [or to be covered with a coating or covering material
applied directly to concrete] <Insert locations>.
B. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to as cast surface finishes where indicated on
Drawings:
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish:
a. Perform no later than one day after form removal.

b. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another
abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture.
c. If sufficient cement paste cannot be drawn from the concrete by the
rubbing process, use a grout made from the same cementitious materials
used in the in-place concrete.

2. Grout-Cleaned Rubbed Finish:
a. Clean concrete surfaces after contiguous surfaces are completed and

accessible.
b. Do not clean concrete surfaces as Work progresses.
c. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand, complying with
ASTM C144 or ASTM C404, by volume, with sufficient water to produce a
mixture with the consistency of thick paint. Add white portland cement in
amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches
adjacent surfaces.
d. Wet concrete surfaces.
e. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub
surface with clean burlap, and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least
36 hours.
3. Cork-Floated Finish:
a. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1 part fine sand, complying with ASTM C144
or ASTM C404, by volume, with sufficient water to produce a mixture with
the consistency of thick paint.
b. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with sufficient water to
produce a mixture of stiff grout. Add white portland cement in amounts
determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent
surfaces.
c. Wet concrete surfaces.
d. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface.
e. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
C. Abrasive-Blast Finish: Apply the following to as-cast surface finishes where indicated on
Drawings:
1. Perform abrasive blasting after compressive strength of concrete exceeds 2000

psi.
2. Coordinate with formwork removal to ensure that surfaces to be abrasive blasted
are treated at the same age.
3. Surface Continuity:
a. Perform abrasive-blast finishing as continuous operation, maintaining

continuity of finish on each surface or area of Work.
b. Maintain required patterns or variances in depths of blast to match field
samples.
4. Abrasive Blasting:
a. Abrasive-blast corners and edges of patterns carefully, using backup boards

to maintain uniform corner and edge lines.
b. Determine type of nozzle pressure and blasting techniques required to
match field sample.
c. Depth of Cut: Use an abrasive grit of proper type and gradation to expose
aggregate and surrounding matrix surfaces to match field sample, as
follows:
1) Medium Texture: Generally, expose coarse aggregate with slight

reveal and with a maximum reveal of 1/4 inch.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces:

1. At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to

formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a color and texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces.
2. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing
operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish:
1. While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and
bull-floated or darbied.
2. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile depth of 1/4 inch in one
direction.
3. Apply scratch finish to surfaces [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive
mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>.
C. Float Finish:
1. When bleedwater sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened
sufficiently to permit operation of specific float apparatus, consolidate concrete
surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible
to power-driven floats.
2. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,
granular texture and complies with ACI 117 tolerances for conventional concrete.
3. Apply float finish to surfaces [to receive trowel finish] [and] [to be covered with
fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed
terrazzo] <Insert locations>.
D. Trowel Finish:
1. After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand
or power-driven trowel.
2. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks
and uniform in texture and appearance.
3. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings
or floor coverings.
4. Do not add water to concrete surface.
5. Do not apply hard-troweled finish to concrete, which has a total air content
greater than 3 percent.
6. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient
flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or
another thin-film-finish coating system] <Insert locations>.
7. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155, for a
randomly trafficked floor surface:
a. Slabs on Ground:

1) Specified overall values of flatness, FF 25; and of levelness, FL 20; with

minimum local values of flatness, FF 17; and of levelness, FL 15.
4) Specified Overall Value (SOV): FF 50 and FL 25 with minimum local
value (MLV): FF 40 and FL 17.
5) Specified Overall Value (SOV): FF 25 and FL 20 with minimum local
value (MLV): FF 17 and FL 15.
b. Suspended Slabs:

8. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and
an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch] [3/16 inch] [1/8 inch].
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated on
Drawings] [where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset
method]. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom
perpendicular to main traffic route.
1. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

2. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and
locations indicated on Drawings.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming

with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route.
2. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.
G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish to concrete stair treads,
platforms, ramps as indicated on Drawings
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
a. Uniformly spread [25 lb/100 sq. ft.] <Insert rate> of dampened slip-resistive
[aggregate] [aluminum granules] over surface in one or two applications.
b. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.
c. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish.
d. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone
and water to expose slip-resistive [aggregate] [aluminum granules].
3.8 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
A. Filling In:

1. Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after Work of other trades is in
place unless otherwise indicated.
2. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction.
3. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the
Work.
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,
and terminations slightly rounded.
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:
1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment

provided.
2. Construct concrete bases high unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, and
extend base not less than 6 inches in each direction beyond the maximum
dimensions of supported equipment unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, or
unless required for seismic anchor support.
3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.
5. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices.
a. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions

furnished with items to be embedded.
b. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases.
c. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated
items.
1. Cast-in inserts and accessories, as shown on Drawings.

2. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete surfaces.

3.9 TOLERANCES
A. Conform to ACI 117.
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete:
1. Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.

2. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to
Architect's approval.
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to
2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling
and placing.
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,
cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the
surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids
more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete.
a. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch.

b. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface.
c. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding
agent.
d. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
e. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement

and standard portland cement, so that, when dry, patching mortar matches
surrounding color.
a. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color

match before proceeding with patching.
b. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding
surface.
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that will affect concrete's durability
and structural performance as determined by Architect.
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces:

1. Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish, and verify surface
tolerances specified for each surface.
a. Correct low and high areas.

b. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a
sloped template.
2. Repair finished surfaces containing surface defects, including spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing, and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections
regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.
3. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.
4. Correct localized low areas during, or immediately after, completing
surface-finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching
mortar.
a. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair
underlayment.
a. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer in accordance

with manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform,
plane, and level surface.
b. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
6. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with repair topping.
a. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to
match adjacent floor elevations.
b. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane,
and level surface.
7. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete.
a. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts, and expose steel
reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch clearance all around.
b. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply
bonding agent.
c. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete,
except without coarse aggregate.
d. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
e. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
8. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching
mortar.
a. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete, and clean off
dust, dirt, and loose particles.
b. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent.
c. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
d. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete.
e. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy

adhesive and patching mortar.
3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete surfaces as follows:
1. Protect from petroleum stains.

2. Diaper hydraulic equipment used over concrete surfaces.
3. Prohibit vehicles from interior concrete slabs.
4. Prohibit use of pipe-cutting machinery over concrete surfaces.
5. Prohibit placement of steel items on concrete surfaces.
6. Prohibit use of acids or acidic detergents over concrete surfaces.
7. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of
construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary
covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.
8. Protect concrete surfaces scheduled to receive surface hardener or polished

concrete finish using Floor Slab Protective Covering.

SECTION 034840 - PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Summary
A. Section includes:
1. Templating, fabrication and installation of precast concrete countertops.
1.2 Submittals
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles of members, jointing, and fastening, cut-outs for mechanical
services, sinks, accessories, backsplashes, thickness, and related items.
B. Samples: Submit following:
1. Minimum 2 inch by 2 inch samples of concrete with appropriate finish and color for
acceptance before proceeding with Work. Indicate maximum range of variation.
1.3 Quality Assurance
A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to ANSIA117.1 or local code if more stringent

requirements are applicable for installing work for accessibility to handicapped.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating work specified in this

Section with minimum 5 years’ experience in type work required for Project.
C. Concrete fully engineered to comply with appropriate ACI 318 guidelines.
1.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. If units are shipped via commercial freight, open crates and inspect each slab in the
presence of the driver. Note any and all damage, and do not accept shipment if damage is
present. Claims due to shipping damage must be submitted to the freight carrier.
B. Handle, transport and store units to prevent damage to materials or structure. Handle with
care to prevent damage to corners and edges.
1.5 Site Conditions
A. Templating
1. All cabinets, millwork or other supporting structures must be fully installed prior to
templating, unless otherwise arranged with manufacturer.
2. All cabinets, millwork or other supporting structures must be free of debris or
obstructions.
3. All fixtures that penetrate the concrete, such as sinks, faucets, drop-in cook tops, soap
dispensers, etc., must be on site at the time of templating.
4. Electricity must be available on site, with outlets or extension cords, and running water
must be available in proximity of area to be templated.
B. Installation
PRECAST CONCRETE COUNTERTOPS 034840 - 1

1. Installer’s vehicle must be able to park within 10 yards of installation area’s key point of
entry.
2. Pathway to installation area must be free of debris or obstructions and accessible to
two to three personnel carrying slabs weighing up to 350 pounds and up to eight feet
in length.
3. All cabinets, millwork or other supporting structures must be free of debris or
obstructions.
4. Electricity must be available on site, with outlets or extension cords within 25 yards of
installation area.
5. Running water must be available on site within 15 yards of the installation area.
1.6 Sequencing
A. Templating
1. All cabinets, millwork or other supporting structures must be fully installed prior to
templating, unless otherwise arranged with manufacturer.
2. All fixtures that penetrate the concrete, such as sinks, faucets, drop-in cook tops, soap
dispensers, etc., must be on site at the time of templating. Manufacturer does not
supply fixtures. Manufacturer may take custody of some or all of the fixtures at his
discretion.
B. Installation
1. All support brackets, hard point connections, etc., must be on site at the time of
installation. Manufacturer does not supply these items.
2. Electrical and plumbing hookup should be scheduled after installation is completed.
Manufacturer does not perform electrical and plumbing hookup.
1.7 Warranty
A. Manufacturer must offer at least a 5 year structural warranty as follows: During the first 5 years
after installation, manufacturer, at its sole option, shall repair or replace product if it fails to
maintain functional structural integrity for the intended purpose of the product solely due to
a manufacturing defect. This applies only to products that have been handled, fabricated,
installed and maintained in the manner recommended by the manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer must offer at least a one-year coating/sealer warranty as follows: During the
first year after installation, manufacturer, at its sole option, shall repair or replace sealer if it
fails to maintain functional integrity for the intended purpose of the product solely due to a
manufacturing defect.
1.8 Maintenance
A. Variations in texture, dimension, color and aggregate distribution and exposure within a final
product are an inherent property of concrete countertops. Hairline cracks that may occur in
the finished product are a natural characteristic of concrete. All units are sealed to resist
moisture and staining. As with natural materials, samples of any material may not accurately
represent installed material. All sizes are nominal and slight variations in thickness are to be
expected.
B. Use common normal care with respect to oil, acids, and food. Spills should be wiped up as
soon as possible. Clean using damp cloth or sponge and only with mild, non-surfactant
neutral-pH cleaners. Do not use harsh cleansers or chemicals, or abrasive cleansers or
scrubbers. These include Comet, Brillo pads and 3M scrubbing pads, and all similar products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers
A. A. The following manufacturers are acceptable.
1. DEX Industries 675 Metropolitan Parkway Suite 1068 Atlanta, Georgia 30310
404-753-0600
2.2 Material
A. DEX Concrete Countertop
B. All units to be structurally engineered and custom made using a precast,

custom-blended, structurally
1. Re-inforced Portland cement based concrete.

2. Material must achieve minimum 10,000 PSI compressive strength at 14 days age.
Manufacturer must supply test results of specified material from independent lab.
3. Density: approx. 144 lbs. per cubic foot. Weight per unit area: 18-lbs/sq. ft. for 1.5" thick
slab .
4. Standard Thickness: 1.5" nominal. Options: Custom thickness and front edge returns.
Minimum thickness for horizontal slabs is 1.5".
5. Standard Edge: Square edge, eased arris and corners. Options: Radius, chamfered,
molded and custom edges.
6. Color: As indicated in documents
7. Standard Maximum Seamless Casting: approximately 9 ft. L for standard depth
countertops. Options: Custom sizes and shapes as specified in shop drawings.
8. Backsplashes: Length matched to slab section. Max 60" L x specified height. Height,
length and thickness will affect maximum length. Backsplashes are cast separate from
the countertops.
9. Integral sinks to include proper drainage, plumbing connections, and associated
rough-ins for fully functioning vanity.
10. Sealer: All units to be factory sealed with a high performance sealer. This sealer
must exhibit the following properties:
a. Safe for food contact surfaces.

b. Colorless.
c. Weather resistant; suitable for interior and exterior use.
d. Water and oil repellant.
e. Non-yellowing (UV resistant).
f. Scratch resistant.
g. Heat resistant.
h. Stain resistant to food and oil.
i. Long lasting.
j. Environmentally safe.
C. Joint Sealant
1. Supplied by manufacturer.
2. Colors: Matched to countertop unless otherwise requested.
D. Adhesive
1. Supplied by installer.

2. Countertop: Liquid Nails low VOC construction adhesive.

3. Backsplashes: Liquid Nails low VOC construction adhesive.
4. Seams: Bonstone zero VOC epoxy
5. Other vertical applications: Thin set mortar.
a. Laticrete 253 Multipurpose Thin-Set mortar, or equivalent.
2.3 Fabrication
A. All units to be custom made in manufacturer’s manufacturing shop. Options: Delivery and
installation; availability varies by location.
B. All units to be structurally reinforced to accommodate appropriate spans, cutouts and

cantilevers. Slabs must be handled and moved while in a vertical orientation, similar to the
technique used for handling plate glass.
C. All units to be fabricated straight, smooth, and true to size and shape prior to finishing.
Exposed edges to be finished as per edge specifications. Maximum dimensional variations:
+0", - 1/4" at maximum slab length; typical variations are usually half of the maximum or less.
D. All units to be fabricated to accommodate specified appliances (i.e. sinks, cook tops,
faucets, etc.). No cutting is done in the field.
E. All units to be hand finished prior to sealing. Hand finishing includes first grinding the surface,
then filling voids with colored material, easing all edges (where appropriate), and leveling
and polishing.
F. Units to be air dried and sealed.
2.4 Finishes
A. All units to be factory sealed with sealer that meets requirements in Article 2.02 (A) 10.
PART 3 - PART 3: EXECUTION
3.1 Templating
A. Manufacturer performs templating, or, manufacturer provides detailed templating

instructions to contractor, and contractor provides templates to manufacturer.
3.2 Installation
A. Manufacturer performs installation, or, manufacturer provides detailed installation instructions

to contractor, and contractor performs installation.
3.3 Cleaning
A. General:
1. Keep installed work clean as work progresses.

2. Wipe up spills as soon as possible. Clean using damp cloth or sponge and mild,
non-surfactant, neutral pH detergent or other water-based cleansers. Do not use harsh
chemicals, abrasive cleansers or abrasive scrubbers.

SECTION 035300 - CONCRETE TOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of cementitious coating systems

and sealers on the following substrates:
1. Exterior and Interior concrete slabs as indicated in documents.
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each finish coat indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: In each color and gloss of finish coat indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, not less than12" x 24".

2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency or by a qualified testing
agency, for each product formulation.Retain "Field quality-control reports" Paragraph
below if Contractor is responsible for field quality-control testing and inspecting.
B. Field quality-control test reports.Material Certificates: For each cementitious coating,

from manufacturer.
A. Source Limitations: Obtain cementitious coating materials from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C

1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.
CONCRETE TOPPING 035300 - 1

C. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of coating system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
Place concrete floor topping mockups to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish,
bonding, texture, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Preliminary samples have
been developed for color and texture that should act as a basis of design.
1. Architect will select one actual substrate of each type to represent surfaces and
conditions for application of coating.
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental

services have been activated.
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional

benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added
cost to Owner.
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages

and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.

2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
3. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
4. Application instructions.
5. Color name and number.
6. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a

minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage of
coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect cementitious coating materials from freezing. Keep materials dry and
storage area neat and orderly. Remove waste daily. Take necessary measures to
ensure that workers and work areas are protected from health hazards resulting
from handling, mixing, and applying the coating.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
B. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. CONCRETE FLOOR TOPPING: Polymer-Modified Cementitious Coating: Containing

portland cement, polymer, and hydrated lime or aggregates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Elite Crete: Thin Finish Pre-Mixed Overlay. Splatter Texture or Knock Down
Finish (Alternate: Slate Trowel Down) with Clear Polyaspartic Sealer Coating
for the interior water park and AUS 50 for the outside water park.
B. Performance Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4500 psi at 28 days according to ASTM C
109/C 109M.
2. Tensile Strength: Not less than 750 psi at 28 days according to ASTM C 109/C
109M.
3. Flexural Strength: 1450 psi at 28 days.
4. Density: 1.89 g/cm3 at 28 days.
5. Shear Bond: 575 psi at 28 days.
6. Cohesion: 98 psi at 28 days.
7. Impact resistance: 28 inch pounds at 28 days.
C. Application thickness: 3/16"
D. Other Materials: Provide crack fillers and related materials that are compatible with
cementitious finish-coat materials and substrates indicated, under conditions of service
and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience. Concrete substrates must be cured for 28 days prior to application.
E. Colors: Match Architect's samples.
F. Sealants:
1. All interior water park floors: Elite Crete Spartic-All RM Clear Polyaspartic Sealer
Coating per Technical Data sheet TD 483. Sealer is to be vapor retarding when
cured.
2. All exterior water park slab surfaces: Elite Crete AUS 50, Clear Aliphatic Urethane
Sealer per Technical Data Sheet TD 454. Sealer is to be vapor permeable when
cured.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that base slabs are visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by
the plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.
B. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility.
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates

and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for mixing and preparing materials and
as applicable to substrates indicated.
1. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in existing concrete to a depth of 1/2
inch or as specified in structural documents and fill with semirigid joint filler.
2. Install joint-filler material where topping abuts vertical surfaces, such as column
pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated in
manufacturers recommendations.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be
coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil,
grease, incompatible coatings, and loose substrate materials.
D. Cementitious Surfaces: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and

chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating
surfaces.
1. Cracks Larger Than 1/32 Inch: Cut out static cracks, voids, or honeycombing
larger than 1/32 inch and patch with materials recommended in writing by
coating manufacturer. Identify dynamic cracks and treat according to
manufacturer's written instructions before beginning application.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and

techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
1. Dampen substrate of surfaces to receive cementitious coatings one hour before

beginning application to prevent surface drag. Immediately before applying
coatings, redampen substrate. Substrates shall be saturated surface dry at time of
application.
2. Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment recommended in writing by manufacturer

for material and texture required.
B. Apply each material at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
Provide total cured material thickness indicated or as recommended in writing by
manufacturer.
C. Spray Application: Apply each coat according to manufacturer's written instructions to

provide the equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Follow spray application with
splatter technique of coated surface to impart a slight texture.
D. Provide joints in topping at frequency recommended by manufacturer.

E. Slope surfaces uniformly where indicated.
A. Testing of Coating Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure
at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when coating
operations are being conducted:
1. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with the following product
requirements.
a. Quantitative material analysis.

b. Compressive strength.
c. Tensile strength.
d. Flexural strength.
e. Permeance.
2. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show
materials being used do not comply with requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces
coated with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected
materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with complying
materials, the two coatings are incompatible.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded
materials from Project site.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent
finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as
approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged

or defaced coated surfaces.
3.6 COATING SCHEDULE
A. General: Apply additional coats when undercoats or other conditions show through
final coat until cured film is of uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
B. Above-Grade Concrete : Two finish coats with total cured thickness not less than 100
mils.
1. First Coat: Apply polymer-modified cementitious coating material at a rate to

achieve a total cured thickness of 60 mils.
C. Second Coat: Apply polymer-modified cementitious coating material at a rate to

achieve a total cured thickness of 40 mils.


SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Mortar and grout.
3. Steel reinforcing bars.
4. Embedded flashing.
5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.
6. Masonry-cell fill.
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing dovetail slots for masonry
anchors.
2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for installing anchor sections of adjustable
masonry anchors for connecting to structural steel frame.
3. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for
furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For the following:
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special
applications.
C. Samples for Initial Selection:
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1

1. Colored mortar.
2. Weep holes/vents.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:
1. CMUs.
2. Mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on
Project.
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.
B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:
1. Masonry units.
a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations
establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.
2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.

3. Mortar admixtures.
4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.
6. Reinforcing bars.
7. Joint reinforcement.
8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.
C. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply
with compressive strength requirement.
D. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit

type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of
masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry
determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
E. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials,

and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.
B. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under Sample submittals
and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry constructionin sizes
approximately 60 inches long by 48 inches high by full thickness.
2. Where masonry is to match existing, build panels adjacent and parallel to existing
surface. This includes decorative parging to match existing
3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant
membrane.
4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;
relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints;
aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities
specifically approved by Architect in writing.
a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from

the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless Architect
specifically approves such deviations in writing.
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely
tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended,

dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in
covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil.
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry
when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover
securely in place.
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for
at least three days after building masonry walls or columns.
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be
left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in
contact with such masonry.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by
spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent
rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements

contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture
and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from
single source from single manufacturer for each product required.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.
2.2 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 except as modified by

requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units
where such defects are exposed in the completed Work and will be within 20 feet
vertically and horizontally of a walking surface.
2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching
exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.
B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 2800 psi.
2. Density Classification: Normal weight unless otherwise indicated.
3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less-than-nominal dimensions.
4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by
Architect's sample.
5. Faces To Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct
application of masonry parging or plaster, provide textured-face units made with
gap-graded aggregates.
2.4 MASONRY LINTELS
A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam
CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with
reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels
before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Holcim (US) Inc.; .

b. Lafarge North America Inc.; .
c. Lehigh Cement Company.; .
B. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural
sand or crushed stone.
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing
the No. 16 sieve.
C. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
D. Water: Potable.
2.6 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for
number of bars indicated.
a. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner.

b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: Ladder type complying with ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.

2. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
3. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
4. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet[, with prefabricated corner and tee
units].
2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into masonry but with at
least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials
that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A
153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304.
3. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 zinc coating.

4. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial

Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
5. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.
6. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or
horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane
of wall.
1. Connector Section: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and
attached to tie section; formed from 0.060-inch- thick steel sheet, galvanized after
fabrication.
a. 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet may be used at interior walls unless

D. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6
inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows
rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
E. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches
long, with ends turned up 2 inches or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.
1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual" and as follows:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick.
2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not
exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing.
3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel,
with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar
bond.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:
1) Cheney Flashing Company; .

2) Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.; Keystone 3-Way Interlocking
Thruwall Flashing.
4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where

indicated to receive counterflashing.
5. Fabricate through-wall flashing with sealant stop where indicated. Fabricate by
bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint
1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.
6. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall
and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself
for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant
backer rod.
7. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from stainless steel to shapes indicated.
8. Solder metal items at corners.

B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:
1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use
metal flashing.
3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use
metal flashing with a drip edge.
4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.
C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking
CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans
have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend
into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
a. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Blok-Flash.
D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet
Metal Flashing and Trim."
1. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type,

grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing
and remain watertight.
E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,

complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash
block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as
indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I
(No. 15 asphalt felt).
2.10 MASONRY-CELL FILL
A. Loose-Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water
repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water
repellency and to limit dust generation).
2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,

retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3. For exterior masonry, use masonry cement mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use masonry cement mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend
ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or
needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.

2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for
other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates

and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified
28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of [8 to 11 inches] [10 to 11 inches] as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions
detrimental to performance of the Work.
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.
4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that would impair mortar bond.
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify
actual locations of piping.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.
B. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After

installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to
opening.
C. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.
3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch
or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not
vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch
maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10
feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10
feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by
more than 1/16 inch.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8
inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses
by more than 1/8 inch.
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or
minus 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in
running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions
at corners or jambs.
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping
not less than [2 inches] [4 inches]. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at
corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at
corners or jambs.
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from
those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that
are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required
before laying fresh masonry.
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,
and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
H. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or
roof structure above unless otherwise indicated.
1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of

structure above.
2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition.
Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down
into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of
tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wedge nonload-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of
tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure
above approaches final position.
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Rake out mortar joints at pre-faced CMUs to a uniform depth of 1/4 inch and point with
epoxy mortar to comply with epoxy-mortar manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY-CELL FILL
A. Pour loose-fill insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show
presence of fill at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been
confirmed. Limit the fall of fill to one story high, but not more than 20 feet.
3.7 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6
inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous
reinforcement.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at[ corners,]
returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.
3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces
structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following:
1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch wide between masonry and structural
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and
other rigid materials.
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to
structure.
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36
inches o.c. horizontally.
3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry

progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision
to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry using one of the following methods:
1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of CMUs on one side of control
joint. Fill resultant core with grout, and rake out joints in exposed faces for
application of sealant.
2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.
3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at
joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar, or rake out joint for application of
sealant.

4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints, and remove filler when unit
masonry is complete for application of sealant.
3.10 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for
brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or
other supporting lintels.
B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
3.11 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow
of water in wall where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could
puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing
on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal
penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by
flashing manufacturer.
2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At
heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches
to form end dams.
3. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than
1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants"
for application indicated.
4. Install metal drip edges with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed
edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
5. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned
edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts
aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of
CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are
shown to be built into masonry.
3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support
reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry

as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction
and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be
placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas
as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of

site-prepared mortar.
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.
C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for
compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.
3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or
otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match
adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant
application, where indicated.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
proceeding with cleaning of masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and
waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK
8-4A.
3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are

Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or
soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and
mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for
recycling.
D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill,
as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off
Owner's property.

SECTION 044313.13 - ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Stone masonry anchored to concrete backup.

2. Stone masonry anchored to unit masonry backup.
3. Stone masonry anchored to wood framing and sheathing.
4. Stone masonry anchored to cold-formed metal framing and sheathing.
B. Products Installed but Not Furnished under This Section Include:
1. Steel lintels in unit masonry.

2. Steel shelf angles for supporting unit masonry.
A. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.
B. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination avoided.
C. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated
platforms, under cover, in a dry location, or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.
D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and

accumulation of dirt and oil.
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and
sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed
stone masonry when construction is not in progress.
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in
place.
B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining
stone masonry face.
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter using coverings
spread on the ground and over the wall surface.
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.
ANCHORED STONE MASONRY VENEER 044313.13 - 1

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with
painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain
from splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.
C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated

with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry
damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is
40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than
seven days after completing cleaning.
D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements

contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Advise installers of adjacent Work about specific requirements for placement of

reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and similar items to be built into stone masonry.
B. Coordinate locations of dovetail slots installed in concrete that are to receive stone
anchors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain[ each variety of] stone, [regardless of finish, ]from
single quarry[, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the
Specifications,] with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality for
each cementitious component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from
single source or producer.
C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of

varieties and from sources complying with Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding."
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate stone units in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated.
1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for

Architectural Granite."
2. For limestone, comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone
Handbook."
B. [Cut] [Split] [Select] stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated,
including details on Drawings and pattern specified in "Setting Stone Masonry" Article.

1. Shape stone specified to be laid in three-course, random range ashlar pattern

with [sawed] [split] beds.
C. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise
indicated. Shape beds to fit supports.
D. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports.
E. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements
for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.
1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.
F. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:
1. Thickness: 4 inches plus or minus [1/4 inch] [1/2 inch].[ Thickness does not include
projection of pitched faces.]
G. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish
and to match approved samples[ and mockups].
1. Finish: [Split face] [Rock face (pitched face)] [Natural cleft] [Mixed split face and
seam face] [Mixed split face, seam face, and rock face (pitched face)] [Smooth]
[Sand rubbed] [As indicated].
2. Finish for Sills: [Smooth] [Sand rubbed] [Split face with sand-rubbed washes] [Rock
face (pitched face) with sand-rubbed washes] [Rock face (pitched face) with
tooled (boasted) washes].
3. Finish for Lintels: [Smooth] [Sand rubbed] [Split face] [Rock face (pitched face)].
4. Finish for Copings: [Smooth] [Sand rubbed] [Split face] [Rock face (pitched face),
front and back; sand-rubbed top] [Rock face (pitched face), front and back;
tooled (boasted) top].
a. Finish exposed ends of copings same as front and back faces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of stone masonry.
B. Examine substrate to verify that dovetail slots, inserts, reinforcement, veneer anchors,
flashing, and other items installed in substrates and required for or extending into stone
masonry are correctly installed.
C. Examine wall framing, sheathing, and weather-resistant sheathing paper to verify that
stud locations are suitable for spacing of veneer anchors and that installation will result in
a weatherproof covering.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Accurately mark stud centerlines on face of weather-resistant sheathing paper before

beginning stone installation.
B. Coat concrete and unit masonry backup with asphalt dampproofing.
C. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials
before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then
drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic
or harsh materials or abrasives.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF STONE MASONRY
A. Perform necessary field cutting and trimming as stone is set.
1. Use power saws to cut stone that is fabricated with saw-cut surfaces. Cut lines
straight and true, with edges eased slightly to prevent snipping.
2. Use hammer and chisel to split stone that is fabricated with split surfaces. Make
edges straight and true, matching similar surfaces that were shop or quarry
fabricated.
3. Pitch face at field-split edges as needed to match stones that are not field split.
B. Sort stone before it is placed in wall to remove stone that does not comply with
requirements relating to aesthetic effects, physical properties, or fabrication, or that is
otherwise unsuitable for intended use.
C. Arrange stones in range ashlar pattern with course heights as indicated, [uniform]
[random] lengths, and uniform joint widths, with offset between vertical joints as
indicated.
D. Arrange stones in broken-range ashlar pattern with uniform course heights, random
lengths, and uniform joint widths.
E. Arrange stones in three-course, random-range ashlar pattern with random course

heights, random lengths (interrupted coursed), and uniform joint widths.
F. Arrange stones in [coursed] [uncoursed] rubble pattern with joint widths within
tolerances indicated.[ Insert small stones into spaces between larger stones as needed
to produce joints as uniform in width as practical.]
G. Arrange stones with color and size variations uniformly dispersed for an evenly blended
appearance.
H. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone
masonry in place.
I. Set stone accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to
established relationships and indicated tolerances.
J. Install steel lintels where indicated. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb

K. Maintain uniform joint widths except for variations due to different stone sizes and where
minor variations are required to maintain bond alignment if any. Lay walls with joints not
less than [1/4 inch] [3/8 inch] at narrowest points or more than [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] [5/8
inch] [1 inch] [1-1/2 inches] at widest points.
L. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.
1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Sealant joints are specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
M. Install metal expansion strips in sealant joints at locations indicated. Build flanges of
expansion strips into masonry by embedding in mortar between stone masonry and
backup wythe. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade
and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.
N. Install embedded flashing[ and weep holes] at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other
obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
1. At stud-framed walls, extend flashing through stone masonry, up sheathing face at

least [8 inches] [12 inches] [16 inches], and behind weather barrier.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through stone
masonry, turned up a minimum of [4 inches] [8 inches] [12 inches] [16 inches], and
extend into or through inner wythe to comply with requirements in Section 042000
"Unit Masonry."
3. At concrete backing, extend flashing through stone masonry, turned up a
minimum of [4 inches] [6 inches] [8 inches] [12 inches], and insert in reglet.[ Reglets
are specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."]
4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing full length of angles but not less than 6
inches into masonry at each end.
5. At sills, extend flashing not less than 4 inches at ends.
6. At ends of head and sill flashing, turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams.
7. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than
1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with
elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants"
for application indicated.
8. Install metal with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to
form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with
requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for application indicated.
9. Extend sheet metal flashing 1/2 inch beyond masonry face at exterior, and turn
flashing down to form a drip.
10. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face. Stop flexible
flashing 1/2 inch back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible flashing to top
of metal drip edge.
11. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior wall face.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from exterior wall face and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
12. Cut flexible flashing flush with wall face after completing masonry wall
construction.
O. Place weep holes and vents in joints where moisture may accumulate, including at base
of cavity walls, above shelf angles, and at flashing.
1. Use to form weep holes.

2. Use wicking material to form weep holes above flashing in stone sills. Turn wicking
down at lip of sill to be as inconspicuous as possible.
3. Space weep holes [16 inches] [24 inches] o.c.

4. Space weep holes formed from 16 inches o.c.

5. Trim wicking material used in weep holes flush with exterior wall face after mortar
has set.
6. Place pea gravel in cavities as soon as practical to a height of not less than 2
inches above top of flashing, to maintain drainage.
7. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration
requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"
Article.
P. Install vents in head joints at top of each continuous cavity at spacing indicated. Use to
form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
Q. Coat limestone with cementitious dampproofing as follows:
1. Stone at Grade: Beds, joints, and back surfaces to at least 12 inches above
finish-grade elevations.
2. Stone Extending below Grade: Beds, joints, back surfaces, and face surfaces
below grade.
3. Allow cementitious dampproofing formulations to cure before setting
dampproofed stone. Do not damage or remove dampproofing in the course of
handling and setting stone.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion joints,
control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch
in 40 feetor more.
B. Variation from Level: For[ bed joints and] lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40
feet or more.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in 20
feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the
average plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.
E. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.
F. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance

specified for thickness of stone.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY
A. Anchor stone masonry to concrete with corrugated-metal veneer anchors unless

otherwise indicated. Secure anchors by inserting dovetailed ends into dovetail slots in
concrete.
B. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated.
Embed anchors in unit masonry mortar joints or grouted cells at a distance of at least
one-half of unit masonry thickness.

C. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated.
Connect anchors to masonry joint reinforcement by inserting pintles into eyes of masonry
joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
D. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with wire anchors unless otherwise indicated.
Connect anchors to masonry joint reinforcement with vertical rods inserted through
anchors and through eyes of masonry joint reinforcement projecting from unit masonry.
E. Anchor stone masonry to unit masonry with [adjustable, screw-attached] [seismic]

veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors to unit masonry with two
screws.
F. Anchor stone masonry to stud framing with [adjustable, screw-attached] [seismic]

veneer anchors unless otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to framing
with two screws.
G. Anchor stone masonry to stud framing with screw-attached veneer anchors unless
H. Anchor stone masonry to wood-stud framing with corrugated-metal veneer anchors

unless otherwise indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to studs with
corrosion-resistant roofing nails.
I. Anchor stone masonry to wood-stud framing with wire anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Fasten anchors through sheathing to wood studs with corrosion-resistant
roofing nails.
J. Anchor stone masonry to metal-stud framing with wire anchors unless otherwise
indicated. Tie anchors to studs.
K. Embed veneer anchors in mortar joints of stone masonry at least halfway, but not less
than 1-1/2 inches, through stone masonry and with at least a 5/8-inch cover on exterior
face.
1. Install continuous wire reinforcement in horizontal joints and attach to seismic

veneer anchors as stone is set.
L. Space anchors to provide not less than one anchor per 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install
additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals
not exceeding 12 inches.
M. Space anchors not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally.
Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at
intervals not exceeding 12 inches.
N. Space anchors not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally,
with not less than one anchor per 2.67 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors
within 12 inches of openings, sealant joints, and perimeter at intervals not exceeding 12
inches.
O. Anchor stone trim with stone trim anchors where indicated. Install anchors by fastening
to substrate and inserting tabs and dowels into kerfs and holes in stone units. Provide
compressible filler in ends of dowel holes and bottoms of kerfs to prevent end bearing of
dowels and anchor tabs on stone. Fill remainder of anchor holes and kerfs with mortar.

P. Set stone in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. Build
anchors into mortar joints as stone is set.
Q. Fill [collar joint] [space between back of stone masonry and weather-resistant sheathing
paper] with mortar as stone is set.
R. Provide [1-inch] [2-inch] cavity between stone masonry and backup construction unless
otherwise indicated. Keep cavity free of mortar droppings and debris.
1. Slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity.

2. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
S. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depth of not less than [1/2 inch] [3/4 inch]
before setting mortar has hardened. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms
and clean sides.
3.6 POINTING
A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar
particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas,
apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is
formed.
B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than
3/8 inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard
before applying next layer.
C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to
produce the following joint profile:
1. Joint Profile: [Concave] [Smooth, flat face slightly below edges of stone] [Smooth,
flat face recessed 1/4 inch below edges of stone (raked joint)] [Flush, with a
3/8-inch half-round raised bead in middle of joint] [As indicated].
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if

methods and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.
4. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and
mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of
replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for

comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before
cleaning stone masonry.
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by
covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or
waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly
by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean stone masonry by bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in
BIA Technical Note No. 20, Revised II, using job-mixed detergent solution.
6. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
7. Clean limestone masonry to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana
Limestone Handbook."
3.8 EXCESS MATERIALS AND WASTE
A. Excess Stone: Stack excess stone where directed by Owner for Owner's use.
B. Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including mortar and excess or
soil-contaminated sand, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.
1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in greatest dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least 2 parts of specified fill material for each part of
masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 312000 "Earth Moving."
3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.
C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill,
as described above, and other waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 044313.13

SECTION 047300 - MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Portland cement based manufactured stone veneer and trim.
B. Related Sections:
1. 092900- Gypsum Board

2. 076000–Flashing and Sheet Metal.
3. 079200–Joint Sealants.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI A118.4 – Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 39 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical

Concrete Specimens.
2. ASTM C 67 – Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural
Clay Tile.
3. ASTM C 144 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
4. ASTM C 177 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Head Flux Measurements
and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate
Apparatus.
5. ASTM C 207 – Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
6. ASTM C 270 – Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
7. ASTM C 482 – Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland
Cement.
8. ASTM C 567 – Standard Test Method for Determining Density of Structural

Lightweight Concrete.
9. ASTM C 847 – Standard Specification for Metal Lath.
10. ASTM C 932 – Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for
Exterior Plastering.
11. ASTM C 979 – Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete.
12. ASTM C 1032 – Standard Specification for Woven Wire Plaster Base.
MANUFACTURED MASONRY VENEER 047300 - 1

13. ASTM C1063 – Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to
Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster
14. ASTM C1329 – Standard specification for Portland cement
15. ASTM C578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
16. ASTM E2556/E2556M – Standard Specification for Vapor Permeable Flexible Sheet
Water-Resistive Barriers Intended for Mechanical Attachment
C. International Code Council (ICC):
1. ESR Report.
D. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL): Building Materials Directory.
E. US Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD): Material Release Numbers

910Fs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Reference Section 013300-Submittal Procedures; submit following items:
1. Product Data.
2. Samples:
a. Standard sample board consisting of small-scale pieces of veneer units

showing full range of textures and colors.
b. Full range of mortar colors.
3. Verification Samples: Following initial sample selection submit

“laid-up sample board using the selected stone and mortar materials and
showing the full range of colors expected in the finished Work; minimum sample
size: 3 by 3 feet.
4. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Qualifications:
1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications.
2) Proof of installer qualifications.
5. Regulatory Requirements: Evaluation reports.
a. Veneer manufacturer’s installation instructions.
b. Installation instructions for other materials.
B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 017800-Closeout Submittals; submit following

items:

1. Maintenance Instructions.
2. Special Warranties.
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacurer who has been producing

manufactured stone veneer for over 10 years.
2. Installer Qualifications: Experienced mason familiar with installation procedures

and related local, state and federal codes masonry.
B. Field Sample:
1. Prepare 4 by 4 foot sample at a location on the structure as selected by the

Architect. Use approved selection sample materials and colors. Include Material
for inclusion in composite, large scale building mock up.
2. Obtain Architect’s approval.
3. Protect and retain sample as a basis for approval of completed manufactured

stone work. Approved sample may be incorporated into completed work.
A. Reference Section 016600-Product Storage and Handling Requirements.
B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
1.6 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: When air temperature is 40 degrees F or below, consult

local building code for Cold-Weather Construction requirements.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard warranty coverage against defects in

materials when installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Eldorado Stone, LLC
B. Product: Veneer types as shown on Drawings. Match existing material as referenced in

documents in color, texture, and stacking style.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. MASONRY STONE VENEER

B. Profile: El Dorado to match exisitng. Include matching corner pieces.
C. Stone Accents:
1. Color: As shown on Drawings.
2. Texture: As shown on Drawings
D. Veneer Unit properties: Precast veneer units consisting of portland cement, lightweight
aggregates, and mineral oxide pigments.
1. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 192 and ASTM C 39, 5 sample average: greater
than 1,800 psi.
2. Shear Bond: ASTM C 482: 50 psi, minimum.
a. Freeze-Thaw Test: ASTM C 67: Less than 3 percent weight loss and no
disintegration.
b. Thermal Resistance: ASTM C 177: 0.473 at 1.387 inches thick
c. Weight per square foot: 2012 IBC and 2012 IRC, ASTM C1670, 15 pounds,
saturated.
3. Weather Barrier: Non-bituminous self-adhering sheet air barrier, (Grace

Perm-a-Barrier VPS is basis of design)
4. MASONRY STONE VENEER REINFORCING: ASTM C 847, 3.4lb (1.8 kg/m2) galvanized
3/8” rib lath or ASTM C 1032, 17 gauge (1.3 mm) woven wire mesh complycode
agency requirements for the type of substrate over which stone veneer is installed.
5. MASONRY STONE VENEER MORTAR:
a. Cement: Portland cement complying with ASTM C 1329.
b. Lime: ASTM C 207.
c. Sand: ASTM C 144, natural or manufactured sand.
d. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, mineral oxide pigments.
e. Water: Potable.
f. Pre-Packaged Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4.
6. Bonding Agent: Exterior integral bonding agent meeting ASTM C 932
7. Water Repellent: Water based silane or siloxane masonry water repellent, applied
per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.3 MORTAR MIXES
A. A. Standard Installation (Grouted Joints):
1. Mix mortar in accordance with ASTM C 270,

2. Polymer modified mortar complying with ANSI A118.4
a. Add color pigment in grout joint mortar in accordance with pigment

manufacturer’s instructions not to exceed 10% by weight of cement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed.
B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory

substrates.
C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Protect adjacent work from contact with mortar.
B. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s installation

instructions for the type of substrate being covered.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install and clean stone in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for
Standard Installation (Grouted Joint) or Jointless/Dry-Stacked installation as specified
above.
B. Apply repellent in accordance with repellent manufacturer’s application instructions.
A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Manufacturer’s Field Service Representative shall make

two periodic site visits for review of on-going installation process.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Reference Section 017400-Cleaning and Waste Management.
B. Remove protective coverings from adjacent work.
C. Cleaning Veneer Units:
1. Wash with soft bristle brush and water/granulated detergent solution
2. Rinse immediately with clean water
D. Removing Effloresence:
1. Allow veneer to dry thoroughly
2. Scrub with soft bristle brush and clean water

3. Rinse immediately with clean water; allow to dry

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,
storage, and handling.
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation
to maintain insulation free of moisture.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck

according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings
of another qualified testing agency.
C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than [25] <Insert value> percent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and

commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection
limitations.
C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.
D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of
abutting panels.
E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for

strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.
H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both

surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and
STEEL DECKING 053100 - 2

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.

2. Steel framing and supports for overhead grilles.
3. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
4. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
7. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction.
8. Shelf angles.
9. Pipe guards.
10. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in
other Sections.
11. Steel plate Lintel/Beam
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.

2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they
are not specified in other Sections.
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe
sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into
concrete.
2. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other
items built into unit masonry.
3. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply
with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop
primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other
work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages,
including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that
are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time
for installation.
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.

2. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for ceiling-hung toilet compartments.

2. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles.
3. Steel framing and supports for countertops.
4. Steel tube reinforcement for low partitions.
5. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
6. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not
7. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction.
8. Shelf angles.
9. Pipe guards.
10. Loose steel lintels.
11. Steel plate Lintel/Beam
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded .
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.
B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS

D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous
with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section

014000 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 316L.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.
E. Abrasive-Surface Floor Plate: Steel plate with abrasive material metallically bonded to
steel.
a. SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.
G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.

2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33;
0.0528-inch minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic
enamel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F
1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
B. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,

ASTM F 593; with hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 2.

C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;
and, where indicated, flat washers.
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating.
D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed
when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M,
conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
E. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless

otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron
or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
F. Post-Installed Anchors.
1. Material for Exterior Locations and typical water Park environment where Stainless
Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F
594.
G. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts)

complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or
studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary
filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with
B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Primer formulated for exterior use over zinc-coated
metal and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20

and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that
maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and
coordinated installation.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or
otherwise impairing work.
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that
of adjacent surface.
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips
flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least
conspicuous.
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware,
screws, and similar items.
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space
anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch
embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and
24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed
to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary
to receive adjacent construction.
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.
C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe
with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top
plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around.
Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch baseplates with four 5/8-inch anchor
bolts and 1/4-inch top plates.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports.
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with where indicated.
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced
not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.

2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open
joint approximately 2 inches larger than expansion or control joint.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup
masonry and concrete.
C. Galvanize and prime shelf angles.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete.
2.8 METAL FLOOR PLATE
A. Fabricate from rolled-stainless-steel floor plate of thickness indicated below:
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
B. Provide grating sections where indicated fabricated from pressure-locked stainless steel
bar grating. Limit openings in gratings to no more than [1/2 inch] [3/4 inch] [1 inch] in
least dimension.
C. Provide stainless-steel angle supports as indicated.
D. Include stainless-steel angle stiffeners, and fixed and removable sections as indicated.
2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
B. Galvanize plates.
C. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.
2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings
and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single
lengths for each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together
to form a single unit where indicated.

B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of
clear span, but not less than 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Galvanize and prime loose steel lintels.
D. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with
2.11 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported
from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no
fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.
2.12 STEEL PLATE LINTEL/BEAM
A. Provide steel plates welded to form faux beam in Connector ceiling. Beam is to match
columns in size and configuration. Weld beam to structural columns as indicated in
Architectural drawings. Grind welds smooth and paint to match columns.
2.13 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into
surrounding surface.
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with
paint adhesion.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming Galvanized Items: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean
railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic
phosphate process.
C. Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in concrete,
sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer zinc-rich primer unless otherwise indicated.
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,
"Commercial Blast Cleaning."
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial
Blast Cleaning."
3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance
Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured
from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of
shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have
been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field
connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that
of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide
threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts,
lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being
supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on
Shop Drawings.
B. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout
column baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and

roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before
packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to
ensure that no voids remain.
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as
used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."]
[Section 099123 "Interior Painting."]
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Finish framing
3. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
4. Wood furring.
5. Wood sleepers.
6. Plywood backing panels.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches
nominal size in least dimension.
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate
component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment

manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply
with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of
preservative retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by
a qualified independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both
before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a
qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Preservative-treated wood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.
3. Power-driven fasteners.
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1

4. Post-installed anchors.
5. Metal framing anchors.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for
fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the
classification marking is representative of the material tested.
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading

agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any
rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by
an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under
the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade
stamp on end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide
certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction
not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.
1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and

containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill
plates.
2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical
formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or
otherwise adversely affect finishes.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not

use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking
and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and
similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and
waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete.
3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior
masonry or concrete walls.
4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in
crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.
5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply

with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a

flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no
evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional
20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the
centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for
fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being
subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior
locations and where indicated.
3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use
where exterior type is not indicated.
4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to
ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according
to ASTM D 6841. For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where
high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with
adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme
fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.
C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry

plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified

testing agency.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking
and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.
E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations
shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
F. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
1. Framing for raised platforms.

2. Concealed blocking.
3. Roof framing and blocking.
4. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar
members in connection with roofing.
5. Plywood backing panels.
2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade of any of the following

species:
1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA.

2. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.
3. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.
B. Other Framing: The following species:
1. Ipe, cumuru, or Sipo for cabana decking and slats
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment
of other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any of the following
species:
1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB.

2. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.
C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following

species and grades:
1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.

2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Standard or No. 3 Common grade;
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.
3. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade
lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate
defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut
lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other
work.
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in

thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of
Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers."
2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative

treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc
coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
manufacturer for material being fastened.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product

indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. USP Structural Connectors.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
A. Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with

ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl

rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or
spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking,
and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.
D. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install
fasteners through each fastener hole.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections
where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of
panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.
G. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as
indicated and as follows:
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more
than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials
accurately fitted to close furred spaces.
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor
level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire
blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood
blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as
sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill
space below partitions.
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not
more than 20 feet o.c.
H. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of
joints or optimum joint arrangement.
I. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of

preservative-treated lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

J. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install

continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
K. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
L. Use corrosion-resistant coated screws typically. Use galvanized steel common nails
where screws are not possible. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate
members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive
nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes
indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as
required for tolerance of finish work.
B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- size

furring vertically at 24 inches o.c.
C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16
inches o.c.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
B. Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection,

miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

SECTION 061533 - DECORATIVE WOOD DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Wood Cabana Lumber.

2. Support framing for Decking Fabrications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Boards: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal in thickness and 2 inches nominalor
greater in width.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominalor greater but less than 5 inches
nominalin least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominalor greater in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.

2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
A. Product Data: For preservative-treated wood products plastic decking andmetal

framing anchors.
1. For preservative-treated wood products. Include chemical treatment

manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing
treated material.
2. For plastic decking and metal framing anchors. Include installation instructions.
B. Samples: For plastic decking, not less than 24 incheslong, showing the range of variation
to be expected in appearance of decking, including surface texture.
A. Material Certificates:
DECORATIVE WOOD DECKING 061533 - 1

1. For lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate
species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by ALSC's
Board of Review.
2. For preservative-treated wood products. Indicate type of preservative used and
net amount of preservative retained. For products receiving a waterborne
treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
B. Certificates of Inspection: Issued by lumber grading agency for exposed wood products
not marked with grade stamp.
C. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Expansion anchors.
2. Metal framing anchors.
A. Lumber Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain

of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.
A. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Handle and store plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL
A. Comply with DOC PS 20 and with grading rules of lumber grading agencies certified by
ALSC's Board of Review as applicable. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with
the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For items that are exposed to view in the completed Work, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece.
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum
dressed sizes for dry wood products.
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Maximum Moisture Content:
1. Boards: 15 percent.
2. Dimension Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominalthickness or less; 19 percent for
more than 2-inch nominalthickness.
3. Timber. 19 percent.

2.2 WOOD FOR CABANAS
A. Hand select wood for freedom from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges,
that would impair finish appearance, including decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shake,
splits, torn grain, and wane.
B. Board Decking for cabanas: 1-1/4-inch actual thickness radius-edged S4S boards, with
one face free of planer skip, machine burn, and torn or chipped grain.
1. Species: Ipe, cumuru or Sipo.

2. Grade Characteristics:
a. Clear one face; small pin knots and worm holes allowed on back face.
b. Sound; small pin knots, worm holes, and fixed knots allowed.
c. All heart one face.
d. Straight grained and parallel cut.
e. Free of heart centers.
f. No decay, incipient decay, honeycomb, knot holes, shakes, splits, or wane.
g. No discoloration.
2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. Cabana fabrication: Select Structural grade and the following species:
1. Ipe, cumuru or sipo for cabana surface decking and slats
2.4 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated, acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and
manufacture. Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length, to penetrate not less than
1-1/2 inchesinto wood substrate.
1. Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated.

2. For pressure-preservative-treated wood, use stainless-steel fasteners.
3. For wood decking material, use stainless-steel fasteners.
4. For redwood, use stainless-steel fasteners.
B. Stainless-Steel Bolts: ASTM F 593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; with ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or
2hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

the following:
B. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

indicated on Drawings or comparable products by one of the following:
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.

2. USP Structural Connectors.

C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of basis-of-design products. Manufacturer's
published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering
analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
independent testing agency.
D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Prime wood indicated to be painted, including both faces and edges. Cut to required
lengths and prime ends. Comply with requirements in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
C. Stain wood indicated to be stained, including both faces and edges. Cut to required
lengths and stain ends. Comply with requirements in Section 099300 "Staining and
Transparent Finishing."
A. Set work to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
work to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA WCD1 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install wood decking material with crown up (bark side down).
D. Install plastic lumber to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Secure members to framing with stainless steel fasteners .
F. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
H. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
I. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of members or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of
joints or optimum joint arrangement.

J. Securely attach exterior rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening
as indicated, complying with the following:
1. "Fastening Schedule" in ICC's International Building Code.

2. "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members" and "Alternate Attachments" in ICC's
International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.
K. Use stainless steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that do
not fully penetrate members where opposite side is exposed to view. Make tight
connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not
countersink heads unless otherwise indicated.
L. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.4 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install members with crown edge up and support ends of each member with
not less than 1-1/2 inchesof bearing on wood or metal, or 3 incheson masonry. Attach
members where framed into wood supporting members by using wood ledgers Do not
notch members.
B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by wood ledgers; double headers
and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches.
C. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams or girders not less than 4 inches or
securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal
thickness by depth of member over supports.
D. Provide solid blocking of 2-inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at intervals of 96

inches o.c., between joists.

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting,
securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E119; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance

Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
B. Air-Barrier and Water-Resistant Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Performance: Air-barrier

and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing assembly, and seals with adjacent
construction, shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a
liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation
or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating
substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction
material changes, penetrations[, tie-ins to installed waterproofing] [, tie-ins to other
installed air barriers], and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air
leakage exceeding specified limits.
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated.
B. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with
[APA AFG-01] [ASTM D3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel
indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
SHEATHING 061600 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints
so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against
abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.

2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and
Two-Family Dwellings.
3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.
D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not
fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these

materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match
spacing of structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so

sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when
rain is forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.
SHEATHING 061600 - 2
SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of

metal-plate-connected members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and
assembled before delivery to Project site.
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in SBCA BCSI, "Building
Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing,
Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral
bending.
2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored.
3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration.

Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in

Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.
B. Structural Performance: Metal-plate-connected wood trusses shall be capable of

withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with
requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below.
1. Design Loads: As indicated.

2. Maximum Deflection under Design Loads:
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of [1/180] [1/240] [1/360] of span.

b. Floor Trusses: Vertical deflection of [1/360] [1/480] [1/600] of span.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of TPI 1, TPI DSB, and
SBCA BCSI.
D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's

"National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "Supplement."
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the
American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) Board of Review. Provide lumber graded
by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under
the rules indicated.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade
stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S.
4. Provide dry lumber with [15] [19] percent maximum moisture content at time of
dressing.
B. Minimum Specific Gravity for Top Chords: [0.50] <Insert value>.
C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for
miscellaneous lumber in [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."] [Section 061053
"Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."]
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage

details required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to
ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly, with joints closely fitted to comply with
tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and
secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before
installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other
causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.
E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting
construction.

F. Space trusses [16 inches o.c.] [24 inches o.c.] [as indicated]; adjust and align trusses in
location before permanently fastening.
G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers
as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors
according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.
H. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads
are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.
1. Install bracing to comply with [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."] [Section 061053
"Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry."]
I. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.
J. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.
K. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not comply with requirements.
1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when
approved by Architect.
3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Protect wood trusses from weather. If, despite protection, wood trusses become wet,
apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply
with EPA-registered label.

SECTION 062023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
B. MDO: Plywood with a medium-density overlay on the face.
C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to
provide air circulation.
1. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely

anchored.
2. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions comply
with requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must
be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions
comply with requirements specified for installation areas.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally
dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity
at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold
damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION
A. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except those with ends exposed in
finished work:
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 062023 - 1

1. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds.
2. Wood-board paneling.
B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges
of lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet,
moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing

humidity in installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours[ unless longer conditioning is
recommended by manufacturer].
A. Do not use materials that are unsound; warped; improperly treated or finished;
inadequately seasoned; too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements; or with
defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials.
1. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment.

2. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts
as recommended by manufacturer.
3. Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and
sand unless otherwise indicated.
4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining
interior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and
1/16-inch maximum offset for reveal installation.
5. Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements.
1. Interior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with

requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.
B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
B. Restore damaged or soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes if any.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during
construction.
B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not
limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy
or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

SECTION 064400 - ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Exterior-exposed ornamental woodwork to include wood screens, case-work, and

sliding door.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing ornamental work
items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.
3. Shop finishing of exterior ornamental woodwork.
A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations,
large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.
1. Show details full size.

2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including
concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.
3. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and
identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each
leaf.
4. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches wide by 12 inches long, for
each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for
transparent-finished ornamental woodwork.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality
Certification Program or has a similar qualification.
ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK 064400 - 1

B. Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program or has

a similar qualification.
A. Do not deliver interior ornamental woodwork until painting and similar operations that
could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If ornamental
woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where
environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions"
Article.
A. Weather Limitations for Exterior Work: Proceed with installation of exterior ornamental
woodwork only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit work to be
performed and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to
rain, snow, or dampness.
B. Field Measurements: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other

construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork
by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings.
C. Established Dimensions: Where ornamental woodwork is indicated to fit to other

construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance
for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions
correspond to established dimensions.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that ornamental woodwork
can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK FABRICATORS
A. Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, available fabricators offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Baker Elements, Oak Park, Ill.: Paul Baker

2. ISEC, Inc.: Tampa, Florida
3. Beaubois, Inc.: Saint-Georges, Québec, Canada
2.2 ORNAMENTAL WOODWORK, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of ornamental woodwork indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork,

including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.
2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality
standard and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard.
Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.
2.3 EXTERIOR ORNAMENTAL WORK FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Exterior ornamental work for transparent finish includes the following:
1. Millwork Screens: Louvered and linear.

2. Base and upper cabinets and counters
3. Doors with louvered panels
B. Grade: Premium.
C. Wood Species: Ipe, cumuru or Sipo (also called Utile).
2.4 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of ornamental woodwork and quality grade specified unless
1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3
inches wide.
2. Wood Moisture Content for Exterior Materials: 9 to 15 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with
requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of ornamental woodwork
and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Marine Plywood): HPVA HP-1, (BS-1088).

Grade B minimum, A where exposed
C. Water-Repellent Preservative Treated Materials: Comply with AWPA N1 (dip, spray,

flood, or vacuum-pressure treatment) for exterior ornamental woodwork items indicated
to receive water-repellent preservative treatment.
1. Items fabricated from the following wood species need not be treated:
a. Ipe, cumuru or Sipo (also called Utile).
A. Exterior Blocking, Shims, and Nailers: Hardwood lumber, pressure-preservative treated,

kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
1. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC3b.
a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19
percent.
b. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
c. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency
approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of
Review.
B. Nails for Exterior Use: stainless steel.

C. Screws for Exterior Use: stainless steel.
D. Provide self-drilling screws for metal-framing supports, as recommended by

metal-framing manufacturer.
E. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed
anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face
of exterior walls and at floors.
F. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Sealants: Use products that comply with the
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24):
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.
2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
3. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.
4. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate ornamental woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease

edges to radius indicated for the following:
1. Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible

before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment
and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times ornamental
woodwork fabrication will be complete.
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely
assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices
that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and
check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before
disassembling for shipment.
2.7 SHOP PRIMING
A. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
ornamental woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to surfaces installed in
contact with concrete or masonry and to end-grain surfaces.
2.8 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish ornamental woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.

Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. Finish Materials: Use finish materials that meet the testing and product requirements of
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."

C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
ornamental woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of ornamental woodwork. Apply two coats to end-grain
surfaces.
D. Transparent Finish for Exterior Items:
1. Provide finish similar to Sikkens Cetol Marine clear 23, three coats.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before installation, condition ornamental woodwork to average prevailing humidity

conditions in installation areas.
B. Before installing ornamental woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion

and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install ornamental woodwork to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble ornamental woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent
that it was not completed in the shop.
C. Install ornamental woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with
concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
D. Scribe and cut ornamental woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and
repair damaged finish at cuts.
E. Anchor ornamental woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to

substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine
finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
ornamental woodwork.
1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
F. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of ornamental

woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed.
1. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed
surfaces where only sealer/prime coats are applied in shop.
A. Repair damaged and defective ornamental woodwork, where possible, to eliminate

functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace ornamental
woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B. Clean ornamental woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up

shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


SECTION 071326 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.

2. Modified bituminous deck-paving sheet waterproofing.
3. Blindside sheet waterproofing.
1. Section 079513.16 "Exterior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for exterior-wall

expansion-joint assemblies that interface with waterproofing.
1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate

condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather
conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and
inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and

performance properties of waterproofing.
2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating
substrate.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate
joints and cracks, expansion joints, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside
corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.
1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of
pedestal-supported concrete pavers.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, including
the following products:
1. 8-by-8-inch square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.

2. 4-by-4-inch square of drainage panel.
3. Plaza-deck paver, 4-by-4-inch square, in each color and texture required.
4. Paver pedestal assembly.
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 071326 - 1

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Field quality-control reports.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained
and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to set
quality standards for installation.
1. Build for each typical waterproofing installation including pavers and accessories
to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatments, inside and
outside corner treatments, and protection.
a. Size: 100 sq. ft. in area.

b. Description: Each type of wall and plaza installation.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the

Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves
such deviations in writing.
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and

substrate temperatures recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not
apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing

materials.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing

material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain
watertight within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Installer's Special Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this
Section, for warranty period of two years.
1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels,

insulation, pedestals, and pavers on plaza decks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection

course, and molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations for Plaza-Deck Paving: Obtain plaza-deck pavers and paver
pedestals from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet

consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick,
polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side; formulated for
application with primer or surface conditioner that complies with VOC limits of
authorities having jurisdiction. Use typically below grade or in proximity to grade.
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW MiraDRI 860/861.

b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Bituthene 3000 for
low temperature applications, Bituthene 4000 for high temperature
locations.
c. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200.
d. W.R. Meadows, Inc; SealTight Mel-Rol XLT.
2. Physical Properties:
a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.
c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970/D 1970M.
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement;
ASTM C 836/C 836M.
e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154/E 154M.
f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour
immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570.
g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water
Method.
h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.
3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness

as sheet waterproofing.
2.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS DECK-PAVING SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Modified Bituminous Deck-Paving Sheet: Minimum 65-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering

sheets designed to be overlaid with asphalt paving; consisting of rubberized-asphalt
membrane with woven or nonwoven fabric reinforcement laminated to one surface or
embedded within the membrane, and with release liner on adhesive side.
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; Pre-Pave CCW 711-70.

b. W.R. Meadows, Inc; SealTight Mel-Dek.
a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: [50 lbf/in.] <Insert value> minimum;

ASTM D 882.
b. Pliability: Unaffected when bent 180 degrees over a 1/4-inch mandrel at
minus 15 deg F; ASTM D 146/D 146M.
c. Puncture Resistance: [40 lbf] [100 lbf] [200 lbf] minimum;
ASTM E 154/E 154M.
2.4 BLINDSIDE SHEET WATERPROOFING
A. Blindside Sheet Waterproofing for Vertical Applications: Uniform, flexible,

multilayered-composite sheet membrane that forms a permanent bond with fresh
concrete placed against it; complete with accessories and preformed shapes for an
unbroken waterproofing assembly; with the following physical properties. Use primarily
below grade or in close proximity to grade.
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; MiraPLY-V.

b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; ,Preprufe
160R-Plus.
c. W.R. Meadows, Inc; SealTight PRECON.
a. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970/D 1970M.

b. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 903, modified.
c. Lap Adhesion: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 1876, modified.
d. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 230 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified.
f. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water
Method.
g. Ultimate Elongation: 335 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, modified.
B. Blindside Sheet Waterproofing for Horizontal Applications: Uniform, flexible,

multilayered-composite sheet membrane that forms a permanent bond with fresh
concrete placed against it; complete with accessories and preformed shapes for an
unbroken waterproofing assembly; with the following physical properties:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; MiraPLY-H.

b. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; ,Preprufe
300R-Plus.
c. W.R. Meadows, Inc; SealTight PRECON.
a. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970/D 1970M.

b. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 903, modified.
c. Lap Adhesion: 5 lbf/in. minimum; ASTM D 1876, modified.
d. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 230 feet; ASTM D 5385, modified.

f. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.1 perm maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water
Method.
g. Ultimate Elongation: 335 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, modified.
C. Mastic, Adhesives, and Detail Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes
recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended

use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities
B. Primer: Liquid solvent-borne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing

material manufacturer.
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate

by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel

grade or low viscosity.
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, modified asphalt

coating.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch, predrilled at 9-inch
centers.
G. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or

mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated
fibrous liners and as follows:
1. Thickness: Nominal 1/8 inch for vertical applications; 1/4 inch elsewhere.
2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer for protection course type.
H. Protection Course: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation

faced on one side with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength
of not less than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6
percent per ASTM C 272/C 272M.
2.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Section 334600 "Subdrainage."
B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel with Polymeric Film:

Composite subsurface drainage panel acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer and
consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not
exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded
to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate through the core of 9 to 21 gpm per ft.
Insert values. Use primarily below grade.

a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Hydrodrain 400.

b. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal 975 (Pre-2014:
Sonoshield DBS 6200).
c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW MiraDRAIN 6200CCW
MiraDRAIN 6200XL.
d. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Hydroduct
220Hydroduct 660.
C. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel without Polymeric Film:

Composite subsurface drainage panel acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer and
consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not
exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side of the core, without a polymeric film
bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate through the core of 9 to 21 gpm
per ft. Insert values.
a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; Hydrodrain 420.

b. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems; MasterSeal 974 (Pre-2014:
Sonoshield DBS 2000).
c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW MiraDRAIN 6000CCW
MiraDRAIN 6000XL.
d. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Hydroduct 200.
D. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel with Polymeric Film: Composite

subsurface drainage panel acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer and consisting
of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a
woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve,
laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and
with a horizontal flow rate through the core of not less than 2.8 gpm per ft..
a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Hydroduct 225.
E. Molded-Sheet Collector-Panel System with Polymeric Film: Composite subsurface

collector-panel system by same manufacturer as primary molded-sheet drainage
panels; consisting of a high-profile, studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet
drainage core; with a nonwoven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not
exceeding No. 40 sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film
bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate through the core of 9 to 17 gpm
per ft. and a minimum horizontal, in-plane flow rate . Provide system with manufacturer's
outlets, connectors, tapes, and other accessories to connect primary molded-sheet
drainage panels with piped subdrainage system specified in Section 334600
"Subdrainage."
a. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Hydroduct Coil
600.

2.7 INSULATION DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Unfaced, Wall-Insulation Type VI, Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board

insulation according to ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi minimum compressive strength;
unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved
drainage channels.
a. DiversiFoam Products; .
b. Owens Corning; Foamular 404 RB.
B. Geotextile-Faced, Plaza-Deck Insulation Type VII, Drainage Panels:

Extruded-polystyrene board insulation according to ASTM C 578, Type VII,
60-psi minimum compressive strength; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges, with
one side having grooved drainage channels, and faced with manufacturer's standard,
nonwoven geotextile filter fabric.
a. T. Clear Corporation, a subsidiary of Fin Pan Inc; Thermadry 1750.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of waterproofing.
1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended
in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in
writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method
according to ASTM D 4263.
3. Verify that compacted subgrade is dry, smooth, sound, and ready to receive
waterproofing sheet.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and
overspray affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other
penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from
joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Install sheet strips of width according to manufacturer's written instructions and

center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a
width of 1/16 inch.
F. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous deck-to-wall and
deck-to-deck joints with overlapping sheet strips of widths according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second
sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.
G. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets
of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:
a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane in each direction

from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.
b. At plaza-deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet strips
onto deck waterproofing and to finished height of sheet flashing.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.
3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written

instructions and per recommendations in ASTM D 6135.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and
seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F,

install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature
application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate
temperature is higher than 60 deg F.
D. Two-Ply Application: Install sheets to form a membrane with lap widths not less than 50
percent of sheet widths, to provide a minimum of two thicknesses of sheet membrane
over areas to receive waterproofing.
E. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps
shed water.
F. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks,
construction, and contraction joints.
G. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.

H. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
I. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with
requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing
extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.
J. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane.
1. Molded-sheet drainage panels Insulation drainage panels may be used in place

of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by
waterproofing manufacturer and installed immediately.
3.4 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS DECK-PAVING, SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Install modified bituminous deck-paving sheets according to waterproofing

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over areas to receive waterproofing. Accurately align
sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum side-lap widths and 6-inch end laps.
Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
D. Apply sheet waterproofing from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed
water.
E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks,
construction, and contraction joints.
F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.
G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing that do not comply with
requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing
extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.
3.5 BLINDSIDE SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION
A. Install blindside sheet waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels over substrate. Lap edges and ends of
geotextile to maintain continuity.
C. Vertical Applications: Install sheet with face against substrate. Accurately align sheets
and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by membrane
manufacturer. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger and tape end laps to ensure
watertight installation. Mechanically fasten to substrate.
1. Securely fasten top termination of membrane with continuous metal termination

bar anchored into substrate and cover with detail tape.

D. Horizontal Applications: Install sheet with face against substrate. Accurately align sheets
and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by membrane
manufacturer. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger and tape end laps to ensure
watertight installation.
E. Corners: Seal lapped terminations and cut edges of sheet waterproofing at inside and
outside corners with detail tape.
F. Seal penetrations through sheet waterproofing to provide watertight seal with detail
tape patches or wraps and a liquid-membrane troweling.
G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to produce a continuous watertight tie

into adjacent waterproofing.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with
requirements. Tape perimeter of damaged or nonconforming area extending 6 inches
beyond repaired areas in all directions. Apply a patch of sheet waterproofing and firmly
secure with detail tape.
3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall
or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or
another method that does not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of
geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during
subsequent construction.
1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage

panels.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests.
B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing

membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation,
membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish
daily reports to Architect.
C. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to procedures in
ASTM D 5957, after completing waterproofing but before placing overlying construction.
Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable
water.
1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and a
maximum depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of sheet
flashings.
2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
3. Testing agency shall observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and
terminations for evidence of leaks during flood testing.
4. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
waterproofing installation is watertight.
D. Electronic Leak-Detection Testing:

1. Testing agency shall test each deck area for leaks using an electronic
leak-detection method that locates discontinuities in the waterproofing
membrane.
2. Testing agency shall perform tests on abutting or overlapping smaller areas as
necessary to cover entire test area.
3. Testing agency shall create a conductive electronic field over the area of
waterproofing to be tested and electronically determine locations of
discontinuities or leaks, if any, in the waterproofing.
4. Testing agency shall provide survey report indicating locations of discontinuities, if
any.
E. Waterproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.8 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING
A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.
B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
C. Protect installed insulation drainage panels from damage due to UV light, harmful
weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by
permanent construction immediately after installation.
D. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with

requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.
E. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.

SECTION 071700 - BENTONITE WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Bentonite waterproofing.
2. Molded-sheet drainage panels.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include installation details for waterproofing, penetrations, and interface
with other work.
A. Field quality-control reports.
B. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit bentonite waterproofing to be installed according to
manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.
1. Do not apply waterproofing materials to surfaces where ice or frost is visible. Do

not apply bentonite waterproofing materials in areas with standing water.
2. Do not place bentonite clay products in panel or composite form on damp
surfaces unless such practice is approved in writing by manufacturer.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer and Installer agree(s) to repair or replace components

of bentonite waterproofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 071700 - 1

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPOSITE POLYETHYLENE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE
A. Composite Polyethylene/Bentonite Membrane: Minimum 90-mil- thick membrane

consisting of a polyethylene geomembrane bonded to a layer of bentonite.
a. CETCO, a subsidiary of AMCOL International Corp; Swelltite.

b. Tremco Commercial Sealants & Waterproofing, an RPM company;
Deckseal.
2. Puncture Resistance: 70 lbf according to ASTM D 4833 or 169 lbf according to

ASTM E 154.
3. Vapor Permeance: 0.03 perms according to ASTM E 96/E 96M.
2.2 PROTECTION COURSE
A. Protection Course: Protection mat of type and thickness as recommended in writing by

waterproofing manufacturer for each Project condition.
1. Adhesive: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Woven-Geotextile-Faced Molded-Sheet Drainage Panels: Composite subsurface

drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet
drainage core; with a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not
exceeding No. 40 sieve, laminated to one side of the core, with a polymeric film bonded
to the other side; and with a horizontal flow rate of not less than 2.8 gpm per ft..
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Bentonite Mastic: Bentonite compound of trowelable consistency, specifically

formulated for application at joints and penetrations.
B. Plastic Protection Sheet: Polyethylene sheeting according to ASTM D 4397; thickness as

recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer to suit application but at least
6 mils thick.
C. Cement Grout Patching Material: Grout mix compatible with substrate being patched
and recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
D. Masonry Fasteners: Case-hardened nails or hardened-steel, powder-actuated fasteners.

Depending on manufacturer's written requirements, provide 1/2- or 1-inch- diameter
washers under fastener heads.
E. Sealants: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Tapes:

Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended waterproof tape for joints between
sheets, membranes, or panels.
F. Adhesive: Waterproofing manufacturer's water-based adhesive used to secure

waterproofing to both vertical and horizontal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for substrate preparations and other conditions affecting performance of
bentonite waterproofing.
B. Examine bentonite materials before installation. Reject materials that have been
prematurely exposed to moisture.
C. Verify that substrate is complete and that work that will penetrate waterproofing is
complete and rigidly installed.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Prepare substrates, voids, cracks, and cavities; and install waterproofing and accessories
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Before installing, verify the correct side of waterproofing that shall face substrate
surface.
2. Apply granular bentonite around penetrations in horizontal surfaces and changes
in plane according to manufacturer's details in preparation for bentonite tubes
and mastic.
3. Apply bentonite tubes, bentonite mastic, or both at changes of plane,
construction joints in substrate, projections, and penetrations.
4. Prime concrete substrates. Primer may be omitted on concrete surfaces that
comply with manufacturer's written requirements for dryness, surface texture, and
freedom from imperfections.
B. Apply bentonite tubes continuously on footing against base of wall to be waterproofed.
C. Protect waterproofing from damage and wetting before and during subsequent
construction operations. Repair punctures, tears, and cuts.
D. Install protection course before backfilling or placing overburden when recommended

in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.
3.4 COMPOSITE POLYETHYLENE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane, with ends and edges lapped a
minimum of 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. Stagger end joints between
membranes a minimum of 24 inches. Seal joints with permanent seam tape.
B. Below Structural Slabs-on-Grade: Apply waterproofing membrane with polyethylene side

down, and staple ends and edges.

1. Install under slabs, footings, grade beams, and pile caps; or continue
waterproofing through key joints between footings and foundation walls, and
extend a minimum of 8 inches up or beyond perimeter slab forms.
2. Protect waterproofing from damage caused by reinforcing bar supports with
sharp edges.
C. Slabs: Starting at lowest point, install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane,

with ends and edges lapped a minimum of 4 inches.
3.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Use adhesives or another method that does not penetrate waterproofing.
Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet
drainage panels during subsequent construction.
1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage

panels.

SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND

FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate.

2. Water-resistive coatings.
1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in EIFS with elastomeric joint
sealants and for perimeter joints between system and other materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in ASTM E 2110 apply to Work of this Section.
B. EIFS: Exterior insulation and finish system(s).
C. IBC: International Building Code.
A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory, including water-resistive
coatings.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 8 inches
square in size.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated.
1. Include similar Samples of exposed accessories involving color selection.
D. Samples for Verification: 24-inch- square panels for each type of finish-coat color and
texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work
including custom trim, each profile, and an aesthetic reveal.
1. Include exposed trim and accessory Samples to verify color selected.

2. Include a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected, as specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND 072419 - 1

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by EIFS manufacturer certifying the following:
1. EIFS complies with requirements.

2. Substrates to which EIFS is indicated to be attached are acceptable to EIFS
manufacturer.
3. Accessory products installed with EIFS, including joint sealants, flashing,
water-resistive coatings, trim, whether or not furnished by EIFS manufacturer and
whether or not specified in this Section, are acceptable to EIFS manufacturer.
C. Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for insulation and
joint sealant, from manufacturer.
D. Product Test Reports: For each EIFS assembly and component, and for water-resistive
coatings, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
E. Field quality-control reports and special inspection reports.
F. Evaluation Reports: For EIFS, including insulation fasteners, water-resistive coatings,

flexible membrane flashing, from ICC-ES.
G. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as

qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and
to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. See section 014000 for
information regarding Integrated Exterior Mockup.
1. Integrated Exterior Mockup may serve as the mock up for EIFS quality standard for
installation of the full system. The EIFs component must function fully with regard to
water-tightness, system drainage and weeps.
A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and
clearly identifying products.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures,
construction traffic, and other causes.

1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.

2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic
insulating materials to Project site before installation time.
3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible
in each area of construction.
A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of

24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS
adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate
temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers'
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components

of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Bond integrity and weathertightness.

b. Deterioration of EIFS finishes and other EIFS materials beyond normal
weathering.
2. Warranty coverage includes the following components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall

assemblies:
a. EIFS finish, including base coats, finish coats, and reinforcing mesh.
b. Insulation installed as part of EIFS including foam build-outs.
c. Insulation adhesive and mechanical fasteners.
d. EIFS accessories, including trim components and flashing.
e. Water-resistive coatings.
f. EIFS drainage components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sto

Corp: Sto Classic www.stocorp.com. or comparable product by one of the
following:
2. Dryvit Systems, Inc.

3. Sto Corp.

A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and ICC-ES AC219 and with the following:
1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with a

means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.
2. System Fire Performance: Fire-resistance rating of wall assembly.
3. Structural Performance: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with
ICC-ES AC219 when tested according to ASTM E 2568.
4. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure of At least 175 psf (8.37 Pa), positive and negative,
determined by testing conducted in accordance with ASTM E330/E330M, with
maximum deflection of 1/120 and factor of safety of 3.0.
5. Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568, High impact resistance unless otherwise
indicated.
6. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between EIFS and
substrates, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service
conditions.
7. Abrasion Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted
on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days and shows no
cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand
when tested according to ASTM D 968, Method A.
8. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass
substrate; cured for 28 days and shows no growth when tested according to
ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.
2.3 EIFS MATERIALS
A. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner designed to protect

substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate and
insulation adhesive.
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for

use as air and water-resistive barriers; compatible with substrate and complying with
physical and performance criteria of ASTM E 2570. StoGuard Joint Treatment, Sto Gold
Coat Waterproof coating, StoGuard transition membrane, and accessories are the
basis of design. Water vapor transmission rate to minimum 10 Perms.
C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing,

rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS
manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated

use; specifically formulated to be applied to back side of insulation in a manner that
creates open vertical channels designed to serve as an integral part of the
water-drainage system of the EIFS-clad drainage-wall assembly; compatible with
substrate; and complying with the following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150/C 150M,

Type I, and polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat.
2. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and
fillers specified for base coat.
3. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of
insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.

E. Drainage Mat: Woven or fused, self-furring, PVC mesh lath mat designed to drain
incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in
writing by EIFS manufacturer with manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
mechanical fasteners suitable for intended substrate. Drainage may be accomplished
through other means, such as using adhesive to form drainage cavities, depending on
Manufacturers standard
F. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; and
EIFS manufacturer's requirements for most stringent requirements for material
performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations,
and the following:
1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for
not less than six weeks.
2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively,
according to ASTM E 84.
3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards of not more than 24 by 48 inches and in
thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches thick or less than the thickness
allowed by ASTM C 1397.
4. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-fabricated
profile with linear, vertical-drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of
board, unless drainage is accomplished through other means.
5. Foam Build-Outs: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
G. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for

compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with
retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. according to ASTM E 2098 and
the following:
1. Reinforcing Mesh for EIFS, General: Not less than weight required to meet
impact-performance level specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
2. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than As recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than As recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than As recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
H. Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the
following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150/ C 150M,

Type I, white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion
adhesive designed for use with portland cement.
2. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and
inert fillers to which only water is added at Project site.
3. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation of polymer-emulsion adhesive and
inert fillers that is ready to use without adding other materials.
I. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard waterproof

formulation and complying with one of the following:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150/C 150M,

Type I, white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion
adhesive designed for use with portland cement.
2. Job-combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer-emulsion
adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement.

J. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant fasteners

consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener
indicated below; designed to resist Project's design loads; capable of pulling fastener
head below surface of insulation board; and complying with the following:
1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in thickness, provide steel
drill screws complying with ASTM C 954.
2. For attachment to light-gage steel framing members not less than 0.0179 inch in
thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002.
3. For attachment to wood framing members and plywood sheathing, provide steel
drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002, Type W.
4. For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide sheathing dowel in
form of a plastic wing-tipped fastener with thermal cap, sized to fit insulation
thickness indicated and to penetrate substrate to depth required to secure
anchorage.
K. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for

preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
L. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's siliconized acrylic-based coating StoFinish with

Lotusan is basis of design complying with the following:
1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments,

sound stone particles, and fillers.
2. Colors: Match Architect's sample. Assume Minimum of 2 colors.
3. Textures: Match Architect's sample. Assume minimum of three textures: Faux brick,
Linear and Free Form.
M. Sealer: Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic-based sealer for protecting finish coat.
Sto Lotusan is basis of design.
N. Water: Potable.
O. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to

comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized
PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use
intended, and ASTM C 1063.
1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of

depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated
for bonding to coating and back leg.
2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind
insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness
of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and
back leg.
3. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind
insulation with perforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in
track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with
face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain
incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations
of EIFS with drainage.
4. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of
movement.
5. Windowsill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over
framing beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to
exterior.

6. Parapet Cap Flashing: Type for both flashing and covering parapet top with
design complying with ASTM C 1397.
2.4 MIXING
A. Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do
not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS
manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period
specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
the Work.
B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other
construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.
1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.

2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application
of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering
of exterior finish coats on other work.
B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather
during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and
deterioration of substrates.
C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to
obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
1. Concrete Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation

installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests
recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for
installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION
A. Primer/Sealer: Apply over CMU or concrete substrates and where required by EIFS
manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.
B. Water-Resistive Coating: Apply over sealed substrate to provide a water-resistive barrier.

1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners
of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over weather-resistive barrier, applied and lapped to

shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where required by EIFS
manufacturer. Prime substrates if required and install flashing to comply with EIFS
manufacturer's written instructions and details.
3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at windowsills, and
elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.
1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door

heads, and at floor line expansion joints of water-drainage EIFS unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Windowsill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.
3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.
4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.
5. Parapet Cap Flashing: Use where indicated on Drawings.
3.6 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION
A. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges overlapped and
mechanically secured with fasteners over water-resistive barrier. Drainage may be
accomplished through other means such as drainage channels depending on
Manufacturers standard.
3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with

ASTM C 1397 and the following:
1. Apply adhesive to ridges on back of insulation by notched-trowel method in a

manner that results in full adhesive contact over the entire surface of ridges,
leaving channels free of adhesive once insulation is adhered to substrate.
2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of
insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level
surface.
3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for not less than 24 hours,
before installing mechanical fasteners, beginning rasping and sanding insulation
or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.
4. Apply insulation over substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented
horizontally.
5. Begin first course of insulation from screed/track and work upward. Work from
perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible.
6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce
running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches
wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window
and door openings and not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals.
a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from
horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.
7. Apply channeled insulation, if used, with drainage channels aligned vertically.

8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.

9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps
greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert
insulation without using adhesive or other material.
10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce
edges and shapes complying with details indicated.
11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting
more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due
to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Prevent
airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.
12. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit
configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with
profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic
reveals to less than 3/4 inch.
13. Install foam build-outs and attach to structure.
14. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.
15. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation
edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps
wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint
substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
16. Form joints for sealant application with back-to-back casing beads for joints within
EIFS and with perimeter casing beads at dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps
between casing beads and between perimeter casing beads and adjoining
surfaces of width indicated.
17. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully
wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not
less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
18. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:
a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base
coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.
b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or
between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and
finish coat over face leg of accessories.
19. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that
does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier.
B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and
as follows:
1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.

2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other
EIFS.
3. Where wall height or building shape changes.
4. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.
3.8 BASE-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Waterproof Adhesive/Base Coat: To exposed surfaces of insulation, apply in minimum

thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer over sloped surfaceswindowsills
parapets foam build-outs.

B. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam build-outs in minimum
thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch
dry-coat thickness.
C. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free
installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or
otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed
mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color
and pattern are invisible.
D. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second

base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches
or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's
written instructions in same manner as first application. Do not apply until first base coat
has cured.
E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4
inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally
at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide, strip reinforcing mesh at
both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4
inches on each side of corners.
1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.
2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing
mesh.
F. Foam Build-Outs: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.
G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same
manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply
until first base coat has cured.
3.9 FINISH-COAT INSTALLATION
A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for
uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform
finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow
lines, and texture variations.
C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS
manufacturer.
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following

special inspections:
1. As stipulated in Ch. 17 of the IBC.

2. According to ICC-ES AC24 ICC-ES AC235.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to ASTM E 2359 ICC-ES AC24 ICC-ES AC219.

D. EIFS will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating
materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to
receive EIFS coatings.

SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Reinforced-polyethylene vapor retarders.
1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders.

2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation
products.
A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCED-POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film

laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim
and weighing not less than 20 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.1
perm. Use typically below slab on grade.

product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:
a. Raven Industries Inc.

b. Reef Industries, Inc.
c. Stego Industries LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil):
www.stegoindustries.com. .
d. Fully Adhered Vapor Barrier HDP: Grace FlorPrufe 120 (Use below
mechanical room floor)
VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 1

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder

manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
B. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer

and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates
indicated.
C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender

washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings.
B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure
vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage
system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs
and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's
written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders.
E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other

work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction.
VAPOR RETARDERS 072600 - 2

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Adhered Mechanically fastened thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.

2. Vapor retarder.
3. Roof insulation.
B. Section includes the installation of insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Insulation strips are
furnished under Section 053100 "Steel Decking."
C. Related Requirements:
1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and
blocking; and for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.
2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof flashings and
counterflashings.
3. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
A. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct

conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness
and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
B. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting
agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's
representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects
roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including
3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials,
Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,
including flatness and fastening.
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if
applicable.
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after
installation.
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work, including:
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roofing,
fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing.
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Sheet roofing, of color required.

2. Roof paver, full sized, in each color and texture required.
3. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system

complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
C. Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by

manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is FM Global/Zurich

approved for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by

roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and
labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of
manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing
with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected
location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.
Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by
sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with
insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during
installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid
permanent deflection of deck.
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's
written instructions and warranty requirements.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing

system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, cover boards,
and other components of roofing system.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of
this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all
components of roofing system such as roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,
cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for
the following warranty period:
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:

1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

2. Firestone Building Products.
3. GAF Materials Corporation.
4. Johns Manville.
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for roofing
system from manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.
A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift
pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing
and base flashings shall remain watertight.
1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure

when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested
according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and
adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as
demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift
pressures:
1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 110 PSF or as indicated in the documents

2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 110 PSF or as indicated in the documents
3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 90 PSF or as indicated in the documents
D. FM Global/Zurich Listing: Roofing, base flashings, and component materials shall comply
with requirements in FM Global 4450 or FM Global 4470 as part of a built-up roofing
system, and shall be listed in FM Global's "RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible
construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-120.

2. Hail-Resistance Rating: SH.
E. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof
Products Qualified Product List" for low -slope roof products.
F. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing agency.
G. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.

Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.3 TPO ROOFING
A. Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform,

TPO sheet.
1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.

2. Exposed Face Color: White.
2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended

use and compatible with roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. ROOF SHEET FLASHING: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils
thick, mi same color as TPO sheet.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.
E. TPO METAL TERMINATION BAR: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or

aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch ) thick; withal Battens: Manufacturer's
standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch
wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants,
termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.5 ROOF SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate,

Type X, 5/8 inch thick.

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing.

b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Dens Deck DuraGuard Dens Deck
Prime.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.
d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate board
to roof deck.
2.6 ROOF VAPOR /AIR RETARDER
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating
of 0.1 perm.
1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Global approved for

vapor-retarder application.
B. Laminated Sheet: Polyethylene laminate, two layers, reinforced with cord grid, with
maximum permeance rating of 0.06 perm.

a. Reef Industries, Inc.
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing

manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of
thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global/Zurich-approved roof insulation.
B. POLYISOCYANURATE BOARD INSULATION Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade
2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.

b. GAF Materials Corporation.
c. Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company.
d. Johns Manville.
C. ROOF TAPERED INSULATION: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to

slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches(1:48) unless otherwisated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for

intended use and compatibility with roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation
and cover boards to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to

attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.
D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 5/8
inch thick, factory primed.
a. CertainTeed Corporation; .
b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Dens Deck DuraGuard Dens Deck
Prime.
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.
d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.
2.9 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV.
B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.
2.10 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting,

surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable
to roofing system manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work:
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced,
and roof-drain bodies are securely clamped in place.
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck
at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing
installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove
sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from
spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when
no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.
C. Install insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written

instructions.
3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or
when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on
adjoining roofing.
C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain

weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.
3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of deck according to recommendations in

FM Global's "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
3.5 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area
to receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and
6 inches, respectively. Continuously seal side and end laps with adhesive.
B. Self-Adhering-Sheet Vapor Retarder: Prime substrate if required by manufacturer. Install

self-adhering-sheet vapor retarder over area to receive vapor retarder, side and end
lapping each sheet a minimum of 3-1/2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Seal laps by
rolling.
C. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to

prevent air movement into roofing system.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to

precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing
roof insulation.

C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall
insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction.
1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers,

install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if
applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush
and does not restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps
exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:
1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft.,
and allow primer to dry.
2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied
within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.
3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly
pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck
using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for specified

Windstorm Resistance Classification.
I. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation to deck
using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav"

for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread
insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
J. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end
joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in
each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck.
1. Fasten cover boards according to requirements in FM Global's "RoofNav" for

specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
K. Install slip sheet over cover board and immediately beneath roofing.

3.7 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical

personnel.
C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by

manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice
area of roofing.
E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations,

penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
F. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing
and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a
watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal
cut edges of sheet.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample
areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with
requirements.
H. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in
place with clamping ring.
3.8 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Mechanically fasten roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
B. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical

personnel.
C. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Mechanically fasten or adhere roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and

perimeter of roofing.
E. Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing
and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a
watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal
cut edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample
areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with
requirements.
G. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in
place with clamping ring.
3.9 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate,
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld
side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to

substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions,

surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage
components, and to furnish reports to Architect.
1. Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM): Testing agency shall survey entire roof area
for potential leaks using electric field vector mapping (EFVM).
B. Flood Testing: Flood test each roofing area for leaks, according to recommendations in
ASTM D 5957, after completing roofing and flashing but before overlying construction is
placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with
potable water.
1. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches with a minimum depth of 1 inch and
not exceeding a depth of 4 inches. Maintain 2 inches of clearance from top of
base flashing.
2. Flood each area for 48 hours.
3. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until
roofing and flashing installations are watertight.
C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to
inspect roofing installation on completion.
D. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate
that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to

determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements.
3.12 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with
copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free
of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to
warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.13 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY
A. WHEREAS _______________________________ of ___________________________, herein called

the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the
following project:
1. Owner: <Insert name of Owner>.

2. Address: <Insert address>.
3. Building Name/Type: <Insert information>.
4. Address: <Insert address>.
5. Area of Work: <Insert information>.
6. Acceptance Date: _________________.
7. Warranty Period: <Insert time>.
8. Expiration Date: __________________.
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as
a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials
and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions
herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make
or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to
correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a
watertight condition.
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of
the building, and to building contents, caused by:
a. lightning;
b. peak gust wind speed exceeding <Insert mph>;
c. fire;
d. failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;
e. faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the
work;

f. vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and

g. activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors,
maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or
unauthorized by Owner.
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null
and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost
and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party
so designated.
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is
not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting
from leaks or faults or defects of work.
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the
extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages
Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and
void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in
writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely
damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or
termination of this Warranty.
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for,
but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled
surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally
specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but
only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty.
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected
leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing
Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or
deterioration.
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said
work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and
resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this
Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for
performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract
Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or
a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this ___________ day of
___________________, ________________.
1. Authorized Signature: _______________________________________.

2. Name: ______________________________________.
3. Title: _______________________________________.


SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Manufactured reglets with counterflashing.

2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed equipment support flashing.
1. Section 061053 "miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and
blocking.
2. Section 077200 "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of
penetrations to be flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.
B. Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall
materials, joints, and seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1. Review construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof-penetration flashing, equipment
curbs, and condition of other construction that affect sheet metal flashing and
trim.
3. Review requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.
4. Review sheet metal flashing observation and repair procedures after flashing
installation.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and
accessory.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1

B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.

2. Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed
details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.
3. Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and
location in Project.
4. Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.
5. Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing
of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.
6. Include details of termination points and assemblies.
7. Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing
direction of expansion and contraction from fixed points.
8. Include details of roof-penetration flashing.
9. Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets,
and counterflashings as applicable.
10. Include details of special conditions.
11. Include details of connections to adjoining work.
12. Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with
factory-applied finishes.
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish.
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished
seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other
attachments.
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous
Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other
exposed accessories.
3. Unit-Type Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.
4. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each
color required.
A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1
tested and FM/Zurich Approvals approved.
C. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing
agency.
D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing and trim, and its accessories, to include in
maintenance manuals.

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge flashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested andFM Approvals
approved, shop shall be listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and
approved.
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to

demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and
installation.
1. Build mockup of typical roof edge, including fasciafascia trim apron flashing,
approximately 10 feet long, including supporting construction cleats, seams,
attachments, underlayment, and accessories.
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that
might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and
trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to
sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing
and trim installation.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.
Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall
remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions
and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings roof edge flashings that are listed
in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-120.
Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals.
D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings roof edge flashings tested
according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 , alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required; with
smooth, flat surface.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. FEVE Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Two-coat fluoropolymer finish

containing 100 percent fluorinated ethylene vinyl ether resin in color coat.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. Use at copings,
fascia and soffits in color to match Composite Metal Panel material
2. Color: Match Architect's sample.

3. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored
acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with
minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 , dead soft, fully annealed;
with smooth, flat surface.
1. Finish: 2D (dull, cold rolled) .
D. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304,

dead-soft, fully annealed, stainless-steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness
indicated; coated on both sides with zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with
factory-applied gray preweathering.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a

slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of
butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically
designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer
according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc; CCW WIP 300HT.

b. Carlisle Residential; a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; WIP 300HT.
c. Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn.; Grace Ice and
Water Shield HT/Grace Vycor Butyl Self-Adhered Flashing/Grace Vycor Plus
Self-Adhered FlashingGrace Vycor V40 Self-Adhered Flashing/Ultra.
d. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.
e. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or
lower.
B. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft.minimum.
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants,
and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim
installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or
manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps
or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing
washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of
metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for
metal being fastened.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.

3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.

4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or
hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
C. Solder:
1. For : ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead.
2. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by
stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.
3. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin, with maximum
lead content of 0.2 percent, as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer.
4. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant

tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane silicone polymer sealant; of

type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing
and trim and remain watertight.
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;

polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
2.5 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Through-Wall, Ribbed, Sheet Metal Flashing: Manufacture through-wall sheet metal

flashing for embedment in masonry, with ribs at 3-inch intervals along length of flashing
to provide integral mortar bond. Manufacture through-wall flashing with interlocking
counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as flashing.
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:
1) Cheney Flashing Company; .

2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc; STF Sawtooth Flashing.
B. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking
counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

a. Fry Reglet Corporation.

b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
d. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch thick.

4. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant
at top edge.
5. Stucco Type: Provide with upturned fastening flange and extension leg of length
to match thickness of applied finish materials.
6. Concrete Type: Provide temporary closure tape to keep reglet free of concrete
materials, special fasteners for attaching reglet to concrete forms, and guides to
ensure alignment of reglet section ends.
7. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar
joint.
8. Accessories:
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to

secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of
standard metal counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without
metal counterflashing.
b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing's lower edge.
9. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown
and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet
metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply
with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each
application and metal.
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on
Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching
profiles.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of
installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal
Roofing."
D. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
standard.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet

metal standard and by FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for
application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form
seams, and solder.
I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for
intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
J. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and
seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
K. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
2.7 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet
tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and flat-stock gutter spacers and straps fabricated from
same metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with
thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness . Fabricate expansion joints,
expansion-joint covers, gutter bead reinforcing bars, and gutter accessories from same
metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Gutter Profile: Style A according to cited sheet metal standard.

2. Gutters with Girth up to 15 Inches: Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with

mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and
anchors .
1. Manufactured Hanger Style: Fig 1-34A according to SMACNA's "Architectural

Sheet Metal Manual."
2. Fabricate from the following materials:
C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to
exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant
or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of
scupper.Fabricate from the following materials:
D. Splash Pans: Fabricate to dimensions and shape required and from the following
materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.

2.8 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long,
but not exceeding 12-foot- long sections. Furnish with 6-inch- wide, joint cover
plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed backup
plate.
2. Fabricate with scuppers spaced 10 feet apart, to dimensions required with 4-inch-
wide flanges and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field
of roof. Fasten gravel guard angles to base of scupper.
3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to
support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter
corners, solder or weld watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1. Coping Profile: Fig 3-4A As indicated according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual."
2. Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed backup
plate.
3. Fabricate from the Following Materials:

b. Stainless Steel: 0.025 inch thick.
C. Roof and Roof-to-Wall Transition Roof-to-Roof Edge-Flashing (Gravel-Stop) Transition

Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials: Shop fabricate interior
and exterior corners.

D. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
materials:
E. Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the
following materials:
F. Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
G. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
H. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

2.9 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not
exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall
openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings
to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high,
end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and
securely anchored.
3. Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or
backing substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.

Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with
end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side
edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment
within 14 days.
B. Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, over underlayment before installing sheet metal flashing
and trim.

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use
fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous
items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform,
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
6. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal
standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal

flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood,
ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or
intersection.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate
to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for
a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction.
1. Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint
members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal
sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70
deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install
sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants."

G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
edges of sheets with solder to width of 1-1/2 inches; however, reduce pre-tinning where
pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel and aluminum sheet.

2. Do not pre-tin zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel and zinc-tin alloy-coated
copper.
3. Do not use torches for soldering.
4. Heat surfaces to receive solder, and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely.
Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
5. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets, using solder for stainless
steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and
soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for
cleaning and neutralization.
H. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.4 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage

system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints. Provide for thermal
expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide
end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.

2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous eave or apron
flashing.
3. Anchor gutter with straps spaced not more than 24 inches apart to roof deck,
unless otherwise indicated, and loosely lock to front gutter bead.
4. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50
feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints.
1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls.

Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building.
3. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system.
D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in elastomeric
sealant compatible with the substrate.
E. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal
flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing
membrane.
1. Anchor scupper closure trim flange to exterior wall and solder or seal with
elastomeric sealant to scupper.
F. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration

indicated. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.

3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance
requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet
metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line,
levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently
watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at
staggered 3-inch centers.
C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM
Approvals' listing for required windstorm classification.
D. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in

cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to

substrate at 24-inch centers.
2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted
holes at 24-inch centers.
E. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in

FM Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified FM Approvals' listing for
required windstorm classification.
F. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with
top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
G. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base

flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum
of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind
rivets and sealant unless otherwise indicated.
H. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with

installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and
clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as
windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Section 044200

"Exterior Stone Cladding."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with

installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to
equipment support member.
3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and
within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed
tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C. Clean off excess sealants.
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and
trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of sheet metal flashing and trim installation, remove unused
materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal flashing and trim
manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean condition during
construction.
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have
deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Immersible joint sealants.
4. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
5. Latex joint sealants.
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured
sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide
Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long
strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint
sealants.
A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.
B. Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified
testing agency.
C. Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the

following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and
substrate preparation are needed for adhesion.
D. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint

preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing
specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

E. Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by

manufacturer.
B. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the

testing indicated.
C. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation
methods specified in this Section.
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing

indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
1. Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other
specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum
adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
2. Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in
contact with glazing and gasket materials.
3. Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in
contact with stone substrates.
4. Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material,
including joint substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.
5. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the
Work.
6. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for
corrective measures, including use of specially formulated primers.
7. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are
based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for
adhesion to, staining of, and compatibility with joint substrates and other materials
matching those submitted.
B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion
to Project joint substrates as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect.
2. Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be
erected.
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical
representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied

Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A,
Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to
opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively.

Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint
substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is
obtained.
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance
with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to
adhere to joint substrates during testing.
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted
by joint-sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been
removed from joint substrates.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair

or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants
from the following:
1. Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant

manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
2. Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.
3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field
experience.
B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.
2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to

ASTM C 1248.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50

percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing
silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.

b. Pecora Corporation; .
c. Tremco Incorporated; .
C. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag,

plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use,
neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T
and NT.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and
minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
a. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic.
2.4 IMMERSIBLE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Immersible Joint Sealants. Suitable for immersion in liquids; ASTM C 1247, Class 1; tested
in deionized water unless otherwise indicated

B. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 100/50, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag,

plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use,
urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50,
Uses NT, and I.
a. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921.
C. Urethane, Immersible, S, NS, 50, T, NT, I: Immersible, single-component, nonsag,

plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and
nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 50, Uses T, NT, and I.
a. Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic 100.
2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with

fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.
B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component,
nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use,
acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White.

b. May National Associates, Inc., a subsidiary of Sika Corporation U.S.;
Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.
2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.
a. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates,

sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems.

b. Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to
producing optimum sealant performance.
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant

manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials
or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for

adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of

sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable
of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and
formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions
affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion
of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant
manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading,
or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable
of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles
remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:
a. Concrete.
b. Masonry.
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a. Metal.
b. Glass.
c. Porcelain enamel.
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer

or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply
primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to
areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer
with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by
such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for

products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of
joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application, and replace them with dry materials.
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs
below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that
do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Dry tool unless otherwise noted.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise
indicated.
4. Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to
Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on
Drawings according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant
and joint substrate.
b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per
each floor per elevation.
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant

Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in
ASTM C 1521.
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate

separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.
Repeat procedure for opposite side.
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.

b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
requirements.
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere
to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to
test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to
determine if adhesion complies with sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion
hand-pull test criteria.
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations,
whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant
material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same
procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are
clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from

testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered
satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to
comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants
comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint
sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair
damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas
are indistinguishable from original work.

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to

NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,
anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for
installation.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal
thicknesses.
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal
thicknesses.
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
7. Details of accessories.
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.
9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of not less than 3
by 5 inches.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

2. For "Doors" and "Frames" subparagraphs below, prepare Samples approximately

12 by 12 inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of
materials and construction:
a. Doors: Show vertical-edge, top, and bottom construction; core

construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement.
Include separate section showing glazing if applicable.
b. Frames: Show profile, corner joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers.
Include separate section showing fixed hollow-metal panels and glazing if
applicable.
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during

transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack
welded to jambs and mullions.
C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on
minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each
stacked door to permit air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.

2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single
manufacturer.
2.2 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door
and Frame Schedule.
1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, with
minimum A40 coating.

d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.

e. Core: Mineral board.
3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with

minimum A40 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.3 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size,

not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of
scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
B. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A
1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A
153M, Class B.
C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application

indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according
to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers,
sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately
form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where
practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at
Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before
shipment.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Steel-Stiffened Door Cores: Provide minimum thickness 0.026 inch, steel vertical
stiffeners of same material as face sheets extending full-door height, with vertical
webs spaced not more than 6 inches apart. Spot weld to face sheets no more
than 5 inches o.c. Fill spaces between stiffeners with glass- or mineral-fiber
insulation.
2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Provide beveled or square edges at
manufacturer's discretion.
3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material
as face sheets.
4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for
attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material
as face sheets.
5. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
6. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where
required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend
minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as
required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.
C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or

handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of
same thickness metal as frames.
1. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to
jambs by butt welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
4. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match
coursing, and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.

2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each
24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
6. Terminated Stops: Terminate stops 2 inchesabove finish floor with a 90-degree

angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in
extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and
flush with frame.
D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated

mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping
according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and

surface-mounted door hardware.
2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for
preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.
2.6 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer

complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;
compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
the Work.
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before
frame installation.
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by

grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and
surface-mounted door hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened
in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed
lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or
NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint
continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on
exposed faces.
c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have
been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with
grout containing antifreezing agents.
2. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout.
3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90

degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances

specified below. Shim as necessary.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32
inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
c. At Bottom of Door: [3/4 inch] [5/8 inch] plus or minus 1/32 inch.
d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and
replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or
otherwise unacceptable.
B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after
installation.
C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged

areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are
specified in painting Sections.

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces, located typically in FEC and areas not
exposed to Water Park humidity environment
2. Shop priming Factory finishing flush wood doors.
1. Section 064216 "Flush Wood Paneling" for requirements for veneers from the same
flitches for both flush wood doors and flush wood paneling.
2. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for field finishing
doors.
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction
and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.

2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Undercuts.
5. Requirements for veneer matching.
6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10

inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent
finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be
expected in finished Work.
2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and
edges representing actual materials to be used.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

a. Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
b. Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate
required.
c. Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for
factory-finished doors.
A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in

AWI's Quality Certification Program.
B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an

FSC-accredited certification body.
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written

instructions.
B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic
sheeting.
C. Mark each door ontop and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels
during remainder of construction period.
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating
and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between
25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a
3-inch span.
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to
repair or replacement of defective doors.
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Five years from date of Substantial
Completion.
4. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

5. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: Two year(s) from date of
Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

2. Eggers Industries.
3. Marlite.
4. VT Industries, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors indicated to be blueprint matched with
paneling from single manufacturer.
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's,

and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with
requirements of grades specified.
2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard
and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with
those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.
B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at
positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide

doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than
450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.
2. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide
fire-protection rating indicated.
3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed
by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
4. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications
indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with
concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed
edges.
5. Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.
a. Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamelsame color as doors.
b. Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit
devices).
C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.

b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

D. Mineral-Core Doors:
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of

referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection
rating indicated.
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability
approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated asneeded to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
a. 5-inch top-rail blocking.

b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.
c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.
d. 5-inchmidrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.
3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with

improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified
requirements for exposed edges.
a. Screw-Holding Capability: 550 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.
2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :
1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).

2. Species: See finish legend for veneer species.
3. Cut: See finish legend for veneer species.
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match.
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same openingor separated only by
mullions.
7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.
Corridor-door faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or
more.
8. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each
separate room or area of building.
9. Transom Match: As indicated.
10. Blueprint Match: Where indicated, provide doors with faces produced from same
flitches as adjacent wood paneling and arranged to provide blueprint match with
wood paneling. Comply with requirements in Section 064216 "Flush Wood
Paneling."
11. Exposed Verticaland Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species -
edge Type A.
12. Core: Structural composite lumber.
13. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire
unit is abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot
press.
14. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to
comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop
Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware
for pairs of fire-rated doors.
B. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed
surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms
and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles.
1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber, rabbeted,

meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into
jambs of metal door frames.
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply
with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime faces and all four edges with stain (if required),
other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Section 099300
"Staining and Transparent Finishing." Seal edges of cutouts and mortises with first coat of
finish.
2.6 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may
be omitted ontop and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors.
C. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
D. Factory finish doors where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished.
E. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" System 9, UV
curable, acrylated epoxy, polyester, or urethane.
3. Staining: Match Architect's sample.
4. Effect: Filled finish.
5. Sheen: Semigloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size,
location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and
plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions

and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges
of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide1/4
inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

b. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.
2. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to
extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required

at Project site.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with
requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements
and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

SECTION 088300 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:
1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.

2. Mirrored plastic domes
1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and
spandrel lites.
2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.
1. Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type
of silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating
components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.
B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and
attachment details.
C. Samples: For each type of the following:
1. Mirrors: 12 inches square, including edge treatment on two adjoining edges.

2. Mirror Trim: 12 inches long.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic.
A. Maintenance Data: For mirrors to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project
who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
MIRRORS 088300 - 1
1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing.
1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of mirror
mastic products and mirror backing matching those submitted.
A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to

prevent damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling
mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion
of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that deteriorate within

specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as defects developed from
normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining and cleaning
mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration,
black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:
1. Binswanger Glass.
2. Guardian Industries Corp.
3. National Glass Industries.
4. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions.
B. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.
C. Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single
source.
2.2 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS
A. Mirrors, General: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating
process.
MIRRORS 088300 - 2
B. Safety Glazing Products: For mirrors, provide products that comply with 16 CFR 1201,
Category II.
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus
or minus 5.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror
manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for

setting mirrors and certified by both mirror and mastic manufacturer as compatible with
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.

a. Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.

b. Liquid Nails Adhesive.
2.4 MIRROR HARDWARE
A. Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to produce a

glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths required
to cover edges of mirrors in a single piece.
1. Bottom and Side Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than
3/8 and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products

by one of the following:
1) Andscot Company, Inc.

2) Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.
3) Stylmark, Inc.
2. Finish: Clear bright anodized.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate mirrors in the shop to greatest extent possible.
B. Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces.
Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Rounded high-polished.
1. Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical
or atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
MIRRORS 088300 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions
B. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of existing

finishes or primers with mirror mastic.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of

substrates, including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating
where applicable.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that
avoids distorting reflected images.
1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual," "Glazing Manual" and

"Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on the Care and
Handling of Mirrors."
B. Provide a minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface
for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C. Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware securely to
mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as
applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
1. Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches long at
quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two
slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.
2. Install mastic as follows:
a. Apply barrier coat to mirror backing where approved in writing by

manufacturers of mirrors and backing material.
b. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for
coverage and to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of
mounting surface.
c. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a
minimum airspace of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting
surface.
MIRRORS 088300 - 4
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
C. Maintain environmental conditions that prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture
from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D. Clean exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Clean mirrors as
recommended in writing by mirror manufacturer.
MIRRORS 088300 - 5
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: For Areas not in Water Park Humidity areas.
1. Interior gypsum board.

2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1. Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies" for metal shaft-wall
framing, gypsum shaft liners, and other components of shaft-wall assemblies.
2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
3. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates
for ceramic tile.
B. Samples: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated
and on same backing indicated for Work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of trim accessory indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory
indicated.
2. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated
and on same backing indicated for Work.
A. Mockups: Build mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Build mockups for the following:
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.
b. Each texture finish indicated.
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings,

on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of
damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.
B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and
conditioned.
C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials

and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction

identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
C. Ceiling and wall materials shall comply with the requirements of the California
Chambers."
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area
and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.
c. National Gypsum Company.
d. Temple-Inland Building Products by Georgia-Pacific.
e. USG.

4. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
B. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Use at FEC only

e. USG.

4. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board, tested

according to ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.

e. USG.
3. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type 5/8 inch, Type X.

4. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements.
5. Indentation: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements.
6. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements.
7. Hard-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 2 requirements
according to test in Annex A1.
9. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and

mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. For use in high humidity areas.

a. Georgia-Pacific Building Products.

b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG.
3. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.

2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat
laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.

e. United States Gypsum Company.
3. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with
manufacturer's standard edges.

b. Custom Building Products.
c. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.
d. National Gypsum Company.
e. United States Gypsum Company.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
e. Expansion (control) joint.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

a. Fry Reglet Corporation.

b. Pittcon Industries.
3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability
properties of ASTM B 221 , Alloy 6063-T5.
4. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish
materials specified.
2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim

accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product
designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to
produce Level 5 finish.
6. Finish for cast-in-place concrete ceilings: high-build interior coating product
designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to
produce seamless finish.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)

produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of

assembly.
D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex

sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

a. Grabber Construction Products.

b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Pecora Corporation.
d. United States Gypsum Company.
3. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Chambers."
E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."
F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072600 "Vapor Retarders."

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support
framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to
avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of
adjacent panels not less than one framing member.
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and
ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into
place.
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where
intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do
not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite
sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed
openings.
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum
panels.
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above
ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in
area.
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of
floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural
members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural

abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is
attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension
lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or
provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.
J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at

openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install
acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations.
Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge
trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing
partitions above acoustical ceilings.
K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1. Wallboard Type: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

2. Type X: Where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
4. Impact-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Single-Layer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to

greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize
end joints.
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate
courses of panels.
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing)

with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
C. Multilayer Application:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base
layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers
at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing
member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with
base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated
assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and
face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to
framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints
of base layer over furring members.
4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with
screws.
D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a

substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board),
comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or
fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
E. Curved Surfaces:
1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent

possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of
curves and tangent to them.
2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c.
Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with
screws spaced 12 inches o.c.
3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over
supports.
1. Install with 1/4-inch open space where panels abut other construction or structural
penetrations.
2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at water park environment tile installation
areas, and where indicated.
B. Water-Resistant Backing Board: Install where indicated with 1/4-inch gap where panels
abut other construction or penetrations. Seal gap with sealant compatible with
waterproof membrane. Lap membrane over sealant.
C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to
produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.
4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from
adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically
indicated as not intended to receive tape.
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
5. Level 5: High profile public spaces that are to be finished with paint, and that
have a critical lighting condition .
E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written

instructions for use as exposed soffit board.
F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and
other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged
during drywall application.
B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited
to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Quarry tile.
2. Crack isolation membrane.
3. Metal edge strips.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in
ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C,
ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10,
ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and
ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other
trades.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details,
and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and
finished tile surfaces.
C. Samples for Verification:
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish
required.
CERAMIC TILING 093013 - 1

2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type
and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at
least 12 inches square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color
or colors approved for completed Work.
3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each
type, composition, and color indicated.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or similarly

certified .
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and
labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile
packages.
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry
location.
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained
and contamination can be avoided.
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from single source or producer.
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous
area.
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform
quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and
each aggregate from single source or producer.
1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement
and aggregate, from single manufacturer.
2. Obtain crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer
of setting and grouting materials.
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in
this Section from a single manufacturer:
1. Crack isolation membrane.

2. Metal edge strips.
2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise

indicated.
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards
referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and
other requirements specified.
C. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as

standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1. Where tile is indicated for installation on exteriors or in wet areas, do not use back-
or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that
this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of
successful in-service performance.
2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Tile Type : Unglazed square-edged quarry tile.


a. American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation.

b. Daltile.
c. Endicott Tile LLC.
d. Quarry Tile Co.
3. Face Size: 6 by 6 inches .

4. Thickness: 1/2 inch .
5. Wearing Surface: Nonabrasive, smooth.
6. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
7. Finish: Mat, clear glaze to match existing.
8. Tile Color and Pattern: Match Architect's sample: Match existing tile .
9. Grout Color: Match Architect's sample: match existing.
10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as
follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base: Coved with surface bullnose top edge, face size 6 by 6 inches .
2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies
with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for
the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by
manufacturer.
B. Fabric-Reinforced, Modified-Bituminous Sheet: Self-adhering, modified-bituminous sheet

with fabric reinforcement facing; 0.040-inch nominal thickness. Provide product
designed to relocate substrate cracks/saw cuts in slab.
a. Custom Building Products; Crack Buster Pro-Crack Prevention Mat

Underlayment.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Improved Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.15.

a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.

c. Laticrete International, Inc.
d. MAPEI Corporation.
3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin

orstyrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site.
4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for
nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.15.
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.


a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.

c. Laticrete International, Inc.
d. MAPEI Corporation.
3. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to

temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by
manufacturer for intended use.
A. Vapor-Retarder Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils thick.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness,
metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for
flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following:
a. Schluter Systems L.P.
C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile
and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile
and grout manufacturers.
D. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
a. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer.
2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum
performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply
with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been
mechanically scarified.
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding
or grinding.
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and

mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been
completed.
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint
locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by
tile-setting material manufacturer. Assume that leveling compound will be needed at
areas of tile installation.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced

mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward
drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those
taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended,
either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the
ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in
TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of
setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Exterior tile floors.

b. Tile floors in wet areas.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile
edges.
E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles
are flush.
F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and
center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work
to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints
within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be
same size, align joints.
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining
tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch .
H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation
of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly
above them. Utilize crack Isolation membrane to relocate control/soft joints to
nearest grout line. When concrete floor has been patched, utilize crack isolation
membrane to bridge repairs.
J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or
other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.
K. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's
written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely
to substrate. Utilize membrane to relocate saw cuts and cracks in slab.
B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.
A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide
new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of
replacement.
B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so
they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's
written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that
cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be
cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning.
Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction
period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer,
apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner
from tile surfaces.
3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA F125-Full TCNA F125-Full, except where partial
coverage is indicated; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane.
a. Ceramic Tile Type: Quarry tile.

b. Thinset Mortar: Improved modified dry-setmortar.
c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Steel and iron.
3. Galvanized metal.
4. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
1. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.

2. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop priming painting pipe and tube
railings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
2. Indicate VOC content.
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish
selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for
application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups

of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Glidden Professional.
3. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
5. As indicated in Finish Legend .
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Exterior
Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in
its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: Match Architect's samples As indicated in a color schedule.
1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when
samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,
samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and
certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint
surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove
rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Wood: 15 percent.
3. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable
and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and

chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted
exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using
methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 2.
2. SSPC-SP 3.
3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4.
4. SSPC-SP 11.
F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where
shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet
metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote
adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.
I. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer
recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system
indicated.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in

"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before
final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat
only.
3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior
door frames.
4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes.
5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to
facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be
applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each
separate coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic

Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:
a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear.

b. Uninsulated metal piping.
c. Uninsulated plastic piping.
d. Pipe hangers and supports.
e. Metal conduit.
f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage
to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Note that most exterior surfaces are painted/finished integrally with the system. It is
assumed that EIFS, Metal Panel, glazed systems, and others do not require "painting" per
this schedule, but are integral to the system as specified.
B. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System MPI EXT 3.1C:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.

c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss

Level 3), MPI #161.
C. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces: Use where concrete does not receive concrete
topping treatment.
1. Clear Sealer System MPI EXT 3.2G:
a. Prime Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat.

b. Intermediate Coat: Sealer, solvent based, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Sealer, solvent based, for concrete floors, MPI #104.
D. Steel and Iron Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating over Epoxy System MPI EXT 5.1R: Use at
exterior stair rails
a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive MPI #101.

b. Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high build, low gloss MPI #108.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss
Level 3), MPI #161.
d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss
(MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #163.
2. Alkyd System MPI EXT 5.1D: Use at miscellaneous metals and structural steel.
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive, for metal, MPI #79.

b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified.
c. Prime Coat: Primer, metal, surface tolerant, MPI #23.
d. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat.
e. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #8.
f. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.
g. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #9.
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System : Use at galvanized
a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive, MPI #101.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5), MPI #163.
F. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Alkyd System MPI EXT 5.4F:
a. Pretreatment Prime Coat: Vinyl wash primer, MPI #80.

b. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.
c. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.
G. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
1. Alkyd System MPI EXT 6.2C:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood, MPI #5.

b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, satin (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #8.
H. Wood Substrates: Wood trim Wood board siding andslats. Use at exterior bath
1. Alkyd System MPI EXT 6.3B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood, MPI #5.

c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, satin (MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #8.
I. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Alkyd System MPI EXT 9.2B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood (reduced), MPI #6.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, satin(MPI Gloss Level 3), MPI #8.

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior
substrates including the following:
1. Concrete.
2. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
3. Steel and iron.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Wood.
6. Gypsum board.
1. for shop priming structural steel.

2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications.
3. Section 055113 "Metal Pan Stairs" for shop priming metal pan stairs.
4. Section 055116 "Metal Floor Plate Stairs" for shop priming metal floor plate stairs.
5. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop priming pipe and tube railings.
6. for shop priming metal gratings.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,

D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,
E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
2. Indicate VOC content.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of
topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.

2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system.
D. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use
same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.
E. Mock Up: When paint colors have been approved, produce a mock up 10' x 10' of
paints on the actual substrate to which they will be applied. Only those paints that have
substantial use need to be mocked up. Example: PT01 on Concrete and CMU.
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less
than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

the following:


1. Benjamin Moore & Co.

2. Glidden Professional.
3. Pratt & Lambert.
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in the Interior
Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in
its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints
and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and
the following VOC content limits:
1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L.
D. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.
1. Ten percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint
materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when
samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site,
samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and
certified by testing agency.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials
being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove
noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint
surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove
rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with
complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture

meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing
E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable
and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and
painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or

apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using
methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:
1. SSPC-SP 2.

2. SSPC-SP 3.
3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4.
4. SSPC-SP 11.
F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where
shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
G. Wood Substrates:
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations

in "MPI Manual."
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory
primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple
coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat,
but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate
coat.
C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic

Safety and Security Work:
1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.

e. Metal conduit.
f. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.
g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a. Equipment, including panelboards.

e. Metal conduit.
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation
covering or other paintable jacket material.
g. Other items as directed by Architect.
3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.
1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing.

2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with
paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing
and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies
with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished
surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage
to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

or defaced painted surfaces.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: Typically PT-1 unless noted otherwise.
1. In Water park environment, where a Vapor Retardant Paint is called out as part of
finish system on Concrete or CMU, use Glidden Vapor Barrier Interior Primer Sealer
1060-1200 as prime coat (0.6 perms), or a similar product with perm rating less
than 1. These are typically between water park and FEC, between water park and
Mechanical room, and at interior surfaces of exterior walls.
2. At all other concrete or CMU surfaces in the water park environment, except
exposed tops of slabs scheduled to be covered with concrete topping, use
product indicated in 071900 Water Repellents to seal surfaces prior to painting.
3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 3.1C:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3. See notes 1 and 2
above.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss
Level 3), MPI #139.
B. CMU Substrates: See 3.6/A/1 and 2 above. PT-01 unless noted otherwise.
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 4.2P:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4. Use where CMU is not
parged.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based, MPI #3.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss
Level 3), MPI #139.
C. Steel Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System over Epoxy Primer System

MPI INT 5.1N:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive MPI #101.

b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based (MPI Gloss
Level 3), MPI #151.
2. Alkyd over Shop-Applied Quick-Drying Shop Primer System MPI INT 5.1W:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for shop application, MPI #275.
b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #49 at steel in
connector.
d. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #47 at structural
steel in waterpark.
D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.3M:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.

matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #139.
E. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.4F:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95.

matching topcoat.


Level 3), MPI #139.
F. Wood Substrates: Glued-laminated construction.
1. Stain and clear coat to match shop-applied finish by Glued-laminated Wood

provider.
G. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
1. Stain and clear coat to match shop-applied finish by Glued-laminated Wood

provider for wood substrates such as wood decking and framing associated with
building structure, and Cabana framing.
2. Where indicated to be painted:
3. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.2B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

matching topcoat.
Level 4), MPI #140.
H. Wood Substrates: Wood trim, Architectural woodwork to be painted, Doors, and wood
board paneling.
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.3A:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.

matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss
(MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141 or as noted in finish legend.
I. Fiberglass Substrates: Doors and Frames except where provided with factory applied
finish coating.
1. Alkyd System MPI INT 6.7B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based, MPI #17.

b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Alkyd, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6), MPI #48.
J. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 9.2B:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.

matching topcoat.
Level 3), MPI #139, unless noted otherwise on Finish Legend.
K. Acoustic Panels: For Tectum panels in ceiling and exposed concrete structure in
restaurant.
1. Water-based Dry fall system compatible with Tectum and Concrete

[MPI INT 5.3H]:

a. Prime Coat: dry fall water based matching topcoat.

b. Topcoat: dry fall water based, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1)[, MPI #133].

SECTION 099653 - ELASTOMERIC COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to the

following exterior substrates:
1. Concrete unit masonry.
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of elastomeric coating indicated. Color
typically to match EIFS finishes
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of elastomeric coating indicated and in each
color and gloss.
1. Submit Samples on same type of substrate as that to receive application, 8 inches

square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each separate coat, including primers and block
fillers as applicable.
D. Product List: For each product indicated, including the following:
1. Cross-reference to coating system and locations of application areas. Use same

designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
2. Manufacturer's recommended spreading rate for each separate coat, including
primers and block fillers for each type of substrate as applicable.
3. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category
specified in Part 2 that specifies coatings approved by MPI, with the proposed
product highlighted.
A. Furnish extra materials that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials
applied and that are packaged for storage in unopened, factory-sealed containers and
identified with labels describing contents.
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent but not less than 2 gal. of each material,
color, and texture applied.
ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099653 - 1

A. MPI Standards: Comply with MPI standards indicated and provide elastomeric coatings
listed in the "MPI Approved Products List."
1. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in the "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and coating systems
indicated.
B. Mockups: Prepare two mockups of each coating system indicated and each color and
finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to
1. Architect will select two wall surfaces of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfaces
and conditions for application of each type and texture of elastomeric coating.
2. Final approval of color and texture selections will be based on mockups.
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, prepare additional

mockups of additional color and textures selected by Architect at no
added cost to Owner.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and ambient air
temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F unless otherwise permitted by
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85
percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet
surfaces.
C. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified
before starting or continuing coating operation.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair

or replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period.
a. Water penetration through the coating.

b. Deterioration of coating beyond normal weathering.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide elastomeric finish coatings and crack fillers, primers, and block fillers as
applicable for use within elastomeric finish coatings that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
2. For each material or coat, provide products and spreading rates recommended
in writing by elastomeric coating manufacturer for use on substrate indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC FINISH COATINGS
A. Exterior Flat Waterborne, Pigmented Elastomeric Coating: MPI #113.
a. Neogard, a division of Jones-Blair Company; Neoflex.

b. Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Sherlastic Elastomeric Coating.
c. Sto Corp.; Stolastic.
d. Dow Corning: Allguard Silicone elastomeric Coating.
2. Surface Profile: Smooth texture.

3. VOC Content: 100 g/L or less.
4. Moisture-Vapor Transmission: Minimum .1 perms, based on testing according to
ASTM D 1653.
2.3 OTHER MATERIALS
A. Crack Fillers: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated

crack fillers or sealants, including crack filler primers, compatible with substrate and other
materials indicated; VOC content complying with limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Primer: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended, factory-formulated,

alkali-resistant primer compatible with substrate and other materials indicated.
1. VOC Content: 450 g/L or less .
C. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Elastomeric coating manufacturer's recommended,

factory-formulated, high-performance latex block filler compatible with substrate and
other materials indicated.
1. VOC Content: 200 g/L or less.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
manufacturer's requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity, and other
conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Begin coating only when moisture content of substrate is 12 percent or less when
measured with an electronic moisture meter.
C. Begin coating no sooner than 28 days after substrate is constructed and is visually dry on
both sides.
D. Verify that substrate is within the range of alkalinity recommended by manufacturer.
E. Verify suitability of substrates including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
F. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in the "MPI

Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and coating
systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, light fixtures,
and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or
impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Do not coat surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as

required to produce coating systems indicated.
2. Perform cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from
cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
D. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating
surfaces.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use equipment and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material
being applied.
2. Coat surfaces behind movable items the same as similar exposed surfaces.
3. Apply each coat separately according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Primers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage.
C. Block Fillers: Apply at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled.

D. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple
coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats similar to color of topcoat,
but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate
coat.
E. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until
cured film has a uniform finish, color, and appearance.
F. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in
sharp lines and color breaks.
G. Apply coatings to prepared surfaces as soon as practicable after preparation and

before subsequent surface soiling or deterioration.
H. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by
authorities having jurisdiction. Wherever spray application is used, do not double back
with spray equipment to build up film thickness of two coats in one pass.
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following testing
procedures:
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample materials
being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified,
sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of materials with product
requirements.
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show
materials being used do not comply with requirements. Remove noncomplying
materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces that were coated
with rejected materials. Remove rejected materials from previously coated
surfaces if, on recoating with complying materials, the two coatings are
incompatible.
B. Field Testing and Inspection: Owner reserves the right to engage the services of a
qualified testing agency to verify installed thickness of elastomeric coatings.
B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered

coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent
finished surfaces.
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating application. Correct
damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as
approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
D. At completion of construction activities, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

coated surfaces.

3.6 COATING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Unit Masonry Substrates:
1. Primer: Concrete unit masonry primer if required by manufacturer.

2. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler if required by manufacturer.
3. Elastomeric Finish Coat(s): Minimum two coats with a total dry film thickness of 16
to 18 mils.
4. Finish-Coat Color: Match Architect's samples.

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Public-use washroom accessories.

2. Public-use shower room accessories.
3. Childcare accessories.
4. Underlavatory guards.
5. Custodial accessories.
1. Section 088300 "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.

2. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for ceramic toilet and bath accessories.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to
prevent delaying the Work.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.
2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts
in other work and substrate preparation.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of
each accessory required.
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated.

2. Identify accessories using designations indicated.
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1

A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty.
A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace

mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, visible silver spoilage defects.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS
A. Owner-Furnished Materials: Toilet paper, paper towels, etc.
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA
70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
2.3 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from
single manufacturer.
B. Toilet Paper Holder:

a. Kohler
3. Mounting: Partition mounted,

4. Toilet Tissue Dispenser Capacity: 4-1/2- or 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.
5. Toilet Tissue Dispenser Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft-resistant spindles.
6. Material and Finish: polished chrome.
C. Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:

a. Kohler/Bobrick

3. Description: separate units for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with

removable waste receptacle.
4. Mounting: Recessed.
a. Designed for nominal 6-inch wall depth.
5. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels.

6. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 12 gal..
7. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
8. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner.
9. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment and waste receptacle.
D. Liquid-Soap Dispenser :

a. Vanesta
3. Description: Designed for dispensing antibacterial soap in liquid or lotion form.

4. Mounting: As indicated.
5. Capacity: 8 oz..
6. Refill Indicator: Window type.
E. Grab Bar :

a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.

4. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a. Finish: As indicated.
5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches.

6. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Waste Disposal Unit :

a. Simple human.
3. Mounting: Recessed.
4. Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover and hinged face panel with
tumbler lockset.
5. Receptacle: Removable.

2.4 PUBLIC-USE SHOWER ROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use shower room accessories from single source from
single manufacturer.
B. Soap Dispenser :

product indicated on Drawings
a. Simple Human Triple wall mount pumps, Stainless Steel. SKU #BT1029.
2. Description: Without washcloth bar.

3. Mounting: Recessed .
C. Robe Hook :

product indicated on Drawings
a. Kohler
2. Material and Finish: Polished Chrome .
2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain childcare accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Diaper-Changing Station:

a. Koala Kare Products. KB110SSRE
3. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and
with child-protection strap.
a. Engineered to support minimum of 250-lb static load when opened.
4. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall
when closed.
5. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism.
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), with replaceable insulated
polystyrene tray liner and rounded plastic corners .
7. Liner Dispenser: Built in.
2.6 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard :


a. Lacava.
3. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that
prevents direct contact with and burns from piping; allow service access without
removing coverings.
4. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded plastic, white.
2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Source Limitations: Obtain custodial accessories from single source from single
manufacturer.
B. Utility Shelf :


b. Bradley Corporation.
3. Description: With exposed edges turned down not less than 1/2 inch and
supported by two triangular brackets welded to shelf underside.
4. Size: 16 inches long by 6 inches deep.
5. Material and Finish: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel, No. 4 finish
(satin).
C. Mop and Broom Holder :


b. Bradley Corporation.
c. GAMCO Specialty Accessories; a division of Bobrick.
3. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.
4. Length: 36 inches.
5. Hooks: Four.
6. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel.

b. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- diameter stainless steel.

2.8 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless
B. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after

fabrication.
C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and
tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
D. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang
doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed
anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners

appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or

defective items.
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Hyatt Aruba For Construction: 02/28/2019
Swimming Pool & Water Feature ADE Project No. 1805
TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SECTION 13 1100
PART 1 - GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 11

1.01 SUMMARY ................................................................................................................................... 11
A. SECTION INCLUDES: .................................................................................................................... 11
B. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO OVERVIEW ................................................................................... 11
C. RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY ARCHITECT/OWNER .................................................................. 11
1.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK & SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 13
A. COMMON FOR ALL ..................................................................................................................... 13
B. POOL INCLUDED ......................................................................................................................... 14
C. CHEMICAL AND POOL EQUIPMENT ROOMS .............................................................................. 14
1.03 DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 15
A. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO: ..................................................................................................... 15
B. CONTRACTOR: ............................................................................................................................ 15
C. CONCRETE:.................................................................................................................................. 15
D. CRITICAL: ..................................................................................................................................... 15
E. FURNISH:..................................................................................................................................... 15
F. INSTALL: ...................................................................................................................................... 15
G. INSTALLER: .................................................................................................................................. 15
H. MUST (or SHALL):........................................................................................................................ 16
I. POOL: .......................................................................................................................................... 16
J. PLASTIC PIPING: .......................................................................................................................... 16
K. PROVIDE:..................................................................................................................................... 16
L. SLIP-RESISTANT (NON-SLIP): ....................................................................................................... 16
M. WORKMANSHIP: ......................................................................................................................... 16
N. ADE: ............................................................................................................................................ 16
1.04 COORDINATION AND PERMITS ................................................................................................... 16
A. COORDINATION .......................................................................................................................... 16
B. PERMITS WITH RELATED INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................... 17
1.05 PROJECT MEETINGS .................................................................................................................... 17
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS.................................................................................................... 17
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 17
B. NONCOMPLIANCE ...................................................................................................................... 17
C. BUILDING CODES AND LEGISLATION ACTS ................................................................................. 18
D. REFERENCED STANDARDS .......................................................................................................... 18
1.07 MANUFACTURERS AND SUBSTITUTIONS .................................................................................... 23
A. PRE-REQUISITES FOR SUBSTITUTIONS........................................................................................ 23
B. SUBSTITUTIONS .......................................................................................................................... 24
1.08 SUBMITTALS ................................................................................................................................ 25
A. GENERAL: .................................................................................................................................... 25
B. SHOP DRAWINGS: ....................................................................................................................... 25
SWIMMING POOLS, WATER FEATURES, & TANKS 13 1100 - 1

C. PRODUCT DATA .......................................................................................................................... 27

D. COLORS / SAMPLES:.................................................................................................................... 29
E. BASIN ITEMS: .............................................................................................................................. 29
F. EQUIPMENT ROOM & SITE ITEMS: ............................................................................................. 31
G. MOCK-UPS ON-SITE: ................................................................................................................... 33
H. APPROVAL / INSPECTION / SCHEDULES DOCUMENTS ............................................................... 34
I. QUALIFICATION DOCUMENTS: ................................................................................................... 34
J. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O & M) DOCUMENTS ............................................................... 34
K. NOT USED ................................................................................................................................... 36
L. PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, PHOTO DOCUMENTATION, AND TEST RESULTS ................................. 36
M. CERTIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 37
N. REVIEW OF PROJECT DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................ 38
1.09 QUALITY CONTROL ...................................................................................................................... 39
A. PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................................. 39
B. SOILS QUALITY & CERTIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 39
C. PRE-INSTALLATION STRUCTURAL MEETING ............................................................................... 39
D. QUALIFIED PERSONNEL .............................................................................................................. 40
E. MATERIALS AND REGULATIONS ................................................................................................. 42
F. ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING OBSERVATIONS ....................................................................... 42
G. TESTING SERVICES ...................................................................................................................... 43
1.10 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES ......................................................................................................... 44
A. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND WATER ...................................................................................... 44
B. SITE WORK, TRENCHING, AND PLENUMS ................................................................................... 44
1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................... 44
A. PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................. 44
B. EQUIPMENT DUTY RATING ......................................................................................................... 44
C. CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ........................................................................... 44
D. PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION REQUIRED:............................................................................... 45
1.12 WARRANTIES & SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS ................................................................... 45
A. TWO-YEAR WARRANTY – EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS INSTALLATION:.................................. 45
B. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY:................................................................................................. 46
C. SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................. 47
D. EXTENDED CORRECTION PERIOD ............................................................................................... 47
1.13 ATTIC STOCK................................................................................................................................ 48
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 48
B. MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................. 48
C. SPARE PARTS............................................................................................................................... 48
D. SPECIAL TOOLS............................................................................................................................ 48
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .................................................................................................................................... 49
2.01 BASIC POOL BASIN CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS ........................................................................ 49
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 49
B. GEOTEXTILE NONWOVEN FILTER FABRIC ................................................................................... 49
C. VAPOR BARRIERS ........................................................................................................................ 50

D. CRUSHED ROCK / STONE ............................................................................................................ 50

E. STEEL REINFORCEMENT.............................................................................................................. 50
F. CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS (TROWEL-GRADE MORTAR & JOINT FILLERS) ............................... 51
G. SEALANTS .................................................................................................................................... 52
H. UNDERWATER SEALANTS ........................................................................................................... 53
I. LINK-SEALS, WATERSTOPS, & WATERPROOF PENETRATIONS ................................................... 53
J. JOINTS ......................................................................................................................................... 56
K. ADHESIVES & GROUTS ................................................................................................................ 57
L. CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING ............................................................................................. 59
M. ADMIXTURES .............................................................................................................................. 60
N. POLYPROPYLENE EXPANSION BOARD ........................................................................................ 62
O. BACKER ROD & TAPE .................................................................................................................. 62
P. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) INSULATION TYPE VI ................................................................ 63
2.02 SHOTCRETE WET-MIX PRODUCTS ............................................................................................... 63
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 64
B. MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................. 64
C. SHOTCRETE WET-MIX DESIGN .................................................................................................... 64
D. SHOTCRETE WET-MIX APPLICATION EQUIPMENT ..................................................................... 64
E. SHOTCRETE WET-MIX SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ................................................................... 64
2.03 CAST-IN-PLACE READY-MIX CONCRETE PRODUCTS .................................................................... 65
A. MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................. 65
B. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX ADMIXTURES ............................................................... 66
C. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX DESIGN ......................................................................... 67
D. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ........................................ 68
2.04 SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX (GUNITE) PRODUCTS ................................................................................ 68
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 68
B. MATERIALS.................................................................................................................................. 68
C. SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX DESIGN ..................................................................................................... 68
D. SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX APPLICATION EQUIPMENT ...................................................................... 69
E. SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .................................................................... 69
2.05 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................... 69
2.06 PIPING & FITTINGS ...................................................................................................................... 69
A. PIPE & FITTINGS MATERIAL TYPES.............................................................................................. 69
B. PIPING SCHEDULES / APPLICABILITY / USES ............................................................................... 70
C. FITTINGS ..................................................................................................................................... 74
D. FLANGES AND FLANGE HARDWARE ........................................................................................... 74
E. FEATURE MANIFOLDS & ASSEMBLIES ........................................................................................ 75
F. ASSEMBLIES, FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS, JOINTS, AND SPECIAL FITTINGS ..................................... 75
G. PIPING SIZE SCHEDULES.............................................................................................................. 76
H. PVC CEMENT & PRIMERS ............................................................................................................ 76
I. PIPE HANGERS, HARDWARE, AND SUPPORTS ............................................................................ 76
J. PIPE LABELING ............................................................................................................................ 77
2.07 FINISHES & COPING..................................................................................................................... 78

A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 78
B. TILES ............................................................................................................................................ 78
C. COPING ....................................................................................................................................... 79
D. INTERIOR QUARTZ-PLASTER FINISH............................................................................................ 79
E. DECKING ..................................................................................................................................... 79
F. GRATES – DECK AND TRENCH ..................................................................................................... 80
2.08 BASIN & SITE EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................................... 82
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 82
B. BASIN DRAINS, RELIEFS, SUMPS, & FLOOR EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES ....................................... 82
C. BEAM PERIMETER & WALL EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES ............................................................... 84
D. RAIL GOODS ................................................................................................................................ 86
E. CUP ANCHOR .............................................................................................................................. 88
F. HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE LIFT UNIT AND ANCHOR ................................................................. 89
G. POOL SAFETY & RESTROOM SIGNS............................................................................................. 90
H. POOL ACCESSORIES .................................................................................................................... 91
2.09 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................... 91
2.10 PUMPS......................................................................................................................................... 91
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 91
B. FEATURES SPECIFIED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (TYPES A through J): ..................................... 91
C. PRE-APPROVED PUMPS - SPECIFIC TYPE AND CLASS RATINGS .................................................. 93
2.11 STRAINERS ................................................................................................................................... 96
A. INTEGRAL TYPE ........................................................................................................................... 96
B. LARGE HAIR & LINT STRAINERS .................................................................................................. 97
C. HIGH FLOW VOLUME FILTER STRAINERS.................................................................................... 98
2.12 FILTERS ........................................................................................................................................ 98
A. GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................... 99
B. REGENERATIVE FILTER SYSTEM: ................................................................................................. 99
C. PORTABLE VACUUM FILTER SYSTEM: ....................................................................................... 105
2.13 TANKS & CABINETS ................................................................................................................... 105
A. ABOVE-GRADE CHEMICAL TANKS............................................................................................. 105
B. ABOVE-GRADE CO2 BULK STORAGE TANK & ACCESSORIES ..................................................... 108
C. BELOW-GRADE CHEMICAL TANKS ............................................................................................ 109
D. COLLECTOR / SURGE / RESERVOIR TANK REQUIREMENTS....................................................... 109
E. CHEMICAL CABINETS ................................................................................................................ 110
2.14 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION – FLOW & PRESSURE ......................................................... 110
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 110
B. BACKFLOW PREVENTER ............................................................................................................ 111
C. FLOWMETERS ........................................................................................................................... 111
D. GAUGE PANEL ........................................................................................................................... 111
E. PRESSURE GAUGES ................................................................................................................... 111
F. PRESSURE REDUCING DEVICES ................................................................................................. 111
G. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES ......................................................................................................... 112
H. TEMPERATURE GAUGES ........................................................................................................... 112

I. VACUUM GAUGES .................................................................................................................... 112

J. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS .................................................................................................. 112
K. WATER LEVEL CONTROLS AND FILL SYSTEM ............................................................................ 112
L. INDUSTRIAL LIQUID FLOW SWITCH .......................................................................................... 113
2.15 CHEMICAL ................................................................................................................................. 113
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 113
B. CHEMICAL CONTROLLERS ......................................................................................................... 114
C. PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL METERING PUMP FOR pH CONTROL SYSTEM(S) ............................... 118
D. SALINE CHLORINATION SYSTEM ............................................................................................... 119
E. CHLORINATION SYSTEMS ......................................................................................................... 120
F. CHEMICAL TUBING ................................................................................................................... 123
2.16 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 123
2.17 ELECTRICAL - CONTROLS, ENCLOSURES, & GROUNDING ......................................................... 123
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 123
B. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO .................................................................................................... 124
C. BONDING, EARTHING, & GROUNDING ..................................................................................... 127
D. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS............................................................................................. 127
E. BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS ..................................................................................................... 128
F. CONDUIT ................................................................................................................................... 128
G. CONTROL RELAYS...................................................................................................................... 128
H. ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES ......................................................................................................... 128
I. ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLES ........................................................................................................ 129
J. EMERGENCY CUT-OFF SWITCH ................................................................................................. 130
K. ENCLOSURE AND PANEL IDENTIFICATION LABELS & ID’S ........................................................ 130
L. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS.................................................................................................. 130
M. MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCH ................................................................................................. 130
N. PHOTO-CELL SWITCH ................................................................................................................ 131
O. THERMOELECTRIC AIR CONDITIONERS FOR NEMA 4X ENCLOSURES....................................... 131
P. TIME DELAY RELAY.................................................................................................................... 131
Q. TIMECLOCKS & TIMESWITCHES ................................................................................................ 132
R. UNDERGROUND / UNDERWATER ELECTRICAL CABLES, CONDUCTORS, & CONNECTORS ....... 132
S. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ................................................................................................. 133
T. INDUSTRIAL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS............................................................. 136
2.18 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 137
2.19 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 137
2.20 VALVES, CHECK VALVES, & OPERATORS ................................................................................... 137
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................ 137
B. APPROVED MATERIALS ............................................................................................................. 138
C. PRE-APPROVED VALVE AND MANUFACTURERS ....................................................................... 139
D. OPERATORS .............................................................................................................................. 140
E. DISCRETE AUTOMATED ACTUATORS........................................................................................ 140
F. PROPORTIONAL AUTOMATED ACTUATORS ............................................................................. 140
G. ISOLATION AND THROTTLING VALVES (2-INCHES AND LESS) .................................................. 141
H. ISOLATION AND THROTTLING VALVES (2.5-INCHES AND GREATER)........................................ 141

I. PRECISION THROTTLING GLOBE VALVES (UP TO 6-INCHES) .................................................... 141

J. CHECK VALVES (1.5-INCHES AND LESS) .................................................................................... 142
K. CHECK VALVES (2-INCHES AND GREATER)................................................................................ 142
L. POTABLE WATER ISOLATION VALVES ....................................................................................... 143
M. MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVES ................................................................................................ 143
N. ELECTRIC SOLENOID VALVES .................................................................................................... 144
O. MODULATING (DIVERSION) FLOAT VALVES ............................................................................. 145
P. BACKWASH VALVES .................................................................................................................. 145
Q. OTHER SPECIFIED VALVES ......................................................................................................... 145
2.21 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 146
2.22 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 146
2.23 MAINTENANCE, SERVICE, TESTING, & RELATED EQUIPMENT .................................................. 146
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 146
B. MAINTENANCE & SERVICE EQUIPMENT................................................................................... 146
C. ROBOTIC AUTOMATIC POOL VACUUM CLEANER..................................................................... 146
D. CHEMICAL TESTING .................................................................................................................. 147
2.24 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 147
2.25 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 147
2.26 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 147
2.27 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 148
2.28 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 148
2.29 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT .................................................................................................. 148
A. NOT USED ................................................................................................................................. 148
B. EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION.............................................................................................. 148
C. PERIMETER OVERFLOW SYSTEM - PARALLEL GRATING ........................................................... 148
D. HIGH-STRENGTH MOLDED FIBERGLASS GRATING ................................................................... 148
E. WATER FILL SYSTEM - AUTOMATED ......................................................................................... 149
F. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS & ACCESSORIES ........................................................................... 149
G. FLOOR ACCESS DOORS ............................................................................................................. 150
H. DECK PEDESTALS....................................................................................................................... 151
2.30 NOZZLES & RELATED EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................ 152
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 152
B. STATIC NOZZLES ........................................................................................................................ 153
C. SEQUENCE DEVICES - AUTOMATED.......................................................................................... 153
2.31 UNDERWATER LIGHTS & RELATED EQUIPMENT....................................................................... 153
A. UNDERWATER JUNCTION BOXES ............................................................................................. 153
B. SLEEVE FITTINGS & FASTENERS ................................................................................................ 154
C. WATER FEATURE UNDERWATER LIGHTS .................................................................................. 154
D. SWIMMING POOL LED UNDERWATER LIGHTS ......................................................................... 156
E. UNDERWATER LIGHTING POWER SUPPLIES / TRANSFORMERS ............................................... 157
PART 3 - EXECUTION ................................................................................................................................. 157
3.01 BASIC POOL BASIN CONSTRUCTION & INSTALLATION ............................................................. 157

A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 157

B. EARTHWORK, & SITE EXAMINATION ........................................................................................ 158
C. VAPOR BARRIERS ...................................................................................................................... 161
D. DEWATERING ............................................................................................................................ 161
E. STEEL REINFORCEMENT & STRUCTURE THICKNESS ................................................................. 162
F. CEMENTITIOUS CONCRETE & REPAIR MORTARS ..................................................................... 164
G. SEALANTS .................................................................................................................................. 164
H. UNDERWATER SEALANTS ......................................................................................................... 165
I. LINK-SEALS, WATERSTOPS, & WATERPROOF PENETRATION EXECUTION ............................... 166
J. JOINTS ....................................................................................................................................... 168
K. BACKER RODS, BOND-BREAKER TAPE, & POLYPROP. EXPANSION BOARDS ............................ 168
L. ADHESIVES & GROUTS .............................................................................................................. 168
M. CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING & ADMIXES ....................................................................... 169
N. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 171
O. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) INSULATION TYPE VI .............................................................. 171
P. PIPING INSULATION & WATER-PROOFING VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION ........................... 171
3.02 SHOTCRETE WET-MIX EXECUTION ............................................................................................ 171
A. PREWORK VERIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 171
B. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOTCRETE WET-MIX............................................... 172
C. PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 173
D. ALIGNMENT CONTROL.............................................................................................................. 173
E. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................................ 173
F. CURING AND PROTECTION ....................................................................................................... 174
G. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.......................................................................................................... 174
3.03 CAST IN PLACE READY-MIX CONCRETE EXECUTION ................................................................. 176
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 176
B. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX TRANSPORT AND PLACEMENT .................................. 176
3.04 SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX (GUNITE) EXECUTION ............................................................................. 177
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 177
B. PREWORK VERIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 177
C. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX ............................................... 177
D. PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 178
E. ALIGNMENT CONTROL.............................................................................................................. 179
F. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................................ 179
G. CURING AND PROTECTION ....................................................................................................... 179
H. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.......................................................................................................... 180
3.05 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 182
3.06 PIPING & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS EXECUTION .................................................................. 182
A. PIPING AND VALVING SYSTEMS................................................................................................ 182
B. PIPING LAYOUT & EXECUTION.................................................................................................. 182
C. PIPE SIZING ............................................................................................................................... 182
D. GENERAL EXECUTION ............................................................................................................... 183
E. PIPING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 186
F. WELDED PIPE CONNECTIONS ................................................................................................... 189

G. NON-WELDED PIPE CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................... 190

H. FLANGED PIPE JOINTS ............................................................................................................... 190
I. THREADED PIPE / FITTING JOINTS ............................................................................................ 190
J. PIPING ISOLATION FROM CONCRETE FLOORS AND WALLS ..................................................... 190
K. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL & WATER-PRESSURE TESTING ......................................................... 190
L. PIPING SUPPORT, EXPANSION, PROTECTION ........................................................................... 191
M. HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORTS ................................................................................................... 193
N. VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS ......................................................................................................... 193
O. FLOOR MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORTS ........................................................................................... 193
P. PIPE RUN ANCHORING FOR DYNAMIC LOADS.......................................................................... 193
Q. NOISE REDUCTION .................................................................................................................... 193
R. COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS.......................................................................................... 194
S. COMPRESSED AIR FLEXIBLE TUBING SYSTEMS ......................................................................... 194
3.07 FINISHES & COPING EXECUTION ............................................................................................... 194
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 195
B. PREWORK VERIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 195
C. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DURING FINISH INSTALL OPERATIONS .................................. 195
D. PREPARATION ........................................................................................................................... 195
E. APPLICATION ............................................................................................................................ 198
F. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ............................................................................................ 199
G. TILES / DEPTH MARKERS / COPING / FINISH REQUIREMENTS: ................................................ 199
H. COPING ..................................................................................................................................... 200
I. GRATING ................................................................................................................................... 201
J. CONCRETE TOPPINGS, RESURFACING, AND REHABILITATION ................................................. 201
3.08 BASIN & SITE EXECUTION.......................................................................................................... 202
A. BASIN STRUCTURES: ................................................................................................................. 202
B. BASIN FLOOR DRAINS, RELIEFS, & SUMPS EXECUTION ............................................................ 205
C. BASIN PERIMETER GUTTER, SKIMMERS, & INLETS EXECUTION ............................................... 205
D. RAILS, LADDERS, ACCESSIBLE LIFT UNIT, & ANCHOR INSTALLATION ....................................... 208
E. SAFETY EQUIPMENT, SIGNAGE, AND POSTS ............................................................................ 209
3.09 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 209
3.10 PUMPING SYSTEMS EXECUTION ............................................................................................... 209
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 209
B. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION...................................................................................................... 210
3.11 STRAINER ASSEMBLIES EXECUTION .......................................................................................... 211
A. CLEARANCES ............................................................................................................................. 211
3.12 FILTER SYSTEMS EXECUTION..................................................................................................... 211
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 211
B. TYPE 7 CLEAR PIPE PLACEMENTS.............................................................................................. 211
3.13 TANK & CABINET EXECUTION ................................................................................................... 212
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 212
B. CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK EQUIPMENT .................................................................................. 212
C. SURGE TANK INSTALLATION ..................................................................................................... 212

D. ABOVE-GRADE WATER TANKS .................................................................................................. 216

3.14 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION – FLOW & PRESSURE EXECUTION ...................................... 216
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 216
B. GAUGES & SENSORS ................................................................................................................. 216
C. INDUSTRIAL LIQUID FLOW SWITCH .......................................................................................... 216
3.15 CHEMICAL SYSTEMS EXECUTION .............................................................................................. 216
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 216
B. SALINE CHLORINATION SYSTEMS ............................................................................................. 218
3.16 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 219
3.17 ELECTRICAL POWER & ELECTRICAL CONTROLS EXECUTION..................................................... 219
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 219
B. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO .................................................................................................... 219
C. BONDING, EARTHING, AND GROUNDING INSTALLATION ........................................................ 220
D. ELECTRICAL EXECUTION/INSTALLATION .................................................................................. 221
E. MOTOR STARTERS AND VFD’s .................................................................................................. 223
F. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS............................................................................................. 223
G. WIND ANOMETER / VELOCITY SENSORS .................................................................................. 223
3.18 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 223
3.19 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 223
3.20 VALVING SYSTEMS EXECUTION................................................................................................. 223
A. VALVES ...................................................................................................................................... 223
3.21 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 224
3.22 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 224
3.23 MAINTENANCE & PRE-COMMISSIONING EXECUTION.............................................................. 224
A. GENERAL IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................. 224
B. PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................ 224
C. PRE-COMMISSIONING .............................................................................................................. 225
D. ROUTINE CARE AND CLEANING ................................................................................................ 225
3.24 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 226
3.25 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 226
3.26 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 226
3.27 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 226
3.28 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 226
3.29 MISCELLANEOUS EXECUTION ACTIVITIES ................................................................................. 226
A. INDIRECT VACUUM ASSEMBLY WITH VACUUM PUMP ............................................................ 226
B. DECK SHOWERS / WATER SUPPLY / WASTE WATER INSTALLATION ........................................ 226
C. WATER LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEMS............................................................................................ 227
D. FLOOR ACCESS DOORS: ............................................................................................................ 227
E. DECK PEDESTALS....................................................................................................................... 228
F. EQUIPMENT SPARE PARTS........................................................................................................ 229
3.30 NOZZLE SYSTEMS EXECUTION................................................................................................... 229

A. CLEAN PIPING & FLUSH SYSTEM PRIOR TO NOZZLE CONNECTION .......................................... 229
B. STAINLESS STEEL COMPONENTS .............................................................................................. 229
C. SWIVEL ATTACHMENTS ............................................................................................................ 229
3.31 UNDERWATER LIGHTING EXECUTION....................................................................................... 229
A. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................... 229
B. UNDERWATER LIGHTING SYSTEMS .......................................................................................... 230
3.32 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 230
3.33 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 230
3.34 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 230
3.35 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 230
3.36 NOT USED.................................................................................................................................. 230
3.37 TESTING, STARTING, & COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS ........................................................... 230
A. PIPING TEST .............................................................................................................................. 230
B. ADJUSTMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 230
C. CONCEALMENT ......................................................................................................................... 231
D. BASIN & PIPE FILLING ............................................................................................................... 231
E. COMMISSIONING & OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT ................................................................... 231
F. CHEMICAL ADDITION / WATER TREATMENT ........................................................................... 232
G. OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION......................................................................... 233
H. CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION.................................................................................................... 233
I. MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES OF INSTALLATION ................................................................. 233

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. SECTION INCLUDES:
1. Pool
2. Water Feature
3. Pool equipment room
4. Chemical room
5. Pumps
6. Piping systems
7. Filters & chemical treatment equipment
8. Electrical control panels & systems
9. Pilings
10. Other specified equipment
B. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO OVERVIEW
1. The Contractor must provide the following Complete Build scenario services and
documentation:
a. General
1) Provide Delegated Engineering Services for the creation and generation of the
required submittals and signed and sealed shop drawings.
a) Refer to SUBMITTALS.
b) Refer to QUALITY CONTROL
2) Provide completed assemblies, equipment, materials, and products
3) Implementation including design, construction, and installation services
b. Provide electrical power systems, control systems, RGBW color changing & lighting
control systems, conductors, connectors, rigid & flexible conduits, industrial ground
fault circuit interrupters, earthing, grounding, & bonding systems.
c. Provide ducting, flues, exhaust, and powered ventilation systems for gas heaters, or
similar activities.
d. Provide a gas regulator for each gas-powered heater/boiler; each gas regulator must
be selected based upon the gas pressure available and in conjunction with the heater
manufacturer’s requirements. The available gas pressure and the gas regulator must
align accurately with the gas heater manufacturer’s requirements.
e. Provide pipe fasteners, hangers, and similar support systems, obtaining approval
from the Architect or Structural Engineer for components that require structural
interface or dependency on the building structure.
f. Collector, Reservoir, and Surge tanks systems, anchoring, or similar structures.
g. Pilings including all shop drawings
C. RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY ARCHITECT/OWNER
1. Refer to the Architect/Owner for the following design & engineering related services:
a. Designs for non-slip impervious decking, pool mechanical room(s), and pool chemical
room(s)

1) Positive draining slopes within containment basins, on floors, or on slabs must

slope to drains designed & located by the Architect.
b. Civil engineering inclusive of site utilities, drain piping (from ADE’s points of
connections with a recommended minimum 2% slope in drain piping to accept the
ADE estimated water flows to the authorized outfall).
1) The Civil or MEP Engineer must determine the outfalls, pipe size, & pipe slope as
appropriate.
c. Project structural engineering for mechanical equipment rooms, chemical rooms,
retaining walls, waterproofing, and the following reinforced concrete structures:
1) Tanks
2) Vaults
d. Coastal engineering and directives/guidance as to the need for pilings (for either
structural support or for “anchoring” the pool basin when deemed required by codes
for coastal pool basins.
e. Geotech Engineer has already specified the recommendations, requirements, and
methodology for placing pilings or spread foundations, anchors for the basins, tank,
and engineered backfill beneath, around the pool basin(s), and site-located tanks
required for the pool(s) and water feature.
1) These Geotech / foundation recommendations and requirements are the final
approval as to the spread foundation or piles’ installation as required by the
Geotech consultant report due to sub-standard soils, suspected sinkholes,
unsuitable soils, or specific codes relating to anchoring necessary for storm or
tidal surges.
2) The Geotech must determine the necessity of placing specialized soils and support
beneath the piping systems’ trunk lines serving the pools.
f. Project MEP, HVAC, & Detailed Dehumidification inclusive engineering services
1) Indoor & outdoor MEP to ADE’s points of connections
2) Provide the design for backflow prevention, pressure reducing, and water
hammer prevention assemblies within the water supply piping systems to the
pool mechanical & chemical equipment rooms. Refer to the MEP’s Drawings for
the design of the water hammer arrestor(s) and pressure reducing assemblies to
protect the auto-fill system(s) from hydraulic potential water hammer or shock.
3) Dehumidification, cooling & heating of room spaces, exhaust gas ducting systems,
HVAC systems, or similar activities. The following recommended minimum
ventilation standards are at least (and greater if the MEP engineer deems
appropriate):
a) Pool mechanical equipment rooms: 10 x air changes / hour
b) Chemical equipment rooms: 20 x air changes / hour
c) Combustion air for fossil-fuel heaters: As required
d) Ventilation air supply for heat pumps: As required

4) For sizeable electrical supply and loads, the components & equipment may be
required by Codes to be placed in a separate, designated functional electrical
room with dual points of egress and requiring enhanced, code-required
clearances. The Architect with his selected project MEP Engineer must determine
the building requirements pertaining to Electrical Requirements and related
electrical enhancements & safety procedures.
g. Chemical & Equipment room and yard illumination must achieve minimum 30-foot
candles as measured at the floor/ground level.
h. Landscape Architecture inclusive of appropriate selections for decking, deck
drainage, deck showers, and selection of appropriate finish materials at and within
(with selected colors & textures) the pool, non-slip finishes and surfaces, its
perimeter edges finishes and textures.
1.02 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK & SYSTEMS
A. COMMON FOR ALL
1. The pool basins consist of a poured-in-place reinforced concrete floor, surrounded by
vapor barriers, and reinforced shotcrete wall/floor construction
2. Pilings and thickened reinforced basins and tanks as identified in the Documents.
3. The layout of pools and noted pool related work
4. Project benchmarks, control points, and elevation controls
5. Dewatering, excavation, placement of engineered backfill in partial lifts (as determined
necessary by the Geotechnical Engineer), crushed stone fill, sequenced backfill &
compaction required below pool basin structures, tank structures, pipe trenches, and
the piping hangers/supports.
6. The collector/surge tanks are poured-in-place, waterproof, reinforced concrete
construction.
7. Pool hydraulic/mechanical systems must include water recirculation, filtration systems,
perimeter gutter overflow collection, activity & specialized static and automated
feature, weir, nozzle pumping systems, and surge tanks. Related primary & automated
water chemical treatment, related equipment systems must include an advanced,
automated chemical controller, saline/chlorine generation, secondary chlorine, and pH
feeder systems.
8. Specified LED lighting with lighting color, lighting intensity, low voltage control,
automated, and static nozzle/weir systems
9. Nozzle, water activity, and weir hydraulic/mechanical systems including related piping
control systems
10. Interior and surface resilient, non-slip finishes for pool basins and wet decks as detailed
herein
11. Pool wet deck accessory equipment indicated or specified (including required
embedded deck anchors and ballast supports) within or adjacent to the pool basin and
its adjacent deck
12. Coordination & provision for electrical operational & safety interlocks, flow and safety
controls for pools, safety cut-off, specialty equipment control systems, industrial ground
fault circuit interrupters, time-delay relays, water level, and wind velocity control
systems.

13. Miscellaneous pool systems’ testing equipment, safety procedures implementation, and
noted equipment automation control systems
a. Provide necessary pressure pumps & related equipment for enabling a successful
water pressure testing as required herein.
14. Commissioning of pool systems, documentation, color-coding, directional flow arrows,
comprehensive labeling, and specified operator training
B. POOL INCLUDED
1. Refer to these Design Documents (Drawings and Technical Specifications) for the various
designed-pools engineered and specified by along with the accompanying descriptive
narratives describing and explaining the design criteria utilized by This Engineer. The
Contractor must provide all required noted and specified certifications, components,
equipment systems, materials, labor, supervision, & testing.
C. CHEMICAL AND POOL EQUIPMENT ROOMS
1. The pool equipment assemblies located in the Chemical / Equipment Room(s) include:
a. Specified filtration systems with metering, gauges, valving, and flow controls,
b. Specified individual feature pumping systems,
c. Chemical automated controls, designated chemical feed, saline/chlorine generation,
including related assemblies, specialized components with equipment, and noted
automated monitoring systems,
d. Reinforced, waterproof, concrete backwash sump(s) with grates and frames,
2. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer's Documents for:
a. Final design & provision of electrical power panels, control panels, sub-panel(s),
relays, controls, safety disconnects, connectors, safety-off controls with relays,
control wiring panels, automated LED RGBW color-changing lighting control panels,
junction boxes, pull boxes, motor control systems, metering, gauges, sensors, circuit
breakers, magnetic motor starters, VFD's, Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
(GFCI), bonding, earthing, grounding, and other electrical componentry.
1) These are a Complete Build Activities. Refer to the COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO
OVERVIEW
3. Air ventilation and drainage
1) Activities in the above-section D.3 are a Complete Build Activity. Refer to the
COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO OVERVIEW and RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY
ARCHITECT sections above.
b. Chemical provision & supply as noted in the chemical equipment sections below.
4. Chemical Room(s) must house chemical feeder systems, chemical tanks, chemical
storage, and the safety drench shower with its eyewash station.
a. Exception: Refer to the Architect for the actual mechanical & chemical room designs.
This Section specifies only the aquatics equipment located within the Architect-
supplied room(s).
5. Provide factory-fabricated floor access doors, safety ladders, and related components
for easy access into equipment vaults and surge tanks.

1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO:
1. This phrase identifies the total responsibility, means & methods, of the Contractor to
provide completely operational assemblies and systems inclusive of Delegated
Engineering Services for electrical, and piling shop drawings as well as other noted
services and installation. The Complete Build Scenario must incorporate sketches,
design & drawing activities, submittals, governmental permitting for services,
installations, executing & providing required efforts, services, & testing necessary to
result in completed systems compliant with permitting requirements, and compliance
with related codes & standards. The Contractor’s provision of equipment, materials, and
services must further include those necessary for Owners' acceptance, compliance with
the Drawings and these Specifications. Also, the Complete Build Scenario is referred to
as a Complete Build Activity.
B. CONTRACTOR:
1. In general, the Contractor is the Licensed Certified General Contractor or Construction
Manager who has overall designated and legal responsibility for the construction of the
work. The Contractor must be qualified for the project contracted for and means the
licensed-person who, for compensation, undertakes to, submits a bid to, or does himself
or by others, construct, repair, alter, remodel, add to, demolish, subtract from, or
improve any building or structure, including related improvements to real estate, for
others, or for resale to others; and whose job scope is substantially like the job scope
described in these specifications.
C. CONCRETE:
1. The term “concrete” as used in this Section, refers only to concrete (SHOTCRETE and
CAST IN PLACE READY-MIX CONCRETE) as specified in this Section only.
D. CRITICAL:
1. This word describes dimensions that are not subject to deviation. Violation of a “critical”
dimension obligates & requires rework to bring the item back into compliance.
E. FURNISH:
1. The term "Furnish" means to supply and deliver to the Project site, ready for unloading,
unpacking, assembly, installation, testing, and similar operations.
F. INSTALL:
1. The term "install" describes operations at the Project site including the actual unloading,
unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,
finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, start-up, commissioning, testing, and similar
operations. Included in the “Install” responsibilities are the miscellaneous hardware and
materials required to complete the “Install.”
G. INSTALLER:

1. The word “installer” or “commercial pool installer” or similar terms denote an individual
or firm retained/hired by the Contractor to perform designated, sub-contracted,
specialty work. The installer must be licensed and qualified in the areas of layout,
forming, excavation, compaction, dewatering, reinforced structures, fiberglass and
similar products, stainless-steel assemblies & components, trim, decking, piping, and
finishes as required or specified to comply with the specific requirements of the Local
Governmental Agency for the project’s locale. If the Contractor acts as the installer (self-
performs), the Contractor must demonstrate the Quality Control requirements herein.
H. MUST (or SHALL):
1. A mandatory-requirement imposing a duty or grants a right which is mandatory or
imperative
I. POOL:
1. The use of the word “pool” within these Specifications must also refer to a basin,
feature, fountain, spa, splash deck, splash pad, spray deck, sun shelf, wading pool, water
feature, water lounge, water play, water recreation attraction, wet deck, or Wet-Play.
J. PLASTIC PIPING:
1. Any piping that is non-metallic, "plastic," "petrochemical-based," “polymer” or
"synthetic” such as PVC, UPVC, CPVC, and HDPE.
K. PROVIDE:
1. The term "provide" means to furnish, install, connect, test, and complete/ready for the
intended use.
L. SLIP-RESISTANT (NON-SLIP):
1. A horizontal, non-skid textured surface with a dynamic coefficient of friction rated at a
minimum of 0.42 (per ASTM C1028) for wet conditions. The words “non-slip” and “slip-
resistant” are equivalent as used in these specifications.
M. WORKMANSHIP:
1. The degree of skill with which a product is made or a job done. On this project, the
Contract Documents require that all workmanship be excellent.
2. The quality and appearance of the “work” must be “high quality and be subject to the
Engineer’s judgment as to compliance with expected, excellent workmanship standards.
Work deemed by the Engineer as “Sub-Standard” or “Sub-Quality” will not be
recommended for acceptance.
N. ADE:
1. This acronym refers to Aquatic Design & Engineering, Inc. Also, the use of "This
Engineer," or "This Consultant" may be utilized herein interchangeably and refers to
ADE.
1.04 COORDINATION AND PERMITS
A. COORDINATION
1. Coordinate services and work with other disciplines to afford and enable a timely
project completion.

2. Schedule inspections
3. Obtain construction authorization from the appropriate governmental agencies as
necessary before commencing with the installation of the specified pool and equipment
work.
4. Comply with state and local department of health and building agency requirements
including specified construction inspections.
5. Documentation & submission of accepted modifications of the approved documents to
permitting authorities.
B. PERMITS WITH RELATED INSPECTIONS
1. Obtain and pay for permits, variance hearings & procedures, and arrange for inspections
necessary for the installation of this work to include but not limited to, amusement ride,
building, electrical, energy conservation, environmental, HVAC, health, gas connections
& supply, impact, safety, wastewater disposal, zoning, and similar permits. If specified
inspections are not successfully secured, the Contractor must pay penalties, re-
inspection costs, and uncovering of completed work when requested/required by the
authorities or inspectors.
1.05 PROJECT MEETINGS
1. Attend project coordination meetings specified and as requested by the Architect or
Owner’s Representative.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Work (materials and workmanship) performed under this contract must be in
conformance with applicable codes, Department of Labor (OSHA), Department of
Justice, Department of Health, governmental agencies, state and local building codes,
Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act (VGB), and the Contract Documents.
2. Specialty Designated Engineering must be by a licensed professional engineer (per the
statutes of the project's locale) with a professional resume that demonstrates his
expertise in the specialty area. Specialty Designated Engineering must be equivalent to
Delegated Engineering Services.
3. Bring any contradictions or ambiguities concerning any referenced codes, regulations,
requirements, standards, specifications, state or local laws, regulations, local
ordinances, fire insurance carrier’s requirements, or the Contract Documents to the
attention of the Architect or This Engineer.
4. A Contractor-responsibility includes the piping or transport of all pool wastewater to the
authorized outfall (sanitary sewer). If local & state codes disallow and prevent
discharge/authorized outfall to the sanitary sewer, then without exception the
contractor must provide the discharge/authorized materials’ delivery to the directed
outfall per local environmental requirements.
B. NONCOMPLIANCE
1. Correction of non-compliant work contrary to the applicable building codes, regulations,
ADA, NEC, OSHA requirements, state codes & laws, local ordinances, referenced
standards, fire insurance carrier’s requirements, and the Contract Documents is a
responsibility of the Contractor.

C. BUILDING CODES AND LEGISLATION ACTS

1. Applicable codes must include ordinances if any are applicable. As a matter of safety,
adherence to the following standards is mandatory:
a. American Virginia Graeme Baker Federal Pool and Spa Safety Act (VGB)
b. Canadian Electrical Code OR National Electrical Code (NEC)
2. The following codes are used as a reference for developing the best design
a. International Swimming Pool and Spa Code
3. The latest edition of the applicable codes (in effect when the Contract Document was
signed) must apply to this project.
D. REFERENCED STANDARDS
1. Standards, Regulations, Codes, and Requirements must be the latest revisions, editions,
and additions of the documents and must supersede the editions listed.
2. Applicable Criteria and specifications may include the following:
a. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1) ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
2) ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal Heavyweight,
and Mass Concrete
3) ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
4) ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
5) ACI 304 – Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete
6) ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting
7) ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting
8) ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
9) ACI 309R - Guide for Consolidation of Concrete
10) ACI 311.4R - Guide for Concrete Inspection
11) ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
12) ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary
13) ACI 347R “Guide to Formwork for Concrete.”
14) ACI 506.2-13 – Recommended Practice for Shotcreting
15) ACI 506.2 - Specification for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of
Shotcrete.
16) ACI 506.3R-82 - Certification of Shotcrete Nozzlemen
17) Comply with building code requirements which are more stringent than the
above
b. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1) ANSI/AWWA C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4-inches
[100 mm] through 12-inches [305 mm], for Water
2) ANSI / ASTM A13.1-2007 Standard for the Identification of Pipes
3) ANSI A108 - Installation of Ceramic Tile
4) ANSI A108.1A - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile in the Wet-Set
Method with Portland cement mortar.

5) ANSI A108.1B - Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured Portland

cement mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland cement mortar.
6) ANSI A108.1C - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile
in the Wet-Set Method with Portland cement mortar -or- Installation of Ceramic
Tile on a Cured Portland cement mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex
Portland cement mortar.
7) ANSI A108.5 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland
cement mortar or Latex-Portland cement mortar.
8) ANSI A108.6 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant,
Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.
9) ANSI A108.8 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Chemical-Resistant
Furan Mortar and Grout.
10) ANSI A108.9 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Modified
11) Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
12) ANSI A108.10 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.
13) ANSI A118.1 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland cement mortar.
14) ANSI A118.3 - Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and Grouting
Epoxy and Water-Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.
15) ANSI A118.4 - Latex-Portland cement mortar.
16) ANSI A118.5 - Chemical-Resistant Furan Mortar and Grout.
17) ANSI A118.6 - Standard Ceramic Tile Grouts.
18) ANSI A118.7 - Polymer Modified cement grouts
19) ANSI A118.8 - Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.
20) ANSI A118.9 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units
21) ANSI A118.10 - Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set
Ceramic Tile and Dimensional Stone.
22) ANSI A118.1 - ANSI A118.13 - Installation of Ceramic Tile
23) ANSI A118.3 - Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting
Epoxy Water Cleanable Tile Setting Epoxy Adhesive
24) ANSI A137.1 - Standards Specifications for Ceramic Tile
25) ANSI B2.1 – Valves
26) ANSI B16.5 – Class 150 Pipe Flanges
above
c. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers.
d. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
1) ASME 112.19.8 - Suction Fittings for Use in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas,
and Hot Tubs
e. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
1) ASCE 7-05: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
f. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
1) ASTM A123 / A123M-09 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

2) ASTM A193 Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless-Steel Bolting for
High Temperature or High-Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose
Applications
3) ASTM A194 / A194M-11 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both
4) ASTM A235-10 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
5) ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
6) ASTM A240 / A240M Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General
Applications
7) ASTM A307-10 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs
8) ASTM A312 - Standard Specification for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold
Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Pipes
9) ASTM A314 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Billets and Bars for Forging
10) ASTM A490-12 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat
Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
11) ASTM A563-07a - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
12) ASTM A615 - Deformed Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
13) ASTM A666, Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip,
Plate, and Flat Bar
14) ASTM A706 - Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
15) ASTM A967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for
Stainless Steel Parts
16) ASTM B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet
and Plate
17) ASTM B221, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes
18) ASTM B455, Standard Specification for Copper-Zinc-Lead Alloy (Leaded-Brass)
Extruded Shapes
19) ASTM C31 – Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
20) ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates
21) ASTM C39 – Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
22) ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
23) ASTM C143 – Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland cement concrete
24) ASTM C150 - Portland cement
25) ASTM C260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
26) ASTM C172 – Method for Sampling Fresh Concrete
27) ASTM C173 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method
28) ASTM C231 – Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method
29) ASTM C260 – Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
30) ASTM C309 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete
31) ASTM C330 - Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete

32) ASTM C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to
Portland Cement
33) ASTM C494 – Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
34) ASTM C578-10, Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
35) ASTM C618 – Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcinated Natural Pozzolan
for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
36) ASTM D256-10 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum
Impact Resistance of Plastics
37) ASTM D570-98 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
38) ASTM D638-10 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
39) ASTM D648-06 – Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position.
40) ASTM D695-10 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid
Plastics
41) ASTM D696-08 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer
42) ASTM D732-10 - Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by Punch
Tool
43) ASTM D790 - Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials
44) ASTM D792-08 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity
(Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement
45) ASTM C1028-07 - Standard Test Method for Determining Static Coefficient of
Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer
Pull-Meter Method:1.02
46) ASTM D1238-04 – Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics
by Extrusion Plastometer.
47) ASTM D1505 - Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique
48) ASTM D1784 – PVC / CPVC Plastic Pipe Properties
49) ASTM D1785 - PVC Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 & 80
50) ASTM D1998 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks
Section 11.3: Low temperature. Impact Test and Section 11.4: Gel Test
51) ASTM D2047 Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-
Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine
52) ASTM D2466 – PVC Schedule 40 Fittings
53) ASTM D2467 – PVC Schedule 80 Fittings
54) ASTM D2583 - 07 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid
Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor
55) ASTM D2584-11 - Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced
Resins
56) ASTM D2563 - Fabricated, Fiberglass Wrapped PVC Pipe Fittings
57) ASTM D2564 - PVC Pipe and Fittings Solvent Cement.
58) ASTM D2855 – Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with PVC
Pipe and Fittings.
59) ASTM D4101 – Polypropylene Materials

60) ASTM E84-12 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials
61) ASTM E303 Standard Test Method for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties
Using the British Pendulum Tester - Rustic Board Pattern: 43.40; Slate Pattern:
34.90; Slate Smooth: 33; Ripple Pattern: 44.75
62) ASTM E648-03 is for "Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-
Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source – Passed
63) ASTM E903-96 - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and
Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres
64) ASTM F593-02 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws,
and Studs
65) ASTM F402 – Standard Recommended Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent
Cements Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings
66) ASTM F437 – CPVC Fittings
67) ASTM F439 – CPVC Fittings
68) ASTM F441 – CPVC Plastic Pipe
69) ASTM F493 - CPVC Pipe and Fittings Solvent Cement
70) ASTM F656 – PVC Primers
71) ASTM F1292 - Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems
Under and Around Playground Equipment: Critical Fall Height 1’ or More.
72) ASTM F1790 – Ball Valves & Check Valves
73) ASTM G154 – Ability to Withstanding UV Exposure
above
g. American Water Works Association
1) AWWA D121-12 - Standard for Bolted Aboveground Thermosetting Fiberglass-
Reinforced Plastic Panel-Type Tanks for Water Storage
h. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) - Manual of Practice
1) CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars
2) CRSI 65 – Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and
Nomenclature
3) Manual of Standard Practice
i. Eslon Engineering Manual for Plastic Piping Systems
j. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
k. IPCEA - Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association
l. ISO – International Organization for Standardization
1) ISO-10352 - Fiber-reinforced plastics
2) ISO-1172 - Textile-glass-reinforced plastics
3) ISO-12114 - Fiber-reinforced plastics
4) ISO-2577 - Plastics - Thermosetting molding materials
5) ISO-1183A - Plastics -- Methods for determining the density of non-cellular
plastics
6) ISO-14125 - Fiber-reinforced plastic composites
7) ISO-179 - Plastics -- Determination of Charpy impact properties
8) ISO-527-4 - Plastics -- Determination of tensile properties

m. MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society:

1) MSS-SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture
2) MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application
n. MET – Met Laboratories, Inc.
o. Model Aquatic Health Code
p. National Association of Architectural Metals Manufacturers (NAAMM)
1) NAAMM AMP-500 Metals Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products
2) ANSI/NAAMM A202.1 (MBG-531) Metal Bar Grating Manual
q. National Plaster’s Council “Pool Plaster Technology.”
r. NEC - National Electrical Code
1) NEC Article 300.50 – Underground, Underwater, & Wet Locations
2) NEC Article 310.10 – Underwater & Wet Locations
3) NEC Article 680 - Swimming Pools, Fountains, and Similar Installations
s. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association
1) NEMA MG-1 -- Motors and Generators.
t. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
u. NSF 50 - Circulation System Components for Swimming Pools
v. NSF/ANSI 61 (2010) Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects
w. TCNA (Tile Council of North America) - Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile
Installation - 2016
1) TCNA 759 – Dry Set Mortar
x. UL - Underwriters Laboratories (or equivalent)
1) UL 1081 - Swimming Pool Pumps, Filters, & Chlorinators (brominators)
y. United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE):
1) Concrete Research Division, Handbook for Concrete, and Cement
2) CRD-C 527 – Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop
z. USEPA UVDGM- U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Ultraviolet Guidance Manual
3. The above mention of a Code or Standard does not imply that those codes or standards
that are "not mentioned" do not apply. Specific mention of code or standard is to bring
attention to that standard.
4. Any apparent silence of the Specification as to any, or the omission from them of any
item, description, or a point, must be regarded as that only the most suitable general
practice for the concerned item, description, or point, is to be used.
5. Items or materials that have not been individually specified must, as a minimum, be
provided to achieve compliance with the relevant code or standard where applicable.
1.07 MANUFACTURERS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. PRE-REQUISITES FOR SUBSTITUTIONS
1. The naming of a brand or manufacturer in these Specifications is to establish the quality
and performance standard for the equipment or component specified. Do not switch or
substitute specific brands or the manufacturer/fabricator indicated unless This Engineer
provides prior written authorization.

2. Prohibited fountain & water feature equipment includes that which is manufactured in
China, India, and Southeast Asia. Such equipment is dis-allowed and prohibited from
consideration or use by the Contractor.
a. All fountain equipment manufacturers must submit a certified letter signed by the
President or Chief Operating Office certifying that none of their submitted
equipment originated nor manufactured in the noted geographical areas above.
B. SUBSTITUTIONS
1. Provide assemblies, products, and model numbers as specified without exception. Any
substitution requests must follow the procedures outlined in Division 01 documents.
a. Substitutions that are not equivalent or do not result in substantial cost savings for
the Owner / Client is dis-allowed/prohibited.
1) However, if a possible substitution might result in substantial cost savings for the
Owner and This Engineer determines that the product substitution is acceptable
and substantially equivalent to the specified product, the substitution may occur
with This Engineer’s written approval.
2) Such substitution approval is subject to the Contractor officially reducing their fee
or a documented payment/refund to the Owner.
b. Do not proceed with the possible alternate or substitution unless This Engineer
provides the prior written approval. Substitution requests must be made in writing
and approved before bidding by the Contractor using the appropriate substitution
request forms as provided under the substitution section in the project manual.
1) It is intended to limit the bidding to a style of product and company that has a
proven history and record of performance.
2) Due to the specialized nature of specific components required for this project,
these specifications, in some instances, refer to various elements by trade or
manufacturers name.
3) Whenever a referenced proprietary (trade) name is used within this Specification
Section, it is expressly used for informational purposes to describe a standard of
necessary function, dimension, appearance, and quality. References to materials
by trade name, make, or model number are not intended to limit competition,
but to assist in assuring high quality. Bidders are required to incorporate in their
Base Bid only the named manufacturer.
c. Other systems considered must be subject to a contractor-provided complete set of
shop drawings and specifications detailing such equipment as it pertains to this
project are submitted for evaluation fourteen (14) days before the bidding. The
submission should include a list of five (5) operating installations within a reasonable
distance of the job site complete with individuals’ names and contact information.
1) The list should include the names, email addresses, and telephone numbers of the
operating personnel.
2) The technical contents of the submittal must include electrical & hydraulic
calculations, equipment fabrication details, if applicable the filter room layout in
plan and elevation views clarifying the project, warranties, installation, and
operating instructions.

d. This Engineer will acknowledge/provide approved substitution of equivalent

products meeting the terms and conditions of the bidding documents only by written
addendum. Assuming further refunds and price reductions to the Owner, additional
equivalent product substitution requests may only occur within the initial 10 days
after the selection of the Contractor.
1) This Engineer may provide written approval for such an approved substitution
only after verification of the Contractor reducing his fee or writing a check to the
Owner.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A. GENERAL:
1. Refer also to provisions of Division 1 - “General Conditions” for Submittal Requirements.
2. Partial or incomplete submittals are disallowed.
3. Submit one set of digital PDF’s for shop drawings, catalog pages, manufacturer’s sales
literature, specification sheets, operation and maintenance manuals, engineering
Drawings, and brochures for fixtures, equipment, fabricated items, and materials.
a. Refer to Division 01 for additional submittal requirements.
4. Do not proceed with ordering, purchasing, fabricating, or installation of any equipment
without Reviewed Shop Drawings from This Engineer.
a. Checking is to determine general conformance with the design concept of the
Contract Documents.
b. The Shop Drawings or submittals process must not modify the design intent of these
Drawings.
c. Any action shown is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents.
d. Confirmed dimensions and coordination at the site are solely the Contractor’s
responsibility.
5. Product Data: The Contractor must provide the Manufacturer's data sheets on each
product to be used, including:
a. Manufacturer’s Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Manufacturer’s storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
c. Manufacturer’s installation methods.
B. SHOP DRAWINGS:
1. The drawings accompanying this Technical specification are diagrammatic and show the
general arrangement of equipment, piping, ductwork, services, supports, and similar
related equipment. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to show
offsets, fittings, and accessories that may be required. The Contractor must carefully
investigate the structural and finish conditions of his work and must arrange such work
accordingly; furnishing fittings, pipes, valving, supports, testing apparatus and
equipment, and numerous accessories that may be required to meet such conditions.
Where conditions necessitate a rearrangement, the Contractor must obtain This
Engineer’s prior written approval.
2. Shop drawings for equipment must be submitted, and Engineer’s favorable review of
shop drawing is mandatory before proceeding with fabrication. Shop drawings must not
be "doctored" reproductions of Architect/Engineer/Owner’s drawings.

a. The Contractor must include the proposed locations of pipe hangers and supports.
b. The Contractor shall incorporate the final electrical conduit diagrams and junction
boxes including the corrected quantity and sizes of each conduit and junction boxes.
1) Observe the NEC requirements for open conduit space after conductors will be
installed.
2) When an additional quantity of conduits or enlarged conduits is needed to
maintain the code-required conduits’ empty space, the Contractor must submit
an RFI with a proposed solution. This Engineer will provide a written direction
document.
3) If enlarged or additional junction boxes are required, the Contractor will submit
an RFI with the proposed solutions. Ensure that only Wago splice-connectors &
terminations are utilized in junction boxes and panels.
3. Shop Drawings, at 1/4-inch=12-inches scale, must be provided and must include
sufficient engineering data, indicate working & erection dimensions, electrical
characteristics, locations at which materials & equipment are to be installed, supported,
other essential data, manufacturer-confirmation of the product’s suitability, and
requested details.
a. Specialty Designated Engineering drawings (signed and sealed by a locally licensed
Professional Engineer) for electrical, water feature above-grade installations,
collector and surge tanks, piling shop drawings, HVAC, dehumidification, heater
ducting, venting, and exhaust systems for this work.
1) Each Specialty Designated Engineers must submit a professional resume
demonstrating and certifying ample experience to enable the Specialty
Designated Engineers has the expertise within the specific specialty area.
2) A certificate of insurance listing the Owner, Architect, and ADE as an additional
insured must be provided with each resume and must include a minimum of:
a) General Liability: $1,000,000 / $1,000,000
b) Workers Compensation: Statutory
c) Professional Liability: $1,000,000 / $1,000,000
i: Exception: Professional Liability policies are exempt from the additional
insureds’ requirements
4. Shop Drawings must indicate the following:
a. Submit shop drawings detailing the installation methods. Coordinate placement with
locations noted in the Contract Drawings.
b. “Dead-line” (dewatering pipe outlet) locations.
1) Dewatering is a Complete Build Activity. Refer to COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO
OVERVIEW
c. Piping elevations, locations, routing, and slopes
1) Graphically illustrate individual pipes with their identification and sizes
d. Pipe trench elevations and locations illustrating minimum excavated earthen slopes
(after coordination with other Contractors)
e. Tank ballast and anchor-type concrete
1) Submit anchoring details (attaching the surge tank to the concrete ballast pad and
mass) for approval before installation.

2) Incorporate the manufacturer’s anchoring, installation recommendations, and

support requirements within the shop drawings.
f. Pre-cast tanks or similar structures
g. Handhold details and dimensions on pool walls without an open gutter or recessed-
gutter beam edge must be compliant with the governmental hand-hold
requirements and the requirements of the Contract Documents.
h. Indicate compressed air systems and air blowers’ metallic-piping diagrams, shop
drawings, and components’ arrangements in the submittals and shop drawings.
i. Piling shop drawing designs. The pilings shop drawings are also subject to the Geo-
Tech Consultant’s review. Refer to COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO OVERVIEW
C. PRODUCT DATA
1. Manufacturer’s literature and data indicating performance characteristics, rated
capacities, weights, materials, surface finish, accessories, electrical nameplate data,
wiring diagrams.
a. Submit for review all certificates of conformance with specified codes and standard
Contract Documents.
2. Provide data on the following equipment, lighting, and accessories:
a. Equipment room equipment:
1) Pumps and motors, including manufacturer-supplied performance curves at the
flow and pressures to include the following minimum requirements:
a) Pump compliance with specified epoxy-fused coatings
b) Stainless steel shaft
c) EPDM seals
d) Hair and Lint Strainer (if integral)
e) Compliance (or equivalency) with a national listing agency
f) Self-priming pumps must include the mandatory manufacturers’ certification
for water-lift capabilities surpassing those required for this project.
i: Self-priming pumps more substantial than 0.75-hp must include self-
priming assist connections, equipment, valves, and materials to the
potable water supply.
2) On pump motors, include specific:
a) The manufacturer confirmed VFD-Duty certification
b) Documented certification for premium efficiency. NEMA Premium (12.12) for
Imperial and IE3 if Metric.
c) Insulation description and rating
d) A minimum TEFC-type enclosure or an approved equivalent
e) Manufacturer-approved rain guards for each pump motor(s) located in
outdoor conditions.
3) Chemical and equipment room controllers, chemical safety (dual-wall) tanks (with
accessories), chemical feeders, saline generators, and specified chemical supply
hoses, labels, conduits, sleeves, labeling, & related materials.
4) Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) physical sizes, allocated electrical loads and noted
compliance with specified programming features.
5) Motor starters with soft start feature.

6) Filters with automation equipment

a) Including components and related sub-assemblies.
b) Metallic components for compatibility with the total immersion in basins
containing mild saline water, salt-air proximity, and seawater exposure.
c) Submit to This Engineer certified test results within 7 days of the verification
water-testing date.
7) Chemical storage safety tanks with factory-provided penetrations & labeling
b. Vapor-retardant pool covers
c. Closed Cell insulation for above-grade piping systems on heated water, chilled water,
air-blower, and regenerative blower systems.
d. Link-Seal (with Century Line thermoplastic wall sleeves) waterproof piping
penetration assemblies including 316L stainless steel hardware
e. Water stops (No-Leak water stops, pre-fabricated water stops, water stop fittings, &
metallic water stops)
3. Complete Build Specialty Designated Engineering submittals with sign & sealed
documents:
a. These are Complete Build activities.
1) A ventilation fan, exhaust, ceiling, and floor-level intake vent assemblies.
2) Piling shop drawings (and related activities), water activities, water features, wet
play components.
3) Plate Heat Exchangers
a) Materials: Titanium
4) Heater ducting, exhaust hood, exhaust vents, barometric dampers, and related
dual-wall safety ducting, flue, and venting systems
5) Coordination with the Project’s Structural Engineer to obtain written approval for
all piping hangers, supports, braces, and expansion components that are
supported by the building’s floor, wall, or ceilings
6) Electrical power systems, control systems, and lighting control panels including,
but not limited to:
a) Control wiring and light schematics and componentry
i: Caution: Rejection must occur if the confirmed, correct electrical power
supply is absent in the documents.
i: Under-deck, underground, underwater, wet-rated conductors, and similar
wires to include rigid & flexible conduits
ii: Solid state Ground fault circuit interrupters (relays) for all submersible
pumps
iii: CAT 5E minimum, although CAT 6 and 6A type data cables are acceptable
for under-deck, underground, and underwater rigid & flexible conduits
(must be rated as suitable for wet conditions).
b) Equipment room electrical panels must show the code-specified 48-inch [1.22
m] uninterrupted clearance in front of panels, motor starters, VFD's,
transformers, disconnects, power supplies, automation panels, & similar
equipment.
c) Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL)-listed pressure-type or exothermic weld (in
compliance with NEC) for ground wires' and earthing connections.

4. Deck-located equipment:
a. Rail products and Accessible Lift Units:
1) Manufacturer’s welded rails & components, including, but not limited to, rail
goods, handrails, ladders, grab rails, and Accessible Lift Units (ALU).
a) Show details of the concrete-mass-anchors to be provided when there is no
concrete decking.
b) Indicate anchor locations with dimensions.
c) Ladder submittals must indicate the relative location of the water level as
compared to the uppermost ladder tread. The upper-most tread must be
underwater.
d) Show vertical supports’ spacing on rails and cross-bracing (with clearances
above the coping and bottom step).
e) Provide capacity loads and seismic certifications for each Accessible Lift Unit.
b. Deck rinse shower assembly with drinking water fountain including ADA compliant
operators
c. Zero-entry type and rim-flow type fiberglass trench materials and parallel style
grating with a locking feature (to the trench)
d. EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system:
1) Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.
D. COLORS / SAMPLES:
1. Submittals for color and texture approvals of contractor-provided samples include, but
are not limited to:
a. Interior finishes
b. UV inhibitor coating on “exposed to sunlight” PVC
c. Refer to the Landscape Architect’s documents for the following:
1) Non-Slip, impervious Decking
2) Deck drainage components and materials
3) Tiles and stone finishes including epoxy flex joints and grouts, and similar
materials.
a) Non-Slip tiles for horizontal surfaces (refer to Drawings’ finish schedule)
b) Glazed tiles for vertical surfaces (refer to Drawings’ finish schedule)
c) Epoxy grouts suitable with the setting materials
d) Colors & textures for tiles and grout
d. Metallic primers and top coat paint materials
e. EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system:
1) Submit the color and samples as noted in the Drawings
2) Submit manufacturer’s standard verification samples of 24" x 24" minimum.
E. BASIN ITEMS:
1. The angle of repose excavation diagrams and shop drawings
2. Dewatering
3. Vapor barriers
4. Steel Reinforcement (Rebars)

a. Submit shop drawing, bending, detailing, and fabrication drawings on rebars before
purchase and fabrication.
1) Include material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent-bar diagrams,
arrangement, and supports of concrete reinforcement.
2) Incorporate enhanced, special reinforcement required for openings &
penetrations through waterproof concrete structures.
5. Basin structural concrete & shotcrete
a. Exception: Refer the appropriate submittals to the Architect, Structural Engineer, or
Landscape Architect if they are the design professionals for these components
b. Submit written reports to This Engineer of each proposed mix design for each type of
concrete at least 15 days before commencing construction. Do not begin concrete
installation until This Engineer reviews design mixes.
1) Identify and label each mix design as being for basins, decks, or ballast-type
concrete anchors
2) The ready-mix supplier must coordinate with Xypex to ensure the proper type,
and dosage of Xypex Admix is provided based on, but not limited to, the specific
products used in the mix design, and the conditions at the job site. Provide a
written confirmation that this coordination has taken place (in the same submittal
package as the concrete mix designs).
c. Submit the following information:
1) Thorough identification of the aggregates, and their source of supply.
2) Recent testing of aggregate for compliance with specified requirements.
3) Scale weight of each aggregate.
4) Absorbed water in each aggregate.
5) Brand, type, and composition of cement.
6) Brand, type, and the amount of each admixture.
7) Quantities of water used in trial mixes.
8) Provide documentation showing the recycled content (fly ash, aggregates, and
other additives by weight) of the concrete.
9) A listing of included proportions of each material per cubic yard including fibrous
secondary reinforcement.
10) Gross weight and yield per cubic yard of trial mixtures.
11) Measured slump.
12) Measured air content.
13) Compressive Strength Tests:
a) ASTM C39; one set for every 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix
design placed in a day or for each 5,000-Sq. Ft. of surface area for a total
surface area of basin’s floor and wall.
b) Make 5 (4-inch x 8-inch [100 x 200 mm] cylinders) laboratory-cured specimens.
Test one specimen 7-days after collection, test three specimens 28-days after
collection, and test one specimen (retained in reserve) for later testing if
required.
c) Historical test reports may be from previous projects within the past 6-
months.

14) Create a test panel for Shotcrete (wet-mix) testing cores.

15) Identification number or name of mix to verify agreement with compression
test reports
16) Submit laboratory test reports for waterproof concrete materials and mix design
tests.
17) Submit material certificates instead of materials’ laboratory test reports when
permitted by Architect.
a) Manufacturer and Contractor must sign material certificates, certifying that
each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements.
b) Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content
complies with specification requirements.
18) Submit meeting minutes of pre-installation conference.
19) Submit proposed mix designs that meet or exceed the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
20) Submit a statement from ready-mixed plant verifying conformance to
specifications and proposed mix designs.
21) Submit written approval/certification of concrete curing materials as specified
herein.
22) Concrete curing materials and adhesives for finishes must be compatible.
6. Waterproofing Systems & Waterstops Description
a. Concrete waterproofing system must be of the crystalline type that chemically
controls and permanently fixes a non-soluble crystalline structure throughout the
capillary voids of the concrete. The waterproofing system must cause the concrete to
become sealed against the penetration of liquids from any direction and must
protect the concrete from deterioration due to harsh environmental conditions.
b. Waterproofing cementitious materials data sheets
c. Waterproofing admixes materials data sheets
d. PVC & pre-formed plastic water stops
e. Adhesive & hydrophilic water stops
7. Concrete admixes
8. Concrete anchoring specialty products
a. Anchoring details (attaching the surge tank to the concrete ballast pad and mass).
b. Rated capacities for anchors and attachments
c. Incorporate manufacturer’s recommendations & requirements for anchoring,
backfill, and drainage installation best practices.
9. Concrete patching, topping, and rehabilitation materials
10. Expansion/construction joint materials
11. Non-Shrink grouts
12. Caulking / Sealants
13. Tile adhesives & setting materials
14. Dowel and dowel sleeves
15. Specialty fabricated joint fillers
F. EQUIPMENT ROOM & SITE ITEMS:

1. Piping, piping cement, glue, cleaners, primers, valves, fittings, supports, and hangers –
for the entire project.
a. Flexible piping connectors
b. Specialty piping, eccentric and other reducers, and fittings
c. Piping Manifolds
1) Provide thoroughly dimensioned shop drawings and indicate flanged connectors.
2) Provide anchoring details for manifold supports
3) Below-grade enclosures for outdoor-located manifolds
4) Manifolds are fabricated from Stainless Steel 316
d. Valve and piping tagging, with a color-coded I.D. system and corresponding valve
chart
1) Submit two (2) copies of laminated 18-inches x 24-inches [455mm x 610mm] valve
charts for each piping system, consisting of Isometric Drawings, or piping layouts
showing and identifying each valve and describing its function to This Engineer for
prior approval. The valve chart must be suitable for mounting in the equipment
room.
e. Valves, check valves, valve operators, flanges, and flange hardware
f. Modulating solenoid valves (with accompanying level controls) for the surge tank.
1) Note: Provide each surge tank with the safety, normally-closed electrically-
operated butterfly shut-off valve, electronic control, & sensors to ensure a
positive seal to prevent an increase of water to the surge tank when the pumps
are de-activated.
a) Valve operator/controls must be mounted to be above the surge tank water
level without exception.
g. Gauges, meters, thermometers, and sensors
h. If Type 6 (galvanized steel) piping is proposed or specified:
1) indicate its intended purpose
2) Cut sheets for the required chlorine impervious coating.
i. Water hammer arrestor devices and reduced pressure backflow preventers
2. Spray nozzles
a. Provide written certification for each nozzle's demonstrated operation.
3. Coping and interior finishes – non-slip surfaces are required except as specifically noted.
4. Depth markings, “NO DIVING,” and other marking tiles - (non-slip surfaces required on
horizontally located markers)
5. Floor Access Doors with safety ladders
6. Pool Rules and Safety signage
a. The Client/Owner must approve colors, lettering, lettering height, text content, font,
and finish materials before Contractor purchasing signage.
1) All such safety signage must be illuminated and easily read if used at night
7. Restroom location directional signage
8. Color printed sample representations (actual size) of the labeling and valve tags
specified herein.
9. Details of assembly and installation for any deviations from the Drawings.

a. Submit laboratory confirmation (using the positive analytical method) of adhesives,

admixes, mortars, epoxy grouts, and other installation materials:
1) Identify the proper usage of the specified materials.
2) Identify the compatibility of specified materials.
3) Identify proper color matching of specified materials.
4) Identify chlorine ions contained in concrete admixes
10. Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters for each submersible pump.
11. Chemical hoses/tubings as per the requirements herein.
G. MOCK-UPS ON-SITE:
1. One mock-up panel being a minimum of 3 feet [0.91 m] long illustrating pool deck
edge(s), gutter surfaces, zero-entry trenches, and grating (when specified), rim-flow
edges, and deck drainage equipment.
a. Without exception, complete all mock-up panels within 30-days from contract
execution and permit issuance.
2. Provide artistry & attention-to-detail to each Mock-Up assembly about:
a. The finishes, color, texture, and non-slip ratings
b. Tiled depth markings
c. Tiled “No Diving” lettering group,
d. International “No Diving” symbol tiled with Red-Color marking
e. Utilize this mock-up panel for Shotcrete testing.
f. Demonstrate that water-level sensitive edges & trims (gutter lip, infinity edge, and
weirs) are precisely level
g. In the event of grating within the mock-up, include adjacent finishes, adjacent
underwater lights, grate mounting hardware, and components visible around and
within the mock-up space. Maintain a targeted 0.375-inch space gap between the
finished wall and deck edges to assist in water passing around or through the grating
with minimal water splash.
h. When the Contract Documents require Eco-FINISH, a minimum of 3 sq. Ft. [0.278 sq.
M] must be applied demonstrating the surface textures, colors, and the juncture of
tiles finishes with the Eco-FINISH materials.
i. In the case of a stainless-steel basin, the Mockup should include a reinforced
concrete foundation and show the attachment and support of the panels to the
foundation.
3. Cast mock-up of the size indicated or as required to demonstrate typical joints, form tie
spacing, spacing gaps to allow water to pass with minimal water splash, and proposed
surface finish, texture, and color. Maintain sample mock-up panel exposed (but
protected) to readily-accessible viewing for the duration of Project, after Architect's &
Owners’ acceptance of visual qualities.
a. Demolish mockups/panels and remove them from the site when directed by
Architect or This Engineer.
4. Deck Pedestal Support Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface
preparation techniques and application exceptional artistry.
a. Finish areas designated by Architect.

b. Do not proceed with remaining work until This Engineer provides approval for the
mock-up’s exceptional artistry.
c. Refinish mock-up area as required to allow for This Engineer’s acceptance.
H. APPROVAL / INSPECTION / SCHEDULES DOCUMENTS
1. Schedule of Values:
a. Provide to This Engineer a copy of the Schedule of Values developed for this project
relevant to Section 13 1100 for written approval.
2. Provide written approvals, a record of successful inspections, and completed operating
permits for the following governmental agencies:
a. Building Official and Building Department(s)
b. Department of Health
I. QUALIFICATION DOCUMENTS:
1. Submit mandatory qualifications for review and approval
a. Include certificates of insurance
2. Submit listings of previous similar projects to Owner / Client with contact info
3. Submit the contractor’s Specialty Designated Engineers’ professional resumes and
include:
a. Mandatory qualifications & resumes for review and approval
b. Listings of previous similar projects with current Client / Operator contact info
J. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE (O & M) DOCUMENTS
1. Provide thorough instructions & operating manuals to the pool operator via this
submittal process. Before turning over to the operator/owner, the Contractor must
provide the comprehensive operating manuals to This Engineer for review and approval.
At a minimum, include in the manuals:
a. Written instructions for total operation & maintenance of each system
b. Comprehensive valve charts and schedules
c. Include specific valve operating directions for the following functions:
1) Normal filtration
2) Backwash events
3) Filter cleaning events
4) Basin draining events
d. Manufacturer-issued "owner operating & maintenance manuals" and warranties
e. A written contact list of the applicable Contractors' employees (names, phone
numbers, and email addresses)
f. A written list of each manufacturer’s local representative (or the contact person’s
info at the actual manufacturer) with names, phone numbers, and email addresses.
g. A copy of each submittal document with the engineer's review stamp affixed
2. Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manual

a. The contractor must deliver to the Architect/Engineer/Owner an electronic copy of

the O&M Manual submittal for review and approval as well as a Final Approved O&M
Manual. Once approved, O & M Manual must also be provided in hard copy bound
format, duplicate of four (4) each.
b. O&M Manual must contain operating and maintenance instructions for the pool
basin structure(s), finishes, and component equipment including, but not limited to,
the following:
1) Table of contents.
2) Equipment cut sheets.
3) Accurate parts list.
4) Pool start-up, commissioning, and emptying-of-water instructions.
5) Pool cleaning, chemical re-supply, and maintenance instructions
6) Auto pool cleaner operation & maintenance
7) Pool maintenance requirements, detailed and based upon: Daily, Weekly,
Monthly, Seasonally, and Annually
8) Narrative on the pool operation through sequences.
9) Troubleshooting information and procedures.
10) A piping diagram (schematic) as installed.
a) Incorporate the updated valve I.D. & numbers for installed valves into this
diagram
11) Valve charts for each piping system, consisting of isometric drawings, or piping
layouts showing and identifying each valve and describing its function.
12) Record Drawings
13) Warranties
c. A DVD of complete start-up and shut-down procedures as well as the training
session.
3. Control systems data / info / narratives:
a. The scope of the project determines the various control systems' narratives specified
within the operators' manual. The controls narrative must thoroughly describe each
Contractor-provided electrical control system and lighting control system.
b. Typically included control system descriptions:
1) Filter automation control
a) Operation of air-relief and pressure-release devices
b) Total filtration modes as applicable to the installed filter systems
i: Normal
ii: Backwash
iii: Tank Drain
iv: Addition of filter media
v: Pre-Coating
vi: Automatic water fill and water level controls
c) Operations with VFD to control/compliment filtration system operation and
pumping flow rates
d) Chemical systems’ electrical interlocks with filter pump operation
2) Electrical control protocols with the building management system

3) Chemical operations / water level systems / flow sensor & flow switches
c. VFD operations and controls
1) Increase and reduction of the pump rotational speeds
2) Interlock and controls with:
a) Regenerative filter
b) Timeclock functions
c) Manual over-ride operation
d) Flow controls
e) Pressure and vacuum sensor systems
f) LED lighting control systems’ operation
g) Automated nozzle control
h) Low-water & high-water level control systems
i) Saline chlorination generation systems
4. Equipment Certification(s) from Contractor
5. Manufacturers’ “approval of installation” certificates and pre-paid preventative
maintenance certificates must be provided to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner.
Ensure the following documentation packages include:
a. Heater(s) system documentation to include:
1) Ducts, dual-wall flues, exhaust, and venting assemblies and componentry (as a
Complete Build Activity)
2) Sensors for high-temperature and low water-flow
b. Pump(s) documentation to include:
1) Types A, B, C, D, E. G, AND K
2) Larger than 10 hp [7.45 kW]
6. Submit certified documents to the governmental Department of Health for the issuance
of operating permits.
7. One set of the local governmental-approved Drawings (with the official approval stamps
in place) with fully signed Department of Health (DOH) forms.
K. NOT USED
L. PERMITS, INSPECTIONS, PHOTO DOCUMENTATION, AND TEST RESULTS
1. Submit written copies of the approved Department of Health permits before
commencing construction.
2. Submit inspection results within three (3) days following each inspection.
3. Provide the certified water test reports
4. Provide the photo documentation of the potting compound in place within each
underwater junction box.
5. After the project startup and before project completion, the Contractor must submit the
following:
a. One set of completed inspection and test documents.
b. Field reports or memos required by regulatory agencies.
c. Test results for “as-installed” observed performance and operational data including
the following:
1) Water flow rates as determined by the flow meters

2) Water pressure and vacuum gauge readings

3) Motor currents (amp draw on each leg) for each pump
4) Lighting circuit currents
5) Successful earthing & grounding tests on metallic equipment items around the
basin perimeter as well as between the mechanical hardware and basin deck
equipment
a) Employ the use of a “sounding/ringing” test equipment (or an approved
equivalent device) to ensure continuity achieved by proper grounding
procedures
6) Satisfactory test results for Contractor’s water leak testing.
7) Above-grade / pools on structure: Successful visual verification results that the
underwater light conduits are water-tight and not leaking beyond the pool basin
structure and that their connections to the junction boxes/transformers/power
supplies are waterproof.
M. CERTIFICATIONS
1. General
a. The Contractor must pay for the costs relating to all manufacturers’ written
certifications.
b. Each manufacturer’s written certification must certify that the equipment was
installed properly and compliant with the manufacturers’ requirements and the
Contract Documents.
c. Submit the successfully written certifications to This Engineer after approved
observation.
2. Pre-Fabricated surge tanks:
a. Testing Requirements at the Fabricator's / Manufacturer's Facility:
1) Demonstrate leak-proof integrity by performing a hydrostatic test with
connections plugged or capped. Maintain water pressure for a continuous 24-
hour period without leakage.
a) The fabricator must attest/certify in writing the satisfactory performance, and
that any defects found were corrected before shipping the tank.
2) The tank manufacturer must provide a written certificate of successful
waterproofing testing and written certification that the tanks are capable of
withstanding seismic activity per the rated seismic zone for this project.
3) The tank manufacturer must provide written certification that the tank is
sufficiently attached to the integral steel frame to prevent flotation of the tank
when the tank is empty but immersed/surrounded by adjacent groundwater.
3. Equipment Operation Certification
a. Provide the Contractor's certification that specified products and equipment is
installed and functioning per the Contract Documents.
b. Provide the Contractor’s certification that all piping systems were cleaned/flushed
out prior to connecting nozzles to the piping systems and before the Contractor
applies finishes to the basin(s).
4. Manufacturer’s Written Certifications Required

a. BaseCrete cementitious waterproofing written certification is mandatory for basins

on podium and on-structure when waterproofing quality and surety is critical.
b. Underwater lighting equipment manufacturer must provide a written certification
including written documentation of UL listing (or equivalent) and NEC compliance for
underwater lighting equipment components in swimming pools (including UL/NEC
required grounding).
c. Lights, Junction Boxes, Cable Installation, & Potting: Provide the certifications
relating to the proper installation of the underwater lights, the junction boxes, the
potting, all in accordance with the manufacturers’ requirements and
recommendations without exception. Use extreme caution and safety practices to
ensure no stray voltage is released into the water basin.
d. Nozzles: The manufacturer must certify that the fountain piping systems were
flushed out (to remove foreign debris) by the Contractor prior to the installation of
the nozzle assemblies.
e. Manufacturers for each/all chemical/sanitation equipment, control panels, filtration
equipment, heaters, pumping systems, submersible pumps, and VFD’s must provide
written certification that the products were installed in complete conformance with
their recommendations/requirements.
5. Concrete Mass Anchors Written Certifications:
a. Provide written documentation certifying the provision of the concrete-mass-
anchors at each rail and ALU (in compliance with the drawings).
1) A written statement from the Contractor certifying the dimensional requirements
of the specified mass anchor sizing is required.
2) Digital photos of the mass anchor installation activities are required.
N. REVIEW OF PROJECT DOCUMENTS
1. Submit three (3) sets of “as-built” drawings (Record-Set) and one (1) set of electronic
PDF files. As-Built Drawings must reflect “as-installed” deviations in red ink on the “For
Construction” Drawings.
2. As-Built (Record-Set) Drawings must accurately record actual and verified:
a. The location and elevation of each pool basin
b. The horizontal/elevation locations of all conduits, pull-boxes, & transformers/power
supplies
c. All piping locations and elevations
d. All conduit & pipe trenches (showing horizontal and vertical locations, slopes,
starting invert elevations, and termination invert elevations of conduits and pipes)
e. All related equipment
f. A written description of excavation difficulties and irregularities encountered during
the construction phase
g. All de-watering ports and access areas
3. Submit 3 DVDs containing operating instructions, photos, and maintenance duties of the
Owner’s personnel.
4. Warranty and fully-paid purchased preventative maintenance certificates
5. Governmental certificate of completion of this project.
6. Governmental-issued operating permit for each pool basin.

1.09 QUALITY CONTROL

A. PROCEDURES
1. Quality Control must include the following specified procedures:
a. Use of qualified installers and personnel
1) Commercial pool installer qualification is mandatory & required before the award
of the contract bid. Submit these qualifications to This Engineer on form AIA A305
(or its equivalent).
2) Pool installer must meet local and verified state certifications and license
requirements before bidding. Copies of required certificates and licenses must be
made available upon request.
b. Performance of work per applicable codes and standards
c. Hold clearance dimensions and mounting heights specified by the NEC, as recited
below, & in the Contract Documents. Submit conflicts for written direction.
d. Perform work per the applicable municipal, county, and state codes along with
applicable permits.
e. No re-use irrigation water is allowed within 10 feet [3.05 m] of any pool or pool wet
deck.
f. Water-level sensitive edges & trims (gutter lip, infinity edge, and weirs) must be
precisely level
g. Excellent artistry is required.
B. SOILS QUALITY & CERTIFICATIONS
1. No deflections or settlement of the soils are permissible.
2. Vacate standing water before placing concrete.
3. The Owners’ Geotech and Owners’ Coastal Engineers’ written reports (for projects next
to a bay, gulf, or an ocean) must dictate the need/requirement for piers/pilings.
4. The Contractor must provide to This Engineer the Geotech Engineer’s written report(s)
certifying the backfill/compaction/density requirements were completed/observed per
the Geotech’s written requirements.
C. PRE-INSTALLATION STRUCTURAL MEETING
1. At least 35 days before the start of the reinforced concrete construction schedule, the
Contractor must conduct a pre-installation conference at the project site to review the
proposed mix designs and to discuss the required methods and procedures to achieve
the necessary concrete construction.
2. The Contractor must require representatives of every party who is concerned with the
concrete work to attend the conference, including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Contractor’s superintendent
b. Testing laboratory
c. Concrete / Shotcrete installer
d. Ready-mix concrete producer
e. Admixture manufacturer(s) Representative (Xypex)
f. This Engineer

3. Minutes of the meeting must be recorded, typed, and printed and distributed to the
Architect, This Engineer, and to the Owner by the Contractor within three (3) days after
the meeting.
D. QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
1. Commercial pool installer requirements:
a. The commercial pool installer must have not less than ten (10) years of successful
experience in the installation of similar commercial-type pools.
1) The commercial pool installer must supply a 100% performance, labor, and
material bond for the work.
2) The commercial pool installer (or his designee) must be licensed as a commercial
pool contractor or installer and be legally authorized to perform the work
outlined in the Contract Documents or must employ such a qualified, licensed
installer to complete this job.
2. Delegated Engineering Services to be employed by the Contractor or Installer:
a. Reference to Delegated Engineering Services is equivalent to a Specialty Designated
Engineer, Specialty Electrical Engineer, Specialty Component Engineer.
b. Each Specialty Designated Engineer must be a licensed professional in the
governmental locale of the project. The Contractor, as a Complete Build Activity,
provides (and pays for) these engineers.
1) Specialty Electrical Engineer: A locally-licensed, professional engineer to provide
the electrical power, control wiring, bonding, earthing, and grounding design for
the pools.
2) Specialty Component Engineer: A locally-licensed, professional engineer to
provide the total specialty structural, safety, and product-specific design for the
following systems:
a) Heater ducting, dual-wall flues, and similar venting systems
b) HVAC and ventilation systems (independent, separate systems) for chemical
and equipment room
3. Manufacturer: A company specializing in manufacturing the products specified with a
minimum of ten years of documented experience
4. Crystalline Water-Proofing Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer to be ISO 9001
registered, and to have no less than 10-years’ experience in manufacturing the
crystalline waterproofing additive & add-mix for the specified concrete work.
a. The manufacturer must provide field service representation during the construction
phase.
1) Manufacturers that cannot provide the performance test data specified may not
be considered and are disallowed for the project.
b. Pre-construction meeting required: Before construction, the waterproofing
manufacturer’s representative must meet with the Contractor to discuss and
coordinate activities.
1) Provide the meeting minute’s document to This Engineer for review and approval.
5. Shotcrete Applicator:

a. Selected company must supply qualified and experienced nozzlemen. Each

nozzleman must have a minimum of five years documented-experience on projects
like this one and certified as per ACI 506.3R-82. Consult with manufacturers
regarding concrete mix design, project conditions and proper dosage rates of water-
proof admix. Coordinate with and provide required trial mixes conducted at the Site.
1) Gunite is disallowed on this project without specific written approval by This
Engineer.
6. Concrete Specialty Installer:
a. The concrete specialty installer must be qualified in the field of concrete repair and
protection with a successful record of accomplishment of 5 years or more for similar
projects.
b. Installer must maintain qualified personnel who have received documented product
training by a manufacturer's representative
7. Tile and Tile Installation Materials Manufacturers:
a. Company specializing in ceramic tile, mosaics, pavers, trim units, and movement
joints with five (5) years minimum experience.
b. Obtain tile components & materials from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and specified physical properties such
as "non-slip" and "slip-resistant."
c. Installation materials company specializing in adhesives, mortars, epoxy grouts and
other installation materials with ten (10) years minimum experience and ISO 9001
certification.
8. Tile and natural stone Installer Qualifications:
a. Tile and stone installing company specializing in the installation of ceramic tile,
mosaics, pavers, trim units, thresholds, natural stone, movement joints, and epoxy
grouts with five (5) years documented experience with aquatic-type installations of
similar scope, materials, and design.
1) Demonstrate a prior knowledge of tile and finish movement joints
b. Installers of tile for wholly tiled basins must be manufacturer-certified technicians,
have documented experience field-knowledge of similar aquatic projects, and the
installation of movement joints.
c. Installers must install water-level sensitive edges & trims (infinity edge, trims, and
weirs) to be precisely level
9. Pool Interior Plaster Finish Applicator / Installer: Plaster finish applicators must have a
minimum five (5) years of documented experience in the trade of pool plastering
installations and the application of "KrystalKrete" or an approved equivalent quartz-
aggregate-type product.
a. The applicator/installer must be a member of the National Plaster’s Council in good
standing.
b. The installer must provide documentation/certification that the laborers performing
the work on site have been factory trained by the pool finish manufacturer.
c. The installer must provide a letter of reference from the pool finish manufacturer.

10. Single layer EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system (Life-Floor) certified
installer:
a. Certificate of qualifications of the certified installers
b. Utilize a certified installer having experience with projects of similar scope and
complexity.
11. Electrical Contractor / Installer: Specified electrical work to be performed by a locally-
licensed electrical contractor with a documented 5 years’ experience on similar projects.
12. Deck Pedestal Support Installer:
a. The deck support system installer must have a minimum of 2-years documented
deck support construction experience, and expertly handle materials. All Work must
comply with the Bison installation application procedures for deck support work
specified herein.
b. The installer assumes the responsibility for and must take into consideration that the
density of the insulation is satisfactory to resist crushing and damaging the
waterproofing membrane.
E. MATERIALS AND REGULATIONS
1. Use of materials and equipment:
a. Use only approved materials and equipment.
b. Without exception, materials and equipment must be in “new” condition and carry a
comprehensive manufacturer’s warranties beginning on the date of Substantial
Completion.
c. The manufacturer’s maintenance and installation instructions (with warranty
documents) must accompany all equipment.
d. Affirm materials and equipment are not damaged or impaired by on-site storage
from the time of delivery until the date of installation.
F. ARCHITECTURAL/ENGINEERING OBSERVATIONS
1. Include and anticipate a minimum of six (6) Architectural / Engineering observations in
the contractor’s scope of work as described below:
2. Multiple observations may be required when there are numerous basins and differing
installation schedules.
3. Typical observation events are:
a. Observation of forms and steel work before shotcrete or concrete placement.
1) The installation of the approved potting kit on all underwater ground lugs and
their exposed copper wires.
2) The installation of the approved potting kit on all “in-structure” ground lugs,
ground connectors, and the junction of the ground wire at each reinforcing
location and their exposed copper wires.
b. Observation of under-deck, underground, and underwater piping during the
necessary water pressure testing. Observations must follow interface of the piping
with the Equipment Room before backfilling and covering of under-deck and
underground piping.
c. Additional and follow-up observations of water-pressure testing on the Equipment
Room piping systems.

d. Observation of basin just prior to the application of the tile and interior surface
finishes material. Tile & other finishes’ movement joints must be in place prior to this
observation.
e. The potting of the “to-be-submerged” junction boxes will be reviewed as well as the
bonding and grounding of the underwater light units. The Contractors’
demonstration of the “ringing” resulting from the successful completion of the
bonding & grounding testing must be observed/reviewed at this time.
f. Observation at the time of start-up, commissioning, and testing, before Substantial
Completion.
g. Owner’s review and Substantial Completion.
4. Provide 72-hour notice of these observations by informing the Architect and This
Engineer.
5. Photo-Documentation events required:
a. Piling execution and accompanying Geo-Tech Observation Notes and Comments.
b. Underwater light and pump junction boxes after the potting Re-Enterable Compound
have been installed (perform the photo documentation without the junction box’s
cover being installed) revealing the adequacy of the installed potting compound.
1) Submit to This Engineer within 2 days of the completed provision of the Re-
Enterable Potting Compound.
6. Coordinate additional inspections with the local building department and other
regulatory agencies as may be specified.
G. TESTING SERVICES
1. General: Provide written reports from licensed testing engineer indicating successful
compliance with specified requirements
2. All piling execution activities must be monitored by the Geo-Tech Consultant without
exception.
3. Compaction Testing Services at the following locations:
a. Beneath basin and adjacent decking
b. Beneath the collector / surge / reservoir tank(s)
c. Beneath below-grade rooms / vaults
d. Within pipe trenches, prior to piping installation
e. Excavations beneath previously-compacted locations (such as basin structures and
placed-decks) will require a professional recommendation from the Geotechnical
Consultant as to the proper method of compaction or methods to fill voids between
soils, potential sinkholes, and the underside of a structure or deck.
4. Shotcrete / Concrete Materials
a. The following compression/break cylinder tests must be made and recorded:
1) 7 days
2) 14 days
3) 28 days
4) 56 days
5) The last cylinder (5th) must be left available for 120 days

b. Before the start of work, the testing firm will verify mix proportions, graduation, and
quality of aggregate. Written certification of aggregates’ quality must be provided to
the Architect and This Engineer.
c. Identification number or name of mix to verify agreement with compression test
reports.
d. Concrete / Shotcrete must be successfully tested prior to application of any surface
finish work.
1) Testing results must be recorded and submitted to the Architect and Contractor
for approval before the start of basin installation work.
1.10 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
A. TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND WATER
1. Provide and meter the water used in the leak testing.
2. Provide and meter the electrical power during the construction period.
B. SITE WORK, TRENCHING, AND PLENUMS
1. Exact locations of below-grade equipment, including piping and electrical centers, must
be verified before excavation and coordinated with the owner’s representative and the
Architect.
2. Core-Drilling or Concrete Penetrations:
a. Obtain specific written approval from the Architect before core-drilling or
penetrating concrete floors or walls after the concrete has been placed.
b. No penetrations or anchors through or into building walls, floors, or ceilings must be
made without prior written approval from the Project's Structural Engineer of
Record.
3. Piping between the Equipment Room, basin, and perimeter basin piping must be
located only in main subterranean trenches or designated passageways within “on-
structure” projects.
a. If applicable, trenches must be excavated, protected, backfilled, and compacted in
accordance with codes, regulations, and the Contract Documents without exception.
4. No rated building partitions must be penetrated unless expressly approved in writing by
the Project’s Architect.
5. No PVC or similar petrochemical piping may be installed into plenums.
1.11 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. PRODUCTS
1. Except as explicitly noted in the Contract Documents, the products of a single
manufacturer for each type category of material or equipment must be utilized
throughout.
B. EQUIPMENT DUTY RATING
1. Equipment and materials must be capable of both continuous and intermittent duty
rating and operation.
2. Pump motors controlled via VFD’s must be VFD Duty rated.
C. CONDITION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

1. Materials and equipment must be new, undamaged, and protected and secured
throughout the construction period in order that the equipment and materials remain in
a new condition at the time of Substantial Completion. Deliver and store equipment,
materials, and products components with labels intact and legible.
a. Immediately inspect all delivered equipment, materials, and products to ensure they
are undamaged and in excellent condition. Report damages and unacceptable
conditions on the contractors’ daily report.
b. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
2. Store expansion joints & water stops indoors or under appropriate tarps to protect from
premature exposure to oil, sunlight, moisture, and water.
3. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials such as construction adhesive, and
materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with the requirements of
local authorities having authority.
a. Store materials to be protected from exposure (the sun, rain, & moisture) to harmful
environmental conditions and at a minimum temperature of 20 degrees F (-7
degrees C) and a maximum temperature of 100 degrees F (38 degrees C).
D. PERFORMANCE CERTIFICATION REQUIRED:
1. The water entering the pool will be pristine, bright, free from suspended matter visible
to the unaided eye, and will be sanitary rated as potable to the satisfaction of
governmental authorities and This Engineer.
2. The equipment suppliers and manufacturers must certify/guarantee that their
equipment to be furnished is:
a. the correct capacity
b. the various components/parts are designed to operate correctly and in conjunction
with each other
c. to perform the prescribed functions correctly & precisely
1.12 WARRANTIES & SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. TWO-YEAR WARRANTY – EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS INSTALLATION:
1. Provide a minimum two (2) year warranty covering pool workmanship, materials, and
equipment from the date of substantial completion of the work (or longer if specified in
the General Conditions and herein).
2. Stainless Steel Pools must have a specialized warranty, executed by the manufacturer,
agreeing to repair, or replace pool system components provided by the manufacturer
that have failed and/or directly result in leakage of the pool.
a. The manufacturer and / or his authorized distributors warrant that the provided
materials will be free of defects when used and maintained in accordance with
Seller’s recommendations.
3. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate warranty requirements with any
related sections or adjacent Work. Notify the Architect and This Engineer immediately
of any potential lapses or limitations in warranty coverage.
4. Standard manufacturer's warranties must apply to equipment, materials, and products
provided by the Contractor.

B. MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY:
1. General:
a. Two-year manufacturer’s warranty minimum for defects in materials and equipment
(or more extended if so specified elsewhere by the specific manufacturer).
1) Five-year warranty on quartz aggregate plaster finishes
b. Owner to be named on manufacturers’ warranties.
c. Replace equipment that fails or shows undue wear.
d. Additional warranties must be as specified in the Architect’s Division 1 - “General
Conditions.”
e. If equipment items are provided with a more extended warranty than the minimum
warranty period, those warranties also must be transferred to the Owner as part of
the Project Close-Out Documents.
2. Specific other warranties:
a. Accessible Lift Units: Five-year warranty for the lift unit and anchor
b. ChlorKing® power supply must be warranted as follows:
1) The manufacturer warrants:
a) the electrical components, pumps and cell containment tank of the ChlorKing®
systems to be free of defects for one year from date of installation.
b) electrode plates of the ChlorKing® system for one year, and then prorated for
one year after. (See actual warranty statement for details)
c) assembly and workmanship of components of the ChlorKing® system to be
free of defects for three years.
c. Enduro Turbo-Clean XL Robotic Automatic Pool Vacuum Cleaner System:
1) Stainless steel casing: Seven-year warranty
2) Overall device: Two-year warranty
d. EVA-rubber Copolymer Wet Area Surfacing System (Life-Floor)
1) Manufacturer warrants all 7/8-inch and 3/8-inch-thick EVA-rubber Copolymer
Wet Area Surfacing System for a term of Five-years from the date of delivery.
2) The manufacturer must warrant all 3/16-inch-thick EVA-rubber Copolymer Wet
Area Surfacing System tiles for a term of Three-years from the date of delivery.
3) The manufacturer must warrant all tiles for a term of Two-years from the date of
delivery.
e. Floor Access Doors:
1) Provide the manufacturer’s standard warranty.
2) Materials must be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of
twenty-five years from the date of purchase.
f. Grate Tech by Daldorado: Ten-year warranty
g. Pumps:
1) Manufacturer’s standard pump warranty. Warranty on mechanical seals covering
100% of the cost of parts and labor extending over the same time period as the
provided pump warranty.

2) Pump failure of any pump component directly attributable to materials or

workmanship within Two-years after shipment must be repaired or replaced FREE
of charge by the pump manufacturer.
3) Motor failure of any motor component directly attributable to materials or
workmanship within Three-years after shipment must be repaired or replaced
FREE of charge by the pump manufacturer.
h. Rails (& Ladders): Warranty duration must be a minimum Three-years from the date
of installation & cover any failure in the material defect.
i. Regenerative Media Filtration (Defender)
1) Defender filter tanks with Flexsol 3000: Ten-year fully-rated warranty
2) Bump tire and internal tube elements: Three-year fully-rated warranty
3) Defender-supplied valve bodies: Five-year fully-rated warranty
C. SPECIAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
1. In addition to the Contractor, the following noted manufacturer(s) agrees to provide
evidence of product liability insurance (a Certificate of Insurance) naming the owner,
architect and Aquatic Design & Engineering, Inc. each as an additional insured. This
insurance will be maintained for a minimum of Five-years.
2. The Contractor and the same following noted manufacturer(s) agrees to indemnify, hold
harmless, and defend the owner, the architect and Aquatic Design & Engineering, Inc.
including their agents and employees for any and claims, damages, losses and expenses
of whatsoever nature, including but not limited to claims for property damage, personal
injury (including death), reasonable attorney’s fees, litigation expenses, court costs and
other damages arising out of or incidental to, resulting from or in connection with
performance of the Contractor and these manufacturer(s) work and products.
D. EXTENDED CORRECTION PERIOD
1. Pre-paid preventative maintenance certificates and operations:
a. Various components and materials require regular or Preventative Maintenance
(PM) operations to be performed by an authorized manufacturer's representative.
Provide the following PM inspections as a part of Base Bid, advance pay for these
PM's:
1) 6-months after Date of Substantial Completion
b. Examine, adjust, and repair the following equipment components as necessary to
maintain operating parameters outlined in the Contract Documents and the
manufacturers’ instructions & recommendations.
1) Auto-fill systems, auto-level sensors, pressure sensors, water flow switches
2) Automated valves
3) Accessible lift devices
4) Backflow preventers and water hammer arrestors
5) Chemical componentry / chemical & mechanical space controllers
6) Filters

7) Heaters and heater exhaust / venting systems

8) LED lights, power supplies / transformers, LED RGBW color changing controls,
level sensors, wind sensors, automated nozzle componentry, etc.
9) Non-slip surfaces
10) Pumps
11) Saline chlorination systems
2. Contractor-provided chemical-supply, cleaning, and maintenance responsibilities
include:
a. Total care, the operation of equipment, routine maintenance, the supply of
chemicals and expendables keeping the system operating within specified
parameters for the initial first 60-days.
1) The Owner will provide electrical power and replenishment of potable water
during this initial Contractor-responsibility period
b. Refer to the Chemical Feeder sections for additional chemical supplies to be provided
to the Owner by the Contractor.
1.13 ATTIC STOCK
A. GENERAL
1. Obtain a receipt for all attic stock items from the Owner to prove delivery
B. MATERIALS
1. Furnish to the Owner an extra stock of 5 percent minimum (of the installed materials)
for the following articles:
a. Tile, copings, grating, and trim edges/surfaces for all shapes to include each type,
color, pattern, and size used in the Work
1) Attic stock (for finish materials) is to be from same production run or batch of
original tile and installation materials.
b. Extra stock (5% of the amount used) of adhesives, mortars, epoxy grouts, pool
plaster, grating units, and other installation materials for the Owner's use in
replacement and maintenance.
1) Please each of the above in 5-gallon containers (or its equivalent), water-proofed,
and labeled for contents
C. SPARE PARTS
1. Refer to the Equipment Schedule and Equipment Schedules for additional strainer
baskets, filter elements, screen filters, and other specified equipment parts specified for
attic stock.
2. Provide specified components in individual boxes (with the part name and model
number clearly marked on the box) to the owner.
D. SPECIAL TOOLS
1. Provide special tools specified for continued operation and maintenance of the
equipment provided under this Section.
2. For the proper functioning of the deck anchors: One anchor spanner wrench must be
supplied with each set of two (2) anchors.

3. Deliver tools to the Owner’s operating personnel during the start-up and testing of the
equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIC POOL BASIN CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
A. GENERAL
1. It is the design intent of these technical specifications, Drawings, and Contract
Documents for the Contractor (and his selected Installers) to provide equipment, labor,
materials, & supervision as required (without exception) for the construction and
installation of the pool(s) & related assemblies at this project site.
2. Activities included, but not limited to, by the Contractor must be layout, forming,
excavation, dewatering, compaction, reinforcing steel, basin structural concrete,
waterproofing, backfill & compaction, piping & valving systems, basin and deck
equipment, finishes, collector, reservoir, & surge tanks, tank anchoring, tank drainage
(for below-grade tanks), filtration systems, pumping systems, chemical systems, air
compressors, miscellaneous equipment systems as noted herein and in the Drawings,
Contract Documents, electrical, Stainless Steel Basin, choreography & programming, and
other components, equipment, labor, materials, & supervision needed although not
explicitly listed.
3. Additionally, included also by the Contractor must be all required components,
equipment, labor, materials, & supervision for start-up, commissioning, chemical
balancing of basin water, warranty, instruction, maintenance during the initial operating
period’s operation, choreography & programming, and similar products & services.
4. Application, employment, and use of components, equipment, labor, materials, &
supervision must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions &
recommendations, the requirements of This Engineer, and the Contract Documents.
Written certifications from each manufacturer are required certifying that the
Contractor provided proper equipment, installation, and executed the installation to
their satisfaction & standards.
a. In the event of a conflict, notify This Engineer in writing requesting a written
clarification.
B. GEOTEXTILE NONWOVEN FILTER FABRIC
1. Filter fabric must be nonwoven, needle-punched, geotextile made of 100%
polypropylene staple filaments.
2. The polypropylene material must resist ultraviolet and biological deterioration, rotting,
naturally encountered bases, and acids.
3. The polypropylene must be stable within a pH range of 2 to 13 and satisfy the
requirements as outlined in AASHTO M288-06 for Class 3 applications and meet the
following M.A.R.V. values:
4.
Property Test Method Imperial Metric
Weight ASTM D-5261 4.5 oz./sq. yd. 142 g.sm
Tensile Strength ASTM D-4632 120 lbs. 533 N

Elongation ASTM D-4632 50% 50%

Mullen Burst ASTM D-3786 225 psi 1,551 kPa
Puncture Strength ASTM D-4833 65 lbs. 1,513 N
CBR Puncture ASTM D-6241 340 lbs. 1,513 N
Trapezoidal Tear ASTM D-4533 50 lbs. 222 N
Apparent Opening ASTM D-4571 70 US Sieve 0.212 mm
Size
Permittivity ASTM D-4491 1.70 Sec-1 1.70 Sec-1
Water Flow Rate ASTM D-4491 120 gpm/sf 4,885 l/min/sm
UV Resistance ASTM D-4355 70% 70%
5. The Basis of Design: Model US 120NW as manufactured by US Fabrics, Inc., 3904
Virginia Avenue, Cincinnati, OH 45227; 800.518.2290 ; info@usfabrics.com;
www.usfabrics.com
C. VAPOR BARRIERS
1. 10-mil extruded virgin polyolefin resins) single sheet) with the following minimum
properties:
a. Virgin polyolefin resins
b. The described 10-mil vapor barrier / retarder membrane must comply and meet the
minimum requirements of ASTM E1745 Class A, B, and C and the following ASTM’s:
Property ASTM Value

Water Vapor Permeance F1249 (perms) 0.018
Puncture Resistance 1709 (grams) 3000
Tensile Strength D882 (lb. f/in3 58
Life Expectancy E154 (years) Indefinite
Roll Dimensions Feet [M] 14 x 200 [4.26 x 60.9]
sq. Ft. [sq. M] 2800 [260.13]
Roll Weight lb. [kilograms] 134.6 [61.05]
Thickness (nominal) 10 mils
2. The Basis of Design: Vapor Barrier Model “Vapor Barrier 10 mil” as manufactured by
Americover, 2067 Wineridge Place, Ste F, Escondido, CA 92029, 800-747-6095,
www.americover.com.
D. CRUSHED ROCK / STONE
1. Stone description:
a. Provide a 4-inches [100 mm] minimum layer of 0.75-inch [20 mm] non-porous rock /
stone beneath the basin floor. This material must be equal to a #57 crushed stone.
b. Separate the crushed stone and the adjacent earthen soils with a geotextile
nonwoven filter fabric.
E. STEEL REINFORCEMENT

1. Steel reinforcing bars must be of the sizes and configuration shown in the applicable
sections of the Drawings.
a. Bars and Associated Materials: Provide to be Grade 60 [Grade 420 Metric], new, and
free of rust and scale.
2. Bars placed into the pool beam with less than 2.5-inches of waterproof concrete cover
must be #2 hot-dip galvanized, pencil-rod, deformed bars.
a. The Basis of Design: DUR-O-WAL DA8706 or pre-approved equal
3. Where seawater may encounter the basin structure, steel must be coated with a rust
inhibitor (or epoxy) coating (factory-applied after cutting). Do not cut any reinforcing
bars in the field when provided with a protective coating.
F. CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS (TROWEL-GRADE MORTAR & JOINT FILLERS)
1. Concrete radii filler (at the juncture of the basin’s wall & floor), trowel-grade mortar,
rehabilitation, resurfacing, and topping,
a. Materials
1) Polymer-modified Portland cementitious mortar:
a) Component A: Liquid polymer emulsion with an acrylic copolymer base and
additives.
i: pH: 4.5-6.5
ii: Film Forming Temperature: 73°F max.
iii: Tear Strength: 950 PSI [6.55 mPa] min.
iv: Elongation at Break: 500% min.
v: Particle Size: less than 0.1 micron
b) Component A must contain an organic, penetrating corrosion inhibitor which
has been independently proven to reduce corrosion in concrete via ASTM G3
(half-cell potential tests). The corrosion inhibitor must not be calcium nitrite
and must have a minimum of 5 years of independent field testing to document
performance on actual construction projects.
c) Component B: A blend of selected Portland cement, specially graded
aggregates, admixtures for controlling setting time, water reducers for
workability, and an organic accelerator.
d) The materials must be noncombustible, both before and after the cure.
e) The materials must be supplied in a factory-proportioned unit.
f) Mortar must be placeable from 1/8-inch to 1-inch in depth per lift for
horizontal applications.
2) To prepare a polymer-modified Portland cement concrete: aggregate must
conform to ASTM C-33. The factory proportioned unit must be extended with 42-
lb. maximum of a 3/8 inch (No.8 distribution per ASTM C-33, Table II) clean, well-
graded, saturated surface dry aggregate, having low absorption and high density.
b. Performance Criteria
1) Typical Properties of the mixed polymer-modified, Portland cement mortar:
a) Color: concrete gray when mixed
2) Typical Properties of the cured polymer-modified, Portland cement mortar:
a) Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109 Modified)

i: 1-day: 3,000 psi min. [20.7 mPa]

ii: 7-days: 5,500 psi min. [37.9 mPa]
iii: 28-days: 7,000 psi min. [48.3 mPa]
b) Flexural Strength (ASTM C-293) @ 28 days: 2000 psi [13.8 mPa]
c) Splitting Tensile Strength (ASTM C-496) @ 28 days 750 psi [5.2 mPa]
d) Bond Strength (ASTM C-882 Modified) @ 28 days: 2200 psi [15.2 mPa]
e) The Portland cement mortar must not produce a vapor barrier.
f) Density (wet mix): 136 lbs. / cu. feet [2.18 kg/l]
g) Permeability (AASHTO T-277 @ 28 days Approximately 500 Coulombs)
c. The Basis of Design:
1) Horizontal Surfaces: SikaTop 122 Plus, a 2-part trowel-grade mortar by Sika
Corporation, is considered to conform to the requirements of this specification.
Sika U.S, Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Avenue, Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; 1-800-933-
7452
2) Vertical and Overhead Surfaces: SikaTop 123 Plus, a 2-part trowel-grade mortar
by Sika Corporation, by Sika Corporation, is considered to conform to the
requirements of this specification. Sika U.S, Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Avenue,
Lyndhurst, NJ 07071; 1-800-933-7452; www.usa.sika.com
2. Crack Joint Filler
a. For use on static and dynamic joints (or cracks that are opened to allow sealing)
b. Observe manufacturers’ recommendations and installation procedures.
c. The Basis of Design: Sika Duoflex NS, Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Ave., Lyndhurst, NJ
07071 USA, 800.933.7452; www.usa.sika.com
3. Concrete patching and overlay
a. A one-component, pourable, rapid hardening, Portland-cement concrete containing
factory blended coarse aggregate designed for quick turnaround, overlay needs, and
formulated to compensate for shrinkage
b. Uses:
1) Structural repair on horizontal, vertical, and overhead surfaces (formed)
2) On-grade, above, and below grade on concrete
3) Full-depth repairs and a filler for voids and cavities
c. Typical properties:
1) Flexural Strength @ 28 days: 700 psi [5.0 MPa]
2) Bond Strength @ 1 day: 2,500 psi [17.2 MPa]
3) Bond Strength @ 7 days: 3,000 psi [20.7 MPa]
4) Compressive Strength@ 2 hours: 2,500 psi [17.2 MPa]
5) Compressive Strength@ 1 day: 5,000 psi [34.5 MPa]
6) Compressive Strength @ 28 days: 7.500 psi [51.7 MPa]
d. The Basis of Design: Sikacrete 321 FS, Sika Corporation, 201 Polito Ave., Lyndhurst, NJ
07071 USA, 800.933.7452; www.usa.sika.com
G. SEALANTS
1. General: Sealants must be RTV Silicone base, manufactured by General Electric, mildew,
and chlorine resistant, capable of continuous water submersion, color as selected.

2. Deck sealant (between the deck and pool beam) must be Deck-O-Seal One Step or
Sikaflex 12-SL. Deck-O-Seal: Hampshire, IL (800-542-7665); www.deckoseal.com . The
Sika Corporation: Lyndhurst, NJ (210-933-8800); www.usa.sika.com.
H. UNDERWATER SEALANTS
1. The Basis of Design for underwater expansion joints for Contractor or pool installer:
a. Submerseal by EMSEAL Joint Systems, LTD; 25 Bridle Lane; Westborough, MA 01581-
2603; 800-526-8365. www.emseal.com.
b. Willseal 250BG by Willseal LLC, 34 Executive Drive, Hudson, NH 03051, 800-274-
2813, 800-416-0550 (Fax), www.willseal.com; email: custserv@willseal.com
1) Available in color “gray.”
2) Joint widths: 0.5-inch to 4-inches [13mm to 100mm]
2. The Basis of Design for underwater expansion joints for Manufacturer Certified Joint
Installer. The below-mentioned materials are pre-approved subject to the materials
being installed by a manufacturer’s Certified Joint Installer.
a. Horizontal underwater construction / expansion joints: “Dura-White” Deck-O-Seal
#125 by Deck-O-Seal Corporation, Hampshire, IL (800-542-7665);
www.deckoseal.com.
b. Vertical underwater construction / expansion joints: “Dura-White” Deck-O-Seal Gun
Grade by Deck-O-Seal Corporation, Hampshire, IL (800-542-7665);
www.deckoseal.com.
I. LINK-SEALS, WATERSTOPS, & WATERPROOF PENETRATIONS
1. Pre-fabricated water stops:
a. PVC Piping Waterstop Coupling: A circular PVC plate fabricated, or factory welded to
PVC pipe couplings must form the water stop.
1) The PVC, Sch. 80, plate must have an outside diameter of 2-inches [50 mm] more
significant than the pipe coupling diameter. Refer to the manufacturer for final
dimensions.
2) Waterstop plate thickness: 0.50-inch [13 mm] or greater. For “hot-air” PVC
welding, the water stop plate must be fillet-welded on both sides of the plate.
3) The integral use of PVC couplings must allow the socket welding of pipes into the
piping water stop couplings.
4) The Basis of Design:
a) Neptune Benson ; www.neptunebenson.com ; 800.832.8002
i: Approved Model #’s: W02 through W18 (2 through 18-inches [50 through
457 mm])
b) Daldorado, LLC., Ph: (888) 509-8128, 4327 Arnold Ave, Naples, FL 34104;
www.daldorado.com
b. Metallic Water stops at Pipe Coupling: Sizes same as PVC unit, except using arc
welding of the water stop plate (with constant materials) to the metallic pipe
coupling.
c. Waterstop Fittings – Sleeve Design

1) Waterstop Fittings are available in PVC and slide over the exterior of either 1.5-
inches [25 mm] or 2-inches [50 mm] Schedule 80 PVC (ADE Type 2) pipe. The units
are cemented (primed and glued) in place per these specifications requirements
in Piping.
2) Fittings must incorporate alignment holes enabling them to be secured to the
adjacent rebars to ensure exact alignment and penetration.
a) A.S.A. Manufacturing, Inc. 14879 SW 111th St., Dunnellon, FL 34432, USA,
800-827-7665, www.asamfg.com
i: Model “PVC-40-301” for 1.5-inches [25 mm] piping
ii: Model “PVC-40-302” for 2-inches [50 mm] piping
d. Fiberglass Waterstop Couplings
1) Fiberglass Waterstop Couplings are required for pipe sizes available in sizes
starting at 1-inch [25 mm] through 20-inches [500 mm].
2) Incorporate a rough exterior sand finish factory-welded to a PVC Sch 80 (ADE Type
2) fitting at the manufacturer’s facilities.
a) Critical: PVC Sch 40 (ADE Type 1) are NOT allowed.
3) Each fitting assembly must be accompanied by a manufacturer’s certification of
factory assembly workmanship quality (see Submittals).
a) A.S.A. Manufacturing, Inc. 14879 SW 111th St., Dunnellon, FL 34432, USA,
800-827-7665, www.asamfg.com
2. Link-Seals assemblies:
a. Sleeve features:
1) Molded from non-conductive, light-weight, high impact-resistant HDPE available
in diameters ranging from 2-inches [25 mm] to 25-inches [635 mm] in any length.
2) Hollow waterstop collar: 2-inches [50 mm] width.
3) Provide specially designed end caps for attaching the sleeves to the concrete
forms and assuring sleeve holds the circular configuration during the concrete
placement.
4) Provide sleeve with a textured exterior surface to assist in assuring a better
mechanical bond to the concrete interfaces.
5) The Basis of Design: Century Line thermoplastic wall sleeves by Thunderline/Link-
Seal, 6525 Goforth Street, Houston, TX 77021, 713.747.6948, www.linkseal.com
or a pre-approved equal.
b. Link-Seal Modular Seals with the following features:
1) Model "S-316L" Link-Seal Modular Seal
a) Suitable for use in water, direct ground burial, chemical exposure, and
atmospheric pressure
b) Must provide electrical isolation and cathodic protection
c) EPDM ("black" in color) with reinforced nylon polymer pressure plates
d) Nuts, bolts, and washers must be ANSI type stainless steel grade 316L, per
ASTM F593-95 with a tensile strength of 85,000 psi, minimum

c. The Basis of Design: Link-Seal assemblies (by PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal), 6525

Goforth Street, Houston, TX 77021, 713.747.6948, www.linkseal.com or a pre-
approved equal.
3. PVC water stops for moving expansion joints
a. Provide flexible PVC (polyvinyl chloride) water stop by Sika Greenstreak, profile style
as indicated in the Drawings.
1) The PVC water stop must be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of
which the core resin is prime virgin polyvinyl chloride.
2) The PVC compound must not contain any scrapped or reclaimed material or
pigment whatsoever.
3) The natural color of prime virgin polyvinyl chloride is an off-white, milky color.
b. Performance requirements are as follows:
Property Test Method Specified Limits
Water absorption ASTM D 570 0.15% max
Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 300 lb./in (0.339 kN/m) min.
Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 638 350% min.
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 2000 psi (13.78 Mpa) min.
o o
Low Temperature Brittleness ASTM D 746 No Failure @ -35 F (-37 C)
Stiffness in Flexure ASTM D 747 700 psi (4.82 Mpa) min.
Specific Gravity ASTM D 792 1.38 max.
Hardness, Shore A ASTM D 2240 79 +3
Tensile Strength after CRD-C 572 1600 psi (11.03 Mpa) min.
accelerated extraction
Elongation after accelerated CRD-C 572 300% min.
extraction
Effect of Alkalies after 7 days: CRD-C 572
Weight Change
Hardness Change between -0.10% / +0.25%
+/- 5 points
4. Hydrophilic water stop for non-moving contraction and construction joints

a. The Basis of Design:
1) Hydrophilic rubber water stop as supplied by Sika Greenstreak, HYDROTITE profile
style number CJ-0725-3K-ADH; www.usa.sika.com.
2) Alternate pre-approved material: SF302 Synko-Flex as manufactured by Henry
Company 999 N. Sepulveda, Ste 800, El Segundo CA 90245-2754; (800) 486-1278;
www.henry.com
b. The water stop must be a combination of chloroprene rubber and chloroprene
rubber modified to impart hydrophilic properties.
1) Products containing Bentonite are prohibited.
c. The water stop must have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion due to moisture
present in fresh concrete.
d. Performance requirements as follows:

1) Chloroprene Rubber
Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 1300 psi min.
Hardness (Shore A) ASTM D 2240 50 +/- 5
Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 100 lb./inch min.
2) Modified Chloroprene (Hydrophilic) Rubber

Tensile Strength ASTM D 412 350 psi min.
Hardness (Shore A) ASTM D 2240 52 +/- 5
Tear Resistance ASTM D 624 50 lb./inch
Expansion Ratio Volumetric 3 to 1 min.
Change -
Distilled Water
@ 70o F
5. PVC water stop accessories

a. Provide factory made water stop fabrications for changes of direction, intersections,
and transitions leaving only straight butt joint splices for the field.
b. Provide field-installed hog rings, or factory-installed punched holes or grommets
spaced at 12-inches [305 mm] on center along the length of water stop.
c. Provide Teflon coated thermostatically controlled water stop splicing irons for field
butt splices.
6. Hydrophilic Waterstops
a. Peel and Stick Adhesive Backing: HYDROTITE ADH
b. Two Component Epoxy Gel: Greenstreak 7300
c. Single Component Hydrophilic Sealant: LEAKMASTER
d. Cyanoacrylate Adhesive (Super Glue): As recommended by water stop manufacturer
J. JOINTS
1. Slip dowel system for expansion joint alignment
a. Provide Sika Greenstreak Speed Load System for expansion joints, to accept 1-inch
diameter x 18-inch-long slip/smooth dowels @ 24-inch o.c.
1) The unit is comprised of a one-piece polypropylene plastic sleeve with the base.
2) Provision for assuring proper field positioning and alignment of slip dowels at
concrete expansion joints.
3) Provisions for allowing free shrinkage and expansion of concrete surfaces
adjacent to expansion joints while providing proper load transfer and preventing
differential vertical movement.
2. Keyway insert for construction joint alignment
a. Sika Greenstreak 3.50-inches [89 mm] plastic keyway inserts (Catalog No. 521).

1) Provision for assuring concrete surfaces adjacent to construction joints provide

load transfer while preventing differential vertical movement.
3. Movement joints for finishes:
a. Mandatory movement joints are required in horizontal and vertical planes for the
various installations of coping, natural stone, racing lanes, wall & gutter tiles, and
similar finishes.
b. Flexible sealants for movement joints must be a high performance, one component,
neutral cure, 100% silicone sealant designed for tiles and stone applications, and
1) Must be manufacturer-certified for use in:
a) interior and exterior locations
b) swimming pool & wet area applications
c) expansion joints in residential & commercial applications
2) Physical properties:
a) Durometer Hardness- Shore A: 27
b) Tensile Strength: 280 psi [1.9 MPa]
c) Dynamic Joint Movement: +/- 25%
d) Weatherability (10,000 hours
QUV Weatherometer: No Change
3) Available in a wide variety of colors
c. The Basis of Design:
1) Model 4.16 Schluter®-DILEX-EDP; Schluter Systems L.P., 194 Pleasant Ridge Road,
Plattsburgh, NY 12901-5841; +1.800.472.4588; www.schluter.com
2) LATASIL sealant; Laticrete International, Inc., One Laticrete Park North, Bethany,
CT 06524; 800.243.4788; www.laticrete.com
K. ADHESIVES & GROUTS

1. Adhesives for the exterior, underwater, and submerged applications
a. Rated by the manufacturer as:
1) superior for the exterior, submerged, and underwater applications
2) ultimate adhesion for porcelain and glass tiles
b. The Basis of Design: Latex Portland Cement Thin Bed Mortar for thin set and slurry
bond coats: Weather, frost, and shock resistant, non-flammable, GreenGuard
compliant, conform to ISO C2TES1, and meeting the following physical requirements:
1) Shear bond in water immersion: > 300 psi [2.0 MPa]
2) 7-Day curing / 21-day water immersion
Tensile adhesion strength: > 170 psi [1.17 MPa]
3) Total VOC Content < 0.05 mg/m3
c. Latex Portland cement Thin Bed Mortar: LATICRETE 254 Platinum by LATICRETE
International, Inc. 1 LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA. Phone 800-
243-4788, www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green
2. Adhesives for spot bonding method of tile and stone installations

a. Rated by the manufacturer as:

1) High strength epoxy adhesive formulated for spot bonding method of tile and
stone installation on vertical and overhead surfaces for exterior applications
2) Adhesive for fabricating granite, marble, and stone
b. The Basis of Design: LATAPOXY 310 Stone Adhesive for a fast, permanent bond, non-
staining, resistant to shock and vibration, non-sag, conform to ANSI A118.3, ISO
13007, and EN 12004, and meeting the following physical requirements:
1) Shear bond to concrete: 720 to 920 psi [5.0 to 6.3 MPa]
2) Tensile adhesion strength: 1,500 to 2,100 psi [10.3 to 14.5 MPa]
3) 7-day cure shear adhesive strength 2,610 to 4,785 psi [18 to 33 MPa]
4) 7-day cure 21-day water immersion
shear adhesive strength 2,030 to 4,930 psi [14 to 34 MPa]
5) Thermal shock 1,030 to 1,600 psi [7 – 11 MPa]
3. Epoxy Grout
a. Only epoxy grouts in tiles or natural stone finishes are permitted
b. The Basis of Design: Laticrete SpectraLOCK PRO Premium Grout by LATICRETE
International, Inc. 1 LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA. Phone 800-
243-4788, www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green
1) Compressive Strength: 3,800 psi (@7 days) [26.2 MPa]
2) Tensile Strength: 1,100 psi (@7 days) [7.6 MPa]
4. Epoxy adhesive anchoring of reinforcing steel
a. The Basis of Design: "HIT-HY 200 Epoxy Adhesive Anchoring System", by Hilti.
1) Utilizing a #4 grade 60 deformed bar dowels with an imbed depth of 4.5-inches
[114.3 mm] into existing 4,000 PSI [27.58 mPa] existing concrete, the following
performance must be attained with a 7-day cure:
2) Bond strength (per ASTM C882-91): 18,540 psi [127.82 mPa]
3) Compressive strength (per ASTM D-695-96): 12,000 psi [82.74 mPa]
4) Tensile strength (per ASTM D-638-97): 6,310 psi [43.51 mPa]
5) Yield strength (as limited by grade 60 bars): 12,000 lbs. [5443.1 kGrams]
6) Tensile strength (as limited by grade 60 bars): 18,000 lbs. [8164.7 kGrams]
b. Adhesive must be furnished in side-by-side refill packs which keep component A and
component B separate. Side-by-side packs must be designed to compress during use
to minimize waste volume.
c. Side-by-side packs must also be designed to accept a static mixing nozzle which
thoroughly blends component A and component B and allows injection directly into
the drilled hole.
d. Injection adhesive must be formulated to include resin and hardener to provide
optimal curing speed as well as high strength and stiffness. Typical curing time at
68°F (20°C) must be approximately 12 hours.
5. Non-Shrink Grout
a. High-precision, non-shrink mineral, aggregate grout
1) Cement-based, non-metallic, & nonshrink
b. One-component – ready to mix and use

c. Fluid, flowable, plastic, & damp-pack consistencies

d. Nonshrinking - Leaves no gaps in equipment and forms
e. Compressive strength @ 7 days: 6,500 PSI [45 MPa]
f. The Basis of Design: Masterflow 713-Plus, by BASF Construction Chemicals, 889
Valley Park Drive, Shakopee, MN, 55379, www.BuildingSystems.BASF.com or
Engineer-approved equal.
L. CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING
1. For Cementitious Basin Applications:
a. Rehabilitation for existing basins and for Shotcrete Dry Mix (Gunite) type basins that
had no Xypex Crystalline Admix included within the design mix:
1) The rehabilitation of the basin’s interior surface is necessary. The initial
treatment must consist of a highly penetrating, highly viscous concrete densifier
to be used as the Preliminary Pool Shell Waterproofing (PPSW).
2) The PPSW must assist in penetrating deeply into the concrete matrix on a
molecular level, searching and filling out all the voids that might exist within the
existing concrete structure.
3) The PPSW must bond with the free Calcium and Lime within the Concrete,
transforming into a dense, waterproof barrier of colloidal silicate gel.
4) Achievement required:
a) Waterproof the surface of the concrete
b) Densify and strengthen the concrete
c) Control hydration
d) Exfoliate remaining entrapped salts
e) Assist in minimizing the reduction of rust on rebar
f) Reduce alkali-silica reactivity
5) Applicable Standards for PPSW to meet or exceed:
a) ASTM D56-91 Flash Point
b) ASTM D-5084-91 Permeability
c) ASTM C-666 Freeze/thaw cycles
d) ASTM C-666-B – Salt Resistance
e) ASTM C-67 – Efflorescence
f) Contain no VOC’s and be EPA Compliant
6) The Basis of Design: “BaseCrete +,” as manufactured by BaseCrete Technologies,
LLC, 6148 Clark Center Ave., Sarasota, FL 34238; 941.312.5142;
info@BaseCreteusa.com; www.BaseCreteusa.com
b. Cementitious waterproofing:
1) After the PPSW rehabilitation process is completed, the Contractor must provide:
2) BaseCrete Bondcoat must be a flexible Portland cement-based membrane coating
to concrete and masonry that resists both positive and negative hydrostatic
pressures and bond to the adjacent and immediate surfaces without exception.
a) This BaseCrete Bondcoat compound is a highly-specialized blend of
aggregates, cement, graded sands, and proprietary additives. The material is
to be used and mixed with the BaseCrete polymer as a waterproofing / overlay
/ micro-topping material.

3) Benefits, Features, & Properties:

a) Waterproofs and decorates, tenacious bonding capacity, becomes an integral
part of the substrate, durable, permanent, breathable, and extremely flexible.
b) Compressive Strength: 7,050 psi [48.61 MPa]
c) Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96: Passes
d) Pull Off: ASTM D4541.02 Surpasses
e) Adhesive strength on Concrete: 1,372 psi [9.46 MPa]
f) Adhesive Strength on Steel Plate: 1,144 psi [7.89 MPa]
g) Flexural Strength: 2,380 psi [16.41 MPa]
h) Impact Strength: 19 lbs. [8.6 kg]
i) Tensile Strength: 732 psi [5.05 MPa]
j) Sheer Bond Adhesion: 720 psi [4.96 MPa]
k) Potable Water Interface: NSF/ANSI 61-2012
Section 5: Complies
4) The product must be specifically applicable to the following applications and use:
a) Waterproof Bondcoat
b) Waterproof Bondcoat in suspended pool basins
c) Waterproof overflow gutters in infinity and vanishing edge pools
d) Swimming Pools & Spas
e) Water Features
f) Tanks and Cisterns
g) Balconies
h) Repair of Concrete Structures
i) To Protect Against Corrosion
i: Two coats (achieving a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch) is required to
create a waterproof condition.
5) The Basis of Design: BASECRETE Flexible Waterproof Bondcoat
a) BaseCrete Technologies, LLC, 6148 Clark Center Ave., Sarasota, Florida 34238;
941-312-5142; www.BaseCreteusa.com
2. For Tiled Applications:
a. Basin waterproofing for basin finishes that consist of completely tiled surfaces on
pools and water features:
1) The Basis of Design: Laticrete Hydro-Ban by LATICRETE International, Inc. 1
LATICRETE Park North, Bethany, CT 06524-3423 USA. Phone 800-243-4788,
www.laticrete.com; www.laticrete.com/green
a)
7-day tensile strength 265-psi [1.8 MPa]
7-day water immersion 95-psi [0.7 MPa]
7-day shear bond 200-psi [1.4 MPa]
M. ADMIXTURES
1. Crystalline waterproofing additive

a. System Description: Concrete waterproofing system must be of the crystalline type,

defined by the ACI 212.3R – 10 Report on Chemical Admixtures for Concrete as a
“PRAH” type hydrophilic admixture.
1) It must react such that it chemically controls and permanently fixes a non-soluble
crystalline structure throughout the capillary voids of the concrete.
2) The system must cause the concrete to become sealed against the penetration of
liquids from any direction, and must protect the concrete from deterioration due
to harsh environmental conditions.
3) Xypex Admix must be added to the concrete mix at the time of batching.
a) For enhanced chemical protection or meeting specific project requirements, or
where the concrete mix design contains higher than 20% fly ash content or
includes a Portland cement/slag cement blend, consult with the manufacturer
or its authorized representative to determine appropriate dosage rate and
product type.
b) The ready-mix supplier must coordinate with Xypex to ensure the proper type
and dosage of Xypex will be provided based on, but not limited to, the specific
products used in the mix design and the conditions at the job site.
i: Written confirmation stating that this coordination has taken place must
be provided in the same submittal package as the concrete mix designs.
b. The Basis of Design: Xypex Chemical Corporation, 13731 Mayfield Place, Richmond,
B.C., Canada V6V 2G9, Tel: 800 961.4477 or 604 273.5265 Fax: 604 270.0451 E-mail:
info@xypex.com Website: www.xypex.com
1) Xypex Admix Type C-500-NF or C-1000-NF (as recommended by the manufacturer
for the specific mix(es) being used) by Xypex crystalline waterproofing materials
as follows:
a) Utilize this additive formula unless noted otherwise in the drawings or these
specifications.
b) Dosage Rate (for this Admix only):
i: 1.25% by weight of Portland cement content
2) Alternate, approved formulation: Xypex type C-500 and C-1000.
a) Dosage Rate (for this Admix only):
i: 2.50% by weight of Portland cement content
c. Substitutions: Not permitted
d. Source Quality: Obtain proprietary crystalline waterproofing products from a single
manufacturer.
e. Setting Time and Strength:
1) Some retardation of the set may occur when using Xypex Admix products. The
amount of retardation will depend upon the concrete mix design, the Admix
product used, dosage rate of the Admix, the temperature of the concrete, and
climatic conditions.
2) Concrete containing a Xypex Admix product may develop higher ultimate
strengths than plain concrete.
2. Admixtures, General:

a. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add

air-entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete
at the point of placement having air content within the following limits:
1) Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing or subjected to
hydraulic pressure:
a) 3 to 15 percent for maximum 2-inches aggregate.
b) 4-1/2 % to 6-1/2 % for maximum 1-inch aggregate.
c) 5 to 7 percent for maximum 3/4-inch aggregate.
d) 6 to 8 percent for maximum 1/2-inch aggregate.
e) Other Exterior Concrete: 2 to 4 percent
b. Use of admixtures for water-reducing and set control must be permitted only with
prior approval of the engineer for each condition and must be in strict compliance
with the manufacturer's directions.
c. Design mix submittals must include these admixtures and must indicate for which
types of concrete structures they are to be used.
d. Provide the admixtures recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions
prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as
required to maintain quality control.
e. Use of calcium chloride will not be permitted.
N. POLYPROPYLENE EXPANSION BOARD
1. The manufacturer must certify the product as having the following properties:
a. Excellent compression and recovery properties
b. Does not rot or deteriorate
c. Sturdy and durable; will not break with normal handling
d. Lightweight, easy to handle
e. Resistant to a wide variety of chemicals and solvents
f. Can be cut with conventional tools
g. Will not split; can be fastened to stakes with screws or ring shank nails
h. Excellent for use with Sika Greenstreak’s Speed Dowel® joint system
2. Dis-allowed products:
a. Asphalt
b. Impregnated fiberboard
c. Pine or redwood (or similar wood products)
3. Physical Properties
Property Test Method Typical Value
Flat Crush TAPPL-T 825 95 Psi
Resistance to Handling ASTM D1725 Complies
4. The Basis of Design: ½ inch and ¾ inch Polypropylene Expansion Board; Greenstreak,
3400 Tree Court Industrial Blvd., St. Louis, MO 63122; 800.793.7832; www.usa.sika.com
O. BACKER ROD & TAPE

1. General: ¾” closed cell polyethylene-based backer rod used to partially fill deep cracks
and joints before applying sealant. Size may vary – refer to the Drawings.
a. Sika polyethylene-based bond breaker tape is pre-approved for joints too shallow to
accommodate the backer rod
2. The manufacturer must certify the following:
a. Easy to apply
b. Highly flexible and compressible
c. Does not absorb water
d. Excellent temperature resistance
e. Prevents 3-sided adhesion
f. Controls sealant depth
3. Data:
Density 2.0 lbs./cu. ft.
Tensile strength 50 PSI
Compression deflection 5 PSI @ 25%
Water absorption 0.03 gm/cc
Temperature range -90°F to 210°F
4. The Basis of Design: ¾ inch Sika Greenstreak Pro Select closed cell backer rod, Sika
Greenstreak, 3400 Tree Court Industrial Blvd., St. Louis, MO 63122; 800.793.7832;
www.usa.sika.com
P. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) INSULATION TYPE VI
1. Insulation placed beneath structures must be rated as Type VI, XPS (extruded
polystyrene) in accordance with ASTM 578
2. Properties:
Imperial S.I.
ASTM 578 Classification Type VI
Compressive resistance, PSI / [kPa] 40.0 276
Density, min, lb./ft3 / [kg/m3] 1.80 29
Thermal resistance of 1.00-inch [25.4-mm] 5.00 0.88
thickness, min, hr•ft2•°F/Btu [K·m2/W] Mean
temperature: 75.2° F [24.1°C] (R-value):
Flexural strength, min, psi [kPa] 60.0 414
Water vapor Permeance of 1.00-in. [25.4-mm] 1.1 63
thickness, max, perm (ng/Pa·s·m2) thickness,
max, perm (ng/Pa·s·m2)
Water absorption by total immersion, max, 0.3
volume
3.
4. The Basis of Design: FOAMULAR® 400, XPS; as manufactured by Owens-Corning Foam
Insulation, LLC, One Owens Corning Parkway, Toledo, OH 43659; 1-800-GET-PINK,
www.owenscorning.com or pre-approved equal.
2.02 SHOTCRETE WET-MIX PRODUCTS

A. GENERAL
1. All shotcrete must be considered structural.
B. MATERIALS
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 - Normal - gray color.
2. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33, 3/8-inch [9.5 mm] maximum size.
3. Water: Potable, clean, and not detrimental to shotcrete wet-mix.
4. Alignment Wire: High strength steel wires used for alignment of shotcrete.
5. Compressive Strength: Refer to the Shotcrete wet-mix requirements.
6. Crystalline Concrete Waterproofing Admixture as specified
C. SHOTCRETE WET-MIX DESIGN
1. Conform to the following requirements:
a. Compressive Strength (28 days minimum): 4,000 psi [27.58 mPa]
b. Aggregate and Water: Proportioned to achieve mix design.
c. Aggregate Size (maximum): 3/8-inch [9.5 mm]
d. Air Entrainment: No admixtures allowed without
specific approval
e. Shotcrete wet-mix Slump
(plus or minus ½-inch [10 mm]): 4-inches [100 mm]
f. The selected Ready-Mix supplier’s Specialty Designated Engineers must provide the
design mix.
1) Water-cement ratio must not exceed 0.45.
2. Develop a mix design to give proper compaction and a low percentage of rebound and
stiff enough not to sag.
3. Approved admixture materials must be in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions & recommendations
4. Thoroughly mix shotcrete wet-mix. Apply mix within 45 minutes of adding Portland
cement to the mix.
5. The combined aggregate gradation must comply with grading No. 2 of ASTM C1436.
6. Maintain quality control records (including concrete delivery tickets) during production
and application of shotcrete wet-mix. Records must include exact mix-design ID number,
included admixes must be listed, arrival time, load off-load time, water added, and
departure time.
a. No water must be added after departing the batch plant
b. Water may only be added by Concrete Supplier only.
D. SHOTCRETE WET-MIX APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
1. Mixing Equipment: Capable of mixing aggregate, cement, and water in sufficient
quantity to maintain continuous placement.
2. Delivery Equipment: Capable of discharging the wet mix aggregate, cement, and water
to meet performance requirements.
E. SHOTCRETE WET-MIX SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1. Provide inspection and testing to verify conformance to design mix specifications and a
finished product that meets or exceeds Grade 2 in quality.

2. Test panels must be provided per the following:

a. Prepare test panels in accordance with ASTM C1140.
b. Perform compressive tests on panels in accordance with ASTM C1140 and determine
acceptability in accordance with ACI 506.2.
c. If test panels are not available for compressive testing, compressive testing of cores
must be performed in accordance with ASTM C1604 with the locations of the cores
being chosen by the structural engineer.
3. Provide one set of pre-construction test panels for each nozzleman prior to performing
work on the actual project. Only nozzlemen who have produced satisfactory pre-
construction test panels must be allowed to work on the project.
4. The shotcrete wet-mix applied material must be kept in a dampened state for a
minimum of 7-days continuous.
5. No shotcrete wet-mix may be placed directly onto soils unless a vapor barrier or steel-
text fabric is provided to prevent concrete contacting earth.
6. Nozzlemen must be certified in accordance with ACI 506.3R
7. Do not apply shotcrete wet-mix when ingredients or the reinforcing steel exceed 100
degrees Fahrenheit.
8. Tolerances must not exceed twice that specified in ACI 117
2.03 CAST-IN-PLACE READY-MIX CONCRETE PRODUCTS
A. MATERIALS
1. Portland cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
a. Use one brand of cement throughout Project.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F, may be substituted for up to 25 percent of the Portland
cement in concrete mixes unless noted otherwise.
3. Standard Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified.
a. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain
substances that cause spalling.
b. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce
concrete of adequate strength and durability by individual tests or actual service may
be used after explicit approval by This Engineer.
c. Fine Aggregate: Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay lumps, or other
deleterious substances.
d. Coarse Aggregate: Clean, un-coated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud,
loam, or foreign matter, as follows:
1) Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
2) Washed gravel, either natural or crushed stone. Use of pit or bank-run gravels not
permitted.
3) Maximum Aggregate Size: Not larger than one-fifth of narrowest dimension
between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths of
minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or bundles of bars.
e. Aggregate Supply: Provide aggregates from one source of supply to verify uniformity
in color, size, and shape.
4. Water: Potable only, clean, and not detrimental to cast-in-place concrete.

B. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX ADMIXTURES

1. Provide admixtures produced by listed manufacturers and use in compliance with the
manufacturer's printed directions. Do not use admixtures which have not been
incorporated and tested in accepted mixes, unless otherwise explicitly authorized in
writing by This Engineer.
a. Cementitious Crystalline Concrete Waterproofing: Mandatory Component
b. Air-Entraining Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C260
c. Water-Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C494, Type A.
d. Super Plasticizer: ANSI/ASTM C494, Type F.
e. Set-Control Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C494
2. Cementitious Crystalline Concrete Waterproofing:
a. Xypex Admix Type C-500-NF or C-1000-NF (as recommended by the manufacturer for
the specific mix(es) being used) by Xypex crystalline waterproofing materials as
follows:
1) Utilize this additive formula unless noted otherwise in the drawings or these
specifications.
2) Dosage Rate (for this Admix only):
a) 1.25% by weight of Portland cement content
b. Alternate, approved formulation: Xypex type C-500 and C-1000.
1) Dosage Rate (for this Admix only):
a) 2.50% by weight of Portland cement content
c. Concrete waterproofing system must be of the crystalline type that chemically
controls and permanently fixes a non-soluble crystalline structure throughout the
capillary voids of the concrete.
d. The system must cause the concrete to become sealed against the penetration of
liquids from any direction, and must protect the concrete from deterioration due to
harsh environmental conditions.
3. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by the manufacturer to be compatible
with other specified admixtures.
a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) “AEA-92 and Air Mix 200”, Euclid Chemical Co.
2) “MB VR or MB-AE,” Master Builders, Inc.
3) “Sika AER,” Sika Corp.
b. Air-Entraining admixtures must not be used in slab mixes without express approval
from This Engineer.
4. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, and containing not more than 0.05
percent chloride ions.
1) “Eucon WR-75 or Eucon WR-91,” Euclid Chemical Co.
2) “Pozzolith Normal,” Master Builders, Inc.
3) “Plastocrete 160,” Sika Corp.

5. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G

and containing not more than 0.05 percent chloride ions.
1) “Eucon 37”, Euclid Chemical Co.
2) “Rheobuild 1000”, Master Builders, Inc.
3) “Sikament 300”, Sika Corp; www.usa.sika.com
6. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: Non-chloride, non-corrosive per ASTM C 494,
Type C, or E, and not contain more chloride ions that are present in municipal drinking
water. The admixture manufacturer must have long-term non-corrosive test data from
an independent testing laboratory (of at least a year’s duration) using an acceptable
accelerated corrosion test method such as that using electrical potential measures.
1) “Accelguard 80”, Euclid Chemical Co.
2) “Pozzutec 20”, Master Builders, Inc.
7. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D and contain no more than
0.05 percent chloride ions.
1) “Eucon Retarder 75”, Euclid Chemical Co.
2) “Pozzolith Retarder,” Master Builders, Inc.
3) “Plastiment,” Sika Corporation.
8. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride or admixtures containing more than 0.05
percent chloride ions.
C. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX DESIGN
1. Conform to following requirements:
a. Compressive Strength (28 days minimum): 4,000 psi [27.58 mPa]
b. Aggregate and Water: Proportioned to achieve mix design.
c. Aggregate Size (maximum): 3/4-inch [ 19 mm]
2. The selected Ready-Mix supplier’s Specialty Designated Engineers must provide the mix
design.
3. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as
specified in ACI 301, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of
concrete specified.
4. Concrete must have a maximum ultimate drying shrinkage of 0.052%, which must be
verified by following the procedures in ACI 209R and using 28-day laboratory shrinkage
values (7 days of curing and then 21 days of air storage)
5. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor
when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other
circumstances warrant, at no additional cost to Owner and as accepted by This Engineer.
Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to
and accepted by This Engineer before using in work.
6. Maximum Water-Cement Ratio: Concrete mix must have a maximum water-cement
ratio of 0.45. Mixes must comply with Chapters 3, 4 and 5 of ACI 318 latest building code
adopted edition.

a. Super-plasticizers, fly-ash, and water reducers may be used to obtain the specified
slump while maintaining the maximum water-cement ratio.
7. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mix to result in a concrete slump at the point of
placement of 4-inches [100 mm] plus/minus 1-inch [25 mm].
8. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial
batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method,
use an independent testing agency acceptable to This Engineer for preparing and
reporting proposed mix designs. Trial batch and field experience tests must have been
performed within 12 months of submittal date.
D. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1. Cooperate and coordinate with the testing laboratory to perform field quality control
testing during concrete.
2. Refer to the testing procedures and requirements within these specifications.
2.04 SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX (GUNITE) PRODUCTS
A. GENERAL
1. The use of Shotcrete Dry-Mix (GUNITE) is disallowed unless strict compliance with the
below is met.
2. All shotcrete must be considered structural.
B. MATERIALS
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 - Normal - gray color.
2. Normal Weight Aggregate: ASTM C33, 3/8-inch [9.5 mm] maximum size.
3. Water: Potable, clean, and not detrimental to shotcrete dry-mix.
4. Alignment Wire: Small gauge, high strength steel cables & wires.
5. Compressive Strength: Refer to the Shotcrete dry-mix requirements.
C. SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX DESIGN
1. Aggregate and Water: Proportioned to achieve mix design.
2. Conform to the following requirements:
a. Compressive Strength (28-day minimum): 5,000 psi [34.47 mPa]
b. Aggregate Size (maximum): 3/8-inch [9.5 mm]
c. Air Entrainment: No admixtures allowed without specific approval
d. The Contractor’s Specialty Designated Engineers must provide the design mix doe
This Engineer’s review. A design mix with a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.35
must be attained.
3. Develop a mix design to give proper compaction and a low percentage of rebound and
stiff enough not to sag.
4. Approved admixture materials must be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions & recommendations.
5. Thoroughly mix shotcrete dry-mix. Apply mix within 45 minutes of batching or pre-
dampening.
6. The combined aggregate gradation must comply with grading No. 2 of ASTM C1436.

7. Maintain quality control records during production and application of shotcrete dry-mix;
make records available. Maintain and record such items as arrival time, water added,
times work ceased, etcetera.
D. SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX APPLICATION EQUIPMENT
1. Mixing Equipment (for shotcrete dry-mix): Capable of thoroughly mixing aggregate and
cement in sufficient quantity to maintain continuous placement.
2. Delivery Equipment (for shotcrete dry-mix): Capable of discharging dry mix aggregate
and cement accurately, uniformly, and continuously.
E. SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
1. Provide inspection and testing to verify conformance to design mix specifications and a
finished product that meets or exceeds Grade 2 in quality.
2. Test panels must be provided per the following:
a. Prepare test panels in accordance with ASTM C1140.
b. Perform compressive tests on panels in accordance with ASTM C1140 and determine
acceptability in accordance with ACI 506.2.
3. Provide one set of pre-construction test panels for each nozzleman prior to performing
work on the actual project. Only nozzlemen who have produced satisfactory pre-
construction test panels must be allowed to work on the project.
4. The shotcrete dry-mix applied material must be kept in a dampened state for a
minimum of 7-days continuous.
5. No shotcrete dry-mix may be placed directly onto soils unless a vapor barrier or steel-
text fabric is provided to prevent concrete contacting earth.
6. Nozzlemen must be certified in accordance with ACI 506.3R
7. Do not apply shotcrete dry-mix when dry mix ingredients or the reinforcing steel exceed
100 degrees Fahrenheit.
8. Tolerances must not exceed twice that specified in ACI 117
2.05 NOT USED
2.06 PIPING & FITTINGS
A. PIPE & FITTINGS MATERIAL TYPES
1. The following types of piping & fittings are identified in the Drawings. Fittings must be
the same type and schedule as piping.
2. Unless noted otherwise, the piping must be NSF-PW rated. The NSF-PW rating assures
that the materials are specifically listed and approved for potable water use.
3. Type 1 and Type 2 pipe may be substituted with UPVC in the same pressure rating.
4.
ADE PIPE & MATERIALS REMARKS
FITTINGS
TYPE
TYPE 1 PVC, SCHEDULE 40

TYPE 2 PVC, SCHEDULE 80

TYPE 3 CPVC, SCHEDULE 80 Utilize CPVC TYPE IV
TYPE 4 HDPE - SDR-11, PN-16
TYPE 5 Stainless Steel, Schedule 10, Welded pipe and pipe fittings
Grade 304 (or better)
TYPE 6 Coated Galvanized Steel, Coated for chemical resistance
Grade 40
TYPE 7 Clear PVC, Schedule 80
TYPE 8 PVC, Schedule 80, Double- A. For hard-pipe transport of
walled Containment Piping sodium hypochlorite
(bleach) and muriatic acid
A. Primary pipe-carrier 2-
inches [50mm] and
secondary containment 4-
inches [100mm]
TYPE 9 Corrugated HDPE pipe For Drain, Vent, Waste, &
Sleeves, under-roadways (meet
Federal Highway loading for H-
10).
TYPE 10 PVC, Flexible The specified length is entirely
sealed/wrapped in direct-burial
insulation & water-proof
jacketing
B. PIPING SCHEDULES / APPLICABILITY / USES

1. Pipe materials must be as follows. Fittings must be the same schedule as the piping:
2.
Description: ADE Type Remarks:
Pipe:
Air blower piping (small 5 Include closed-cell insulation within the
loads / pressures only) equipment room. Place signage “HOT –
(initial 90 feet [27.4 M]) DANGER.”
Air blower piping (small 3 Include closed-cell insulation for exposed
loads / pressures only) piping; typical for blower-induced air
(after initial 90 feet [27.4 supply for therapy fittings or similar use.
M]) Add closed-cell insulation on exposed
piping
Air compressor & 5 The entire piping system for compressed
regenerative blower air to be St. steel as indicated above (Type
piping >30 psi [2 Bars] 5); include closed-cell insulation for
exposed piping
Air tubing / hoses within 1 Long sweep fittings specified to facilitate
conduits and chases (for the install of tubing. Black color for tubing

applications such as air / flex pipe; air tubing must be UV outdoor-

supply tubing for rated.
pneumatic valves)
Chemical tubing conduits 1 Long sweep fittings specified to facilitate
or chases install of tubing.
Chlorine or acid transport 8 Place such piping within Type 6 below-
grade sleeves for additional protection.
(Double-walled thermoplastic piping
containment below grade).
Clear piping to observe 7 Minimum length of 24-inches [600 mm] or
water flow in designated as noted in Drawings. Utilize prior to flow
pipe locations meters, waste discharge pipes, etc.
Provide pipe supports to prevent sagging.
Concealed piping & 1 For sizes 6-inches [150 mm] or less
Fittings
Concealed piping & 2 For sizes 8-inches [200 mm] or greater
fittings
Exposed fountain pipe 10 For apparent connections in the fountain
when flex pipe is conducive to relocating
nozzles and angular adjustments. Without
exception, the flex pipe color MUST match
the color of the basin’s interior finish.
Exposed pipe & fittings 2 Above-grade within equipment rooms
except as noted herein
Flexible Joints 1,2,7, & 10 Flexible connectors (for pipe sizes up to
12-inches [305 mm] must be located.
Refer to FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS within
these specifications.
Flexible piping 10 Pipe sizes up to 3-inch [75 mm] must use a
5-ft [1.3 M] length of flexible pipe at the
positions noted in the Drawings.
Heater piping 3 Must be fully supported – refer to heater
manufacturer to determine if Type 5 is
expressly specified.
Pipe & fittings beneath 2 Without exception – since these pipes are
basin structures inaccessible after construction.
Piping & valve manifolds 5 Includes trunk pipe with numerous valve
branches – each connection must be
flanged. Utilize the flange to convert to
other types of pipe material
Piping beneath roadways, 2 (placed Install Type 2 piping within Type 6 or Type
traffic areas, beneath within 9 piping (being used as an oversized
building footers, or piping Type 6 or sleeve) sized and installed per the
exposed to heavy loads Type 9 manufacturer’s requirements for depth of
earth cover. Utilize H-10 load rating.

oversized
sleeve)
Piping passing through 5 Pipe passing through two or more layers
multiple structures of concrete – all pipe sizes
Piping passing through a 2 Pipe passing through a single layer of
single structure concrete only – all pipe sizes
3. Piping General Notes / Requirements

a. Provide closed-cell insulation (rated for high temperatures up to 240° F [115° C.])
around chilled, heated, & compressed air piping.
1) Compressed air piping must include closed-cell installation unless located beneath
18-inches [455 mm] of soil.
b. UV inhibitor coating on piping & fittings: Types (1 through 4 and type 8) Plastic
(petrochemical) piping & fittings exposed to sunlight must be coated with an
ultraviolet inhibitor.
c. The pipe and fittings must be manufactured in the USA, using domestic materials, by
an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.
1) The pipe must be stored indoors after production at the manufacturing site until
shipped from the factory.
2) This pipe must carry the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal of approval for
potable water (PW) applications.
3) Standard lengths of pipe size 6 inch and larger must be factory beveled each end.
d. Heavy, corrosion-resistant coatings on metallic piping
1) Type 6 pipe (galvanized steel pipe) must have a minimum G90 heavy corrosion-
resistant coating applied to surfaces.
a) Type 5 (stainless steel) may be used instead of coated galvanized steel at
Contractor’s option.
e. Piping used for chemical conduits/sleeves/chases
1) Place chemical tubings which carry muriatic acid (pH control), and chlorine within
Type 1 conduits/sleeves/chases.
a) Use only “sweep” (long ell) fittings to allow future replacement of the flexible
chemical hoses
b) Air tubing and hoses for tubing supplying air to pneumatic valve must be
placed within Type 1 conduits / sleeves / chases.
f. Underground Piping: Piping (to the uppermost pipe hemisphere) must be placed a
minimum of 18-inches [455 mm] underground unless detailed otherwise on the
Drawings.
1) Exception: Refer to the Drawings for the local codes and established freeze /
frost-line elevations in cold climates. Frost-line invert elevations must be
observed without exception.
g. Seawater (ocean-water and brackish water) piping systems must incorporate Type 4
piping that complies with the PolyPipe Design and Engineering Guide for
Polyethylene Piping standards.

4. Type 1 Piping:
a. PVC Schedule 40 pipe must be manufactured from a Type I, Grade I Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per ASTM D1784.
b. The pipe and fittings must be manufactured in compliance with ASTM D1785 and
D2665 (where applicable), consistently meeting or exceeding the Quality Assurance
test requirements of these standards regarding material, workmanship, burst
pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality.
c. The Basis of Design: Pipe & fittings must be manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company, 15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar, CA 91392); (818)
364-1611; www.spearsmfg.com or a pre-approved equal.
5. Type 2 Piping:
a. PVC Schedule 80 pipe and fittings must be manufactured from a Type I, Grade I
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per ASTM
D1784.
b. The pipe and fittings must be manufactured in compliance with ASTM D1785,
consistently meeting or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements of this
standard regarding material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion
quality.
c. The Basis of Design: Pipe must be manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company
15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar, CA 91392); (818) 364-1611;
www.spearsmfg.com or a pre-approved equal.
6. Type 3 Piping:
a. CPVC Schedule 80 pipe and fittings must be manufactured from a Type IV, Grade I
Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 23447
per ASTM D1784.
b. The pipe and fittings must be manufactured in compliance with ASTM F441,
consistently meeting the Quality Assurance test requirements of this standard
regarding material, workmanship, burst pressure, flattening, and extrusion quality.
c. The Basis of Design: Pipe & fittings must be manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company 15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar, CA 91392); (818)
7. Type 5 Piping:
a. Schedule 10S, Grade 304 (or better) stainless steel piping.
b. The pipe and fittings must be manufactured in compliance with ASTM A312,
consistently meeting or exceeding the Quality Assurance test requirements of this
quality.
8. Type 7 Piping:
a. PVC, Schedule 80, Clear pipe, and fittings must be manufactured from a Type I,
Grade I Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) compound with a Cell Classification of 12454 per
ASTM D1784.

b. The pipe must be manufactured in compliance with ASTM D1785, consistently

meeting or exceeding the applicable Quality Assurance test requirements of this
quality.
c. The pipe must be manufactured in the USA by an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.
PVC Schedule 80 CLEAR pipe and fittings must be packaged immediately after its
manufacture to prevent damage and must be stored indoors at the manufacturing
site until shipped from the factory.
d. Clear PVC piping and fittings have no UV inhibitors and thus must not be placed
outdoors or in areas exposed to sunlight or UV exposure.
e. The Basis of Design: Clear pipe & fittings must be manufactured by Spears
Manufacturing Company 15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar,
CA 91392); (818) 364-1611; www.spearsmfg.com or a pre-approved equal.
C. FITTINGS
1. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the Drawings, fittings must be as follows:
a. Fittings must be of same pipe schedule and rating as the pipe material specified.
b. Pump inlet / outlet piping fittings must be either:
1) Type 3 to resist possible high-temperature deformation
2) Type 5
3) Type 6 coated for chemical resistance
4) Type 6 pipes and fittings (if used) must have a minimum G90 heavy corrosion-
resistant coating applied to surfaces before start-up. Such coating must be
suitable for continuous exposure to mildly chlorinated water typical of pool
water.
5) Typical Type 1 or Type 2 piping or fittings may not be used to connect to pumps
due to potential high temperatures.
6) When threaded pipe joints and fittings are used, fittings must be Type 2
minimum. Threaded joints must have sufficient threads and be assembled with
Loctite “No More Leaks” pipe thread sealant (item #80726) per installation
instructions of Loctite. No more than three pipe threads must be exposed after
the joint is made up tight – or – the fitting with male threads has become
extremely tight and sealed completely. Female plastic pipe threads must only
accept plastic male fittings. In the case of male pipe threads of a metal pipe, a
metal female fitting must be used. Female metal pipe threads may accept plastic
or metal male pipe threads.
7) Type 1 through Type 4 piping connections must be socket welded or flange
connections except where flanged connections are detailed.
c. The Basis of Design: Fittings must be manufactured by Spears Manufacturing
Company 15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar, CA 91392); (818)
D. FLANGES AND FLANGE HARDWARE
1. Pipe flanges must comply with the requirements specified herein. When flanged pipe,
joints are used, flanges must be of standard ANSI geometry and rated as Class 150.

2. Flanges may be either welded slip-on flanges or “Vanstone” lap joint flanges except
where one type is specified herein.
3. Manufacturer-accepted (subject to This Engineer’s approval) synthetic non-degradable
gaskets must be used at flange joints. VITON gasket materials must be considered as a
minimum.
4. Bolts, washers, and nuts must be stainless steel, grade 316L minimum.
a. Flange hardware exposed to Seawater must be rated A286 Stainless Steel 2205 UNS
S31803.
b. Flange hardware installed within remote locations must be provided with an
appropriate epoxy coating to assist in providing a potentially longer usable life.
5. Threaded fasteners must have Loctite #271 applied to bolt threads before tightening
and torqued to a value sufficient to load the bolt to 40-60% of bolt yield strength.
E. FEATURE MANIFOLDS & ASSEMBLIES
1. Manifolds must be complete units and be Type 5 and incorporate the Drawing
requirements to include:
a. The specified quantity of inlets and outlets
b. The specified branch pipe diameters
c. The overall main trunk diameter
d. Only flanged connections
e. Only Globe valves for proportional flow type control (unless otherwise indicated)
2. Supply manifold supports to support the specified weights, maintain the manifolds in
position, and minimize any movement or vibration during the operation of the feature.
3. Piping manifolds, fittings, clamping devices, anchor bolts, connections to manifolds,
nozzles, light fixture brackets, weir plates, and inlets in features must be made of Type 5
(Schedule 10S, stainless steel) piping.
F. ASSEMBLIES, FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS, JOINTS, AND SPECIAL FITTINGS
1. Rubber expansion joints: Fabricated, molded rubber units equipped with flanges and as
noted below:
a. Hypalon rubber to resist mildly chlorinated water
b. Flanges with Hypalon enamel painted over the ductile iron portions
c. Molded reinforcement and steel rings and rods must assist in the PSI rating and
inches of mercury pressure / force ratings.
1) The target pressure rating must be 50 psi [344.7 kPa]
2) The target vacuum rating must be 30-inches [760 mm] of mercury
a) Exception: Joint assemblies for pipe sizes greater than 24-inches [610 mm] and
can withstand a vacuum of 20-inches [510 mm] minimum.
d. Provide control rod assemblies with each flanged rubber expansion joint
1) Control rod assemblies and hardware must be 316L
e. The Basis of Design: Model 502H as manufactured by Mercer Rubber Company, 350
Rabro Drive, Hauppauge, NY 11788, 631.582.1524, or a pre-approved equal.
2. Flexible Connectors: Provide fabricated, flexible connector units equipped with flanges
as noted below:

a. Refer to the Drawings for locations required

b. Stainless steel V-Loops technology to address pipe motion
1) Incorporate stainless steel flexible bellows, double-braided piping with flanged
end connectors and rated for mounting in building spaces or in direct-burial
locations.
c. Must be capable accommodating up to 4-inches [100mm] movement in pipe sizes
1.5-inches [37mm] through 12-inches [305mm] at up to 160 PSIG [1103 Kpa].
d. Observe manufacturer requirements.
e. The Basis of Design: Model: Kinflex V-Loop as manufactured by Kinetics Noise
Control, Inc., Dublin, Ohio, 1-877-457-2695; www.kineticsnoise.com
G. PIPING SIZE SCHEDULES
1. Refer to the schedules & sizes within the Drawings & These Specifications
H. PVC CEMENT & PRIMERS
1. A purple primer on PVC surfaces before applying PVC cement
2. Thermoplastic solvent cement: Heavy Bodied, Medium Setting High-Strength, Industrial
Duty for sizes through 12-inches [305 mm]; Extra-Heavy Bodied, Slow Setting Industrial
Duty for sizes 14-inches [350 mm] and above.
3. The Basis of Design: PVC cement & primers must be manufactured by Spears
Manufacturing Company 15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar, CA
91392); (818) 364-1611; www.spearsmfg.com as noted below:
a. Listed for NSF Standard 61 for Potable Water
b. Primer for PVC: Spears Primer Cleaner-70 Industrial Grade, Purple
1) Clear primer is acceptable for connections made indoors.
c. Primer for CPVC: Spears Primer Cleaner-24 Industrial Grade, Purple
1) Clear primer is acceptable for connections made indoors.
d. Cement for PVC: Spears PVC-11 Gray for sizes through 12-inches [305 mm]
e. Cement for PVC: Spears PVC-19 White or Gray for sizes 14-inches [350 mm through
30-inches [750 mm]
f. Cement for CPVC or PVC: Spears CPVC-24 Gray or Orange (for sizes)
I. PIPE HANGERS, HARDWARE, AND SUPPORTS
1. Pipe fasteners, hangers, and similar support systems requiring a structural interface or
dependency on the Architect’s building structure must be provided as a Complete Build
Activity with Delegated Engineering Services submittals.
a. Refer to 1.08 SUBMITTALS
b. Refer to 1.09 QUALITY CONTROL
c. Fasteners, hangers, and supports anchored to the building structure must be
approved by the project's structural engineer of record and must be sized in
accordance with the pipe and hanger manufacturers' requirements related to the
specific pipe size, spacing, and associated loads.
2. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary materials
and equipment to completely execute the pipe hanger and supports as described in this
specification.

3. Steel pipe hangers and supports must have the manufacturers name, part number, and
applicable size stamped on the part itself for identification.
4. Hangers and supports must be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS SP
58.
a. The materials specified for the pipe support methods indicated in the Drawings are
SST 304 (or better) or plastic. If only steel hangers or supports are available, they
must be surface-coated (after priming) to assist in avoiding rust and corrosion.
However, all threaded components of the hanger must be stainless steel 304 or
better.
b. Exception:
1) Hangars and supports in chemical rooms must be plastic, fiberglass, or other non-
metallic materials without exception.
2) Hangers & supports within the collector / surge tank and gutters must be plastic,
fiberglass, or other non-metallic materials (submit for approval).
a) V-Bottom clevis hanger with plastic/fiberglass equivalents of 18-gauge
continuous support channel, B-Line B3106 and B3106V, to form a continuous
support system for plastic pipe or flexible tubing.
c. Primer and top coatings for steel hanger and support components must be from the
same manufacturer.
1) Pre-approved manufacturers and products include:
a) Rust Inhibitive metallic primer
i: Rust-Oleum: 7780 Clean Metal Primer or 7769 Rusty Metal Primer
ii: MAB Paint Company: Rust-O-Lastic Zinc Chromate Primer
iii: Fuller - O'Brien Paints & Coatings: Blox Rust Alkyd Metal Primer (verify for
the type of metal)
b) Top Coat:
i: Rust-Oleum: Match with the primer used and the type of metal
ii: MAB Paint Company: Rust-O-Lastic Finish Coating
iii: Fuller - O'Brien Paints & Coatings: Versaflex Heavy Duty Alkyd Gloss
Enamel
d. Stainless steel materials are not to be painted or coated except as noted in the
Drawings.
5. Minimum support size must be 1-inch [25 mm] x 2-inches [50 mm] coated galvanized
steel with the appropriate pipe straps for support.
6. The Basis of Design:
a. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger, and
support systems must be as manufactured by Cooper B-Line, Inc. or engineer
approved equal. Cooper Industries, Inc.; 509 West Monroe Street
Highland, IL 62249, USA; 800.851.7415; www.cooperindustries.com
J. PIPE LABELING
1. Compliant with Brady B-946 custom legend, self-sticking markers, and arrows or
Engineer-approved equal

2. The Basis of Design: Brady Corporation, Phone: 800-643-8766 (www.bradycorp.com) or

Graphic Products, Inc., Phone: 888.326.9244 http://www.duralabel.com/free-
gifts/thankyou-pipemarking.php#ixzz2TsmLNeLx
2.07 FINISHES & COPING
A. GENERAL
1. Non-slip tile must mean non-glazed manufacturer-labeled as "non-slip", "non-skid" or
"slip-resistant" to be installed on horizontal surfaces
a. Non-slip copings, decks, & tiles must have a dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF) of
less than or equivalent to 0.42 (per ASTM C1028) in wet conditions and identified by
the manufacturer as having a "non-slip" or "slip-resistant" surface.
b. The slip-resistant finish must be incorporated from the original manufacturer, "after-
market" slip-resistant applications onto surfaces or tiles are not allowed.
2. Pools’ interior finishes must be white or light color with a smooth and easily cleanable
surface.
a. Caution: Interior color finishes other than “White” will require specific approval from
the local Health Dept (for pools).
B. TILES
1. The Basis of Design: Dal-Tile
a. Tiles must be "frost-proof" and capable of withstanding the expected weather and
climatic conditions at the project's locale.
b. Decorative tile: 2-inches by 2-inches [50 mm x 50 mm] porcelain ceramic
manufacturer-rated as non-slip.
c. All protruding corner edges must incorporate at least one bullnose trim tile.
d. Glass tiles not permitted unless approved explicitly by This Engineer.
e. Tiles provided with back-mounted mesh and coatings that might prevent a full bond
to the back of the tiles will be rejected without exception.
2. Wall, floor, and marker tiles
a. Tiles at the underwater expansion joint: multiple white 2-inches by 2-inches [50 mm
x 50 mm] porcelain, non-slip tiles.
b. Zero-entry Tiles, stone finishes, or pavers, as detailed: non-slip.
c. Lettering for marker tiles: Contrasting color, 4-inches [100 mm] high.
d. Vertical-Placed Marker Tiles: Glazed surface.
e. Horizontal-Located Copings and Tiles: Manufacturer-classified as non-glazed, and
non-slip.
1) The slip-resistant finish must be incorporated from the original manufacturer,
"after-market" slip-resistant applications onto the tiles are not allowed.
f. An approved universal NO DIVING symbol tile (red in color) may be substituted for
the spelled "NO DIVING" tiles.
3. Step edge, gutter trim, and bench edge tiles
a. Step edge tiles must be 2-inches x 2-inches [50 mm x 50mm] (or pre-approved 1-inch
x 1-inch [25 mm x 25mm]) dual tiles as noted in the finish schedule in a very, dark
contrasting color (use Dal-Tile Cobalt Blue for pricing purposes).

b. Step edge / bench edge horizontal nosing tiles must consist of non-slip tiles that are a
Munsell color value from "zero" to "four" and contrast to the interior of the pool
(and gutter edge) surfaces.
c. Provide unique shaped tile and bullnose tiles as detailed in the Drawings.
1) In all cases where two tiles are installed in a protruding, perpendicular condition
resulting in an approximate 90-deg (or similar corner) edges being evident, the
installer is required to provide at least one of those tiles having a bullnose trim.
2) The tile edges (using bullnose trim tiles) located at gutter lips and step edges are
typical details, examples, and are applicable and indicative of all similar tiled
conditions.
C. COPING
1. Coping must be one of the following materials
a. Travertine
b. Flagstone
c. Slate
d. Bluestone
e. Limestone
f. Sandstone
g. Granite
h. Coral stone (or shell stone)
2. Refer to the Landscape Architect’s drawings for finish selections
3. Copings must be rated as “non-slip” or “slip-resistant” as noted above.
D. INTERIOR QUARTZ-PLASTER FINISH
1. Interior basin surfacing must be a combination of quartz-plaster (and tiles) as detailed.
2. Quartz Plaster: “KrystalKrete” by CL Industries, Inc.; Orlando, FL. 1-800-333-2860;
www.clindustries.com
a. Interior Finish BaseCrete – Flexible Waterproof BondCoat (prior to quartz-plaster
materials’ installation). The BaseCrete must serve as a sealer, waterproofing, and
bonding agent as well as a scratch coat.
b. No admixtures are permitted without the written approval of This Engineer.
c. Color: “KRYSTAL BLUE” to be used for pricing purposes.
E. DECKING
1. Concrete, Unit-Pavers, or similar decking:
a. Refer to the Architect and the Landscape Architect.
2. EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system
a. Material: EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system is a factory-molded
surface composed of EVAtrax™, an ethyl vinyl acetate copolymer. Note that the type
of attraction determines the required tile thickness.
1) Depending on ASTM F1292 requirements for critical fall height 6’ select tile
thickness from optional thicknesses 1 ¼”.
2) Refer to the Drawings for the specified thickness.
a) Thickness and Weight:

i: 3/8-inch standard = 2 lbs. [0.9kg]

ii: 7/8 inch = 4.4 lbs. [2kg]
3) Color & Patterns: Refer to the Drawings
4) The Basis of Design: Life Floor, 2010 E Hennepin Ave. #8, Building 8 Suite 206,
Minneapolis, MN 55413, Phone: (612) 567-2813. E-mail: solutions@lifefloor.com;
www.lifefloor.com
F. GRATES – DECK AND TRENCH
1. System Description
a. Allowable loads on stainless steel grating must be 1,500 lbs. per sq. feet [7,323.64 kG
per sq. m].
b. Grating must be linear, with grating bars running the length of the trench.
c. Trench channel and pool deck grating must be locked down flush with adjacent finish
decking. Provide grating with concealed locks and be independently removable.
d. Plastic deck drain units must contain UV inhibitors, have a removable grate top,
utilize stainless steel grade 316L hardware, and adapt to underground piping system
connections.
e. Stone Grating: Pool grate material must be stone (reinforced) of at least 30%
recycled materials. The material is a 95% agglomeration of natural stone substrates
& mineral oxides formed under a high-tech vacuum & compression process. It is a
proprietary formulated structural polymer hybrid system of a complex blend.
2. Stainless Steel Grating
a. The Basis of Design: SSS Clean Tread™ Model KD98 MM Way,
sales@kadeeindustries.com; Kadee Industries, Inc., Walton Hills, OH 44146 Phone:
800.321.3827
b. Materials
1) Provide SSS Clean Tread™ Model KD98 Entrance Floor Grilles and Frames
2) Grille thickness must be 1-1/8 inch with a minimum Coefficient of Friction of 0.6
as measured by the James Machine defined in ASTM D2047 using Standard
Neolite in dry and wet testing.
3) Tread Material must be manufactured from Type 316L stainless steel .071-inch x
.177-inch surface wires spaced with a .125-inch slot opening, and resistance
welded to .070 x.1.0-inch Type 316L stainless steel support rods spaced 1 inch on
center.
4) Hidden Lockdowns [conventional construction]: Entrance Floor Grilles must
include hidden locking devices manufactured from formed Type 316L stainless
steel saddle clip slotted to receive a spring clip and an ASTM A193 Grade B8 18-8
stainless steel machine screw.
5) Hidden Lockdowns must be spaced no more than 2-ft [610 mm] on center.
6) Fasteners, accessories, and other materials specified for complete installation in
accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and meeting
performance requirements.
7) Drainage Pit Frames:

a) Provide welded frames fabricated from 1.25-inch x 1.25-inch x 0.125-inch thick

Type 304 (or better) stainless steel angle with splice plates as required,
complete with grouting strap anchors for a permanently recessed application.
b) Provide welded intermediate framing supports manufactured from 1-1/2-inch
x 1-1/2-inch x 3/16-inch Type 304 (or better) stainless steel angle spaced no
greater than 3-Ft. on center with a uniform floor load of 300 lb./sq. ft. and no
more than 2-Ft. on center with a consistent floor load of 500 lb./sq. ft.
c. Fabrication
1) Comply with NAAMM’S “Metals Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products.”
a) Tread Material: Stainless Steel: Polished Finish No 4 Fabricate pool deck
grating assemblies as detailed.
b) Stainless Steel Frames: Stainless Steel Mill Finish No. 2
2) Tread Surfaces: Serrated.
3) Provide related parts, devices, trench liner, anchors, and other items necessary
for water-tight installations.
4) Fabricate splices, corner units, corner fittings, intersections, and end closures.
5) Factory miter and weld joints.
6) Provide components in single size where possible; minimize site splicing.
7) Provide maximum size recommended by the manufacturer for units intended for
removal and cleaning. If joints are necessary for the grating, spaced
symmetrically, away from typical traffic flow patterns.
8) Provide a minimum number of pieces possible for frames that exceed the
maximum length. Provide frames with hairline joints, equally spaced, intact with
corner pin, splice plates, and installation anchors.
9) Shop fabricate frame as an assembled unit for installation.
3. Plastic deck drainage & grating
1) Pool deck channel grating system model NDS SPEE-D #400 Channel Drain with
slip-resistant tread by NDS, 1-800-726-1998
a) Lengths: 10 feet [3.048 M]
b) Open area per foot of channel: minimum of 19 sq. inches [122.58 cm]
c) Must connect to PVC, sch. 40 piping via manufacturer-supplied adapters
(located below-grade)
d) Provide color selections for selection
b. Provide atrium drains by NDS (or equal) for drainage of planter and turf areas
4. Trench channel and trench-deck grating
a. The trench channel at the zero-depth and at rim-flow perimeter overflow systems
must incorporate acrylic / fiberglass custom channels.
b. The grating must be formed of molded PVC sections that are modular, interlocking
sections, UV stabilized and certified NSF-50.
1) The top section must have a raised herringbone design and certified to IBC
Classification B for Wet-Barefoot inclining platform (ramp) test for swimming pool
surroundings and communal shower rooms.

2) Grating must be 0.47” (12mm) wide and an outside depth of 1.0” (25.4mm) with a
middle depth of 1.83” (46.6mm) for load strength requirements.
3) The grating must be certified under ANSI/ AS3996 class A for covers and grates
with a load exceeding 10kN (2,248lb).
4) The space between the bars must not exceed 0.315” (8mm) to comply with IBC
child finger/toe entrapment guidelines.
5) The grating surface bars must run parallel to the pool wall and with the gap,
provide at least 40% open space per foot for unrestricted water flow.
6) Fasteners must be SS-316 and be provided by the manufacturer.
7) The grating must be lockable to prevent unauthorized removal.
c. All inside and outside corners and custom radii sections under 3-feet inside diameter
must be custom fabricated and strengthened by the manufacturer.
d. Color to be selected by the Architect/Owner. The grating product must have a
minimum 10- year warranty.
e. The Basis of Design:
1) Daldorado, LLC.,
2) Neptune Benson parallel-type grating.
a) Critical: Perpendicular type grating is not permissible
5. Stone Grating:
1) The pool stone grating system by Jonite Stone with lockable units
2) The slip-resistant surface in the model and color indicated in the Drawings
3) Materials: Reinforced, 95% natural aggregates, and hybrid polymers
4) ADA compliant
a) Jonite Private Limited; 5 Upper Aljunied Link Quartz Industrial Building #01-01;
Singapore 367903; Phone: +65 6383-3788; www.jonite.com
b) Jonite USA; 1275 Glenlivet Drive, Suite 100 Allentown, PA 18106;
+1.484.224.2972; info@jonite.com
2.08 BASIN & SITE EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. Hardware (screws, nuts, and similar connection devices must be Stainless Steel (Grade
304 (or better)).
a. If these hardware items are visible to guests, then the minimum stainless-steel grade
is 316L.
2. Contact This Engineer if there are questions concerning the determination of the basin
type and applicability of design standards.
3. The quantities indicated in the Drawings are for the Contractor’s early information;
however, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the actual quantities required.
B. BASIN DRAINS, RELIEFS, SUMPS, & FLOOR EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES
1. Anti-Vortex Plates

a. Anti-vortex plates shall be used to stabilize pool pump suction piping in surge-tank
(balance-tank; surge weir gutter) to prevent water vortex.
1) The anti-vortex plate shall be fabricated from ½” Type 1 PVC board. The plate
shall be designed to reduce velocity from 6-fps to 1.5-fps maximum.
2) The anti-vortex plate shall include the following hardware; 4-316-SS nuts, 4-316-
SS threaded rods and 8-316-SS washers as supplied by the manufacturer.
b. Anti-vortex plates and hardware as manufactured and supplied by Daldorado LLC.
Ph: (888) 509-8128, 4327 Arnold Ave, Naples, FL 34104; www.daldorado.com or
approved equal.
2. Floor Drains & Sumps
a. For basins/ pools that are authorized for human swimming and recreation activities,
the following must apply:
1) Drain sumps (for wall and floor installation) must be pre-certified as compliant
and listed for Virginia Graeme Baker (VGB-2008) Pool and Spa Federal Safety Act,
NSF Standard 50 listed, and compliant with provisions of the ASME A112.19.8
(ASME-2007).
2) Drain assemblies (grates, frames, and sumps) must be manufactured of non-
corrosive and non-conductive suitable for continuous exposure to chlorinated
water environments. Injection-molded PVC must be UV stabilized meeting the
requirements of ASTM G154, which require the materials be capable of
withstanding 750 hours UV exposure. Top surface to be a raised, cross ridge
profile for non-slip, with 3/8-inch [9.5 mm] maximum bar spacing.
3) Provide internal "blanking disk" in the sump assembly to allow a minimum of a
continuous 24-hour 20-psi water-pressure test.
4) Comply with ASTM E661 sustaining a minimum load of 200 lb. [90.7 kG].
5) Comply with ASTM C1028 dynamic coefficient of friction (DCOF) rated at a
minimum 0.42 in wet conditions to achieve a non-slip surface.
6) Main drain assemblies must include removable grates secured tamper proof
screws with at least one anchor per 6-inches [150 mm] of the perimeter of frame
and grate. Comply with ASME A112.19.8 (latest issue) design parameters without
exception.
7) Each drain pot must have a pipe side outlet (FIP) plus bottom outlet(s) (FIP) for
the required hydrostatic relief valve(s). Refer to the Drawings for sizes required.
a) Model MLD-FGD-xxxx by Lawson Aquatics, Inc., and Grate Technologies;
800.897.6160; www.neptunebenson.com
b. For basins that are designed only for non-human use, decorative or display
architectural fountains, and non-swimming water features, the following must apply:
1) Drains and anti-vortex covers must be pre-manufactured units. The integral anti-
vortex cover must allow the flush insertion of tiles as indicated on the Drawings
(to assist in disguising the drain body).

2) Suction & inlet bodies, strainers, anti-vortex plates, securements, and fasteners
must be fabricated as specified and outfitted for integral tile installations, flow
regulator assemblies, and grounding-to-earth lugs for metallic components. Refer
questions to This Engineer as needed.
3) Piping connections must be supplied with tapered, imperial threads for sizes 2-
inches [50 mm] through 8-inches [12 mm through 200 mm].
a) Model MLD-FGD-xxxx by Lawson Aquatics, Inc., and Grate Technologies;
800.897.6160; www.neptunebenson.com.
c. In case of a stainless steel pool, floor drains shall be specified, supplied, and installed
by the basin manufacturer. Drains shall be designed and fabricated to facilitate
monolithic concrete slab or block-out type installations and concrete bonding.
Drains shall be equipped with grounding lugs or holes for connecting grounding
wiring. All sumps shall be in conformance with ANSI/APSP-16 2011.
3. Floor inlet equipment
a. Floor-located water inlet fittings must be white cycolac, nominal 4-inches [100 mm]
square with the water-flow-adjustability feature.
b. Inlet: Adjustable-flow type.
c. The adjustable inlet fitting must be provided with 1.5-inches [40 mm] socket x 2-Inch
[50 mm] MIP connections.
d. The Basis of Design: Model Hayward SP1425S, Adjustable Floor Inlet Concrete Pool
Fitting by Hayward Pool Products, Inc.; One Hayward Industrial Drive, Clemmons, NC
27102, (908) 355-7995; www.hayward-pool.com.
4. Hydrostatic Relief Equipment
a. Drain Sump-Located Relief Fittings: One relief fitting must be factory installed in
each drain sump; include a collection tube.
1) Material: White cycolac or white ABS material and capable of being flushed
mounted in each of the basin’s drain sumps.
2) Primed spring-loaded, leak-proof and have a self-cleaning O-ring seal.
3) The fitting must be provided with a 1.5-inches [40 mm] x 2-inches [50 mm] MIP
connection. Include a collection tube as recommended by the manufacturer.
a) Models #SP-1056 & #SP-1055, Hydrostatic relief fittings must be by Hayward
Pool Products, Inc.; One Hayward Industrial Drive, Clemmons, NC 27102, (908)
355-7995; www.hayward-pool.com.
5) In the event of a stainless steel pool, the basin manufacturer may specify an
alternate hydrostatic relief fitting located within each drain sump.
b. Floor-Located Hydrostatic Relief Fittings:
1) These pool plugs must be shipped with no pool plaster in the lead weight cap.
2) The relief fitting must be “The Pool Plug” by Swimming Pool Specialties, Inc.; 860
Pennsylvania Ave, Hagerstown, MD 21742-(301-733-7750).
C. BEAM PERIMETER & WALL EQUIPMENT ASSEMBLIES

1. Gutter Mounted Elements: Must be designed and fabricated to withstand forces

specified by the accessory manufacturer and/or recognized swimming authority in
addition to those service conditions specified by governing code officials. Exposed steel
must be polished stainless steel. All components must be designed to be flush, and
there must be no protrusions of any kind that could potentially produce a tripping
hazard
2. Hydromassage fittings
a. In case of a stainless steel pool, hydromassage fittings shall be specified, supplied
and installed by the basin manufacturer.
b. Therapy fittings must be combination wall and jet fittings with integral flow-through
connections for air and water supply lines.
3. Beam perimeter gutter fittings
a. Gutter drain fittings (body and grate) must be white cycolac, nominal 2.75-inches x
4.5-inches [70 mm x 115 mm] with a 4-sq. inches [2580 sq. mm] open area.
b. Fasteners: Size must be 2-inches [50 mm] female NPT plus 2-inches [50 mm] PVC
Socket Connection. The gutter grate must be secured to the gutter body via stainless
steel Grade 304 (or better) screws.
1) Under no circumstances must a gutter grate be installed without a pre-
manufactured gutter body.
2) A rigid PVC pipe attachment to the gutter body is a mandatory requirement.
c. Provide one gutter fitting to serve as an air-vent and located at a higher elevation for
the gutter piping system in accordance with the Drawings.
d. The Basis of Design: Model #SP-1019 by Hayward Pool Products, Inc.; 900 Fairmount
Avenue; Elizabeth, NJ 07207 (201-351-5400); www.hayward-pool.com and supplied
in accordance with the Drawings.
4. Beam perimeter skimmer assemblies
a. Wall-mounted perimeter skimmers must be NSF-approved, ABS molded body with
10-inches [250 mm] diameter cover, an 8-inch [203 mm] full hinged weir with an
automatic level adjustment of 4.5-inches [115 mm].
b. The skimmer must be provided with a thermoplastic strainer with 160 cu. inches
[2620 cc] capacity, rated at 75 GPM [284 L/min].
c. Minimum flow is 30 GPM [114 L/min], and the maximum flow is 75 gpm [284 l/min]
per each skimmer served by a minimum 2.50-inches [65 mm] connection pipe.
d. Provide the VGB certified / listed equalizer fittings and approved grate assemblies to
serve each direct-suction skimmer body in accordance with the Drawings and
Equipment Schedule.
e. The skimmer units must be supplied with NSF-listed “spring-loaded” equalizer
assembly mechanisms (or equivalent as provided by the manufacturer). Each
skimmer body must have two – 2.5-inches [65 mm] diameter piping connections.
f. Each skimmer must have two - VGB certified, NSF approved and CPSC listed equalizer
fittings, approved as a submerged suction outlet, and designed to be used as a
skimmers equalizer suction fitting for both floor and wall. Open Area: 13.80 sq.
inches; Flow Rate: 44/49 gpm (floor/wall).
g. The Basis of Design:

1) Skimmer: Model # 540-6400 by Waterway Plastics, 2200 East Sturgis Road,

Oxnard, California 93030, 805-981-0262, www.waterwayplastics.com
2) Skimmer Equalizer Submerged suction outlets: Model 34-222 with 2-inches [50
mm] socket connection; Recreonics, 4200 Schmitt Avenue, Louisville, KY 40213,
(800) 428-3254; www.recreonics.com
5. Wall inlet assemblies
a. Wall-mounted water inlet fittings must be white cycolac, frame with 1.5-inches
(socket x threaded FIP); when combined with a MIP threaded insert provides a
complete unit with adjustability features.
b. The adjustable inlet fitting must be provided with 1.5-inches [40 mm] PVC socket &
threaded connections.
c. The Basis of Design: Waterway Models # 215-9150 with insert # 400-1410D (White;
0.75-inch [18 mm]); Waterway Plastics, 2200 East Sturgis Road, Oxnard, California
93030, 805-981-0262, www.waterwayplastics.com
6. Wall static fittings
a. Wall-mounted water static insert fittings must be white cycolac, nominal 2-inches
[50 mm] diameter.
b. The fitting must be provided with 1.5-inches [40 mm] female socket and 2-inches [50
mm] male NPT connections.
c. The Basis of Design: Wall Fitting Body - Model #34-009 and Safety Grate Insert Grate
Model 34-013 by; Recreonics, 4200 Schmitt Avenue, Louisville, KY 40213, (800) 428-
3254; www.recreonics.com
7. Hydrotherapy jet assemblies
a. Hydrotherapy fittings must be white ABS and rated for 15 GPM [60 L/min] of water
flow at a total dynamic head not exceeding 42 feet [12 m] of the total dynamic head.
b. Therapy fittings must be combination wall and jet fittings with integral flow-through
connections for air and water supply lines.
c. The Basis of Design: Models (indicated below) Waterway Plastics, 2200 East Sturgis
Road, Oxnard, California 93030, 805-981-0262, www.waterwayplastics.com and
include:
1) Therapy fittings: Model #210-7810
2) Nozzles: Model #217-6620
3) Wall fitting: Model #212-7600G & 215-6660
D. RAIL GOODS
1. General:
a. Rails (& ladders) must be provided as a fabricated 1.50-inches [40 mm] x 0.120-inch
[3 mm] O. D. (wall thickness) ASTM-A-554 grade 316L-stainless steel rail. The finished
surfaces must be a polished number 6-finish. Grab rail and grab rail anchor sizes
must be coordinated to ensure compatibility.
b. Metallic components must be passivated, in compliance with ASTM A967-99,
incorporating organic acid passivation techniques for maximum corrosion resistance.
Following passivation, the metallic components must be electropolished to afford
uniformity of surface finish.

c. Welds must be TIG type and be applied using ASTM-A-554 grade 316L series welding
rod.
d. Bonding screws: Provide bonding screws (18-8 stainless steel). The minimum size of
the bonding screws must be 0.24-inch [6 mm] in diameter.
1) A bonding screw & lug must be provided on the lower portion of the anchor. The
bonding screw will be Type 316L-stainless steel.
2. Deck Anchors:
a. Grab Rail Anchors: Grab rails penetrating any PVC membrane must be anchored
with PVC anchors mounted in concrete. Anchors must be designed and fabricated
to withstand required loads and facilitate simple removal and replacement of the
grab rail without damage or part replacement. Grab rail and grab rail anchor sizes
must be coordinated to ensure compatibility.
b. The anchor must be the standard cataloged product of a company regularly engaged
in the manufacture of pool deck equipment.
c. The compression anchor must support a 1.50-inches [40 mm] O. D. stainless steel
rail, providing circumferential support. The stainless-steel retainer ring must apply
equal pressure around the circumference of the rail – offering support in every
conceivable direction of force, preventing rail damage and deformation. Wedges or
anchor systems incorporating dissimilar metallic materials will not be allowed.
d. The anchor body and cover must be fabricated from high-quality copolymers. The
anchor cover must incorporate four (4) countersunk holes to accommodate a three-
point spanner wrench.
e. The anchor body must incorporate an anti-rotation fin. The fin must be in the
uppermost part of the anchor body and will assist in preventing the anchor from
spinning in a concrete deck. The fin must be an integral component of the anchor
body.
f. The anchor must be 6.25-inches [158 mm] high and must be 1.5-inches [40 mm] in
diameter. Close tolerance dimensions must assist in achieving a secure fit for 1.5-
inches [40 mm] O. D. railing.
g. Provide a stainless-steel compression ring. The ring must be designed to make
sufficient contact with the 1.5-inches [40 mm] O. D. rail that the anchor is to secure.
The compression ring must not deform the rail in any manner.
h. The anchor must have a flush mount design such that an escutcheon plate is not
required.
i. An anchor spanner wrench must be supplied. It must be fabricated of stainless steel
and must incorporate three hardened roll pins for cover contact and tightening.
j. Provide an anchor lid to place into the deck anchor when the rails are removed.
k. The Basis of Design: Model #: COM-1.50-6 inch supplied by Inter-Fab Commercial
Aquatics, 3050 S. Alvernon Way, Tucson, AZ 85713; 520.790.7040;
www.ICAaquatics.com
3. Ladders

a. Ladders must be fabricated of stainless steel (corrosion resistant) and must have
non-slip, stainless steel tread steps. Cross braces are mandatory and must be
attached to vertical ladder rails by means of stainless steel split tees and stainless-
steel hardware. The centerline distance between the vertical uprights of the ladder
rails must be as dimensioned in the Drawings, allowing for a 3-inches [75 mm]
minimum clearance between the pool wall and the back of the ladder tread.
b. The ladder rails must have cross braces. Two (2) molded rubber bumpers must be
provided, one for each ladder rail. The ladder rails and their gripping surface must
comply with Accessibility Guidelines.
c. Each ladder tread is configured for 20-inches on center [508 mm], having 83.25 sq.
inches [53709 mm2] of surface area, and must be equipped with a step reference
locator. The tread top must have a non-slip top surface and must incorporate nut
inserts, eliminating the need for exterior nuts and sharp surfaces.
d. The ladder must be capable of being supported by two (2) 6.25-inches [156 mm]
deep escutcheons-less copolymer compression anchors.
e. The Basis of Design: Ladder assemblies must be by Inter-Fab Commercial Aquatics,
3050 S. Alvernon Way, Tucson, AZ 85713; 520.790.7040; www.ICAaquatics.com
4. Hand Rails
a. The stair rail must be of the multiple custom-bend designs. The stair rail must match
the geometry and dimensions indicated in the Drawings and must include an 18-
inches [540 mm] horizontal flat portion of the rail for user stability.
b. The rail height must comply with Accessibility Guidelines
c. If the rail length exceeds 8-feet [2.43 m], provide an additional vertical support post.
If the rails are intended for handicapped ramps, then vertical support posts must be
equally spaced and not exceed a maximum spacing of 7.5-feet [2.28 m] and must
comply with Accessibility Guidelines.
d. Two (2) 6.25-inches [156 mm] deep escutcheons-less Copolymer compression
anchors must support the stair rail.
e. The Basis of Design: Items must be by Inter-Fab Commercial Aquatics, 3050 S.
Alvernon Way, Tucson, AZ 85713; 520.790.7040; www.ICAaquatics.com
5. Grab Rails and Inset Steps
a. The grab rails and their gripping surface must comply with Accessibility Guidelines.
b. Four (4) 6.25-inches [156 mm] deep escutcheon-less Copolymer compression
anchors must support the grab rails. One anchor spanner wrench must be supplied
with each set of four (4) anchors.
c. The Basis of Design: Items must be provided by Inter-Fab Commercial Aquatics, 3050
S. Alvernon Way, Tucson, AZ 85713; 520.790.7040; www.ICAaquatics.com
E. CUP ANCHOR
1. Cup anchor must be fabricated of ASTM-A-554 grade 316L series stainless steel. The cup
and the flange portion of the anchor body must be stamped or drawn from a single
piece of material. The cup portion must be 3-inches [75 mm] with a depth of 2.5-inches
[63 mm]. The face flange must be 4-inches [100 mm] square and must fit flush with the
finished pool wall.

2. A standoff must be provided which must secure the eyebolt (or integral crossbar),
support an anchoring flange and bonding / grounding screw attachment.
3. The anchor bolt / integral crossbar must be provided. The eyebolt must be 18-8 stainless
steel. The eyebolt / integral crossbar must be flush with the face flange of the anchor
body and provide for a minimum 1-inch [25 mm] opening.
4. Supplied by Inter-Fab Commercial Aquatics, 3050 S. Alvernon Way, Tucson, AZ 85713;
520.790.7040; www.ICAaquatics.com
5. Line Anchors: Must be designed and fabricated to withstand forces specified by floating
line manufacturer or by recognized swimming authority. In case of a stainless steel
pool, line anchor construction must utilize third-party bracing elements (not solely
supported by wall panel) and/or utilize the structural pool system to provide resistance
to service forces (line anchors secured only to wall panels are not permitted).
F. HANDICAPPED ACCESSIBLE LIFT UNIT AND ANCHOR
1. Refer to the Rail Goods – General Requirements
2. Design assisted access lift to be self-operating, powered by water pressure of no more
than 55 psi (379.2 kPa)
3. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act) Accessible Lift Unit is required where applicable.
4. The lift must support a 400 lb. [181 kg] lifting capacity with a 1.5 safety factor.
5. Provide wheels for removal and transport to storage.
6. Lifting Mechanism: must be Manufacturer’s standard design to facilitate 42-inches
[1066 mm] of vertical travel, a stabilizing pressure foot to maintain load stability during
load rotation without deflection, and an adjustable base stand with anchor locations at
20.5-inches to 30-inches [520 mm to 762 mm] from the pool wall.
7. The lift must include two, 1-inch [25 mm] threaded anchor bolts to secure the lift to the
anchor assembly.
8. The lift’s anchor assembly comprises two jig-mounted threaded in beds that are located
29 5/8-inches [752 mm] O.C. The preset assembly must include a grounding lug for
proper bonding.
9. Provide 2 valve control handles requiring less than 5 lb. [2.2 Kg] of pressure to operate.
Locate at both deck and pool levels adjacent to the seat at resting position. The valve
control must not require continuous manual pressure to operate.
10. Include a self-adjusting stainless-steel footrest. Footrest surface must be 10-inches by 8-
inches [254 mm by 203 mm] and swivel to accommodate self-adjustment feature.
11. Metallic components of the lift must be fabricated of ASTM-A-554 316L-stainless steel.
The finished surface must be a polished number 6-finish
12. Provide a seat assembly that meets or exceeds the Type “A” Seat per ASTM seat
standards, and the following:
a. Size: 18-inches [455 mm] high, 18-inches [455 mm] wide and 17¾-inches [455 mm]
deep, double contour design.
b. The seat must fold down with a “No-Pinch” hinge and stainless-steel hinge pins
c. Include a rigid inner transfer arm and flip-up outer arm.
d. Seatbelt Assembly: Wide synthetic webbed belts with a quick release, non-metallic,
cam-lock buckle.
13. Water Box: Stainless steel, 8-inches [200 mm] wide by 8-inches [200 mm] long by 6.125
inches [155 mm] deep with vandal-proof cover.

a. Factory-cut one 1.125 inches [28 mm] diameter hole in the sidewall to allow for the
water supply line.
b. Plumb a hose spigot into the water box, allowing for connection of a flexible hose.
c. Factory cut a hole in the removable lid for the hose to pass through.
14. If insufficient water pressure is available for lift operations, then provide the following
pressure amplification system: ½-HP, single phase, 60-cycle, 3450 RPM, stainless steel
centrifugal pump.
a. The unit must have a performance rating of 5 GPM [1.385m3h] at 60 psi [413.7 kPa].
The system must employ a hydro-pneumatic pressure-sustaining tank having a
maximum working pressure of 100 psi [689.5 kPa] with a 3/4 inch [20 mm]-NPTM
tank connections as a holding reservoir.
b. Control the pump’s operation via a field-adjustable pressure switch allowing for
adjustment of cut-in and cut-out pressure.
c. The pump must be equipped with a 0.75-inch [20 mm], brass, spring-loaded check
valve designed to retain water pressure accumulated within the pressure-sustaining
tank.
d. Include 50-feet [15.24 m] of 0.375-inch [9.5 mm] Nylon Seal tubing and necessary
tubing connectors.
15. Provide Manufacturer’s standard:
a. “Flush plug” to cover the lift deck anchor when not in use.
b. Include a warning sign, double-stitched to the cover that is visible from the pool deck
when in use.
16. Battery operated lifts must have a completely sealed, watertight battery, intended for
use in the pool environment.
a. Items must be by Inter-Fab Commercial Aquatics, 3050 S. Alvernon Way, Tucson, AZ
85713; 520.790.7040; www.ICAaquatics.com
G. POOL SAFETY & RESTROOM SIGNS
1. Custom fabrication of signage must include:
a. Sign size established by the Architect
b. Aluminum-sign fabrication with baked enamel finish. Color: White
c. Fabricated aluminum frame with stainless steel 316 hardware suitable for wall
mounting.
d. Dark contrasting lettering – a minimum of 1-inch [25 mm] high (upper case only)
1) Exception: “NO DIVING” rule must be a minimum 4-inches [100 mm] high (upper
case only).
2) Refer to the Drawings for the recommended rules for the pool(s) operations.
2. Restroom location signage
a. Customize the directional arrow nature of the sign to point toward the location of
the restrooms.
b. Sign size established by the Architect. Each sign must have minimum 1-inch [25 mm]
high (upper case only) dark, contrasting letters and a correctly-located directional
arrow.

H. POOL ACCESSORIES
1. Safety and Cleaning Poles: one-piece, 16 feet [4.87 m] long minimum.
2.09 NOT USED
2.10 PUMPS
A. GENERAL
1. Refer to pump schedules for pump type ratings, water flows, heads, motor speed,
enclosure, efficiency, NPSH-R value, and power requirements. The unit must be suitable
for the conditions shown on the pump schedule.
2. Mount pump on a rigid, single piece base plate, with grouting hole, connected by
flexible coupling with a guard to an induction type motor of IE-3 if metric and NEMA
Premium (12.12) if Imperial premium efficiency level, suitable for VFD duty rated, and
slow-starting.
a. Exception: Vertical type pump motors may be provided with custom supports in lieu
of a base plate.
3. Unless otherwise noted in the "Pump-Type" ratings, pump construction must be cast
iron and be fitted with a long-life, product lubricated, drip-tight EPDM or VITON
mechanical seal, with O-ring seat retainer, designed for the specified maximum
temperature and pressure and for quiet operation.
4. The housing must be hydrostatically tested to 150 percent maximum working pressure.
5. The design of the pump must include ease of maintenance with machine fit parts that
are easily disassembled.
a. A coupling, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and operating in variable speed
applications, must be installed between the pump and motor.
b. A spacer coupler must be fitted to allow for removal of pump’s wetted end without
disturbing pump volute or movement of the pump’s motor and electrical
connections.
B. FEATURES SPECIFIED FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (TYPES A through J):
1. Impeller shaft:
a. Impeller shaft must be a solid 416 stainless steel; heat-treated to 80 KSI yield
strength and be supported by two heavy duty ball bearings. The design must allow
back pull-out servicing, enabling the assembly to be removed without disturbing the
casing piping connections.
2. Bearing Housing:
a. The bearing housing must supply support for a single row of permanently lubricated
heavy-duty ball bearings, with provision for purging or flushing. Grease bearings with
polyurea grease, capable of handling both high and low temperatures and resistant
to washout and condensation.
b. The bearings must be capable of absorbing both radial and thrust loads and
maintaining the rotating element in axial alignment.
c. Bearings must be capable of being inspected and repaired by removal of only a
bearing bracket.
3. Mechanical Seals

a. The pump’s mechanical seal must be Stainless Steel multi-spring balanced type with
silicon carbide faces incorporating EPDM or VITON secondary seals.
b. Provide stainless steel gland plate with stainless steel trim.
c. Provide factory-installed flush line with manual vent.
d. Seals must be capable of being inspected and easily repaired without disassembling
the pump and its piping connections.
4. Impeller:
a. Impeller must be of the enclosed double suction type made of low zinc silicon brass
or stainless steel - both hydraulically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-1:2003
balance grade G6.3 and keyed to the shaft
5. Volute:
a. Pump volute must be cast iron ASTM A159 (35,000 psi [241.32 mPa]) with an
integrally cast pump discharge and pump suction.
b. Flanges must be extra heavy-duty, 250# thickness while capable of being drilled for
125# ANSI flat face use. Volute must have integrally cast support feet, gauge ports at
nozzles, and vent and drain ports.
6. Fusion Bonded Coating:
a. Factory coat to protect internal cast iron wetted components with Scotchkote 134,
fusion bonded coating by 3M with a Thickness of 8 to 12 mils.
1) Exception: Impellor or similar components
b. Primer: Refer to the manufacturer’s recommended primer for the indicated
substrate.
7. Motor:
a. Motors must meet scheduled horsepower, rotational speed, phase & voltage, and
totally-enclosed-fan-cooled enclosure design (TEFC). Pump and motors must be
factory aligned, to be realigned after installation (prior to operation) by the
manufacturer’s representative.
b. Motors must be non-overloading at any point on the pump curve and meet NEMA
specifications conforming to the standards outlined in EPACT 92.
c. Motors must be Premium Efficient IE-3 if metric and NEMA Premium (12.12) if
Imperial, TEFC individually rated, listed for variable frequency drive / inverter duty,
and slow start.
d. Motors must have Class F (or higher) insulation for efficient operations, explicitly
identified, with duty-rated for VFD duty, and slow start.
e. Provide each motor with terminal blocks / terminal lugs for power connection.
f. Each motor (larger than 25 hp [18.64 kW] must have a shaft grounding ring system.
g. A manufacturer-supplied performance chart with an NPSH-R value is mandatory for
each pump.
8. Seismic:
a. The seismic capability of each pump must allow them to withstand a horizontal load
of 0.5g, excluding piping and fasteners used to anchor the pump to mounting pads,
without adversely affecting pump operation.
9. Testing & Paint Color:

a. Each pump must be hydrostatically tested, painted with two coats of high-quality
factory approved paint, and name-plated before shipment. Color: Red, unless noted
otherwise.
10. Accessories:
a. Internal bronze casing wear-rings, galvanized drip pan on the base, and unique
spacer-couplers.
C. PRE-APPROVED PUMPS - SPECIFIC TYPE AND CLASS RATINGS
1. Type: Refer to below listing for requirements of specified pump class':
2.
PUMP SPECIFIED ATTRIBUTES / FEATURES Manufacturers
TYPE / Series
A • Class: Flooded Suction Centrifugal Pump Armstrong
• Split-Coupled Vertical Inline Pump with Motor 4300
Integrated Pump Mounted Controls
• Integrated control enclosure must be NEMA 4X type.
• Stainless Steel Type 416 Pump Shaft with Outside
Balanced Mechanical Seal.
• Couplings must be split to allow removal from pump
and motor shafts, leaving space between the shafts
sufficient to replace mechanical seal components
without disturbing the pump or motor.
• Seal Construction: Silicon Carbide Seat, Resin
Bonded Carbon Rotating Face with EPDM, or VITON
Elastomers. Seal hardware must be 316L Stainless
Steel
• Pump volute must be coated with an NSF approved
low VOC epoxy on the interior and external surfaces.
• Motor enclosures must be TEFC with Terminal
Blocks
• Motor Efficiency: NEMA Premium (12.12) compliant
with NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2 for inverter-fed poly-
phase motors. IE-3 is compliant with metric.
• 1,750 RPM or less (Maximum Rotational-Speed)
• When the motor is greater than 25 hp, equip with an
AEGIS SGR motor shaft grounding system factory
installed and tested. Site installation of SGR is not
allowed.
• Pump must be compliant with NSF Standard 50-211.
B • Class: Flooded Suction Centrifugal Pump with Marlow 580
Vertical In-Line Construction
• Stainless Steel Pump Shaft / Sleeve with EPDM or
VITON Seals
• Epoxy Fused Coating on Wetted Parts
• TEFC Motor Enclosure with Terminal Blocks

• Premium Efficiency Motor IE-3 for metric and NEMA

Premium (12.12) for imperial Class F Insulation (or
better)
• Inverter / VFD Duty Rated Motor at 1,750 RPM or
less (Maximum Rotational-Speed)
• When the motor is greater than 25 hp, equip with a
Shaft Ring Mounted Grounding System
• NSF Standard 50 Listing Compliant
C • Class: Flooded Suction Centrifugal Pump with Marlow 530SC
Horizontal Construction
• Stainless Steel Pump Shaft / Sleeve with EPDM or
VITON Seals
Premium (12.12) for imperial Class F Insulation (or
better)
• Inverter / VFD Duty Rated Motor at 1,750 RPM
(Maximum Rotational-Speed)
• When the motor is greater than 25 hp, equip with a
Shaft Ring Mounted Grounding System
• NSF Standard 50 Listing Compliant
D • Class: Self-Priming Centrifugal Pump with Marlow 4SPC
Horizontal Construction
• Flanged Suction and Flanged Discharge
Premium (12.12) for imperial Class F Insulation
• Steel Pump Shaft with Replaceable Bronze Shaft
Sleeve with EPDM or VITON Seals
• Bronze Impeller
• Integral Suction Strainer with Stainless Steel Strainer
Basket
• NSF Listing Standard 50 Listing Compliant
E • Class: Self-Priming Centrifugal Pump with Marlow 6E1
Horizontal Construction Marlow 6E2
• Flanged Suction and Flanged Discharge Marlow 6E4
• Cast Iron Hydraulic Body with Epoxy Fused Coating Marlow 3PL
on Wetted Parts Marlow 4PL
• TEFC Motor Enclosure with Class F or better
Insulation


Premium (12.12) for imperial with Class F or better
Insulation
• Stainless Steel Pump Shaft or Stainless-Steel Shaft
Sleeve (Close-Coupled)
• EPDM or VITON Seals on 3PL and 4PL Only
• Cast Iron Impeller
• NSF Listing / NSF Standard 50 Listing Compliant
F • Class: Self-Priming Centrifugal Pump with Hayward
Horizontal Construction HCP Series
• Union-Coupled Suction and Discharge Pentair
• NORYL, Thermoplastic Housing Hydraulic Body Whisperflo-
• TEFC Motor Enclosure with Class E Insulation XFK Series
• Inverter / VFD Ready Rated Motor at 3,550 RPM or
• Stainless Steel Pump Shaft / Sleeve with VITON Seals
• Integral Non-Corrosive Strainer Basket with
Transparent Cover Lid
G • Class: Self-Priming Centrifugal Pump Marlow 3B
• 4-inch Suction and 3-inch Discharge Female NPT
Pipe Connections
• Cast Iron Hydraulic Body with Epoxy Fused Coating
on Wetted Parts
• ODP Motor EPACT Efficient EISA Compliant with
Class F Insulation
• Inverter / VFD Ready Rated Motor at 3,550 RPM or
• Steel Pump Shaft with Replaceable Bronze Shaft
Sleeve with EPDM Seals
• Cast Iron Impeller
• Integral Suction Strainer with Stainless Steel Strainer
Basket
H • Class: Self-Priming Centrifugal Pump with Hayward
Horizontal Construction Tri-Star-SP-
• FIP Suction and Discharge Pipe Connections 32x Series
• NORYL, Thermoplastic Housing Hydraulic Body Pentair
• ODP Motor at 3,450 RPM or less WhisperFlo
• Integral Non-Corrosive Strainer Basket with See- Challenger
Through Cover Lid Sta-Rite
• NSF Listing / NSF Standard 50 Listing Compliant Max-E-Pro
Dyna-Pro

I • Class: Self-Priming Trash Pump AMT 3xxx-95

• Rated for solid laden liquids, slurries, and sludge Series
• FIP Threaded Connections
• Cast Iron Hydraulic with Built-In Buna-N Check Valve
• Stainless Steel Impeller (Self-Cleaning) and Stainless-
Steel Shaft
• TEFC Motor Enclosure at 3,450 RPM or less with
Class F Insulation
• Stainless Steel Pump Shaft with EPDM or VITON
Seals
J • Class: Submersible Pump Barnes
• Rated for solids with diameters up to 3-inches 3xSE Series
• Flanged Discharge 4xSE Series
• Cast Iron Hydraulic Body with Epoxy Fused Coating Deming
on Wetted Parts 7365 Series
• TEFC Motor Enclosure to be Premium Efficiency IE-1
with Class F Insulation
• Stainless Steel Pump Shaft with EPDM or VITON
Seals
• Equipped with Float Level Controls
K • Class: Submersible Vertical Turbine Grundfos
• Inverter/VFD Duty Rated Motor at 3450-3480 RPM
• Shaft Seal SIC/SICNBR
• 4-inch Pump | 6-inch Motor | Impeller | Integral
Check Valve: Constructed of AISI 304 (or better)
Stainless Steel
• 4-inch FNPT Pump Discharge Connection
• Liquid Rated: Water Max temperature. 104°F
• Power: KVA Code J | 460/480V, 3PH, 60Hz
• Service Factor: 1.15
• Enclosure Class: (IEC 34-5) IP68
• Insulation Class (IEC 85) F
• Thermal Protection: External w/Built-in transmitter
• Cooling Jacket with Inlet Filter; AISI 304 (or better)
Stainless Steel
•
2.11 STRAINERS
A. INTEGRAL TYPE
1. The Basis of Design: Integral strainers as supplied with
a. Pentair Commercial type pumps
b. Hayward Commercial type pumps

B. LARGE HAIR & LINT STRAINERS

1. Stainless steel 316L is not less than 11-gauge.
a. The unit must be equipped with a more substantial influent, flanged connection with
a smaller eccentric-reducer-type effluent, flanged connection.
b. The upper hemisphere of the influent and effluent piping must be level requiring that
the strainer serves as an eccentric reducer as well.
1) Strainer units that do not allow the piping to reduce in size across the strainer
body are disallowed.
c. The open-area ratio of the influent pipe cross-sectional area compared to the
cumulative area of the openings in the baskets must not be less than a ratio of 19 to
1.
2. The welding process must be T.I.G. Parts must be fitted and welded in accordance with
approved standard practices defined by the American Welding Society regulations
regarding the TIG welding of stainless steel. The assembly must be sealed and purged
with argon or other inert gas as approved by the AWS. Filler rod must be 316 stainless
steel or better.
3. The circumference of the strainer body must be parallel to the direction of the entering
fluid. Entering fluid will enter the baskets open-end entrance unimpeded. A solid
partition between the baskets at the influent end must also serve as a sizeable debris-
catching bar. Basket configuration: Not less than four continuous flow paths, 90 percent
the length of the strainer body.
4. The influent and effluent nipples and flanges will be 316L stainless steel. Flange
thickness: Minimum 0.25 inch [6 mm] for 4-inches [100 mm] diameter flanges and
smaller; and not less than .50 inch [13 mm] for 5-inches [125 mm] diameter flanges with
the bolt arrangement pattern to match ANSI standards in size, dimension, quantity, and
location. The nipple portion must be rolled to the standard ANSI pipe diameter and
seam welded. The nipple must be inserted 1/8 inch [3 mm] into the flange and have a
continuous sealing weld connecting the two.
a. Exception: Metric sized flanges’ bolt patterns must match DIN standards.
5. The lid must be a minimum of 0.5-inches [13 mm] thick transparent polycarbonate sheet
with manufacturer-supplied reinforcing to assist in preventing excessive vacuum loads.
6. Lid bezel: 11-gauge stainless steel Type 316L. Mechanically fasten bezel to the lid with a
minimum twenty stainless steel Allen head screws. The lid will be one-piece cut to size
and not have any holes or penetrations. Each glazing beam provided handle openings
incorporated into the vertical portion of the glazing beam.
7. Gasket material: Premium-grade EPDM, VITON, or neoprene. The gasket must be 0.25
inch [6 mm] high by 0.25 inch [6 mm] outside dimension width conforming uniformly to
the dimensions of the lid receptor area.
8. Strainer must include a lid securing system comprised of stainless steel draw latches
with a maximum working pressure of 2250 psi [15.51 mPa], and a burst pressure rating
of 2400 psi [16.54 mPa]. Each draw latch bracket must be TIG welded to the body of the
ProStrainer. Provide 10 per strainer. Each draw latch must be pressure adjustable by
hand tightening a metal thread claw. Each of these operations must be accomplishable
without the use of tools.

9. Provide one FPT half coupling welded to the central lowest point on the strainer body.
Provide threaded brass or stainless plug screwed in strainer body accessed and serviced
from outside the strainer body.
a. Drain nipple will have threads on the exterior to allow for a standard pipe connection
and an external drain valve.
10. Strainer baskets: Provide 316L perforated stainless steel mesh and frame with 0.125
inch [3.2 mm] perforations, not less than 71% open area. Provide manufacturer’s
standard retractable handle. The strainer assembly must be provided with a minimum
of two internal-baskets (per strainer).
11. Strainer Limitations: Strainers must be operated upstream of pumps with a VFD or a
Motor Starter with soft-start.
12. The Basis of Design: ProStrainerTM Model by Neptune Benson, Inc.; 6 Jefferson Drive,
Coventry, Rhode Island 02816, (401) 821-2200; www.neptunebenson.com
a. Cast-iron, coated cast-iron, or fiberglass strainers are disallowed.
C. HIGH FLOW VOLUME FILTER STRAINERS
1. Strainers:
a. Housing: Carbon steel with factory-applied primer and top coat. Color RED.
b. Equip units with a semi-automated motorized brushaway feature or equivalent.
Refer to the Equipment Schedules.
c. A clogging indicator must be provided on each unit.
d. Maximum pressure: 150 psi [1,034.2 kPa]
2. Screen Elements:
a. Construct screens from molded plastic ribs that support a stainless-steel weave wire
screen with filtration sized at 500 microns. Verify the micron size rating prior to
ordering.
b. Remove inorganic suspended solids by means of an automatic flush valve.
c. The element cylinder must incorporate two O-rings to confirm sealing inside the
filter housing.
3. Construction Materials:
a. 500 mm to 3500 mm
1) Housing: Phosphate pre-treated steel 37-2 with polyester coating
2) Lid: SMC polyester
3) Seals: Nitrile rubber
4) Perforated stainless steel screens: Stainless Steel #316L
a. Brushaway Model; Amiad USA Inc. Main Office and Manufacturing: 120-J Talbert
Road, Mooresville, NC 28117, Tel: +1 704 662 3133, Fax: +1 704 662 3155, Toll Free:
+1 800 24 FILTER, E-mail: infousa@amiad.com www.amiadusa.com
b. Auto-Cleaning Steel Filter; Timex, Gıdacılar Caddesi 1064. Sokak No:10 Saray-
Kazan/ANKARA, Turkey; +90 312 815 52 46; info@timex.com.tr;
http://www.timex.com.tr/eng
2.12 FILTERS

A. GENERAL
1. Certifications: The filter(s) must bear the NSF Seal of Approval per NSF Standard 50.
a. The filter area must be listed in NSF-Standard 50 to provide the specific filter rate. No
modification, manipulation or interpretation of these values will be permitted.
2. Metallic tanks must be equipped with a UL listed grounding lug.
3. Refer to the Drawings for tank connection sizes.
4. A mandatory sight glass / clear pipe segment 2-Feet [600 mm] in length must be
provided on:
a. Defender Regenerative Filter - pre-coat pipe
b. All Filters – upstream of the flow meter
5. Each outdoor located filtration system must be manufacturer-rated for outdoor use. All
tubing must be metallic and impervious to rain and UV damage
B. REGENERATIVE FILTER SYSTEM:
1. Common Features:
a. Filter system
1) The primary components of the system consist of the primary filter tank, flex tube
filter elements, element assembly, bump-mechanism, vacuum transfer system,
sight glass, pressure gauge panel, inspection (viewing) window, valves, and
automatic filter controller.
2) Filter system capacity:
a) Flow rates are identified within the Drawings. No deviations are permitted.
b) Filter systems' total useful filter surface areas are identified in the Drawings.
3) Filter system must be designed to amplify sq. feet [sq. M.] of filter area while
minimizing operating weight. Systems that operate at more than 11 lbs. per sq.
feet [53.71 kG per sq. M.] of filter area must not be considered.
b. Filter Tanks:
1) The filter tank sizes (physical dimensions) are identified in the Drawings. Each tank
must be suitable for 50 psi [344.7 kPa] working pressure and hydrostatically
tested to 75 psi [517.1 kPa].
a) Tank basin: Minimum 0.25 inch [6 mm] thick.
b) Bottom dished head: Minimum 0.25 inch [6 mm] thick.
c) Top flat head: Minimum 1.5 inches [40 mm] thick.
d) Material: Type A-36 carbon steel.
2) Certified welders must perform welding. Joints must be butt, or fillet welded
inside and out by the manual or automatic process. Welded joints must have
sufficient penetration and fusion with little or no reduction of the thickness of the
base metal. Welds must be free of coarse-ripples, grooves, overlaps, rugged
ridges, or valleys. Welded surfaces must be chipped and brushed clean, when
necessary, leaving no slag or splatter.
3) Tank legs: 6-inches x 2.5 inches [150 mm x 63.5 mm] channel legs 0.25 inch [6mm]
thick. 137 cm filters must have (4) legs.
a) Material: Type A-36 carbon steel.

b) Bearing plates: 10-inches x 5-inches x 0.25 inch [250 mm x 125 mm x 6 mm]

Type 316L stainless steel. Each bearing plate must have (2) 5/8 inch [15.8 mm]
drilled holes to secure to the floor with the 0.5-inch x 4.5 inches [12.7 mm x
114.3 mm] stainless steel concrete anchors provided.
c) The legs must be designed with bolted connections to minimize overall tank
height for shipping and access to the mechanical room.
4) The tank head must be bolted to the basin with 7/8 inch [22.2 mm] diameter
T316L stainless steel threaded rods and nuts, 9-inches [225 mm] on center
around the tank perimeter.
5) The tank must include brackets for mounting automatic controller, gauge panel,
filter / regulator, vacuum transfer blower and vacuum hose rack.
a) Include a minimum 12-inches [305 mm] diameter access port with cover and
hardware to facilitate cleaning of tube elements and interior inspection of the
filter.
6) The tank must include an integrally mounted hydraulic lifting device (davit). The
davit assembly must be designed to lift the filter head and include a pivot
mechanism allowing the head to rotate 180°, for access to the tube sheet.
7) Systems requiring external devices for filter head removal will not be considered.
c. Flexsol 3000 Interior Lining
1) Interior surfaces must be grit blasted to white metal condition with a 2-3 mil
profile. Blasted surfaces must be cleaned of dust or blast residues and primed as
soon as is practical on the same day blasting is done.
2) When priming has dried, the lining process will begin. If prime coat has cured for
over twenty-four hours, a refresher coat will be applied.
3) Application of Flexsol 3000® lining must be made by experienced applicators using
a high-pressure, high-temperature plural component system. Wetted surfaces
including flange face(s), man-way rings, and man-way covers must be lined to 120
mils +/- 5 mils DFEET
4) Hardness must be verified after curing to ASTM D 2240 standard.
5) Flexsol 3000® lining must meet the NSF toxicity standard unconditionally and
must be approved for use with the NSF approved filter.
6) Flexsol 3000® lined vessels must carry a ten (10) year limited non-prorated
warranty.
d. Exterior Coatings
1) Exterior surfaces must be grit blasted to white metal condition with a 2-3 mil
profile. Blasted surfaces must be cleaned of dust or blast residues and primed as
soon as is practical on the same day blasting is done.
2) When priming has dried, the coating process will begin. If prime has cured for
over twenty-four hours, a refresher coat will be applied.
3) Two coats of high solids enamel must be applied for a total developed film
thickness of 5-8 mils.
4) The manufacturer is to supply a minimum of 16 ounces [0.5 L] of high solids
enamel touch-up paint.

5) Each tank must be epoxy painted / coated after placement with the equipment
room. Provide a marine-grade epoxy-painted / coating (2 coats) installed per the
manufacturer's requirements with proper primers in color selected by This
Engineer.
6) Authorized coatings are:
a) Sherwin Williams MACROPOXY® 646-100 FAST CURE EPOXY or approved equal
i: Provide recommended primers for the selected tank coatings
e. Internal Components
1) The filter must consist of flex tube elements, filter tube sheet, stainless steel lift
shaft, and internal flow diversion assembly.
2) The filter elements must be flexible tubes that provide the support structure for
the media. The outer wall of each element must be fabricated of multi-filament
high strength polyester braid. Each filter-element must have an internal T316L
stainless steel spring, which acts as a support structure for the braided filament.
3) The filter element tube sheet must be fabricated of T316L stainless steel and
provide both support for the top of the element assembly as well as a watertight
seal to prevent media from escaping the filter tank.
4) The lift shaft must be fabricated from T316L stainless steel and provide the
internal connection between the filter element tube sheet and the external bump
mechanism.
5) The influent filter connection must be fitted with a T316L stainless steel flow
diversion assembly.
6) Stainless steel wetted fasteners must be Type 316L.
7) Systems utilizing rigid elements with replaceable filter septum must not be
considered.
f. Vacuum Transfer System
1) The design of the vacuum transfer system must allow the recharging of media
into the filter for either bag or bulk media.
2) Vacuum blower motor: 5 HP [3.73 kW] TEFC 115/230v single-phase, 50 - 60 Hz
(verify).
3) Provide an inline filter with dual connections to prevent dust and media from
being drawn into the blower.
4) Provide three (3) 1.5-inches [40 mm] Sch. 80 PVC ball valves for the vacuum drain
line, the blower/fan inlet, and the vacuum hose.
5) Provide 10 feet of 1.5-inches [3 m of 40 mm] vacuum hose with specified fittings.
6) Install a GFI protected receptacle on the vacuum mounting bracket that is field
wired to the RMF controller.
7) Provide necessary pipe, fittings, and hardware for field plumbing of the vacuum
transfer system.
8) Systems requiring external pre-coat mixing tanks, slurry feed, or other wet media
transfer devices must not be considered.
g. Air Compressor Package: One air compressor per mechanical room. The following is
the minimum requirement:
1) 2 hp [1.49 kW]
2) 20-gallon [75.7 L] capacity receiving tank

3) 135 psi [930.8 kPa] maximum, 5.2 cfm [147.2 L/min] at 90 psi [620.5 kPa]
4) Air pressure gauge, pressure relief valve, belt guard, pressure switch, air filter,
tank drain, and water separator
5) 115 vac, 1-phase, 15 amps FLA, 50 - 60 Hz (verify)
6) Auto start / stop control package
7) Compressed Air Piping from air compressor’s filter / regulator to Defender
components and valves must be:
a) 0.50 inch [50 mm] hard brass pipe with 0.50-inch shut-off brass ball valve
b) Must be manufacturer-rated for outdoor use and UV-resilient proof
c) The Basis of Design:
i: McMaster-Carr – Brass nipple # 50785K14
ii: McMaster-Carr – Brass valve # 4628K83
iii: McMaster-Carr – Dielectric unions as needed
h. Media
1) Expanded perlite with a median particle size of 37 microns. Percentage retained
on a +150 Tyler Mesh must not be less than 8% or more than 25%. Darcy
permeability must be between 1.2-1.85.
2) Contain no more than 1 tenth of one percent (.001) of crystalline silicate.
3) Certified by the Manufacturer for use in the Defender Filter. The media must be
NSF Std. 50 listed.
4) The Basis of Design: Aquaperl (Harborlite) supplied by World Minerals.
5) Each Defender filter must be furnished with the specified charges of perlite media
as scheduled on the Drawings.
i. Filter Cleaner: Each Defender filter must be furnished with one (1) charge of
chemicals for cleaning and degreasing of filter tube elements.
2. Automated Style Regenerative Defender
3. The Basis of Design: Defender or Assero Model(s) as scheduled on the Drawings, as
manufactured by Neptune Benson, 6 Jefferson Drive, Coventry, Rhode Island 02816,
(401) 821-2200; www.neptunebenson.com
a. Bump Mechanism
1) Pneumatically operated tire-mounted externally on the filter tank head. The tire is
alternately pressurized then depressurized causing the connected filter element
assembly to move in an upward then downward fashion.
2) Systems that do not incorporate a pneumatic bump mechanism must not be
considered for automation.
b. Automatic Controller
1) The controller must provide total control of the system's filtration and
regeneration cycles, and provide necessary equipment interlocks and timing
mechanisms to execute the filter program.
2) The controller must include an adjustable pressure switch, factory set to 50 psi
[344.7 kPa]. The switch must stop recirculating pump and close the pneumatic
valves if air pressure falls to 50 psi [344.7 kPa].
3) The controller must contain a microprocessor that will activate the following
functions of the system:

a) Bump cycle / manual or automatic

b) Precoating of the filter elements
c) Stopping and starting the main recirculating pump
d) Opening and closing of pneumatically operated valving
e) Vacuum transfer system
f) Heater cool down delay
g) Auxiliary contacts to interlock chemical control or other equipment
h) Keyed switch to activate continuous, intermittent bump cycle for flex tube
cleaning.
4) Controller panel must display the following functions:
a) Filter status
b) Precoat status
c) Recirculating pump status
d) Vacuum transfer pump status
e) System power
5) Controller enclosure must be NEMA 4x (unless otherwise noted), or pre-approved
alternate.
6) The RMF automatic controller will provide signal power to the primary
recirculating pump variable frequency (VFD) including control wiring.
7) The RMF must be 120V, 50 – 60 HZ (verify), 1-phase, 30 amps rated and be UL
labeled.
8) Systems without programmable, automatic bump/regeneration/filter modes must
not be considered.
a) Manual-bump systems are disallowed
c. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) must be provided with each Defender (one per filter
pump) for control of the filter pump motor.
d. Digital Flow Meter
1) A digital flowmeter must be included with a 4 to 20 mA 0-10 VDC analog output.
2) The flow meter can read a minimum of 150% of the design flow rate.
3) The flow meter must be wired into the VFD to provide automatic speed control of
the filter pump motor.
4) The VFD must compensate for varying filter head losses by maintaining the
specified flow rate with the 4 to 20 mA output signals of the flowmeter.
e. Filter / Regulator
1) Each filter must include a combination filter / regulator.
2) The regulator must be adjustable from 0 – 120 psi [0 to 827.4 kPa]; ½-inch [13
mm] FPT connections must be provided for field installation of air tubing. All air
tubing equipment must be metallic and be manufacturer-rated for outdoor use
and impervious to rain event and UV damage & degradation.
f. Water Separator: One water separator with automatic drain must be provided for
each air compressor supplied. ½-inch [13 mm] FPT connections must be provided for
field installation of metallic air tubes.
g. Pneumatic Actuators

1) Each filter must include pneumatic actuators for (1) influent valve, (1) effluent
valve, and (1) pre-coat valve
2) Double-acting with valve-mounted drilling to ISO 5211.
3) Include (2) 0.25-inch [6 mm] FPT ports for open / close connections. Flow control
valves with quick connect fittings must be provided at each port to allow speed
control adjustment for the open / close function of the actuators.
4) Materials:
a) Body: Aluminum alloy, extruded per ASTM 6063, anodized per UNI 4522
b) Ends: Die-cast in Aluminum alloy per ASTM B179, epoxy-polyester coated
c) Pistons: Die-cast on Aluminum alloy per ASTM B179
d) Pinion: Nickel-plated steel
e) Slideways: Acetal resin (LAT LUB 731320T)
f) Fasteners: AISI 316L Stainless steel
g) Springs: Epoxy coated steel, pre-compressed
h) Seals: NBR Nitrile rubber
i) Lubricant: MoS2
j) All components must be manufacturer-rated for outdoor use and UV resilient
weatherproof
5) Factory lubricates to allow for 1,000,000 maneuvers.
6) Include adjustable travel stops for both directions.
7) Working temperature limits: 4 to 186-deg F [15.5° to 85.5° C].
8) A toolkit for adjustment of pneumatic actuators must be provided by the filter
manufacturer.
9) Systems utilizing manually-operated valves are prohibited.
h. Solenoid Valves
1) Each filter must include three-(3) single solenoid, 4-way valves mounted on a
multi-station manifold for the operation of the pneumatic actuators and bump
mechanism.
2) Valves must include lighted DIN connectors.
3) Valves must be factory lubricated, and not require any field lubrication.
4) Valves with multi-station manifold must be located on the bottom of the
automatic controller, factory wired and include quick connect fittings for
attachment to the pneumatic actuators and bump mechanism.
5) The Basis of Design: SMC Series SY-7000, or pre-approved alternate.
i. Manufacturer Supplied Valves (included with filter system)
1) Each Defender Regenerative Filter contains five (5) system valves to facilitate
system fill after media recharge, pre-coat/regeneration, influent & effluent for
filtering and media dump/drain valve.
2) Precoat/regeneration and effluent valves: Butterfly type with pneumatic
actuators.
3) The system fill-valve: Butterfly type with lever operator and is the same size as the
pre-coat/regeneration valve.
4) Influent valve: Wafer type check valve, ductile iron body (with epoxy-fused
coating) with a double disc, SS Type 304L.
5) Dump/rinse valve: Butterfly type, lever operated with stainless steel extension.

j. Drain Requirements
1) A sump pit or standpipe is required for dumping spent media and rinsing tube
elements.
2) Size sump or standpipe drain piping for 300 gpm capacity.
a) If drain piping cannot be sized for 300 gpm, or if the sewer is at an elevation
higher than the filter tank drain, use the following minimum sump sizes for
each Defender Model:
i: Model SP-24-xx 130 gals
ii: Model SP-27-xx 160 gals
iii: Model SP-33-xx 250 gals
iv: Model SP-41-xx 450 gals
v: Model SP-49-xx 620 gals
vi: Model SP-55-xx 850 gals
3) Refer to the Drawings for the specified trash / sump pump to transfer waste to
the authorized outfall.
C. PORTABLE VACUUM FILTER SYSTEM:
1. Provide self-contained vacuum unit(s) intact with pump, filter, piping, valving, vacuum
hoses, poles, vacuum heads, 100 feet [30 m] extension cord, and wheeled units for easy
transport.
2. Coordinate supply voltage with the vacuum assembly unit provided.
a. The Basis of Design: Model "Wildcat E2" by Spectrum Aquatics, (800) 791-8056, 7100
Spectrum Lane, Missoula, Montana 59808. www.spectrumproducts.com
b. Verify available project voltage prior to ordering.
2.13 TANKS & CABINETS
A. ABOVE-GRADE CHEMICAL TANKS
1. General
a. Chemical tanks must be rotationally molded high-density cross-linked polyethylene,
one-piece seamless construction, cylindrical in cross-section, vertical in axis, intact
with piping inlets and outlets, drains, overflows, and restraint systems.
b. Enclosed tanks must be vented; tanks must be provided with entrance man ways,
level indicators, and UV-resistant exterior coating.
c. Tanks must be marked to identify the manufacturer, date of manufacture and serial
number.
d. Ladder:
1) Fiberglass access ladders must be provided with the polyethylene chemical
storage tanks at locations as shown. Use proper chemical resistant materials
when anchoring to tank dome or sidewall.
2) Ladders must be mounted to the tank to allow for tank expansion and contraction
due to temperature and loading changes.
3) Ladders must be designed to meet applicable OSHA standards. Reference: OSHA
2206; 1910.27; fixed ladders.
e. Fittings and Gaskets:
1) Fittings must be of the following type as suitable for the service:

a) Fittings must be compression type, tank adapters with standard national pipe
thread to be compatible with associated plumbing. Fittings must be made
vertical on sloping tank tops as specified.
b) Bolted spool fittings must be flange fittings with one 150 lb. [68 Kg] flange. Use
bolts with polyethylene injection molded encapsulated heads compatible with
the chemical stored. Provide gaskets for bolts sealing surface on the inner
surfaces of the tank.
c) Only integrally molded outlets (molded as part of the tank) must be used as a
drain. Field installed outlets are disallowed.
d) Fittings must be installed at the factory.
2) Gaskets: Minimum 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, constructed of 60-70 durometer VITON.
f. Flexible couplers / connections:
1) Lower-sidewall tank fitting attachments must be equipped with flexible
couplers/connections designed to deflect due to tank loading, chemical
temperature, and storage time duration.
2) Tank piping flexible couplers must be designed to allow design movement in any
direction.
g. Bolted flange fittings:
1) Construct with one 150 psi [1,034.2 kPa] flange, one 150 psi [1,034.2 kPa] flange
gasket, and the correct number of all-thread bolts.
2) Flanges: PVC Type 1, Grade 1.
3) Gaskets: Minimum 0.25 inch [6 mm] thick, constructed of 60 to 70 durometer
VITON.
4) Bolts must be encapsulated with polyethylene. The encapsulated bolt head must
not contact the fluid in the tank and must cover the head. See manufacturer for
polyethylene color code to identify the bolt base metal.
5) Encapsulated heads must have a gasket to provide a sealing surface against the
inner wall of the tank.
6) Bolt holes must straddle the principal centerline of the tank in accordance with
ASME B16.5.
h. Downpipes and fill pipes: PVC or material compatible with the chemical stored
1) Support at 6 feet [1.8 m] max intervals.
i. U-Vents: OSHA 1910.106(F) (iii) (2) (IV) (9)
1) Each tank must be vented for the material and flow and withdrawal rates
expected.
2) Tank manufacturer-sized insect screen
a) Caution: Insect screen open area may lessen the tank capacity by 1/3.
3) Material: PVC or material compatible with the chemical stored.
j. Flange Adapters: may be used to adapt threaded or socket fitting components to 150
psi [1034.2 kPa] flange connections. Adapters must be of a material compatible with
the chemical stored.
1) Adapters
a) Level indication:

i: Float indication: The level indicator must be assembled to the tank and
consist of PVC float, indicator, polypropylene rope, perforated interior
pipe, PVC roller guides, clear PVC sight tube, and necessary pipe supports.
ii: The level indicator must act inversely to the tank contents and must not
allow entrance of tank contents into the sight tube at any time.
k. Manufacturer: Poly Processing Company, P.O. Box 4150, Monroe, Louisiana 71211;
866.590.6845. The manufacturer’s representative is CES, 860 Jupiter Park Drive, Suite
2, Jupiter, FL 33458, 800.940.1557; WWW.CESWaterQuality.com
2. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks
a. Tanks must comply with ASTM D 1998 Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks, except
where modified in this specification.
b. Service: Chemical storage tanks must be suited for the following operating
conditions:
1) Chemical Stored: Sodium hypochlorite
a) Concentration: 9% - 15% maximum
b) Resin: XLPE with oxidation resistant system (OR-1000)
c) Fitting Material: PVC, Schedule 80
d) Gasket Material: VITON
e) Bolt Material: Titanium (stainless not allowed)
f) Approximate specific gravity for chemical: 1.2
g) Specific gravity rating for the primary tank: 1.9
h) Specific gravity rating for the secondary tank: 1.65
i) Tank design:
i: Safe-Tank – primary and secondary containment
ii: IMFO (Integrally Molded Flanged Outlet) Tank to allow thorough -drainage
iii: Black color – UV Resilient - or insulation with mastic coating specified in
outdoor installation to assist in preventing chemical degradation
iv: Flexible connectors to assist in preventing pump vibration stress damage
v: B.O.S.S. fittings (by manufacturer) are specified
vi: Tank pad (PPC IMFO) must be provided by the manufacturer
vii: Safe-surge manway cover specified
viii: Vent design: Exceed the largest fill or discharge pipe by 1-inch [25 mm]
minimum
2) Chemical Stored: Hydrochloric acid (aka Muriatic acid)
a) Concentration: <35%
b) Resin: XLPE with oxidation resistant system (OR-1000)
c) Fitting Material: PVC, Schedule 80
d) Gasket Material: EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) or VITON
e) Bolt Material: Titanium (stainless not allowed), Alloy C-276
f) Approximate specific gravity: 1.16
g) Specific gravity rating for the primary tank: 1.9
h) Specific gravity rating for the secondary tank: 1.65
i) Tank design (mandatory):
i: Safe-Tank - primary and secondary containment
ii: IMFO tank to allow thorough -drainage

iii: Fume-tight manway cover

iv: Scrubbers (to reduce corrosive fumes into the environment)
v: Black color – or insulation with mastic coating specified in outdoor
installation to assist in preventing chemical degradation
vi: Mandatory flexible connectors / rubber expansion joints to assist in
preventing pump vibration stress damage - must be provided by the
manufacturer
vii: B.O.S.S. fittings (by manufacturer) are specified
viii: Tank pad (PPC IMFO) must be provided by the manufacturer
ix: Vent design: Exceed the largest fill or discharge pipe by 1-inch [25 mm]
minimum
c. Lifting Lugs: A minimum of three lifting lugs must be provided on chemical tanks are
having a capacity of more than 3,000 gals. [11 m3].
1) Lugs must be designed for lifting the tank when empty.
2) Unless otherwise indicated, bolted sealed top manway must be 17-inches [430
mm] or higher and be in locations easily accessible from the nearest worker
access position.
a) The sealed man way must be constructed of polyethylene material.
b) The bolts must be chemically compatible with the chemical being stored.
c) Gaskets must be closed cell, cross-linked polyethylene foam, VITON, and
EPDM materials.
d. Safe tanks/containment systems (Tank-within-a-Tank)
1) Tanks must consist of an HDXLPE (High-Density Crosslinked Polyethylene) primary
tank with secondary containment.
2) The primary tanks must be a vertical, cylindrical, flat bottom, dome top, and
seamless in construction.
3) The secondary containment tank, outer tank, must be an HDXLPE, open top,
vertical, cylindrical, flat bottom, and seamless in construction. The outer tank
must be rated at 110% of the inner tank's capacity.
4) The tank diameter must be measured externally. Tolerance on the outside
diameter including out of roundness must be plus or minus 2 percent.
Measurement must be taken in a horizontal position. The knuckle radius at the
bottom of a wall must be a minimum of 1-inch [25 mm]
5) Edges cut out, such as entrance man way, must be trimmed to have smooth
edges.
6) Bottom sidewall fittings must be designed for Safe tanks / containment systems.
B. ABOVE-GRADE CO2 BULK STORAGE TANK & ACCESSORIES
1. General
a. Tank capacity: 118 gallons with a storage capacity of 1000 pounds at 125 psig
b. Tank design criteria: ASME rated compliant with pressure vessel design section VIII,
Division 1; 300 psig with insulation type SI; stainless steel #316 tank construction
with related hardware, valves, gauges, and connectors
c. Dimensions: 30-inches diameter x 72.5-inches high support with a 6-inches [150 mm]
tall reinforced housekeeping pad

d. Performance: Minimum usage 3.0 lb./day; rated for up to a continuous CO2 gas
delivery of 30 lb./hour; peak flow rate of 50 lb./hour
2. The Basis of Design for the low-pressure bulk CO2 tank: Model 1000 HF, Low-Pressure
Bulk CO2, MVE, Carbo-Systems as provided by Chart, Inc. 800.400.4683;
www.chartindustries.com
3. Minimum required accessories from Chart, Inc. include:
a. Fill gun and flush mount fill box
b. Surface mount fill box
c. CO2 fill hose with a vent hose
d. Piping, valves, gauges, drain ports per the manufacturer
C. BELOW-GRADE CHEMICAL TANKS
1. General
a. Below-grade chemical tanks must be rotationally molded high-density cross-linked
polyethylene, one-piece seamless construction, cylindrical in cross-section, vertical in
axis, intact with piping inlets and outlets, drains, overflows, and restraint systems.
b. Each tank must have a self-containment / double wall tank system.
c. Tanks must be marked to identify the manufacturer, date of manufacture and serial
number.
D. COLLECTOR / SURGE / RESERVOIR TANK REQUIREMENTS
1. General:
a. Fiberglass Ladders: The tank must be equipped with an integral fiberglass ladder with
extendable hand-hold safety provisions.
b. Leak-proof Requirements: The tank must be manufacturer-certified as waterproof
and leak proof.
c. Socket Geometry: Standard ANSI geometry. Unless otherwise specified herein, Type
2 (Sch. 80 PVC) socket fittings must be stub-mounted with a maximum fitting
protrusion from the tank surface of 3-inches [75 mm].
d. Piping: Provide the overflow piping, specified modulating diversion valves, foot
valves, isolation and variable valves, tank level sensors, water fill sensors, water-
pressure testing assemblies, & pipe supports as identified within the Drawings.
e. Top Lip Requirements: Include provisions to mount a collar to maintain the upper
part of the surge tank at 6-inches [150 mm] above the highest water elevation.
2. Below-Grade Fiberglass Tank:
a. Construction: Reinforced fiberglass unless indicated to be concrete in the Drawings.
1) Reinforced Fiberglass Construction: Base construction to be wood or steel
reinforcing (as required for support).
2) Reinforcing members must be located on the outside surfaces of the tank and be
glassed over to affirm no reinforcing member surfaces are exposed.
3) Internal ribbing, braces, or gussets may be used to achieve stability at the
discretion of the manufacturing fabricator; however, internal gussets or ribbing
must be limited to that which allows at least 95% of the nominal tank volume to
be achieved.

4) External gussets may be used to increase stiffness and stability; however, gussets
must not protrude more than 4-inches [100 mm] from the tank surface
dimensions and must not interfere with access to flange or NPT connections.
5) Specified Type 2, Sch. 80 PVC fittings must be factory installed. No field-installed
fittings are permitted.
6) Mounting Provisions: Design tank to mount on a concrete ballast pad at its invert
elevation. Ballast pad to be certified to provide sufficient resistance to suspected
hydrostatic uplift pressures assuming an empty tank and groundwater to be
within 12-inches [305 mm] of the uppermost surface elevation.
a) Place a minimum of one (1) cubic yard of 3,500 psi [24.13 mPa] concrete for
every 200 gallons [0.75 m3] of tank capacity around each tank to resist
hydrostatic uplift pressures. The reinforced-foundation must extend 3-ft [0.91
m] beyond the exterior vertical walls of the tank.
b) Provide structural anchors affixed and integral to the tank capable of fastening
the tank to the concrete foundation per the manufacturer’s instructions and
requirements.
7) Each collector, reservoir, and surge tank(s) must be equipped & provided (by the
manufacturer) with Sch. 80 PVC water-pressure test assemblies consisting of 2-
feet [600 mm] of pipe, slip socket cap, pressure gauge, and a hose bibb on each
pipe penetration into the tank.
8) Lifting Provisions: Provide lifting features to facilitate hoisting. The tank must
accommodate lifting without permanent deformation of any part or surface.
9) Shipping Requirements: Before shipping, cap or plug tanks. Prepare the tank for
shipping with no external pressures that may affect the integrity of the tank or
accessories.
10) Provide the specific valves indicated on Drawings.
b. The Basis of Design:
1) AquaWorx, 10450 66th St N., Pinellas Park, FL 33782, 888.426.8851,
www.aquaworxusa.com
3. Below-Grade Concrete Tanks
a. If a reinforced concrete tank is scheduled, construct the concrete tank per the
Drawings and These Specifications.
b. Xypex water-proof admix C-500-NF is required in its reinforced, waterproof concrete.
E. CHEMICAL CABINETS
1. Chemical cabinets must be lockable, well-vented, equipped with a light assembly (rated
for corrosive locations), and large enough to contain the designated chemicals.
2. Cabinets must have a UV-resistant exterior coating.
3. A weatherproof sign / label must be placed on the exterior of the enclosure to signify
the chemical contents and the maximum chemical storage capacity
2.14 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION – FLOW & PRESSURE
A. GENERAL
1. Gauges must have a minimum 2-inches [50 mm] diameter dial face and be readable
from 12-feet [3.5 m].

2. Wetted materials must be stainless steel or bronze alloy.

3. Dual purpose gauges are permitted.
4. Gauges must be remote back-mounted onto the pump gauge panel.
5. Gauges located outdoors must be weatherproof with stainless steel hardware.
B. BACKFLOW PREVENTER
1. Refer to the Architect’s project MEP engineer for this design.
2. Recommendations to the project MEP:
a. The assembly must be a “reduced pressure principle backflow preventer” of at least
1-inch [25 mm] NPT size. The actual backflow preventer must match (in size) the
auto-fill / manual fill pipe size.
b. The unit must be rated for supply pressure up to 175 psi [1,206.6 kPa] and water
temperatures up to 180° F [75° C].
c. Material: Bronze
d. Required Accessories: shut off valves on both sides.
e. Recommended Accessories: union connections, strainer
f. The Basis of Design: Watts LF009M2-QT by Watts Water Technologies Company;
Lawrence, MA 01842; 617.688.1811.
C. FLOWMETERS
1. Each filtration system must be provided with a remote-reading flow meter sensor
installed on the discharge side of the pump return flow adjusting valve (after the filter
and heater). A 4-20 mA signal is preferred.
2. All electronic flowmeters must be equipped with a local numeric readout display unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
3. The flow meter must be rated for a minimum of 150% the design water flow gpm.
D. GAUGE PANEL
1. Refer to the Drawings for a representation of the pump gauge panel.
2. Vacuum, pressure, flow, and temperature gauges must be mounted on the panel using
back-connected gauges.
3. Materials:
a. PVC
b. Stainless steel
E. PRESSURE GAUGES
1. Provide primary recirculation pumps with a pressure gauge with sensor tubing installed
on the discharge side of the pump as shown in the Drawings.
2. Each pressure filter / strainer system must have two pressure gauges, one mounted on
the influent-side and one on the effluent side of the filter.
3. The gauge can read a maximum pressure of 50-psi [344.7 kPa].
4. The gauge must be fitted with a 0.25-inch [6 mm] NPT stem back connection and be
suited for direct back-mounting on the gauge-panel.
F. PRESSURE REDUCING DEVICES
1. Pressure-reducing valves: Bronze, rated for a maximum supply pressure of 300-psi
[2,068.4 kPa] and adjustable downstream pressure of 25 to 75 psi [172.4 to 517.1 kPa].

2. The unit must be factory-preset at 65-psi [448.2 kPa].

3. The Basis of Design: Watts’s #LF25AUB-Z3 sized to match the incoming municipal water
supply pipe size by Watts Water Technologies Company; Lawrence, MA 01842;
617.688.1811.
G. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
1. Material: Bronze, rated for an AGA/CGA steam rating of up to 14,370,000 BTU/hour (or
as specified by the specific manufacturer’s requirements).
2. Valve must be set to relieve at a temperature of 210° F [98° C] and a pressure of 125 psi
[861.8 kPa].
3. Inlet and outlet connections must be up to 2-inches [50 mm] NPT.
4. Unless otherwise specified, pressure relief valves for ratings not exceeding 14,370,000
BTU/hour must be Watts’s #174A.
5. The balance of the specified pressure relief valves must be sized in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements.
6. Pressure relief valves must be by Watts Water Technologies Company; Lawrence, MA
01842; [617.688.1811].
H. TEMPERATURE GAUGES
1. Each heated system must be provided with a remote-reading temperature gauge (or
thermometer) with the sensor connected to the downstream side of the mixed, heated
water piping run.
2. The temperature gauge can read a maximum temperature of 120° F [48° C].
3. Wetted materials must be of stainless steel, Type 316L.
4. Gauges must be remote back-mounted onto the pump gauge panel.
a. Aluminum
I. VACUUM GAUGES
1. Provide primary recirculation pumps with a vacuum gauge with sensor tubing installed
on the suction side of the pump as shown in the Drawings.
2. A vacuum gauge can read a maximum vacuum of 15-inches [380 mm] Hg.
a. Vacuum gauge must be fitted with a 0.25-inch [6 mm] NPT stem back connection and
be suited for direct mounting on the pump inlet pipe.
J. WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
1. Provide in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. The Basis of Design: Watts Model “1 LF15M2-FS Unit Size F” by Watts Water
Technologies Company; Lawrence, MA 01842; 617.688.1811. Note: The Model number
will vary depending on the size.
K. WATER LEVEL CONTROLS AND FILL SYSTEM
1. Provide a water-level sensors system and related water level control panel into each
Water Feature as indicated in the Drawings. Pre-approved equals may be accepted.
a. Each device must provide sensing signals to activate a relay and solenoid valve
located in the mechanical equipment room.
b. The sensor units operate at 12-24VDC < 2 Amps.

c. The same manufacturer must fabricate the level sensor, level fill controls, and fill
valving manifold.
2. The sensor may be a single unit with different outputs that correspond to different
water levels or a set of discrete sensors that are each placed at the water levels of
interest. Refer to the Drawings and Equipment Schedule.
3. The Water Level Control Panel must be those specified in Equipment Schedule.
4. The Water Level Control Panel must typically monitor the water level at three set points,
listed from highest to lowest:
a. High-High set point – when the water level is below this elevation for a minute or
more, and all pumps are off, the fill valve is opened for a short period of time.
b. High set point – when the pumps are on, and the water level is below this elevation
for longer than a minute; the fill valve is opened until this set point senses that the
water elevation is above it for longer than a minute. If a static line is available, a
single sensor installed on that line may turn the fill valve on and off, regardless of if
the pumps are on and off, and this may replace the High and High-High sensor
described here.
c. Low set point: When the water level is below this elevation for longer than a minute,
and the fill-valve is presumably already in an open position, all pumps and
underwater lights must be de-activated (shut down) to prevent their operation and
damage when operating without sufficient water being present.
1) If there is a dynamic draw-down on the tank, the water level will increase after
the pumps are deactivated. For this reason, this low set point sensor cannot be
used to re-activate the operation of the pumps and lights.
2) Instead, the pumps and lights are permitted to re-activate their operation when
the water elevation is located above all designated set points for longer than one
minute.
d. Refer to the Drawings for additional level set-points required.
L. INDUSTRIAL LIQUID FLOW SWITCH
1. Operation: This control is an independently mounted water flow sensing device that
makes or breaks an electrical circuit when the water flow stops or starts.
2. Electrical enclosure rating:
a. NEMA X for outdoor
b. NEMA 1 for indoor (totally enclosed with no corrosive fumes)
3. Maximum Velocity: 10-feet/sec [3M/sec]
4. Pipe connection size: 1.25-inches [30 mm] NPT
a. McDonnell & Miller (an ITT company), 8200 N. Austin Ave., Morton Grove, IL 60053,
www.mcdonnellmiller.com
1) Model FS7-4 for pipe sizes: 1.5-inches to 16-inches [40 mm to 400 mm]
2) Model FS7-4L for pipe sizes: 20-inches to 36-inches [500 mm to 900 mm]
2.15 CHEMICAL
A. GENERAL

1. Chemical controllers, feeders, and pumps must meet the requirements and carry the
product certifications for NSF Standard 50.
2. Critical: The use of Sulphuric Acid is prohibited.
B. CHEMICAL CONTROLLERS
1. General
a. The integrated equipment room control system must provide continuous monitoring
and command of sanitizers (standard ORP probe or the Cl/Br amperometric probe)
oxidizers, pH, temperature, system flow rate monitoring for each return line, flow
rate monitoring for the heater piping, chemical inventory levels, surge tank water
levels, MFV control, system pressures, and water chemistry balance calculations.
b. The Basis of Design: BECSys5 by BECS Technology. Manufacturer Representative:
CES, 2 Jupiter Park Lane, Suite 1, Jupiter, FL 33458, USA; 800.940.1557;
WWW.CESWaterQuality.com
2. Controller
a. The controller must have 120 VAC; <1A fused input and must come in a NEMA 4X
polycarbonate enclosure.
b. The controller must allow assignment of primary alarm, equipment room control,
and be equipped as follows:
1) 4 integral 3A solid-state relay outputs
2) 5 integral 3A powered mechanical relays outputs
3) 15 - 3A solid state or mechanical relays
c. The controller must carry UL 508, (CSA) C22.2 Number 205- M1983, FCC part 15
subpart B product certifications.
3. Equipment room control must perform the following functions:
a. Main recirculation pump
1) Off- surge tank water low-level set point
2) Off- strainer high vacuum set point
3) On/off- operation
4) On/off- energy saving mode (24 hr., 7-day function)
5) On/ off- emergency shutdown
b. Water Chemistry Control
1) Continuously monitor and power pH, ORP, & Cl/Br ppm
a) Selectable control of sanitizer through ORP or amperometric ppm
2) Selectable on/off feed or time-based proportional feed
a) Time-based proportional feed cycle time will vary based upon the variance of
measurement to setpoint
b) Proportional band of 0 to 2.0 pH units, 0 to 100 mV, 0 to 2 ppm [0 to 2 mg/L]
with an increased offset from set point causing increased feed system
operation
c) Regulate the output of the chemical feed system from 10% to 100% of
capacity
d) Sanitizer min/ max residual selectable for non-primary control method (i.e.
ORP control can have min/ max amperometric ppm value)

3) Feed duration alarm circuit must disable appropriate feed and activate an alarm
circuit
a) Sensor failure
b) Chemical feed malfunction
c) Low chemical feed inventory
d) Overfeed time (programmable from 0 to 18 hrs., 1-minute resolution)
c. Liquid Level Alarms
1) Surge tank low-level set point to disable recirculation pump
2) Surge tank low-level set point to initiate autofill solenoid
3) pH chemical inventory low-level set point
4) Sanitizer chemical inventory low-level set point
d. Flow Monitoring
1) Paddlewheel flow sensor
2) Flow rate, gpm
3) Flow volume totalizer
4) For each return piping system
5) For the heater piping
6) For each water feature & weir supply pump
e. Heater Control
1) Temperature control, heater on/off
2) Energy saving mode, selected on/off set-times, and secondary temperature set-
point
f. Energy Conservation Mode
1) Disable mechanical and chemical functions during programmed conservation
cycle
2) Periodically monitor and satisfy operational requirement based on a programmed
time
4. Control Displays
a. The display must be a backlit LCD with 12x40 alpha/ numeric, graphical characters
that will continuously display information related to the following:
1) pH: 0.0 to 14.0, 0.1 or 0.01 resolution (programmable)
2) ORP: -1000 to 1000 mV, 1 mV resolution
3) PPM: 0 to 20 ppm [0 to 20 mg/L] 0.1 or 0.01 resolution (programmable)
4) Temperature: 32-212°F, 1°F resolution; 0-100°C, 1°C resolution
5) Flow rate: 0-8800 gpm, 0.1 gpm resolution; 0-33265 liter/min, 0.1-liter resolution
6) Flow volume: 999 trillion gallons, 1-gallon resolution; 999 trillion liters, 1-liter
resolution
7) Pressure: programmable range psi, kPa
8) Vacuum: 0 to 31 inches/ Hg, 0 to 787 mm/ Hg
9) Surge tank: programmable range 0.01 feet, 0.01 m
10) Chemical Inventory: programmable range 0.1 feet, 0.1 m
11) Heater set point & alternate heater set point (4 Event 28-day timer)
12) Alternate ORP control set point (4 Event 28-day timer)
13) Cl/ Br booster ORP or ppm feed points with a separate trigger set points

14) Superchlorination ORP or ppm set point

15) Display of Ca hardness & alkalinity
16) Langelier & Ryznar index calculated
17) Smart menus w/ integrated help
5. Feed Mode:
a. Auto/ manual off/manual-on, which will provide on/off or proportional feed modes.
6. Data Logging
a. The controller must have 512K battery backed-up RAM for input level recording and
events.
b. Thirteen input level recordings for 19 to 56 days depending on sample rate (2 to 6
minutes):
1) pH, ORP, ppm, temperature, & TDS
2) Flow Rate, pressure differential & strainer vacuum
3) Surge tank level
4) Two chemical inventory levels
c. 3800 events over a maximum of 21 days recording alarms, menu changes and
operational cycles related to the following parameters:
1) pH, ORP & ppm Hi/ Low w/ interlocked failsafe
2) Water temperature
3) System Low-flow & sample stream No-flow
4) Pressure differential & vacuum Hi
5) Surge tank water level: Low
6) Autofill
7) Chemical Inventory: Low
8) Battery: Low
7. Safety Systems
a. The controller must have three security password levels with six for operators, two
for managers and one for the distributor providing a history of access identified by
the user.
b. The controller must also have programmable alarms (some disabling chemical feed)
for pH, ORP, free chlorine ppm, temperature, low flow & no flow, and chemical
overfeeds, pressure & vacuum, surge levels, chemical inventory, backwash initiation
& cycle duration.
c. Alarm conditions must activate a primary alarm signal provided as a dry contact relay
enabling the use of 0-240 VAC alarms.
8. Alarm Indicators:
a. Flashing LED alarm indicator with an auto-polling LCD display of hi / low out of range,
overfeed, low system flow and sample stream no flow
9. Remote Operation
a. The controller must be provided with a 33,600-bps data modem for communication
via telephone, pager for selectable alarms or fax alarm data conditions via auto
dialer.

b. Up to six phone numbers can be selected for the paging of specific alarms attached
to each phone number.
c. Provide BECSys for Windows based remote operation software with a graphical
display, for interactive connection and direct connect capability to a PC with the
controller. Operational data logs, graphs and event calendars must be included with
the software.
10. Sensors
a. The controller must have four (4) standard sensors and seven (7) additional sensors.
Although some sensors are listed as “additional” by the manufacturer, they are
specified for this project and must be provided by the installer on this project for all
pools.
b. Standard Sensors:
1) The standard pH and ORP sensors must come with a Ryton body and inorganic
electrolyte gel.
2) The standard temperature sensor will be a 2 wire, Zener diode temperature
probe.
3) The pressure sensor must consist of a compound pressure/ vacuum gauge
manufactured in stainless steel, 2.5-inches [63 mm] diameter, liquid filled with an
operating pressure range of 0 to 60 psi [0 to 413.7 kPa] and vacuum of 0 to 30-
inches/ Hg. [0 to 760 mm/Hg.]
c. Additional Required Sensors
1) Flow Sensor: Provide a measurement of pool circulation flow rate utilizing a self-
powered 4-20 ma paddle wheel flow sensor equipped with a minimum of 25 feet
[7.5 m] cable and saddle.
2) Amperometric Sensor
a) The Free Chlorine Sensor must be an amperometric probe system with a
measuring range of 0.05 to 20 ppm [0.05 to 20 mg/L] with an entirely
selectable scale and a temperature range of 36°-113° F [2°-45° C].
b) The amperometric probe must come with a PVC body, replaceable PTFE
membrane and electrolyte, gold cathode, and silver/ silver chloride anode.
3) Pressure Transducers:
a) Provide a measurement of influent/ effluent filter system pressures utilizing
transducers.
b) The transducers may have an operating range from 0 to 20 psi [0 to 137.9 kPa]
through 0 to 100 psi [0 to 689.5 kPa] with an output of 4 to 20 mA. The
transducers must have a <+/- 2% span max @ 77° F [25° C] which includes
linearity, hysteresis, and repeatability, 0.25% static error band and 1.5%
typical thermal error band.
c) The wetted components of the transducer must be stainless steel with
plumbing connections of 0.125-inch [3 mm].
4) Vacuum Transducer:
a) Provide a measurement of recirculation pump vacuum utilizing a transducer.

b) The transducer must have an operating range of 0 to 30-inches/Hg. [0 to 762

mm/Hg.] with an output of 4 to 20 mA. The transducers must have a <+/- 2%
span/ year typical long-term drift, 0.25% static error band and 1.5% typical
thermal error band.
c) The wetted components of the transducer must be stainless steel with
plumbing connections of 0.25-inch [6 mm].
5) Liquid Level Sensor:
a) Provide a measurement of two liquid levels (for surge tanks and chemical
inventory).
b) The level sensor must be constructed of noncorrosive material and must be of
the type to facilitate capacitance measurement through 2 sensing elements
that are contained within a field-adjustable, sealed sensor rod providing a
single 4 to 20 mA outputs.
c) The sensor must be field-calibratable allowing for site modifications within an
operating range from 3 to 15 feet [1 to 4.5 m].
6) Main Drain Modulating Valve control
a) Minimum components:
i: BECSys SLS surge tank level sensor (located in 2-inch standpipe inside
surge tank) to monitor the water level in the surge tank
ii: BECSys5 with a 4-20mA output board
iii: The electronically controlled solenoid valve
11. Flowcell:
a. Fiberglass body, clear acrylic sensor mounting plate, and a clear acrylic viewing tube.
b. Provide accurate sample flow rate and water velocity regulation past the probes
while providing hydro-mechanical cleaning of the free chlorine sensor.
c. Provided with PVC 0.5 inch [13 mm] isolation ball valves, PVC ¼-in wet-test valve,
and reed flow switch.
C. PERISTALTIC CHEMICAL METERING PUMP FOR pH CONTROL SYSTEM(S)
1. Provide one muriatic acid peristaltic feeder system (this may require multiple feeders
per pool) as specified in the Drawings.
2. The Muriatic Acid addition system for each pool must include the following:
a. Stenner peristaltic feeder (as specified in the Drawings Equipment Schedule).
b. Chemical crock with a sealed lid with MSDS and content labels (see the Equipment
Schedule) – include a containment tank with each chemical crock.
c. Connections to the pool piping system(s).
d. Spare parts as noted above in “CHEMICAL METERING PUMP FOR LIQUID CHLORINE.”
e. Sulphuric acid systems are not allowed.
3. The Basis of Design (models as listed in the Equipment Schedule): Stenner Pump
Company, 3174 DeSalvo Road, Jacksonville, FL 32246, 904.641.1666; Manufacturer
Representative: CES, 2 Jupiter Park Lane, Suite 1, Jupiter, FL 33458, USA; 800.940.1557;
WWW.CESWaterQuality.com
4. Chemical supply: The contractor must provide the muriatic acid to fill the tank for the
commissioning and initial service period. Upon substantial completion, the contractor
must re-fill the acid tank to capacity.

D. SALINE CHLORINATION SYSTEM

1. General
a. Chemical sanitizer for the pool(s) must be sodium hypochlorite, generated on-site in
an offline installation.
b. The chlorine generator system must be NSF-50 listed and UL-1081 listed and certified
for use in pools and spas.
1) Listings may vary depending upon which generator is specified.
c. The electrical wiring, breakers, and disconnect boxes provided at the facility must be
UL listed components.
1) The system must be pre-wired, ready for field connection of power
interconnected to the pool pump and control circuits.
2) All equipment and power supply must be bonded & grounded via the bonding lug
to the local shared-bonding grid. The bonding connector must be conductively
connected to the grounding means.
d. The system can operate in water temperatures ranging from 59-deg F [15-deg C] to
104-deg F [40-deg C].
e. The ChlorKing® system must have salt concentration displayed in PPM, measured
using a toroidal probe. No moving parts and no calibration needed.
f. An authorized representative must be located within a reasonable distance of the
facility and must be available to install and service the system as required.
2. CHLOR SM Salt Chlorine Generators
a. The SM system must produce from 3.5 lb. [1.58 kG] to 25 lb. [11.34 kG] (model
specific) of equivalent chlorine as a dilute solution of sodium hypochlorite from a
single cell, plumbed in bypass, from a saline concentration of 3,500 – 7,000 ppm in
the pool water.
b. Chlorine delivery must be controlled by a bypass side stream, plumbed into the
return line using a bypass valve and providing the saline system with a minimum of
20 gpm.
c. The maximum amount of pressure through the generation cell must be 30 psi.
d. System's power supply must be water cooled.
e. Manufacturer: Manufacturer: ChlorKing®, www.chlorking.com; (models as listed in
the Equipment Schedule): Manufacturer Representative: CES, 2 Jupiter Park Lane,
Suite 1, Jupiter, FL 33458, USA; 800.940.1557; WWW.CESWaterQuality.com
3. NEX-GEN chlorine generator
a. General:
1) The system must be available is a skid mounted, self-contained version where
limited field connection is required.
2) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN power supply must be water cooled and have no fans.
b. Operational & Production Requirements:
1) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN chlorine generator will produce 1,666 - 2,500 ppm of
sodium hypochlorite in a production tank from a concentration of 5,000 ppm
sodium chloride fed from a saturated salt feeder, or from a seawater feed system.
a) No salt must is required to be added to the pool basin directly.

2) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN chlorine generator must re-circulate the swimming pool
water through the production tank to re-use any salt in the swimming pool.
3) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN chlorine generator must not require a water softener.
4) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN system will produce from 5 lbs [2.27 kg] to 40 lbs [18.14
kg] per day (model specific) of equivalent chlorine as a solution of sodium
hypochlorite.
5) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN system will control the pH of the chlorine being
manufactured at a 7.0 – 7.5 range within the production tank. This feature is
mandatory without exception.
c. MODELS AVAILABLE:
1) ChlorKing® Model: Lbs/Day Production Neutral pH Chlorine?
2) NEX-GEN 5 5 No
3) NEX-GEN 7.5 7.5 No
4) NEX-GEN 10 10 No
5) NEX-GEN 20 20 No
6) NEX-GEN 40 40 No
d. The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN system requires:
1) salt concentration in the production tank of 5000 ppm.
a) No salt is added to the pool (salt is added only to the production tank)
e. Chlorine delivery to the pool recirculation is controlled by an electrical diaphragm
metering pump or venture distribution system.
f. Flow through the ChlorKing® NEX-GEN cell is adjustable to meet production
requirements. Flow switches are included as safety devices.
g. The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN system must include a hydrogen dilution blower to remove
hydrogen from the production tank safely.
1) Hydrogen must be vented from the production tank using the supplied ventilation
port on the top of the production tank at the time of field installation.
2) The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN system will not allow chlorine production if the
hydrogen dilution blower is not active and no air movement is detected.
h. The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN power supply is comprised of the following components:
1) Power Supply Dimensions: W: 16.5-inches L: 2.5-inches
2) Transformer Dimensions: W: 10-inches L: 17-inches
i. The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN Pump must be mounted to the floor and requires field
connection.
j. The ChlorKing® NEX-GEN system must be capable of satisfactory performance when
installed as per the manufacturer’s recommendations (reference the ChlorKing®
NEX-GEN installation manual).
k. The Basis of Design: Manufacturer: ChlorKing®, www.chlorking.com; Manufacturer
Representative: CES, 2 Jupiter Park Lane, Suite 1, Jupiter, FL 33458, USA;
800.940.1557; 800.536.8180 WWW.CESWaterQuality.com
E. CHLORINATION SYSTEMS
1. Accu-Tab Chemical System

a. Design system to feed low concentrations of calcium hypochlorite in solution

intermittently or continuously as specified for pool applications. The system must be
a single pre-assembled, package unit with a welded aluminum frame consisting of a
chlorinator, electrical box, centrifugal pump, and solution tank. Refer to the
Drawings for the Model specified.
b. Use only Accu-Tab® Blue-SI calcium hypochlorite tablets by PPG Industries, Inc.
1) The Accu-Tab tablets must have a maximum pH of 10.5. Alternate chemicals must
comply with this pH and be specifically approved for use in this chlorine feeder.
c. Batch systems with pressure mixing components producing chlorine concentrations
exceeding the limits of the specifications will not be considered.
d. System design must use an NSF Standard 50 listed erosion feeder and tablet
combination and must be capable of meeting requirements of the Health
Department having authority over the installation.
e. The Basis of Design: Accu-Tab Chemical System pressure system(s) by Axiall
Corporation, Water Treatment Products, 11 Stanwix Street (Suite 1900), Pittsburgh,
PA 15222, 800.245.2974; www.axiall.com
2. System Features.
a. A maximum chlorine solution level of 0.1% (1000 ppm) must be maintained to
prevent calcification in system components. Systems producing chlorine
concentrations higher than 0.1% must not be acceptable.
b. Delivery must be by erosion feed technology to control strict and consistent
concentration limits in the chlorine treatment solution. Soaking type, spray, or
vortex technology systems must not be acceptable.
c. The chlorinator must automatically and continuously feed a limited quantity of
chlorine in solution as needed; when the system is not running, no more chlorine
than that amount which can be fed in one minute or less must be left in the tank to
prevent dilution.
1) Batch systems preparing excess quantities of solution for delivery over an
extended period must not be acceptable.
d. A centrifugal pump wired to the electrical system box must feed freshly mixed
chlorine treatment solution only as required for maximum efficiency. Batch systems
requiring the use of a metering pump or pumps to feed pre-prepared standing
solution must not be acceptable.
e. Piping in the chlorinator unit must be Schedule 40 PVC. Systems with flexible tubing
must not be acceptable.
3. System components.
a. Inlet Water Supply Connection:
Model 1030 1-inch [25 mm] NPT 10 GPM [37 L/min] specified
Model 3070AT 1.5-inches [40 mm] 20 GPM [74 L/min] specified

NPT
Model 3140AT 2-inches [50 mm] NPT 60 GPM [227 L/min] specified

Model 3500 2-inches [50 mm] NPT 60 GPM [227 L/min] specified
b. Inlet solenoid valve. Opens and closes on command when the system receives a
signal. Coordinate required voltage.
c. Flow meter: A rotameter flow meter, measuring the flow of the water eroding
stream to the chlorinator.
d. Inlet control valve: PVC gate valve mounted in line with the flow meter allows the
operator to adjust the flow of the water-dissolving stream.
e. Solution tank. PowerBase 3500 made of HDPE, others made of PVC. Capacities (Refer
to the Drawings for the model specified)
Model 1030 7.5 gallon [0.02 m3]
Model 3070AT 22 gallons [0.08 m3]
Model 3140AT 22 gallons [0.08 m3]
Model 3500 30 gallons [0.1 m3]
f. Float valve. Made from Schedule 80 PVC and 316L stainless steel to meter tablet by-
pass flow. The float valve opens or closes to maintain a level in the solution tank.
g. High-level Switch: Prevents the solution tank from overflowing, opens the circuit to
the solenoid valve, causing the closing of the valve. Not applicable to model 1030.
h. Solution delivery pump: Single-stage centrifugal pump for systems with pressures up
to 20 psi [137.9 kPa]. (For systems requiring discharge pressure greater than 20 psi
[137.9 kPa], a custom selected pump must be necessary.)
i. Discharge check valve: PVC swing check valve.
j. Outlet connection.
Model 1030 1-inch [25 mm] NPT
Model 3070AT 1.5-inches [40 mm] NPT
Model 3140AT 2-inches [50 mm] NPT
Model 3500 2-inches [50 mm] NPT
k. Aluminum frame, Type 6061-T.

4. Electrical requirements: Two 110v, 20A circuits required from pool controller. An NEMA
4X electrical enclosure must be provided.
5. Chemical supply: The contractor must provide the Accu-Tab to fill the chlorine feeder for
the commissioning and initial service period. Upon substantial completion, the
contractor must refill the chlorine feeder to capacity.

a. The Accu-Tab tablets must have a maximum pH of 10.5. Alternate chemicals must
comply with this pH and be specifically approved for use in this chlorine feeder. Use
of other tablets will void NSF certification
b. DANGER: DO NOT MIX CHEMICALS! The PowerBase model chlorinator systems are
designed for use with Axiall Corp. approved tablets only. Do not use Cal-Hypo tablets
with stabilized chlorine or bromine products, or other sanitizing chemicals. Fire or
explosion could result.
F. CHEMICAL TUBING
1. Chemical tubing suitability must be rated as “GOOD” as it pertains to its rating a
chemical compatibility rating chart suitability for accommodating any specific chemical
required.
2. The chemical tubing diameter must be no less than 0.375-inch [10mm] or as required by
the chemical feeder manufacturer.
3. Outdoor-located (or exposed to UV rays) tubing must be rated as “UV black
suction/discharge chemical tubing;” pressure rated at 45 PSI @ 73-deg F.
a. Exception: When used indoors and not exposed to any UV, Tygon B-44-3 model
AAB00029 tubing may be used.
4. The following chart must be used as a guide in selecting chemical tubing:
Chemical Required Recommended Tubing UV Properties
Material at 70º F [21º C] (when exposed to
UV or located
outdoors)
Muriatic Acid Tygon Chemical®; Viton®; UV Black
(maximum: 20 percent Teflon® PTFE
Baume° (a 31.45% diluted
form of Hydrochloric Acid)
Sodium Hypochlorite, >5% Silicone; Tygon Chemical®; UV Black
Viton®; Teflon® PTFE
5. The Basis of Design: Tygon UV Resistant R-3400 model # AAE00029; Saint-Gobain

Performance Plastics; 2664 Gilchrist Road, Akron, OH 44305; 800.798.1554;
www.tygon.com
2.16 NOT USED
2.17 ELECTRICAL - CONTROLS, ENCLOSURES, & GROUNDING
A. GENERAL
1. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer's Documents for electrical
components, connectors, materials, standards, & additional technical specifications. All
design & equipment/materials must be coordinated with the Project Electrical Engineer
as well.
2. Refer to the Complete Build requirements below for all electrical components,
connectors, controls, enclosures, rigid & flexible conduits, conductors, grounding,
bonding, and earthing.

3. Electrical equipment and installations, including the grounding of the metal material,
are to meet or exceed the National Electrical Code (NEC) and conform to the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
a. Provide enclosures to include a conductive back panel for component mounting and
heat dissipation
4. All Electrical enclosures provided must include adequate protection against dust and
water:
a. If located indoors within a conditioned space (not subject to rain, sleet, snow, a
corrosive atmosphere, or falling / splashing water droplets), the enclosure must be
connectors, IP-54 or better [or NEMA equal].
b. If located outdoors or in unconditioned space, the enclosure must be IP-55 or better
[or NEMA equal].
5. All electrical enclosures that are exposed to corrosive / corrosion-causing fumes, or
unconditioned air within 1 mile of a saltwater body of water, must be made of stainless
steel, plastic, or fiberglass.
6. Electrical components must be UL Listed or ETL Listed, by an equivalent certifying
agency, and NEC compliant.
7. Maintain a minimum, unobstructed clearance of 48 in [1.22 m] in front of panel boards,
motor starters, VFD's, LED power supplies, lighting control panels, transformers, control
panels, lighting panels, and MCC's.
8. The cabling, conductors, and wiring located in under-deck, underground, underwater
conduits, & underwater junction boxes must comply with wet-rated requirements of
NEC Article 300.50 (Underground & Underwater Installations) and NEC 310.10 (Wet
Locations).
a. Note: Under-Deck cabling, conductors, conduits, & wiring must be manufacturer-
rated for Underground, Underwater, and Wet locations
9. If equipment componentry is installed with noncompliant metallic parts, the item will be
considered defective and must be replaced with specified components and hardware at
no additional costs for the Owner.
B. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO
1. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer’s Documents or those of the
Project Electrical Engineer
2. Electrical power systems
a. Such power systems must include but not be limited to:
1) Panels, circuit breakers, VFD's, magnetic motor starters, relays, overload heaters,
related transformers, service disconnects, safety cut-off switches, deck
receptacles, bonding, earthing, grounding, underwater-rated cabling, rigid &
flexible conduits, and other similar systems.
3. Electrical control panel systems
a. Such control systems must include but not be limited to:

1) Controls system, HMI, control wiring circuitry, connectors, relays, timing switches
and sequencers, underwater/dry/exposed LED lights, lighting control panel
system (for LED operation, LED color changing, operator LED color choices, and
custom LED color selections), power supplies, related transformers, service
disconnects, safety cut-off switches, auto fill, wind sensor systems, deck
receptacles, bonding, earthing, grounding, underwater-rated cabling, rigid &
flexible conduits, and other similar systems.
a) The contractor is responsible for providing the entire control panel system(s)
and the lighting control panel system(s) in their entirety.
b) Specialized lighting control panels for automated LED lighting, LED color
selections, & nozzles systems must be in precise compliance with the logic and
protocols of the manufacturer / distributor of the automated LED lighting,
nozzle, auto fill, & wind sensor controls, programming, and sequencing.
c) Specialized submersible pump circuitry, VFD’s, and Industrial Ground Fault
Circuit Interrupters.
d) Although the Drawings may graphically indicate a lighting control panel
system, the manufacturer and fabricator of the lighting control panel must
determine the final quantity of enclosures required to accommodate all the
lighting controls. All individual lighting control panels must comprise and
equal the lighting control panel system.
i: The same holds true for the Control Panel System.
ii: Each Control Panel System may consist of multiple panels and enclosures
as determined by the panel fabricator.
2) Filter pump(s) electrical controls, interlocks, and safety systems on UV sterilizers,
chemical addition systems, gauge and metering systems, and heaters. The sub-
systems must not be operable unless the filter system is running and delivering
filtered water to the Pool or water feature.
a) Low pool water shutdown interlock to shut down and deactivate the system in
the event of an emergency low water condition.
3) Such electrical interlocks and similar safety systems as may be required by NEC,
local building codes, governmental regulations, and these Contract Documents
(Drawings & Technical Specifications).
4. Control Panel System (CPS) Performance Requirements
a. General:
1) The CPS must include all functions necessary to control the filtration equipment
and feature systems associated with the aquatic features of the project.
2) The CPS must be housed in stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosures and adhere to the
UL508A and NEC Article 680 standards.
a) Exception: As indicated otherwise within this section.
3) The CPS must be provided in a panel(s) configuration that will allow for its
installation in the location as identified in the design documentation.
4) The panel(s) plan and elevation view layout with sizing to be provided for review
and approval.
5) The interface must include a user-friendly industrial rated color touch screen
(HMI) controlled via PLC.

6) The CPS must include a 24-hour programmable time clock for days/hours
operation with independent timeframe functionality for filtration and feature
systems to allow for variable operating hours by the operator.
7) The CPS must include monitoring of all sensor devices.
8) Alarms and overall systems status must be displayed, acknowledged and where
applicable influenced via this control system.
9) The hardware selection and its layout must facilitate ease of maintenance and be
user-friendly.
10) The CPS must include remote access capabilities through the internet/web
interface.
11) The CPS must have the master power disconnect to deactivate all supply voltage
into the panel for safety troubleshooting.
12) The CPS must include an AC-DC Power Supply for the components that require
that type of Voltage.
13) All fittings and adapters connected to the CPS must be Liquid-Tight.
14) All conductor/wiring splice connectors must be of the Lever-Actuated, Cage-
Clamp with side-entry
15) All wiring within the CPS must be performed, grounded/bonded in accordance
with NEC compliance, and manufacturer's instruction manuals.
b. Typical Pump Systems
1) The CPS must include monitoring and controlling the pump(s) on/off/fault
function.
2) The flow switch(s) must include proof of flow to the CPS which in turn must cease
pump(s) function through connection to the VFD(s) if no flow is detected.
3) During pump(s) startup the CPS must provide for a delay of 2 minutes for proper
pump ramp-up prior to flow switch activation.
4) The CPS must include monitoring of the pressure sensor(s) readings upstream and
downstream of each pump(s).
5) The CPS must include monitoring of flow sensor(s) readings and provide a signal
to VFD(s) for calibration of desired flow rates.
c. Typical Filtration Systems
1) For automated-backwash or bump-style filters, the CPS must include monitoring
of the pressure sensor(s) readings upstream and downstream of the filter(s).
2) For automated-backwash or bump-style filters, the CPS must include monitoring
of filter(s) on/off/fault function.
3) The CPS must include monitoring of the filter control panel(s) to ascertain pre-
coat & backwash cycles as well as to maintain proper flow rates during non-
filtration cycles (if required).
d. Typical Heater Systems
1) For heaters greater than 500 kBtu/hr, the CPS must include monitoring of on/off
function.
2) For heaters that are 500 kBtu/hr or higher, the CPS must include the ability to set
a goal temperature and monitor the pool temperature, using either Modbus or 0-
10V analog input and output signals.

3) The CPS must include an electrical interlock between the pump(s) and heater(s) to
ensure all heater operations cease when the pump is not functioning (if the
heater controller does not have built-in protection to stop operation when no
water flow or a high temperature reading in the system).
e. Typical Chemical Control Systems
1) The CPS must include monitoring of the chemical controller on/off function. The
chemical controller includes a separate monitoring system where the owner will
be able to monitor operation and chemical data.
2) The CPS must include an electrical interlock between the filter/feature pump(s)
and chemical feed system(s) to prevent chemicals from being injected into a pipe
that has no flow.
f. Typical Potable Water Fill Systems
1) The CPS must include monitoring on/off function.
2) The CPS must include monitoring and controlling associated level sensor(s) &
control valve(s).
g. Typical Underwater Lighting Systems
1) The CPS must include monitoring on/off function.
2) The CPS must include days/hours of operation control/photocell or both on
underwater lighting circuits.
3) The CPS must include complete controls for LED on/off/auto operation, color
changing, operator color choices, and pre-selection of colors or custom color
selections.
5. Grounding and Bonding of components are inclusive and must be provided within the
Complete Build Scenario.
C. BONDING, EARTHING, & GROUNDING
1. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer's Documents.
2. Each nozzle, LED light, and specialty metallic component must be equipped with
grounding lugs or capable of being grounded (fabricated from the same material as the
body to which it is attached), bonded, earthed, and grounded in accordance with these
Specifications, the Drawings, and the requirements of the manufacturer. An UL / ETL
Listing / NEC (or an equivalency) certification is required.
3. If the grounding lugs are not provided by the manufacturer, then the Contractor must
have the ultimate responsibility for providing the necessary grounding lugs.
a. The grounding lug must accommodate a #8 solid, copper conductor (either bare or
insulated) per the requirements of NEC 250.8
D. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS
1. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer's Documents for all circuit breaker
panelboards & enclosures.
2. Provide bottom feed feature unless otherwise noted in the Drawings.
3. The recommended Basis of Design:
a. Crouse Hinds model # XLPD
b. Square-D (as equivalent to the above)
c. Westinghouse (as equivalent to the above)

4. One Master Circuit Breaker is required for each panel

E. BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer's Documents for all circuit
breakers.
2. Circuit Breakers must be by the same manufacturer as the Panelboard.
F. CONDUIT
2. Provide non-metallic, rigid, or approved flexible, Type 1 for the interior, exterior, under-
deck, underground, and underwater locations.
a. Wiring inside the pool equipment area mechanical space or enclosure must be
encased in rigid Type 1 conduits.
b. Underwater light conduits must be 1-inch [25 mm] diameter rigid Type 1 from the
low-voltage power supplies / transformer to each light niche and be watertight /
waterproof without exception.
3. Conduit sizes must adhere and follow the NEC, Chapter 9, Table #B for concentric
stranded “THWN” copper conductors in schedule 40 PVC (rigid or approved flexible
nonmetallic conduits), minimum allowable sizes for either:
a. 4-wire, 3-phase bundle, or
b. 2-wire + ground, 1-phase bundle
G. CONTROL RELAYS
2. Control relays must be “industrial duty” and rated for continuous operation. Each unit
must be 2-pole and equipped with both normally closed and normally open contacts for
each pole.
3. Control Relay: 120 VAC, DPST
a. 120vac coil, 60 Hz, DPDT
b. 8-pin Octal Base
c. Socket # 5B586 (socket code A)
d. 12A contact rating (resistive)
e. 13.2A contact rating (inductive)
f. Coil VA rating at 3.5
g. DIN rail/screw mount
h. 2.4” L x 1.6” W x 0.83” H
4. The Basis of Design: Model #2DT07 with Socket #5B586 (or as noted in the Drawings), by
Square-D or an approved equal
H. ELECTRICAL ENCLOSURES
2. Seams are to be continuously welded and ground smooth.
3. Include the following: Seamless foam-in-place gasket.
4. Internal 3-point latch
5. Powerglide handle.
6. The door must be capable of being removed by pulling a continuous hinge pin.

7. Collar studs for mounting back panel

8. Bonding provision on the door with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
9. Provide window kits for panel enclosures housing meters and chemical controllers.
a. Glazing: 0.25-inch-thick clear polycarbonate.
10. Hardware:
a. Material: stainless steel (nuts, bolts, washers).
b. Verify metallic components exposed to or submerged in chlorinated water must use
only stainless-steel Grade 316 hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, and misc. items).
c. Cast-Iron castings or steel components exposed to or submerged in chlorinated
water or coastal salt-laden air must be epoxy fused coated.
11. Unistrut:
a. enclosure assemblies must be installed with Unistrut- mounting hardware.
1) Unistrut Finish: Stainless Steel
2) Hardware Material: Stainless Steel
I. ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLES
1. General:
a. Refer to the Designated Specialty Electrical Engineer's Documents.
b. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
c. Refer to the Drawings for the locations and quantities of the receptacles specified.
d. Each receptacle must be a Class A GFCI-protected device.
2. Pool-side:
a. Provide weatherproof poolside receptacles for the powering of the portable vacuum
system(s) as well as for compliance with the National Electric Code.
b. Each receptacle must be a Class A GFCI-protected device.
3. Convenience:
a. 120VAC, 1-Phase, 60 Hz
b. 20-amp rating
c. Mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure unless otherwise noted in the Drawings
d. Suitable for equipment yard or pool deck area
e. The Basis of Design: Leviton or a pre-approved equal
4. Portable vacuum:
a. An outdoor receptacle for the powering of the portable, wheeled-vacuum equipment
to include:
1) Stainless steel
2) 54-inches [1.37 m] total length with 24-inches [0.61m] above the soils
3) 250V rating
4) 15-amp trip rating
5) NEMA 6-15 Single; 2P, 3W, Straight-Blade configuration
6) Suitable for a 1-hp, 208VAC portable vacuum pump (Plug-In); Maximum FLA = 8.3
amps
b. The Basis of Design: PEDOC Power Solutions, LLC; 847.815.6125;
www.pedocpower.com

J. EMERGENCY CUT-OFF SWITCH

2. E-Stop Pushbutton
3. 22-mm size with RED color
4. Maintained Push-Pull
5. One Normally-Closed (N.C.) contact rated at 10 Amps at 600 VAC
6. Mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure / housing
7. Screw clamp terminals
8. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
9. Provide the relays, operator button, weatherproof enclosure, and signage for this
device.
10. Provide Model XB5AT42 or an approved equivalent by Schneider.
K. ENCLOSURE AND PANEL IDENTIFICATION LABELS & ID’S
2. Install custom engraved phenolic labels on controls and electrical panels / enclosures.
a. Equipment Spaces are required to use phenolic labels to comply with OSHA safety
regulations, ISO guidelines.
b. Provide phenolic labels in locations where a durable label is a necessity and in the
following typical locations: Cutout switch labels, electrical panels, identification
panels, service disconnects, name-plates, and door-plates
3. Unless specified otherwise by codes, utilize the colors noted herein.
4. Approved Label / Tag Manufacturer: Carolina Design Company, PO Box 812, Clover, SC
29710 tammie@phenoliclabels.com
a. Alternate manufacturers may be considered; however, their quality must comply
with those from Carolina Design Company (above).
L. MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS
2. Provide magnetic motor starters, and solid-state overload relays for each 3-phase pump
motor in the various mechanical room and areas.
3. Unless there is a VFD serving the pump motor, a soft start feature is mandatory.
4. Motor starters must meet the following Specifications unless otherwise specified.
a. Magnetic starters must be of the “100% -voltage, non-reversing type” and rated at
the voltage available at this project site.
b. 60 hertz/3-pole polyphase is assumed to be the minimum design point.
c. To confirm compliance, verify the actual operating voltage prior to ordering any
equipment.
d. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
5. Coil voltage: 120VAC, 60 hertz unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
6. The coil must be used to electrically interconnect 120 VAC type components that will
operate only when the starter is energized.
7. Include 1 N.O. auxiliary contact set.
8. The Basis of Design: Square-D “Class 8536” Series as supplied by Square-D.
M. MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCH


2. Verify and confirm power rating for each disconnect switch.
3. Early-break auxiliary contacts (1 N.O. and 1 N.C.)
4. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
5. The Basis of Design: Nonmetallic HDI Series or an approved equivalent by Mennekes
Electronics, www.mennekes.com.
N. PHOTO-CELL SWITCH
2. Provide photocell switch with the following features:
a. 120 VAC, Normally-Open (N.O.) contacts
b. Closed at 1 – 5-foot candles
c. Opens at 3 – 15-foot candles
d. 15A rating (tungsten)
e. 1800-watt rating (tungsten)
f. 1-Watt power consumption
g. Cadmium sulfide photocell with sealed polycarbonate housing and lens
h. 9-inches leads
i. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
j. Fits within a standard exterior outlet box rated at NEMA 3R
3. Provide Model #K4321C by Intermatic; www.intermatic.com or approved equal.
4. A UL / ETL Listing / NEC (or an equivalency) certification is required.
O. THERMOELECTRIC AIR CONDITIONERS FOR NEMA 4X ENCLOSURES
2. Unless specifically noted herein, each NEMA enclosure installed in a non-ventilated
space, or outdoors in direct sunlight, must include two (2) cooling units.
3. Cooling unit:
a. Thermoelectric air conditioners rated at 400 BTU/hour each
b. Rated for NEMA 4X enclosures; unit is grade 316L stainless steel
c. Vertical mount in sidewall enclosure; unit is 12-inches x 6 inches [305 mm x 150 mm]
with mounting bracket
d. Solid state components 120-Vac 50/60 Hz, 2 amps
e. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
4. Manufacturer: EIC Solutions, Inc., 700 Veterans Way, Suite 200, Warminster, PA 18974,
USA
P. TIME DELAY RELAY
1. Up to 5-Minute: 120 VAC Coil, DPDT
2. Contact rated to 5 amps (resistive)
3. Adjustable energize delay to 10-minutes maximum
4. 8-Pin (socket code K)
5. Order with 8-Pin socket Omron
6. Model # H3YN-2 AC100-120 or pre-approved equivalent by Omron Corp.;
www.omron.com

Q. TIMECLOCKS & TIMESWITCHES

2. Electromechanical time clock(s) must be provided with the following features:
a. 120VAC, DPDT – Normally Open (N.O.) contacts with 40A rating
b. 7-day timer with a 15-minute timing interval
c. Auto-voltage select (120VAC to 277VAC
d. Real-time clock face
e. On-Off-Auto Override switch
f. Amber and Green LED power and status lights
g. 24-hour battery backup in the event of a power loss
a. Provide model # GM40AV-QW by Intermatic, Inc.; www.intermatic.com or an
approved equal.
b. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the body.
4. Timeclock appropriate functions
a. The following features must be controlled via the time clocks:
1) Each Pool’s underwater lights (mount timer in the Equipment Room)
2) Each Pool’s feature pumps (mount timer in the Equipment Room)
5. 15-minute mechanical timer switch with the following functions:
a. Without hold over-ride
b. SPST Auto-Off Timer
c. 20A pole rating (resistive)
d. 125VAC, 5060 Hz
6. The Basis of Design: Model # FF15MC by Intermatic, Inc.; www.intermatic.com.
R. UNDERGROUND / UNDERWATER ELECTRICAL CABLES, CONDUCTORS, & CONNECTORS
2. Conductors must be copper with insulation suitable for the location.
3. Wires / conductors for grounding, earthing, and bonding must be:
a. If encased in concrete, #8 AWG bare, solid copper cable. Otherwise, #8 AWG
insulated solid copper cable.
b. Conduit encasement for bonding, earthing, or ground wires are prohibited.
4. Rated under-deck, underwater, and underground electrical cable and conductors must
be encased in waterproof, sealed PVC conduits rated for continuous operation in
marine, underwater, and underground wet environments.
5. Under-deck, underwater, and underground cables, conductors, cords must be rated for
wet conditions and locations and be supplied, encased in a waterproof conduit, with the
appropriate cord length intact with the following:
a. Moisture-impervious metal-sheathed
b. Allowable conductor types THWN
1) Alternate wiring types (only with specific approval from This Engineer) may be
MTW, RHW, RHW-2, TW, THW, THW-2, THHW, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, or ZW
2) Except for bonding, earthing, or grounding wires.

c. Size in accordance with NEC Table 310-16, rated at 75 Degrees C., operating at a
maximum ambient temperature of 122 Deg. F. [50 Deg. C.]
d. Be of a type listed for use in wet locations
1) CAT 5E wet-rated cables must be: Mohawk, “VersaLAN CMR/CMX” - or equal
2) Encase all insulated conductors in a waterproof conduit.
e. DMX cable must be TMB ProAqua cable model PCAQ224UL**
1) Basis of Design: TMB ProAqua Submersible Cables; 527 Park Avenue
San Fernando, CA 91340, USA;+1.818.899.8818; WWW.TMB.COM
6. Provide underwater lights with 4 feet [1.22 m] of excess electrical cord stored in the
light’s wet niche. The conductors must be able to be removed for servicing.
7. The interior of conduits, enclosures, or raceways installed under-deck, underwater, and
underground must be considered a wet location.
a. Insulated conductors and cables installed in these conduits, enclosures, or raceways
in under-deck, underwater, and underground installations must be listed for use in
wet locations and must comply with NEC 310.10.
b. Connections or splices in an under-deck, underwater, and underground installation
must be approved for wet locations.
c. Cables & conductors located underground must be wet/submersible rated and
capable of water chemistry containing mild chlorine (up to 5 ppm) and pH range: 6 to
9.
8. Splicing Connectors:
a. Splicing connectors in junction boxes and control panels shall utilize Cage-Clamp with
spring pressure connection technology via lever actuators.
1) Critical: Wire-Nut connector-types are disallowed and not permissible on this
project.
b. Each device must be capable of accommodating solid conductors, stranded
conductors, and fine-stranded conductors.
c. Provide manufacturer-approved mounting adapters as needed for conductor
management.
d. Basis of Design:
1) Series 222-xxx for splicing connectors
2) Series 773-xxx Push-Fit for grounding and bonding connectors
3) WAGO Corporation; N120w19129 Freistadt Rd, Germantown, WI 53022,
Phone: +1.888.828.4592; Email: info.us@wago.com | Web: www.wago.com
S. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
2. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) inverter units must be provided for each 3-phase pump
motor as listed on the Drawings.
3. VFD must be capable of interfacing with the Defender RMF controller
4. VFD must be a six-pulse input design.
5. VFDs must be solid state, with a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) output utilizing current
IGBT inverter technology and voltage vector control of the output PWM waveform and
must output a waveform that closely approximates a sine wave.

a. Option for Single Phase Input: The VFD must convert incoming fixed frequency
single-phase AC power into a variable frequency and voltage for controlling the
speed of three-phase AC induction motors. The VFD must be UL-listed for Single
Phase operation. De-rating the VFD for operation on other than UL-labeled voltages
must not be acceptable.
6. Equip VFD with a bypass.
a. Bypass option must send the motor to bypass mode based on an accessible door-
mounted selector or based on the drive’s programmable relay. A bypass pilot light
must provide an indication of the bypass mode.
b. The bypass mode must provide overload protection.
c. Contactors/Relays must be electrically and mechanically interlocked.
d. An essential services mode must send the motor to bypass regardless of the selected
mode.
e. The bypass enclosure must be equipped with a circuit breaker/disconnect switch.
7. VFD must utilize VVCPLUS, an output voltage vector switching algorithm, or equivalent,
in both variable and constant torque modes.
a. VVCPLUS provides rated RMS primary voltage from the VFD.
1) VFD’s that cannot produce rated RMS fundamental, output voltage or require the
input voltage to be increased above motor nameplate value to achieve rated RMS
primary output voltage is not acceptable.
2) VFD’s that utilize Sine-Coded PWM or Look-up tables must not be acceptable.
8. Provide an Automatic Energy Optimization (AEO) selection feature must be provided in
the VFD.
a. This feature must enhance motor magnetization voltage and dynamically adjust
output voltage in response to load, independent of speed.
b. Output voltage adjustment based on frequency alone is not acceptable for single
motor VT configurations.
9. Provide an Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) function to measure motor stator
resistance and reactance.
a. It must not be necessary to spin the motor shaft or decouple the motor from the
load to accomplish this optimization.
b. Parameters for motor resistance and motor reactance must be user-programmable.
10. Provide a Run Permissive Circuit to accept a “system ready” signal ensuring the VFD
does not start until isolation valves, seal water pumps, and other types of auxiliary
equipment are in the proper state for VFD operation.
a. The Run Permissive Circuit can send an output signal as a start command to actuate
external equipment before allowing the VFD to start.
11. Green Drive VFDs must be factory programmed to meet specified performance
requirements:
12. Programming must include but must not be limited to filter pump, remote start/stop
requirements, run confirm requirements and PID loop requirements.
13. VFDs and options must be UL, CUL, and CE-labeled as a component.
14. Harmonic Distortion Control:

a. The VFD must provide internal DC link reactors to minimize power line harmonics
and to provide near unity power factor.
b. DC Link reactor must be installed, so that power fluctuations to the DC Capacitors are
reduced to increase Capacitor life.
c. VFDs without a DC link reactor must provide a 05 percent impedance line side
reactor and spare capacitors.
15. Performance Requirements:
a. Input voltage 200-240, 380-480, 575-600 VAC +/- 10%, 3-phase, 48-63 Hz.
b. Voltage tolerance + 10% or – 15% of specified line voltage.
c. Output Frequency 0 to 300 Hz. Operation above 60 Hz must require programming
changes to prevent negligent high-speed operation.
d. Environmental operating conditions:
e. 14-deg F. to 122-deg F. [-10-deg C. to 50-deg C]
f. 0 to 3,280.8 feet [0 to 1000 m] above sea level
16. VFD must be wired into the Defender RMF controller for on/off and run confirm
functions.
17. The VFD must be a Green Drive series.
18. Provide VFD’s with the following specified properties:
a. A Shorting Contactor, Isolation Contactor, and Inverter Contactor
b. Overload Relay
c. Thermal overload protection
d. Voltage and current surge limitation via circuit breakers and fuses
e. Integrated hand/off/auto control via the Digital Keypad
f. Manual bypass for easy, non-automated, Programmable Soft-Start operation and
Ramp-Up time periods
g. Load Inductors and Interfacing Controls consisting of Digital Keypad mounted on the
front of the specified NEMA Enclosure or as indicated on the Drawings.
h. Pilot Lights (by-pass-on, power-on, and drive-on)
i. Control wiring interconnectivity between the VFD and RMF to verify proper
communications with automatic devices (filtration controls, chemical controller,
chemical controls, pumping controls, UV sanitizers, etc. Include hard contact
terminals (to distribute 120V Control Power)
j. Pre-installed provisions for a bolt-on direct connect cooling unit in the enclosure
k. Continuous display of operating parameters of the motor (Hz, volts, amps)
l. Programmable soft start for reduction of power company demand charges and
reduced water hammer potential
m. Must be interfaced with the RMF controller and flow sensors to provide direct
command of circulation system flow rate for maximum energy savings
n. Interfaces with energy management system via Modbus RTU
o. The control operation of the various VFD’s will activate or de-activate related
chemical feeder’s systems thru a 120-vac coil, VFD control, VFD via RMF hard
contacts, or relays.
p. Each new drive will be fed from a breaker located in either an MCC or Power
Distribution panel.

a. Neptune Benson – Allowed for Defender Systems, Filter Pumps, and Feature Pumps
b. Danfoss – Allowed for Defender Systems, Filter Pumps, and Feature Pumps
c. Armstrong Pumps – Allowed for Filter and Feature Pumps only
d. CES – Allowed for Filter and Feature Pumps only
e. Current Systems Inc. – Allowed for the River Flow Thrusters systems
T. INDUSTRIAL GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTERS
1. General:
a. The Industrial ground fault circuit interrupter(s) must be provided for each
submersible (basin-located) pump assembly.
2. Basic Features
a. The Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs) are solid state relays that
extend the capabilities of standard GFCIs to the detection of ground leakage currents
in all stages of power conversion equipment, from simple rectifiers to sophisticated
variable frequency drives.
b. Industrial GFCIs must detect both AC and DC ground leakage current. The device
must be available in a range of voltages, load amperages, and options.
c. Industrial GFCI’s must be simple to install and require a minimal amount of
connections.
1) Provide for internal mounting within the Control Panel
d. For grounded and high-resistance grounded systems
e. Voltage options up to 250 VAC
f. Single-phase or three-phase AC systems
g. Works on systems with DC components and systems with variable frequency drives
(VFDs)
h. Included options for adjustable trip level
i. Built-in ON and Alarm indications
j. Test and Rest pushbuttons
k. Digital display showing ground fault current in real-time
l. Must support the manufacturer’s remote communication system
m. Open type (no enclosure) models are recognized components
n. Closed type (in enclosure) models with applicable voltages up to 100 A listed as Class
A devices
3. Manufacturer Certified Applications
a. Industrial ground fault interruption in single- or three-phase AC systems up to 250
VAC
b. Systems with DC components
c. Systems with variable frequency drives (VFDs)
4. 6-mA Trip Level with Inverse Time Curve Required
a. The Industrial GFCI must feature a 6-mA trip level.
1) The unit’s trip in accordance with UL943, the standard for personal protection.
2) The minimum response time is 25-ms at leakage currents of 250-mA and above.
3) No degradation in performance after 1 million cycles

4) Models up to 100 A using system voltages 240 V line-to-line and below are listed
as Class A ground fault circuit interrupters.
5. The Basis of Design: BENDER LifeGuard Series GFCI (Industrial); Bender Inc.
420 Eagleview Blvd. Exton, PA; 800-356-4266 or 610-383-9200; info@bender.org
www.bender.org
2.18 NOT USED
2.19 NOT USED
2.20 VALVES, CHECK VALVES, & OPERATORS
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1. Valves must be compatible and suitable with mildly chlorinated water typical for pools
and water features as well as saline type water (less than 7,000 ppm) in respects.
a. Internal parts must be removable for inspection and complete replacement without
applying heat or breaking pipe connections.
b. Valve shafts must be Grade 316L stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
c. Valve hardware (bolts, nuts, washers, and misc. metallic components must be
stainless steel, Grade 316L).
d. The shaft seals must be of the V-type and must be replaceable without removal of
the valve from the line or the shaft from the valve.
e. Valve must have round disc design for increased CV, high cycle life, and final sealing.
f. Valve body must have integrally molded body stops and seat relief area to prevent
over-tightening of the mating flanges. Valves must accept flat faced flanges in
accordance with ANSI B16.5 bolt pattern for 150 lb. flanges.
1) Exception:
a) If a liner is utilized, the liner must be 100% seat design fully molded around the
body whereas only the Disc and Seat are wetted parts and feature raised
convex rings on the face and be utilized as the mating flange gaskets.
g. Valve joints must be prepared using flanged connections to accept either wafer style
or lugged butterfly valves.
h. Valves placed in "difficult-to-reach" locations or more than 7 feet [2.13 m] above the
floor elevation must have chain operators or extended valve operators as pre-
approved by This Engineer.
1) Valve handles, and valve operators must be of the same material as the valve
body.
2. Pressure and Temperature Minimum Ratings:
a. Valves must be rated for 150 psig [1135 kPa] pressure ratings at 120° F [48° C]
b. 1/2 inch [12 mm] through 24-inches [600 mm] flanged valves must be pressure rated
to 150 psig [1135 kPa].
3. Valves must be open when turned counter-clockwise.
4. Valves must be certified by NSF International for use in potable water service.
a. Valves must be rated as complying with NSF-50 or NSF-61 (drinking water) standards.
b. Metallic valves (and their handles or operators) must be stainless steel or epoxy-
fused coated (NSF-61 compliant).

5. The maximum water velocity allowed through thermoplastic-type valves must be 5.0 fps
[1.524 mps]. Valves located in positions with water velocities that exceed 5.0 fps [1.524
mps] must be metallic and manufacturer rated for those flow velocities.
a. Exception: This Engineer may consider higher water velocities if those higher water
velocities are certified explicitly as permissible by the valve manufacturer.
6. True-Union connections are mandatory on all butterfly, gate, and globe valves mounted
in self-contained Fiberglass Pre-Assembled filtration, chemical, and pumping pak-type
systems.
7. Valves (and check valves) placed into compressed air systems must individually be rated
for use with compressed air by the manufacturer.
8. Cast Iron valves 3-inches and larger must have an epoxy coated body on interior and
exterior surfaces, ductile iron-nylon II coated disc, one piece 416 stainless steel shaft
with Buna-N, EPDM, or VITON seat minimum, 150 PSI rating Internal components
include EPDM resilient lining, Rilsan coated ductile iron disc and T304 (or better) L
stainless steel shaft.
9. Cast Aluminum valves sized at 2-inches and larger must have an ASTM S12A body,
coated with Rilsan on the interior and exterior surfaces, or an ASTM B26 Class B body
without coating if the valve body is not wetted. Internal components include Buna-N or
EPDM resilient lining and seat. Internal components include EPDM or BUNA-N resilient
lining, a disc made of Rilsan coated ductile iron or uncoated stainless steel, and T304L
stainless steel shaft.
10. Thermoplastic Valves 3 inch and larger must be constructed from PVC Type 1 Cell
Classification 12454 or CPVC type 4 cell classification 23447. Thermoplastic valves must
include PVC disc with solid type 316L stainless steel shaft with Buna-N, EPDM, or VITON
seat pressure rated to 150 psi @ 73 degrees Fahrenheit.
B. APPROVED MATERIALS
1. U-PVC – Conforming to ASTM D1784 Cell Classification 12454 A
2. Polypropylene – Conforming to ASTM D4101 Cell Classification PP0210B67272
3. PVDF – Conforming to ASTM D3222-91A Cell Classification Type II
4. UV Inhibitors: Mandatory for plastic valves and components if located exposed to
sunlight
5. FKM – VITON® Fluorocarbon Rubber (also referred to as VITON)
6. EPDM – Ethylene Propylene Diane Terpolymer Rubber
7. Nitrile – Nitrile Butadiene Rubber
8. Ball valve O-rings must be EPDM or VITON®.
9. Lugs, Operating Nuts, Stem Extensions, Shafts, and Valve Hardware:
a. Stainless steel, in accordance with ASTM-A276, in Grade 316L.
b. Butterfly Valve Disc Assembly: Offset design with entirely isolated Type 316L
stainless steel stem and Type 316L stainless steel hardware.
10. Cast Aluminum housing with Rilsan (nylon) coating
11. Stainless Steel, grade 316L or better (unless otherwise noted in the Drawings)
12. Operator component requirements:
a. Unless noted otherwise, actual lever handles, gear handles, chain components
(wheel, chain, etc.) must be one of the following:

1) Epoxy fused coated

2) Stainless steel, Type 316L or better
3) High impact polypropylene handle / handwheel
C. PRE-APPROVED VALVE AND MANUFACTURERS
1. The Basis of Design for Plastic-type valves (for less than 5 FPS [1.524 MPS] water velocity
applications):
a. ASAHI America
1) Type-57 Butterfly valves must be PVC, PP or PVDF body with either PP, PVC, or
PVDF disc and EPDM, Nitrile, or FKM seat & seals.
2) Classifications approved:
a) Ball Valves: up to 3-inches [80 mm]
b) Butterfly Valves: 1.5-inches [40 mm] and larger
b. Spears
1) PVC & CPVC 2000 Industrial True Union Ball Valve
a) Ball check valves must be CPVC (ADE Type 3)
a) Ball Valves: up to 3-inches [80 mm]
b) Butterfly Valves: 1.5-inches [40 mm] and larger
c) Globe Valves: up to 6-inches [150 mm]
2. The Basis of Design for Metallic valves:
a. Dominion Valves by Neptune Benson
1) Valves 3-inches to 12-inches [75 - 305 mm] must be constructed with cast
aluminum ASTM S12A housing and entirely coated with Rilsan on the interior and
exterior surfaces. Internal components include EPDM resilient lining, Rilsan
coated ductile iron disc and T316 stainless steel shaft
2) Valves 14-inches [355 mm] and larger must be constructed with cast iron housing
epoxy coated and with Rilsan coated ductile iron disc.
3) Valves must be Dominion butterfly valves and must be provided for strainer
isolation, filter bypass, backwash throttling, filtered water return, and balance
tank connections.
a) Butterfly Valves: 2-inches [50 mm] and larger
b. Val-Matic Series 2000 valves
1) Provide valves manufactured and tested in accordance with American Water
Works Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C504 and certified to ANSI/NSF 61
Drinking Water System Components-Health Effects.
2) Provide valve body metallic parts with factory-primed and epoxy-fused coated
resistant to chlorine and mild saline water (7,000 ppm) as associated with saline-
based chlorine generators.
3) The manufacturer must have a quality management system that is certified to ISO
9001:2000 by an accredited, certifying body.
a) Butterfly: 2-inches [50 mm] and larger

c. Bray Series 20 and 21 valves

1) Aluminum body
2) Uncoated Stainless-Steel disc
3) EPDM or BUNA-N seat material
3. Flanges and Hardware:
a. Plastic piping must have plastic flanges (with equivalent pressure ratings);
b. Stainless steel piping must have stainless steel flanges.
D. OPERATORS
1. General requirements:
a. Metallic components for operators must be stainless steel unless approved by This
Engineer.
b. Valve hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, etc.) must be 316L stainless steel.
2. Lever Type Operator:
a. Only for standard sizes 1.5 – 6-inches [40 – 150 mm]. Lever operators may not be
used on sizes larger than 6-inches [150 mm].
b. Must have built-in lockout capability.
3. Gear Type Operator:
a. Mandatory for standard sizes 8-inches [200 mm] and larger
b. Gear operators are acceptable for sizes smaller than 8-inches [200 mm] as well
c. Must be equipped with a position indicator.
4. Chain Type Operator:
a. Mandatory for valves located 7 feet [2.13 m] or greater above the floor elevation.
b. Chain operators may be installed on Gear-operated butterfly valves. The chain must
be weldless loop style chain.
E. DISCRETE AUTOMATED ACTUATORS
1. Pneumatic
2. Electric
3. Actuation accessories to be provided and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
requirements.
4. Minimum features must include:
a. An actuator at 120 VAC, 60-Hz
b. Two adjustable limit switches for cycle adjustment
c. Visual position indicator
d. Maximum 33-second travel time
e. 0.7-amp FLA
f. Mounted in a NEMA 3R enclosure under otherwise noted in the Drawings
F. PROPORTIONAL AUTOMATED ACTUATORS
1. When specified in the Drawings, a proportionally controlled electric actuator must be
supplied by the same manufacturer supplying the valve body and stem to ensure
compatibility
2. Electric: 120 VAC, 60-Hz

3. Must include positioning board which accepts a 4-20mA signal

4. Minimum travel: 355 degrees of rotation
5. Maximum cycle time: 20 seconds
6. Minimum duty cycle: 35%
7. The Basis of Design: EA 250 Actuators by GF Signet, for GF Type 563 Butterfly Valves
G. ISOLATION AND THROTTLING VALVES (2-INCHES AND LESS)
1. Isolation and throttling valves of 2-inches [50 mm] and less in size must be true-union
ball valves.
a. Refer to the Drawings for specific types specified.
2. Materials of construction must be Type 2. The “true-union” design must allow valve
removal and replacement without spreading the pipelines adjacent to the valves.
3. Valves must be 100% -port and have replaceable Teflon seats. Valves must have a
blowout-proof bottom entry stem, and ABS handle that can be easily removed.
4. Valves must have a Safe-T-Shear® stem with double O-ring stem seals. Valve handles
must be polypropylene with built-in lockout mechanism. Valve union nuts must have
Buttress threads. Seal carriers must be Safe-T-Blocked®.
H. ISOLATION AND THROTTLING VALVES (2.5-INCHES AND GREATER)
1. Isolation and throttling valves of 2.5-inches [65 mm] and greater in size must be of the
butterfly type.
a. Refer to the Drawings for specific types specified.
2. Materials of construction must be Type 2. The valve body must be Type 2. The valve disc
must be polypropylene or better. The valve shaft must be stainless steel. Seat materials
and other elastomers must be rated for continuous chlorinated water and saline
content water service and must be EPDM or better.
3. The valves must be rated for “bubble-tight” service unless otherwise specified. Valves
between 2.5-inches [65 mm] and 6-inches [150 mm] must have lever-style operators
unless indicated otherwise.
4. Valves 8-inches [200 mm] AND greater in size must have gear-type operators.
5. The valves must be wafer-style and must fit between standard ANSI flange construction.
I. PRECISION THROTTLING GLOBE VALVES (UP TO 6-INCHES)
1. Precision throttling valves 6-inches [150 mm] and smaller in size must be of the Globe
type.
2. All thermoplastic Globe valves must be constructed from PVC (Type 2), or CPVC (Type 2),
or U-PVC – Conforming to ASTM D1784 Cell Classification 12454 A, as specified in the
Drawings.
3. Seals must be FKM – VITON® Fluorocarbon Rubber or EPDM – Ethylene Propylene Diene
Terpolymer Rubber
4. The valve shaft must be stainless steel
5. Globe valves with “floating disks” are expressly prohibited.
6. There must be no metal to media contact. Valves must have excellent flow regulating
characteristics throughout the entire lift of the disc.
7. Valves must have a high impact polypropylene handwheel.

8. PVC and CPVC -1/2 inch [12 mm] through 4-inches [100 mm] globe valves must be
pressure rated to a minimum 80 psi [551 kPa] or higher for water at 73°F [22.8°C]. Sizes
must be rated for full vacuum service 29.9 inch/Hg.
a. Spears Y-pattern True-Union PVC Globe Valve, www.spearsmfg.com, 800. 327.6390
J. CHECK VALVES (1.5-INCHES AND LESS)
1. Thermoplastic check valves 1.5-inches [37mm] and less must be True-Union 2000
Industrial Ball Check type manufactured to ASTM F-1970 and materials of construction
from Type 3 (CPVC Type IV), ASTM D-1784 Cell Classification 23447.
a. The check valve design must allow installation in either a horizontal or vertical
position.
b. CPVC 1/2 inch through 1.5-inch ball check valves must be pressure rated to 235 psi at
73°F.
c. Note thermoplastic water velocity limitation as indicated above
2. Suitable for pressure and vacuum service
3. The valve ball must be the only moving part and must unseat to permit flow in one
direction, but seal against its seat to prevent backflow. Minimum 100% shut-off
pressure must not exceed 0.7 psi [4.82 kPa].
4. The valves must have one of the following end-connections: socket-weld with true-
unions on both ends
a. CPVC (Type 3) Flange connectors are required as the Drawings specify.
5. Materials:
a. O-rings and seals must be EPDM or VITON. Seal materials and other elastomers must
be rated for continuous chlorinated water and saline content water service.
b. Valve union nuts must have Buttress threads.
c. Valve seats must be a standard O-ring type.
d. Seal carriers must be Safe-T-Blocked®.
e. Valve components must be replaceable.
f. Components must be assembled with Silicone-Free, Water Soluble Lubricants
g. NSF must list EPDM valves® for use in potable water service.
h. The valve body, ball, and other components must be Type 3.
a. Model True Union 2000 Industrial Ball Check Valves as manufactured by Spears
Manufacturing Company, 15853 Olden St., Sylmar, CA 91342 (PO Box 9203, Sylmar,
CA 91392); (818) 364-1611; www.spearsmfg.com
K. CHECK VALVES (2-INCHES AND GREATER)
1. Check valves 2-inches [50 mm], and higher in size must either be a “swing check” type or
the “wafer-style,” torsion spring design.
2. Materials of construction must be Stainless Steel, including body, disc, arm, stem, shaft,
spring, bushing, and seat ring.
3. The disk must seat tightly and secure positive closure to prevent backflow.
4. The valve seat and any other wetted part must be of a material rated for continuous
chlorinated-water service.

5. Any wetted elastomer must be EPDM or VITON.

6. The valve design must allow for replacement or removal without disassembly of the
adjacent flanges.
7. The Basis of Design (pre-approved equals):
a. “Ritepro” by Bray, Model 210, ASME 150, with stainless steel body and seat
b. “Dual-Disc type” by Val-Matic in stainless steel Grade 316.
1) Pre-Approved Alternate: “Dual-Disc type” by Val-Matic in Ductile Iron ASTM A536,
Grade 65-45-12 with BUNA-N Resilient Seat Molded to Body with mandatory
Fusion Bonded Epoxy (FBE) Coating
L. POTABLE WATER ISOLATION VALVES
1. Isolation valves for potable water service at street pressures less than 150 psi [1.03
mPa] must be of bronze construction and of either “ball” or “gate” design.
2. Valves must have glass-reinforced Durafill valve seats rated for potable water service.
3. The valve ball or disc must be hard chrome plated brass. The valve must be bottom-
loaded with a pressure retaining stem.
4. The valve must be rated “bubble-tight” service in continuous isolation service at 400 psi
[2.76 mPa] WOG (non-shock).
5. Valves must comply with all applicable requirements and conform to federal
specification WW-V-35B, Type II, Style 3, Class A.
6. The maximum water velocity allowed through plastic-type valves must be 5.0 fps [1.524
mps]. Valves located in positions with water velocities that exceed 5.0 fps [1.524 mps]
must be metallic and manufacturer rated for those flow velocities.
a. Series B-6000 or equivalent by Watts Regulator Company; Lawrence, MA 01842 (617-
688-1811).
M. MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVES
1. Motorized control valves must be furnished as a complete assembly by a single source
and be pre-assembled, and factory tested before delivery.
2. The valve must be bi-directional motion and must be rated for 100 psi [689.5 kPa]
minimum continuous pressure services.
3. The valve must be of the “butterfly” type suitable for continuous throttling applications.
4. The valve body must be wafer style and meet ANSI Class 125/150 flange standards.
Valve neck length must be sufficient to allow for flange clearance. The valve body must
have an integrally cast top plate for direct flush mounting of an electric motor actuator
without the use of brackets or adapters.
5. The valve seat must be field replaceable and must be designed to adequately isolate the
valve body, stem, and journal areas from the liquid media. The outside diameter of the
valve disc must be such that, when opened, it will not interfere with adjacent piping.
6. The stem must be one-piece. The disc, shaft, and stem must be connected by a Grade
316L stainless steel torque plug or disc screw. This connection must provide positive
engagement preventing blowout of the one-piece stem, must maintain a leak-proof and
shake-proof connection, and allow for quick, easy disassembly.
7. Materials of construction must be as follows:

a. Valve body must be cast aluminum with Rilsan Coating on all interior and exterior
surfaces.
b. The seat must be EPDM or VITON.
c. The disc must be stainless steel.
d. The shaft and stem must be Grade 316L stainless steel.
e. Hardware (bolts, nuts, washers, and misc. metallic components must be stainless
steel, grade 316L.
8. The electric actuator must consist of a permanent split-capacitor, a reversible-type
electric motor that drives a compound epicyclical gear.
9. Handwheel with a de-clutch lever must be provided so that the handwheel does not
rotate during electrical operations.
10. The valve actuator must have visual, mechanical position indication, readable from 12
feet [3.5 m], showing output shaft and valve position. The unit can mount directly to
butterfly valves without brackets or adapters.
11. The actuator must have an integral terminal strip, which through conduit entries will
secure wiring to power supplies. Cable entry must be by means of two 1-inch [25 mm]
NPT threaded connections. The actuator must be rated for continuous duty and must be
constructed to withstand high shock and vibrations without failure. The actuator must
have a self-locking gear train, which is permanently lubricated at the factory. The
actuator must be fitted with two adjustable factory-calibrated mechanical torque limit
switches of the single-pole, double throw type.
12. The motor must be equipped with overload protection. The actuator housing must be
hard anodized aluminum for extensive environmental protection and be rated to NEMA-
4X standards. The actuator must include mechanical travel stops, which is adjustable to
15 degrees in each direction of the 90-degree rotation. The mechanical travel stops
must be adjusted in the Field to obtain the desired reduced flow when the valve
actuator is energized to a position as closed. The actuator must include two adjustable
travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.
13. The electrical motor must be rated for 120VAC, 60 hertz, and single-phase electricity.
The Valve Manufacturer must select the actuator size to provide sufficient closing and
opening torque to rotate the valve 90 degrees in no more than 60 seconds while the
valve is at 100% flow and pressure conditions.
14. Unless otherwise specified, the actuator must be by Dominion or Val-Matic or a pre-
approved equal. www.neptunebenson.com
N. ELECTRIC SOLENOID VALVES
1. Electric solenoid valves must be furnished as a complete assembly by a single source
and be pre-assembled, and factory tested before delivery.
2. The valve must be of the plunger or linear motion type and be rated for 100 psi [689.5
kPa] minimum continuous pressure service at water temperatures not exceeding 125° F
[51° C]. The valve must be suitable for continuous isolation service without leakage
under the conditions specified.
3. Wetted surfaces must be rated for continuous use in mildly chlorinated and saline
content water (associated with saline chlorine generators) typically of pool applications.

4. Materials: Stainless steel or PVC. The valve must have NPT connections in the sizes
specified. The valve body must have an integral top plate for direct flush mounting of an
electric solenoid actuator without the use of brackets or adapters.
5. The electric solenoid actuator must have an integral terminal strip or wire leads, which
through conduit entries will secure wiring to power supplies. Cable entry must be by
means of 0.5 inch [13 mm] NPT threaded connection. The actuator must be rated for
continuously energized duty and must be constructed to withstand high shock and
vibrations without failure.
6. The actuator housing must be rated for extensive environmental protection to at least
NEMA 4X standards unless noted otherwise in the Drawings. The electrical actuator
must be rated for 120VAC, 60 hertz, and single-phase electricity. The actuator size must
be matched to the valve size to provide positive closing and opening while flowing water
at 100% pressure.
7. The valve must be closed when the solenoid is deenergized (and 100% open when the
solenoid is energized). The solenoid valve must be “quick-acting” with a total closure
time not to exceed one (1) second.
8. The selected solenoid valve must be equivalent to or better than ASCO, ASAHI, or
Magnatrol.
O. MODULATING (DIVERSION) FLOAT VALVES
1. Modulating / diversion float valves - vertical must be flanged float valves with double
float and pivoted arms with guides. The entire assembly must be designed and
fabricated for submerged service.
2. Construction must be either stainless steel or PVC/Polypropylene and equipped with
Type 2, Sch. 80 PVC van stone flanges. Floats must be adjusted in the field for the
regular operating water level in the surge tank.
3. Modulating valve units must be equipped with chemical resistant gaskets / seals that
will prevent air intrusion into the pump suction piping.
a. Model "Dual-Float" (in the sizes noted within the Drawings) as distributed by
Neptune Benson.
P. BACKWASH VALVES
a. 2-inches [50 mm] 100% -port, high-flow, manual backwash multiport valve assembly
suitable for operation with a corresponding Pentair filter tank unit.
1) The valve must have no more than 1.5 psi [10.3 kPa] pressure drop when flowing
100 gpm [379 L/min] of water.
2) The valve must have an unrestricted 2-inches [50 mm] inlet and outlet ports and
allow operator selection of flow direction for various operational modes.
2. The valve must be of substantial Type 3 CPVC body construction. The valve must be
rated for continuous operation to 50 psi [344.7 kPa] operating pressure.
3. Large (more than a 100 GPM [378 LPM] flow rate) automated sand filter systems must
be equipped with the factory-supplied automatic valves.
Q. OTHER SPECIFIED VALVES

1. Unless otherwise specified, the valves must satisfy the applicable general requirements
of the Specifications for the specified duty.
2. Other chemical valves are specified in “Chemical Equipment.”
3. Specified valves are “manual” unless electric, motorized, or pneumatic valves are
explicitly specified within the Drawings.
4. Valves specified for chemical duties must be rated appropriately for peak chemical
concentrations expected after the injection point.
5. Metallic-type valves must be equipped as follows:
a. Factory primed then Fusion Epoxy Coating or approved equal
b. EPDM or VITON Seals
c. Stainless steel stems and shafts
d. Stainless steel fitted
2.21 NOT USED
2.22 NOT USED
2.23 MAINTENANCE, SERVICE, TESTING, & RELATED EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. Provide commercial-rated equipment.
2. Observe and follow manufacturer’s instructions & recommendations
3. Refer to the Drawings’ Equipment Schedules for exact models specified.
B. MAINTENANCE & SERVICE EQUIPMENT
1. Maintenance handles & poles:
a. 1-piece 1.25-inches O.D. [32 mm] fiberglass handles with quick-change adapters to
connect cleaning equipment
2. Vacuum hose:
a. Heavy-duty rated with integrally molded cuffs
b. 2-inches [50 mm] diameter x 50 feet [15.24 m]
c. Materials contain UV inhibitors
d. Color: White/Black
e. Warranty: 4 years
3. Wall Brush:
a. Heavy-duty firm & non-metallic bristles
b. Curved, 24-inches [610 mm] long
c. Include quick connector for easy adaption to pole
4. Vacuum head:
a. Commercial Flex-O-Vac vacuum head
b. 24-inches [610 mm] wide x 7-inches [178 mm] deep
c. Dual vacuum connectors to a single 2-inches [50 mm] hose connection
C. ROBOTIC AUTOMATIC POOL VACUUM CLEANER
1. Components & Materials
a. Pump’s suction power must be a minimum of 13,208 gallons/hour [50 CuM/hour].

b. Onboard sensors must include a gyroscope, tilt sensors, and infrared proximity
c. Rotating brushes must be PVC or PBC (or a combination of both)
d. Stainless steel outer casing
2. Programming
a. Equipped with multiple pre-programmed cleaning tracking scenarios
b. Includes an eight-function remote control
3. Cleaner Bags
a. Filter bag options must include the following micron choices:
1) 105, 250, or 1,000
4. Ease of maintenance
a. The pump must be accessed, repaired, and maintained on the pool deck without
tools.
5. Data:
a. Cleaner width: 28.7-inches [73 cm]
b. Weight in-water / out of water: 8.81 lbs. [4 kG]
c. Trolley: St. Steel with cable reel
d. Power: 120/220 VAC / 24 VDC
e. Pump: 14,530 gal/hour [55 cu m /hour]
f. Cleaning Velocity: 5,600 sf / hour
g. Filtration capacity: 8.37 lbs. [3.8 kG] sand
h. Walls & obstacles detection: 2 infra-red sensors and tilt sensor
i. Water Operating Depth (min.): 15-inches [38 cm]
a. Enduro-TurboClean XL; US Exclusive Distributor: CES, 2 Jupiter Park Lane, Suite 1,
Jupiter, FL 33458, USA; 800.940.1557; WWW.CESWaterQuality.com
D. CHEMICAL TESTING
1. Provide testing lab kit for:
a. Free Available Chlorine: 1- 10 ppm
b. Total Available Chlorine: 0 – 3 ppm
c. pH – 6.8 – 8.4 ppm
d. Acid & base demand
e. Calcium Hardness (CAH)
f. Total Hardness
g. Cyanuric Acid (CYA)
h. Copper and Iron
i. Reagents for 24 months of testing
2. The Basis of Design: Taylor Professional Complete Chlorine Testing Lab; model #56-300
by Recreonics; www.recreonics.com
2.24 NOT USED
2.25 NOT USED
2.26 NOT USED

2.27 NOT USED

2.28 NOT USED
2.29 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. NOT USED
B. EMERGENCY EYEWASH STATION
1. Provide one (1) emergency eyewash station and drench shower (in each chemical
equipment room)
2. The Basis of Design: Bradley Plumbing Fixtures; 414-251-6000. Refer to the Drawings for
the specified model number. There are no known equal.
C. PERIMETER OVERFLOW SYSTEM - PARALLEL GRATING
1. Grating over the trench at the zero-entry and infinity sumps must be parallel-type by
Daldorado LLC. Ph: (888) 509-8128, 4327 Arnold Ave, Naples, FL 34104;
www.daldorado.com with the following Specifications.
2. The grating shall be formed of molded PVC sections that are modular, interlocking
sections, UV stabilized and certified NSF-50.
a. The top section shall have a raised herringbone design and certified to IBC
Classification C for Wet-Barefoot inclining platform (ramp) test for swimming pool
surroundings and communal shower rooms.
b. Grating shall be 0.47” (12mm) wide and an outside depth of 1.0” (25.4mm) with a
middle depth of 1.83” (46.6mm) for load strength requirements.
c. The grating shall be certified under ANSI/AS3996 class A for covers and grates with a
load exceeding 10kN (2,248lb).
d. The space between the bars shall not exceed 0.315” (8mm) to comply with IBC child
finger/toe entrapment guidelines.
e. The grating surface bars shall run parallel to the pool wall and with the gap, provide
at least 40% open space per foot for unrestricted water flow.
f. Fasteners shall be SS-316 and be provided by the manufacturer.
g. The width of the grating shall allow the insertion of the touchpad’s holding brackets
between the grating and the gutter lip.
h. All inside and outside corners and custom radii sections under 3-feet inside diameter
shall be custom fabricated and strengthened by the manufacturer.
3. Grate color to be selected by the Architect/Owner. Colors available in white, bone and
gray. The grating shall have a minimum 10-year manufacturer’s warranty.
D. HIGH-STRENGTH MOLDED FIBERGLASS GRATING
1. Floor grating over each indoor collector/ reservoir / surge tank must be GRIDWALK
square mesh grating by American Grating, LLC; 1191 Center Pointe Drive; Henderson,
NV, 89074 (1-800-990-4783) with the following Specifications.
a. Grate thickness of at least 2-inches [50 mm]. Mesh must be a maximum of 1.5-inches
[40 mm] square on a regular pattern with a bar width of at least 0.32 inch [8.1 mm].
b. Gridwalk grating sections:

1) Capable of withstanding a consistent load of 109 lbs. per sq. feet [532 kG per sq.
m] over a 36-inches x 36 inches [915 mm x 915 mm] square section without
exceeding a center point deflection of 0.080 inch [2 mm].
2) Capable of withstanding a concentrated center load of 200 lbs. per sq. feet [976
kG per sq. m] of grating on a 36-inches x 36 inches [915 mm x 915 mm] section
without exceeding a center point deflection of 0.213 inches [5.4 mm].
3) Field-fit to the specified size as shown in the Drawings in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
c. Cut out sections of the grating to allow the auto-fill system, vacuum discharges, and
other utilities to spray into each tank.
d. The area to be covered with this fiberglass grating must be divided into individual
sections so that each section does not exceed 4 feet [1.2 m] in width.
e. Provide structural pultrusion floor supports as needed if This Engineer deems the
deflection of the grating to be unacceptable. Such support and bracing must be
provided as part of Base Bid.
2. Outdoor located collector/ reservoir / surge tanks must have a lockable lid enclosure.
E. WATER FILL SYSTEM - AUTOMATED
1. Each pool must be fitted with an automatic water level control system.
2. The water level control and fill system must include a manual fill valve (as sized on the
Drawings) arranged in parallel with the automatic fill valve (sized on the Drawings).
Install an additional isolation valve on the potable water inlet line for safety.
3. Valves exposed to municipal-supplied water pressure must be rated for safe drinking
water pressures up to 125 psi [861.8 kPa]. Maintain a minimum 4 inches [100 mm] air
gap from the city water supply pipe terminus to the maximum water level of each water
feature and pool (as measured in the surge tank).
a. The water connection must be via a listed, pre-approved backflow preventer system
as noted herein.
4. Potable water fill system must comply with local and state codes and requirements.
5. Provide a water hammer arrestor as specified.
6. Provide a pressure limiting device if the pressure of the supply pipe is higher than 60 psi.
7. Pre-approved automated water-fill systems include:
a. The feature and pool water level control system for Aquaworx fabricated fiberglass
tanks must be from the ATLEV family (sizes vary) by Aquaworx Inc., 10450 66th St N
#3, Pinellas Park, FL 33782 (1-888-426-8511).
F. COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS & ACCESSORIES
1. Air compressor:
a. Provide air compressors, coolers, drying systems, oil removal filters, separator
vessels, sensors, screens, receiver tanks, and related valving, check valves, gauges,
drains, moisture removal units, controls, and PLC’s.
b. Air compressors must generate the target air supply and noted pressures and include
the following mandatory, minimum accessories:
c. Variable speed drive and internal automated operating controls
d. Remote monitoring reporting features

e. Air, oil, and water filters

f. Water-cooled units provided unless otherwise noted
g. Stainless steel heat exchangers
h. Reverse osmosis system with internal booster pump
i. Water pump (for internal compressor circulation and cooling)
j. Integrated refrigerant dryer
k. Sound insulated canopy
l. Oil-free output air supply
2. Receiver tank
a. Designed and constructed in accordance with ASME Section VIII Div-I Code for
compressed air storage use.
b. Epoxy-fused coatings – interior and exterior
c. Stainless steel fittings
d. Automated controls
e. Gauges, flow meters
f. Communication protocols with an air compressor
3. After-cooler
a. Water-cooled unit (integral with an air compressor)
b. Gauges, valves, controls
c. Safety guards to prevent heat injury
4. Gauges, valves, the rate of flow indicators, and monitoring package
a. Air Compressor: Atlas Copco, Model AQ-xx, 10-Bar, 800-732-6762;
www.atlascopco.com
b. Receiver Tank: Model 660 gallons, vertical air receiver tank, 165 PSI, Manchester
Tank, 1000 Corporate Centre Drive, Suite 300, Franklin, TN 37067; 800-399-5628;
www.mantank.com
c. After-Cooler: Integral with Air Compressor
G. FLOOR ACCESS DOORS
1. Provide where indicated on plans vault access door Type JD-AL, refer to the Drawings for
the door sizes.
a. Length denotes hinge sides.
b. The floor access door must be double leaf and pre-assembled from the
manufacturer.
2. Performance Characteristics
a. Covers: Must be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 300 psf (1464 kg/m2)
with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span.
b. The operation of the covers must be smooth and easy with controlled operation
throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.
c. The operation of the covers must not be affected by temperature.
d. Entire door, including hardware components, must be highly corrosion resistant.
e. Covers: Must be 1/4-inch (6mm) aluminum diamond pattern.

f. Frame: Channel frame must be extruded aluminum with bend down anchor tabs
around the perimeter.
g. Hinges: Must be specifically designed for horizontal installation and must be through
bolted to covers with tamper-proof Type 316 stainless steel lock bolts and must be
through bolted to the frame with Type 316 stainless steel bolts and locknuts.
h. Drain Coupling: Provide a 1-1/2 inch [38 mm] drain coupling located in the right front
corner of the channel frame.
i. Lifting mechanisms: Manufacturer must provide the required number and size of
compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes to provide, smooth,
secure, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and to
act as a check in retarding downward motion of the covers when closing. The upper
tube must be the outer tube to prevent accumulation of moisture, grit, and debris
inside the lower tube assembly. The bottom tube must interlock with a flanged
support shoe fastened to a formed 0.25-inch [6 mm] gusset support plate.
j. A removable exterior turn/lift handle with a spring-loaded ball detent must be
provided to open the cover. Provide a flush, gasketed, removable screw plugs to
protect the latch release.
k. Safety Ladders with an extendable safety post must be provided with each floor
access door.
l. Hardware:
1) Hinges: Heavy forged Type 316 stainless steel hinges, each having a minimum 1/4-
inch (6mm) diameter Type 316 stainless steel pin, must be provided and must
pivot, so the covers do not protrude into the channel frame.
2) Covers must be equipped with a hold-open arm which automatically locks each
cover in the open position.
3) Covers must be fitted with the required number and size of compression spring
operators. Springs and spring tubes must be Type 316 stainless steel.
4) A Type 316 stainless steel snap lock with a solid handle must be mounted on the
underside of one cover.
5) Hardware: Must be Type 316 stainless steel throughout.
3. Finishes: Factory finish must be mill finish aluminum with a bituminous coating applied
to the exterior of the frame.
4. The Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Type JD-AL Access Door by The Bilco Company, P.O.
Box 1203, New Haven, CT 06505, 1-800-366-6530, Fax: 1-203-933-8478, Web:
www.bilco.com .
H. DECK PEDESTALS
1. GENERAL
a. The deck pedestals must have a broad footprint that provides stability, is impervious
to freeze-thaw cycles, and offers a range of heights suited to almost any application.
b. Precise spacer tabs allow for deck drainage, simple accessories adjust for slope, and
the screw-to-adjust height setting assures a perfectly straight and level deck.
c. Pedestals made of High-Density Copolymer Polypropylene
d. Contains 20% Post-Industrial Recycled Material
e. Factory-Adjustable pedestals must be preassembled

f. Eligible manufacturers must be based in the USA and all products for this project
must be Made in the USA.
g. The Basis of Design: Acceptable Manufacturer: Bison Innovative Products; 2395
West 4th Avenue, Denver, CO 80223; Phone 800-333-4234 and 303-892-0400; Fax
303-825-5988. Email: Sales@BisonIP.com, Web: www.bisonip.com .
2. HEIGHT AND SUPPORT-WEIGHT DEPENDENT
a. Utilizing the weight capacity and mounting height of each pedestal, select the Deck
Pedestals’ model.
b. Level-It Model by Bison:
1) Manufacturer-designed to support a maximum of 750 lbs. [340 kG] per pedestal
2) Level.it adjustable system height range is 2-inches to 12-inches [50 mm to 305
mm]
3) Accessories for heights from 0.125 inch to 2-inches [3.2 mm to 50 mm]
c. ScrewJack Model by Bison:
1) Manufacturer-designed to support a maximum of 1000 lbs. [453.5 kG] per
Pedestal
2) ScrewJack model system height range is 1.25-inches to 24-inches [31.7 mm to 610
mm].
3) Tab Width 3/16 inch
4) Accessories for heights from 0.125 inch to 1.25-inches [3.2 mm to 37.5 mm]
d. VersAdjust by Bison:
1) Manufacturer-designed to support a maximum of 1,250 lbs. [566.9] per pedestal
2) Integrated Base Levelers accommodate 0 to 0.50 inch per foot slope [0 to 12.7
mm]
3) VersAdjust adjustable system height range is 2.25-inches to 36-inches [57 mm to
914 mm]
4) Accessories for heights from 0.125 inch to 2.25-inches [3.2 mm to 57mm]
2.30 NOZZLES & RELATED EQUIPMENT
A. GENERAL
1. Applicable to all metallic components and equipment without exception
a. Each nozzle and specialty metallic component must be fabricated from Stainless
Steel, Grade 316L (or better) unless specifically noted herein or within the Drawings.
1) The manufacturer(s) of stainless-steel components must provide their products
passivated and delivered with no carbon/iron particles.
a) Passivation is a non-electrolytic process typically using nitric or citric
acid which removes free iron from the surface and forms an inert, protective
oxide layer that in turn renders the stainless-steel more rust-resistance due to
lack of iron to react with the atmosphere.
2. Supply with all nozzles with flow straighteners, swivel connections, and grounding lugs
(or for provisions for grounding) as specified. Refer to process flow diagrams for model
references.

a. The specific materials of construction for each nozzle are critical and must not be
substituted.
b. Nozzles must be factory-assembled and tested prior to shipment.
c. Bonding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on the nozzle body.
3. The Basis of Design for all fountain & water feature equipment:
a. Fontana Fountains: www.fontanafountains.com
4. Fountain equipment manufactured in China, India, and Southeast Asia is specifically
prohibited from consideration or use.
B. STATIC NOZZLES
1. Refer to the Drawings' Equipment Schedules for the static nozzles’ manufacturer(s).
Refer to the nozzle descriptions herein.
a. Submit the following when requesting equivalent products:
1) Flow rates and pressures must be in exact compliance and equivalent with the
initially specified component (to verify that the pumps specified will be matched
perfectly with the total flow and pressures).
2) Dimensions must match the specified component (to check that the nozzles will
fit within the space provided).
3) Water spray geometry and performance of the nozzle must be equivalent to the
specified unit.
C. SEQUENCE DEVICES - AUTOMATED
1. The product specified in Equipment Schedules sequence device must be a water level
independent sequencing nozzle assembly, consisting of a submersible pump with VFD
control, as shown in the Drawings and supplied as a 100% assembly.
a. Sequencing is mandatory for each nozzle unless identified as a “non-sequenced”
unit.
b. Sequence device must be a water level independent sequencing nozzle assembly,
consisting of a submersible pump with VFD control, as shown in the Drawings and
supplied as a 100% assembly:
1) Submersible Grundfos Pump: Removable service. Including 8/4 submersible cable
(in length specified to allow connection to the data junction box).
2) 50/60 Hz AC signal and common for sequencing device
3) A designated industrial ground fault circuit interrupter (within the Control Panel)
must be provided with each submersible pump.
2.31 UNDERWATER LIGHTS & RELATED EQUIPMENT
A. UNDERWATER JUNCTION BOXES
1. Junction boxes and fasteners must be constructed as specified and equipped with
suitable cover gaskets providing a water-proof enclosure.
2. Each junction box must have a grounding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug on
the body.
3. The size and quantity of conduit integral outlets with their cord-seals must be fabricated
to comply with the Drawings.

4. Provide the re-enterable potting in each underwater junction box to result in complete
encapsulation of all wires and wire connectors/joints to prevent water contact or water
intrusion to the conductors. Without exception, junction boxes must be provided with
re-enterable potting compound encapsulating all conductors, splices, and connections.
a. Only potting compounds certified by the junction box manufacturer must be
authorized for use.
b. The Basis of Design for Re-Enterable Compound:
1) 3M™ Scotchcast™ 2123; 3M Electrical Markets Division; 6801 River Place Blvd.;
Austin, TX 78726-9000; 800.245.3573; www.3M.com/electrical
2) AquaBond Model AB-1000 Potting Compound; AquaBond, LLC, 6444 E. Spring
Street #275, Long Beach, CA 90815-1553; 714.961.1420; sales@aquabond.com
5. Multiple 0.50 inch [12 mm] PVC socket connection(s) for submersible cable in wet
conduit.
6. The manufacturer must certify the cord seals, seals & gaskets, potting compound
materials, and junction box assembly as being suitable for permanent immersion into
chlorinated water, 7,000 ppm of saline water (as associated with saline-based chlorine
generators) and be leak-free.
7. The Basis of Design for Junction Boxes: Fontana Fountains/Features WithWater; 1067
FM 306, Ste. 108; New Braunfels, TX 78130; (830) 515-5340;
http://www.featureswithwater.com/
B. SLEEVE FITTINGS & FASTENERS
1. Sleeve fittings and fasteners must be complete units and be constructed as specified.
C. WATER FEATURE UNDERWATER LIGHTS
1. General:
a. The cabling, conductors, and wiring located in under-deck, underground, and
underwater conduits must comply with wet-rated requirements of NEC Article
300.50 (Underground Installations) and NEC 310.10 (Wet Locations).
1) Note: Under-Deck, underground, and underwater cabling, conductors, and wiring
must be UL-listed (or an approved equivalent) as suitable for under-deck,
underground, underwater, and Wet locations
2) Each underwater light must have a grounding provision with a UL-Listed
grounding lug on the body (or equivalent agency listing requirements).
b. Unless specifically otherwise noted:
1) Feature Underwater LED lights must be 100% color changing RGBW and able to
reproduce a minimum of 16,000,000 individual colors with the LED's covered by
optically clear lenses.
2) 512DMX technology (to program this lighting system) is required.
3) Each LED light must come intact with control boards, programming software,
power supplies and be provided in a pre-assembled enclosure as indicated in the
Drawings.
4) Each LED light must have an expected lifespan of approximately 50,000 hours’
minimum at nominal ratings.
5) Each LED lights must be serialized and traceable to production tests.

c. The Feature LED light manufacturer must provide written certification that the LED
lights and their controls are of the latest technology available and rated for RGBW
capabilities.
d. Constructed of heavy-duty UV resistant materials and metallic components subject
to submerged water conditions must be Stainless Steel Grade 316.
e. IP 68 Rating allows installation in any environment (including complete submersion
in chlorinated water). The specific manufacturer must have authorized this product
to be in a submerged water condition with a chlorine exposure of up to 5 Parts per
Million (PPM).
f. The manufacturer must provide a listing of 5 installations (minimum) of this product
in a submerged application environment. The Contractor must include contact
information (name, company, the name of the project, phone number, and email
addresses) of the on-site operators to allow verification of the suitability of these
submerged LED strip lighting units.
g. Simple installation with IP68 connector and brackets as identified by the
manufacturer for authorized submerged applications. Rigid or flexible with
numerous mounting and connection methods must be first authorized by the
manufacturer. Grounding connections at specified intervals must be provided by the
manufacturer.
h. Available in various profiles and light output to comply with and match the details
and requirements of this water feature project.
i. All exposed ground lugs and bare, copper wire must be coated as per 2.31.D.7.
2. Feature underwater lights, light housings, niches, rock guards, brackets, fasteners,
freestanding support device, and stands must be complete units and be constructed as
specified.
a. Supply supports / stands with vertical adjustments.
b. Capable of a 20-degree aiming adjustment (from absolute vertical)
c. Have a grounding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug.
3. Each feature LED light unit must be provided with a low-water cutoff device or
controlled via an approved low-water-level sensor.
4. Each electrical connection must be potted and made waterproof per the manufacturer’s
a. Supply each underwater light customized to be equipped with sufficient cord length
to connect to the related underwater junction box when routed on the Water
Feature floor or within the below-grade conduits as indicated on the Drawings.
1) Upper ponds that are connected via wet conduits to junction boxes at lower
elevations must be demonstrated to be waterproof.
b. 18/5 STW submersible cable (Type ST or SO)
5. The LED lamp(s) must be UL listed for fountain (Water Feature) applications.
a. Each lamp must be protected with a Class ‘A’ CFGI 256*256*256 as outlined in NEC.
b. Each lamp must have an independent Neutral routed back to the Lighting control
panel.
c. The use of Common Neutrals or ganging of neutrals is not acceptable.

6. Unless otherwise explicitly stated, the LED color-changing lights must be 12VDC, in the
wattage noted, DMX addressable, and equipped as follows:
a. Optically clear lenses of convex cast cut glass, tempered, and heat resistant
b. Polarity reversible sensors
c. Capable of indicating if the DMX is not active or if the DMX polarity is reversed.
d. Underwater rated cable – 18/5 STW or 5X1mm2 Ho5RN-F (SOOW) submersible for
lengths indicated in the Drawings
e. Individual LED's must be mounted on an aluminum mounting plate for highly
efficient heat dissipation and then attached to the housing using thermally
conductive heat transfer epoxy.
f. Tested using pressure decay at 15 PSI (1.1 bars) and certified by the manufacturer.
Pressure decay system can detect 0.1 Pascal (0.000145 psi)
7. Underwater niche lighting
a. Deep Niche LED light fixture must include rock guards, and related hardware must
1) Stainless Steel Type 316 or better
2) Multiple 0.50 inch [12 mm] PVC socket connection(s) for submersible cable in wet
conduits. The Contractor must demonstrate each assembly to be waterproof.
3) Have a grounding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug.
4) Scheduled wattage, smooth dimming, and high-res color mixing.
5) Low EMI and fully programmable with the standard DMX-512A control signal.
6) Capable of operating in a synchronized mode and switchable between pre-
programmed shows using a show main switch.
D. SWIMMING POOL LED UNDERWATER LIGHTS
1. General:
a. The cabling, conductors, and wiring located in under-deck, underground, and
underwater conduits must comply with wet-rated requirements of NEC Article
300.50 (Underground Installations) and NEC 310.10 (Wet Locations).
1) Note: Under-Deck, underground, and underwater cabling, conductors, and wiring
must be UL-Listed (or an approved alternate) for Underground and Wet locations
2. Mount each LED underwater light in a stainless-steel Type 316 (or better) or an
approved non-metallic wet niche.
3. Provide LED light unit with a low-water cutoff device.
a. Exception: If the LED underwater light is rated for continuous use in “dry” and “wet,
submerged” conditions, this requirement must not apply.
4. Each LED light must be shipped with 95 feet [28 m] length wet-rated underwater cable
unless specified otherwise.
5. Each light assembly must include a low-voltage power supply / transformer to reduce
the voltage to 12 VAC.
a. Low-voltage power supplies / transformers enclosures must be a NEMA 3R rating.
6. Have a grounding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug.
7. The potting kit compound is required at all underwater grounding lugs, ground wires,
and splices must be coated with one of the below-listed materials.

a. The material Potting Compound must be packaged in the two-part plastic composite
closed mixing pouch. The resin must be mixed within the closed mixing pouch by
merely separating the barrier between the two parts of the bag and working the
contents back and forth within the bag.
b. The Basis of Design:
1) 3M Scotch-cast #2136 potting kit, 3M Electrical Markets Division, 6801 River Place
Blvd., Austin, TX 78726-9000, 800.245.3573; www.3M.com/electrical
2) AquaBond ABP-1000 potting kit; AquaBond, LLC, 6444 E. Spring Street #275, Long
Beach, CA 90815-1553, 714.961.1420; sales@aquabond.com
E. UNDERWATER LIGHTING POWER SUPPLIES / TRANSFORMERS
1. Power Supplies / Transformers for underwater pool lighting must be rated at 120 VAC
primary and 12VAC secondary for 60-hertz continuous operation and a maximum of 3
amps and 300 watts.
2. Power ratings:
a. LED 45 watts white (which is equivalent to 300 watts incandescent) minimum for
pool underwater lights.
b. LED 26 watts white (which is equivalent to 100 watts incandescent) minimum for spa
underwater lights.
3. The power supplies / transformers must be mounted in a waterproof exterior enclosure
and suitable for above-grade, outdoor mounting.
a. Locations within 1 mile of coastal regions: stainless steel NEMA 4 weatherproof
rating
b. The power supply / transformer must be of the two-winding type, internally fused
for overload protection.
c. Three taps must be provided to safeguard proper voltage when operated within
allowable line loss limits.
d. Two separate wiring compartments must provide isolation between primary and
secondary leads.
e. Power supplies / transformers must be UL-rated, Class “A,” and approved for pool
underwater lights.
f. Have a grounding provision with a UL-Listed grounding lug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 BASIC POOL BASIN CONSTRUCTION & INSTALLATION
A. GENERAL
1. Equipment and materials must be installed in accordance with referenced standards,
the manufacturer’s instructions & recommendations, and the Contract Documents.
a. In the event of a conflict, notify the Architect and This Engineer in writing requesting
a written clarification.
b. Without exception, written certifications from each manufacturer are required
certifying the Contractor provided proper materials, equipment, related hardware, &
installations. The Contractor is responsible for all costs necessary to attain the
certifications.

2. Install equipment, materials, infinity edges, and weirs correct and precisely level.
3. Protect Equipment from damage during installation and through substantial completion.
At the Contractor’s expense, he must replace damaged parts, components, and
equipment.
4. Stainless steel equipment must be installed no more than 30-days prior to filling the
basins to assist in protecting the stainless-steel components.
5. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to protect the finishes and appearance of the
stainless-steel equipment to be like-new without exceptions.
6. Environmental Requirements for manufactured products & Single Layer EVA-rubber
copolymer tile wet area surfacing system:
a. Install the surfacing system when the minimum ambient temperature is 40 degrees F
(1-degree C), and the maximum ambient temperature is 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
b. Do not install in rain
B. EARTHWORK, & SITE EXAMINATION
1. Protect adjacent and nearby existing work, structures, landscape, and finishes.
2. Verify the following:
a. Existing conditions under the provisions of Part 1, “General.”
b. Substrate conditions conform to the Contract Documents.
c. Conditions (including elevations, dimensions, & layout) comply with the Contract
Documents.
1) Compliance with this prerequisite will be satisfied by the Contractor providing a
site examination prior to executing the agreement for the construction
3. Formwork
a. Provide forms as required for basins, described, specified, related construction, and
assemblies.
b. Prepare forms using commercially manufactured formwork release agents that
prevent formwork absorption of moisture, prevent bond with concrete, and do not
stain the concrete surfaces before the installation of concrete / shotcrete.
c. Verify fabricated forms meet the following:
1) True to line and dimension. Verify that finished dimensions are accounted for in
constructing the forms.
2) Sufficiently robust, secured and adequately braced against vibration or movement
during concrete / shotcrete placement. The formwork must be adequate and
sufficient to prevent deflections or to dislodge.
3) Constructed to permit the escape of trapped air during concrete / shotcrete
placement.
4) Built to minimize rebound during placement operations.
d. Form Ties:
1) Form ties, or through-wall ties of any kind, must not be used when walls are 10-ft.
[3.05 M] or less in height. Instead, the formwork must be designed to span
vertically from the top of the wall to the bottom of the wall and utilize only
external bracing.

2) For walls that are greater than 10-ft. [3.05 M] in height, form ties will be
acceptable if conforming to the following:
a) Constructed so that the form tie, along with an integral water barrier at or
near the midpoint of the form tie, remains embedded in the wall, except for a
removable portion at each end.
b) Form ties must have conical type inserts creating cone-shaped depressions at
the concrete surface of at least 1-inch [25 mm] in diameter and 1-1/2-inches
[37 mm] deep to allow for filling and patching. Inserts must be fixed so that
they remain in contact with forming material and must be constructed so that
no metal is within 1.5-inches [37 mm] of the concrete surface when the forms,
inserts and tie ends are removed. Additionally, the form ties portions that
remain in place must have an integral water barrier at or near the midpoint of
the form tie.
c) Form ties consisting of through-wall tapered bolts that are entirely removed
from the structure are not permitted and must not be used.
d) Plug all ties’ hole depressions with Portland cement patching mortar product
explicitly intended for plugging holes in water retaining structures. Mortar
must be of a similar color of the structure and must be installed in strict
conformance with the manufacturer’s installation directions. Submit
manufacturer’s product data for review.
e) Ties must withstand pressures and limit deflection of forms to acceptable
limits.
4. Earthwork & excavation (for in-ground projects)
a. Verify that the following have been completed and are compliant with these
Specifications:
1) Compacted soils have been pretested to be at a 95% minimum density (using the
modified, optimum Proctor test) via the geotechnical consultant’s soils reports.
2) Excavation surfaces are clean, smooth and without voids or irregularities.
3) Evaluation of groundwater table elevation characteristics for use in determining
requirements for basin or deck structures and support
4) Ensuring suitability of soil-bearing capacity for stable and adequate support of
structures and equipment.
b. The contractor must provide layout and excavation activities for in-ground projects
to include:
1) Perform hand trimming of the excavation as needed to comply with the
dimensional requirements.
2) Remove excavated and relocated soils from the job site or relocate to other areas
on the location as directed by the Architect or This Engineer. There must be no
additional costs to the Owner for soils relocated or removed from the site.
a) Over-excavation with the removal of inferior/substandard soils below the pool
basin, pipe trenches, and tank location as directed within the most recent
Geotechnical Consultant’s report. Replace over-excavated soils with
mandatory engineered backfill monitored by the Geotechnical Consultant.
3) Remove foreign debris and spoils from the site and dispose of legally per existing
governmental requirements.

4) Surge tanks require excavation that is approximately 6 feet [1.83 m] larger (on
each side) and 2 feet [0.61 m] deeper to allow for engineered backfill and
placement of concrete mass ballast anchors.
c. Excavation including trenches must be returned to the original grade, compacted to
95% of the optimum modified Proctor test, and surface condition unless other
directed in writing by the Architect or This Engineer.
d. It is the responsibility of the Owner to obtain verification from a locally-licensed
Geotechnical Consulting Engineer that the assumed design load-bearing capacity of
2,000 psf [0.96 bars] is available at the basin location.
5. Backfill & compaction:
a. Compact soil / earth beneath each basin, deck, deck shower, footer, post, and tank
to 95% minimum of the optimum modified standard Proctor test. No deflections or
settlement of the soils are permissible. Vacate standing water before placing
concrete.
b. Certification of the compaction/density testing by a locally-licensed Geotechnical
Consulting Engineer is mandatory before providing reinforcing steel work or other
construction installations.
1) Coordination and compliance with the Geotechnical Consultant’s instructions &
recommendations are mandatory.
2) Should the basin or deck structures require re-excavations to repair faulty or
broken pipes, the Contractor must secure a professional recommendation from
the Project’s Geo-Technical Consultant for compaction methods to achieve
successful, certified compaction testing. The Contractor must bear the expense
and responsibility required to achieve new, successful backfill and density testing
certifications adequately.
a) It is common that the placement of a lean concrete mix is required to fill voids
below the basins or decks. The Contractor must bear the expenses and
responsibility for all such restorative requirements & re-work without
exception and at no cost to the Owner.
c. Surge tanks / deck showers / cleaning equipment posts / emergency stop posts /
receptacle posts, etc. must be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's
instructions & recommendations and requirements including the quality and type of
backfill materials, and compaction efforts.
d. Gravel and crushed rock (well-drained backfill) is a mandatory requirement and must
be placed around the tank(s) per the Manufacturer’s instructions and the
requirements of The Drawings and the Technical Specifications.
e. For concrete basins or tanks, do not backfill via mechanical methods before the
basin’s or tank’s structural concrete has gained sufficient strength to withstand the
applied load.
f. For non-concrete basins and tanks: Backfill using #57 crushed stone placed in 1-ft
[305 mm] deep lifts. The Contractor must follow the Contract Documents for
additional procedures.
1) After each lift of backfill crushed stone placement, the tank must be filled with an
equal height of water.

2) Furnish the specified geotextile materials to assist in preventing earth (or another
authorized backfill material) from encountering the crushed stone materials’
layer.
3) The Contractor must comply with the tank manufacturer’s installation and
backfill/compaction requirements without exception.
4) The contractor must arrange to have the tank manufacturer on site during the
placement of the rock and other backfill efforts.
a) A written report from the tank manufacturer approving the tank placement
and backfill procedures is required from the Contractor.
g. Piping trenches initial backfill must specifically allow fittings to be accessible for
viewing until initial water-pressure tests, regulatory inspection(s), and engineering
observations are successfully completed then verified by this Engineer.
C. VAPOR BARRIERS
1. Comply with the requirements of the vapor barrier manufacturer
2. Provide a vapor barrier at locations to prevent the basin concrete / shotcrete structure
from encountering the surrounding soils.
a. Exception: If Steel-Tex is placed on the walls and the beam, the (wall) vapor barrier
may be omitted from those specific areas.
3. Overlap each vapor barrier partial piece a minimum 6-inches [150 mm].
4. Provide 12-inches [305 mm] long tape fasteners (or its equivalent) on 36-inches [914
mm] centers at overlap junctures.
5. Seal the vapor barrier at each piping penetration.
6. Verify that hydrostatic relief locations are unobstructed by the vapor barrier.
D. DEWATERING
1. Perform dewatering of excavated and surrounding areas as required.
2. Dewatering efforts include, but not be limited to, the pool basin structure areas, pipe
trench locations, and the locations of surge tanks.
3. Note that the pool structure(s) are not designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift or
groundwater conditions that could cause floating of the structure. The hydrostatic relief
device and pool plugs specified must be provided to assist in this area of concern.
a. Order the pool plug (hydrostatic relief device) with no plaster installed so that it may
be finished with the same interior finish as specified herein. An identical color match
is required.
b. Locate 1 cu feet [28 L] of 0.75-inch [20 mm] non-porous crushed rock / stone
beneath each hydrostatic relief plug cone & dewatering valve box and at the base of
other specified equipment as noted.
c. Puncture / remove the vapor barrier at each hydrostatic relief cone and pool plug
location.
d. However, multiple de-watering outlets / locations around the Pool and at all tank
locations are a Contractor responsibility.
4. Crushed stone to assist in dewatering control:

a. Crushed stone layer thickness must be increased as needed depending on what layer
thickness is necessary to accommodate and control the groundwater encountered,
for other structural considerations, to minimize the presence of standing water.
5. Dewatering systems:
a. Provide a deadline-type dewatering pipe (minimum 2-inches [50 mm] Type 2 (Sch 80
PVC) piping extending from the specified crushed rock/stone bed (below the drain
assembly sump) to the surface elevation (for future accessibility and) to assist in
allowing removal of the groundwater from beneath and around the basin.
b. Provide a minimum of two such dewatering device assemblies beneath each basin. A
minimum of 18-inches [455 mm] of the specified crushed stone bed must surround
each dewatering pipe terminus.
c. Provide a valve box enclosure visible at the ground surface end of the deadline
dewatering pipe(s) to assist the operator in locating these pipes in the future. Record
the dewatering pipe terminus locations on the Record-Set drawing.
1) Do not permanently affix the cap on top of the deadline dewatering pipe.
E. STEEL REINFORCEMENT & STRUCTURE THICKNESS
1. Unless otherwise drawn, the horizontal-located rebars must be positioned on chairs or
solid shotcrete blocks to confirm a minimum 3-inches [75 mm] concrete cover. The
vertically-located rebars must be accurately and securely positioned to ensure a critical
3-inches [75 mm] of concrete cover. When single mats of rebars are installed, they must
be placed to be in the center of the concrete placement with the minimum coverage
denoted in the Drawings.
2. Place and fabricate reinforcement in accordance with ACI 506.2 for shotcrete and ACI
318 for cast-in-place concrete.
a. Minimum lap splice / overlap of reinforcing bars must be 48 bar diameters unless
noted otherwise in the drawings.
b. Hooked rebar must be bent to provide:
1) 12 bar diameters straight extension for 90-degree hooks
2) 24 bar diameters straight extension for 45-degree hooks.
3. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, the following steel reinforcing and
concrete/shotcrete thickness schedule must apply:
4.
Location / Purpose Deformed Rebar Rebar Spacing Concrete /
Rebar Size Grade O.C.E.W. Shotcrete
ksi [MPa] Thickness
Pool Basin(s) #4 60 [420] 12-inches [305 mm] 8-inches [200
mm]
Pool Beams with < #2 60 [420] 6-inches [150 mm] Refer to
2.5-inches [62.5 Drawings
mm] of concrete
cover
Inside corners (re- #4 60 [420] 5 bars – place first bar
entrant angles) in 3-inches [75 mm]

basin requires clear from corner to

diagonal rebar the rest at 6-inches
placement [150 mm] O.C. and
each bar being 8 feet
[2.43 m] in length
Below-Grade Tanks #6 60 [420] 10-inches [250 mm] - 12-inches
and Vaults (Double top and bottom mats [305 mm]
Mat) of steel required in
floor & ceiling and
double mats in walls
(each mat being
located 3-inches [75
mm] clear from the
face of concrete
surfaces)
Pipe Penetrations #5 60 [420] When pipes or link 12-inches
Additional Rebars seals penetrate a [305 mm]
wall, ceiling, or floor
within a vault or tank,
place additional, extra
rebars in the
immediate vicinity as
indicated in the
Drawings and A.10 of
this specification
section
IWF Slab-on-grade #5 60 [420] 8-inches [200 mm] 8-inches [305
mm]
Housekeeping Pads #4 60 [420] 12-inches [305 mm] Refer to
Drawings
Below-Grade Mass #4 60 [420] 12-inches [305 mm] Refer to
Inertia Anchors in horizontal layers Drawings
not further than 12-
inch apart
Pool Basin Floors #5 60 [420] 10-inches [250 mm] – 12-inches
(when Pilings / top and bottom mats [305 mm]
Piers provide the of steel required
basin support)
5. In the event of questions, contact The Architect and This Engineer for clarification.
6. Place reinforcement in accordance with ACI 506.2.
7. If pilings are required, additional rebars (in varying grades & schedules) will be necessary
as noted in the Drawings. Piling / Pier contact with the basin floor will be via specially
ADE-designed piling caps as indicated in the Contract Documents.
8. Install special reinforcing as shown in the Drawings and as required by this Section.

9. Install the grounding and bonding system for the rebars as required by the NEC, the
Drawings, these technical specifications, and the Contract Documents.
10. Tie splices with 18-gauge annealed wire as specified in the referenced CRSI standard.
a. Tie wires must be “made tight” for electrical bonding purposes, as required by NEC,
Article 680.
b. Place steel tie wires tight at each rebar intersection and a minimum of 3 tie wires
tight at rebar overlaps (equally spaced)
11. When penetrations (piping or link-seal sleeves) penetrate walls, floors, and ceilings,
place additional, extra rebars in the immediate vicinity as indicated in the Drawings.
These additional rebars are to be placed as shown in the Drawings and as noted below
(in the event the Drawings and this specification conflict, the more stringent must
apply):
a. (2) #4 bars horizontal and vertical at penetration quadrants
b. (2) #4 bars in a diagonal placement (forming an “X” appearance)
c. Minimum length of these extra rebars must be 4 feet [1.22 m] + “X” (with “X” being
the penetration diameter)
d. A minimum of 3-inches [75 mm] of concrete cover is required
12. Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, sandblast the steel to a
white metal finish removing contaminants and rust.
13. Where corrosion has occurred due to the presence of chlorides, high-pressure wash
after mechanical cleaning. Prime steel with 2 coats of Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem as
directed by the manufacturer. (See Sika's Spec Component SC-201-0699);
www.usa.sika.com
F. CEMENTITIOUS CONCRETE & REPAIR MORTARS
1. Follow manufacturer instructions & recommendations without exception.
2. Specific installation care is required for (but not limited to):
a. Surface preparations
1) Remove all deteriorated concrete, dirt, oil, grease, and bond-inhibiting materials.
2) The perimeter of the repair must be neatly saw cut 1” deep around the perimeter
and then chipped until reaching good sound concrete with no feathering prior to
placing new concrete patch materials.
3) No cutting of the rebars is permissible.
4) Utilize high-pressure water blast or other appropriate means to obtain aggregate
surface.
5) Observe minimum and maximum thicknesses for concrete patch materials.
6) Saturate the surface with clean water & substrate must be saturated surface dry
(SSD) with no standing water during application.
b. Mixing of the products
c. Application & finish of the products including permissible temperatures during the
application process.
d. Curing of the products must be per the manufacturers’ requirements and
recommendations.
G. SEALANTS

1. Follow manufacturer instructions & recommendations without exception.

2. Specific installation care is required for (but not limited to):
a. Surface preparations
1) Observe minimum and maximum thicknesses as well as the ratio of the width of
sealant in a crack or joint vs. the depth of the sealant.
2) Ensure that the correct primer for the sealant is installed per the manufacturer’s’
requirements.
3) Observe manufacturers’ requirements for bond breaker tape or backer rod
b. Mixing of the products: Refer to the manufacturer’s cut sheets for direction.
c. Application & finish of the products
d. Curing of the products
H. UNDERWATER SEALANTS
1. General:
a. Follow manufacturer instructions & recommendations without exception.
b. Specific installation care is required for (but not limited to):
1) Surface preparations
a) Observe minimum and maximum thicknesses
2) Mixing of the products
3) Application & finish of the products
4) Curing of the products
2. Pre-manufactured Underwater Expansion Joint
a. The contractor must provide appropriately formed and prepared expansion joint
openings constructed to the exact dimensions and elevations shown on
manufacturer’s standard system drawings or as indicated on the contract drawings.
Deviations from these dimensions will not be allowed without the written consent of
The Architect and This Engineer.
b. The contractor must clean the joint opening of all contaminants immediately prior to
installation of the joint expansion system.
c. Repair spalled, irregular or unsound joint surfaces using manufacturers’ standards for
repair of the substrates in question.
d. Remove protruding roughness to ensure joint sides are smooth. Ensure that there is
sufficient depth to receive the full depth of the size of the Submerseal being
installed. Refer to Manufacturers Installation Guide for detailed systematic
instructions.
1) Exception: Without exception, this Engineer must have the last right of
acceptance or approval.
e. No drilling, or screwing, or fasteners of any type are permitted to anchor the sealant
system into the substrate.
f. A system to be installed by qualified installers only per detailed published installation
procedures and by job-specific installation instructions of manufacturer’s field
technician.
g. Clean and Protect

1) Protect the system and its components during construction. Subsequent damage
to the joint expansion system will be repaired at the contractor’s expense. After
work is complete, clean exposed surfaces with a suitable cleaner that will not
harm or attack the finish.
3. Experience and Qualifications:
a. An authorized Contractor or pool installer (with the on-site oversight of a
manufacturer’s representative) must provide Submerseal by Emseal [or Willseal] for
underwater expansion joints:
1) Submerseal by EMSEAL Joint Systems, LTD; 25 Bridle Lane; Westborough, MA
01581-2603; 800-526-8365. www.emseal.com.
2) Willseal 250BG by Willseal LLC, 34 Executive Drive, Hudson, NH 03051, 800-274-
2813, 800-416-0550 (Fax), www.willseal.com; email: custserv@willseal.com
b. Deck-O-Seal type underwater expansion joints require written certification of
qualification for the selected, manufacturer-certified installer.
1) Critical:
a) Deck-O-Seal type joints may only be utilized when installed by a
manufacturer’s Certified Joint Installer. This experience and certification
requirement is applicable to:
i: Horizontal underwater construction / expansion joints: “Dura-White”
Deck-O-Seal #125 by Deck-O-Seal Corporation, Hampshire, IL (800-542-
7665); www.deckoseal.com.
ii: Vertical underwater construction / expansion joints: “Dura-White” Deck-
O-Seal Gun Grade by Deck-O-Seal Corporation, Hampshire, IL (800-542-
7665); www.deckoseal.com.
I. LINK-SEALS, WATERSTOPS, & WATERPROOF PENETRATION EXECUTION
1. Waterstop installation
a. General
1) Follow manufacturer instructions & recommendations without exception.
2) Maintain continuity of water stops at intersections and transitions.
3) Vibratory consolidation of concrete / shotcrete around each water stop is
required without exception.
4) Lapping of water stop, use of adhesives, or solvents is disallowed.
5) Protect water stop from moisture, water, dirt, oil, and sunlight during the
progress of the Work
6) Prevent water migration by four primary measures:
a) Reinforced concrete in and around floor area near joint per the Drawings
b) Installation of the PVC water stop specified herein
c) Installation of Speed Dowels specified herein
d) Installation of a sealant system in the construction / expansion joint (noted
below)
2. Waterstop Fittings Sleeve and Fiberglass Waterstop couplings
a. Utilize the supplied hole attachment points to secure the water stop(s) in place and
main vertical / horizontal / perpendicular alignment planes

b. On the large pipe diameters (=>6-inches [150 mm], the fiberglass water stop
couplings must be covered with a minimum 5-inches [125 mm] concrete cover unless
approved explicitly by The Architect and This Engineer.
c. Additional sealing methods via the placement of non-shrink grout at the uppermost
concrete / pipe juncture are mandatory. Refer to the Drawings.
3. PVC Waterstop
a. Field butt splices must be heat fused welded using a Teflon covered, thermostatically
controlled, water stop splicing iron at approximately 380 Deg F.
b. Center waterstop in joint and secured in position using hog rings or grommets
spaced at 12-inches on center along the length of the water stop. Wire tie to
adjacent reinforcing steel.
c. Provide field-installed hog rings, or factory-installed punched holes or grommets
spaced at 12-inches on center along the length of water stop.
4. Hydrophilic Waterstop
a. Cut coil ends square (or at the proper angle for mitered corners) to fit splices
together without overlaps.
b. Seal splices using cyanoacrylate adhesive (super glue) and LEAKMASTER.
c. Seal exposed cells of HYDROTITE with LEAKMASTER.
5. Hydrophilic and PVC Intersections: Seal with LEAKMASTER.
6. Strip-Applied Waterstops
a. Apply primer/adhesive (matched to the specific water stop material) to dry concrete
surface, 2-inches [50 mm] full continuously along the joint, maintaining a minimum
of 2-inches [50 mm] clear concrete-cover to the finished face. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions & recommendations.
1) Primer adhesive must be allowed to “dry to the touch” (typically 30 minutes to
several hours; dependent on-site conditions) prior to application of water stop.
b. Continuously adhere water stop concrete utilizing primer adhesive and maintaining a
minimum of 2-inches [50 mm] clear concrete-cover to the finished face.
c. Apply waterstop the same day as primer adhesive.
d. Waterstop must be butt spliced pressing ends together ensuring no separation or air
pockets
e. Remove release paper from waterstop immediately prior to concrete placement.
Examine water stop for premature swelling, discontinuity, and debris contamination
prior to concrete pour. Replace unacceptable water stop.
7. Speed Dowel System
a. Attach bases to the face of concrete forms using a double-headed nail or self-tapping
screw.
b. Center of base must be centered on the forms (or positioned as directed by The
Architect and This Engineer).
c. Prior to placing concrete, Speed Dowel sleeve must be slipped over the base.
d. Provide a minimum 18-inches of concrete from Speed Dowel system and hand-work
concrete around the Speed Dowel System.
e. Remove concrete forms with bases still attached. Bases may be reused if they remain
in acceptable condition.

f. Install slip dowels to the 100% depth of the embedded Speed Dowel sleeve and
proceed with next concrete pour.
g. Field Quality Control:
1) Do not grease dowels.
2) Do not use bent or badly sheared slip dowels. Saw cutting is recommended.
3) Do not place concrete directly over the Speed Dowel or Speed Load Systems.
4) Place edge forms plumb. Out of plumb forms may result in misaligned dowels.
J. JOINTS
1. Refer to the TCNA (Tile Council of North America), ACI (American Concrete Institute),
applicable codes and standards, manufacturers, and the Contract Documents for
minimum standards for joint placement and separations.
2. Provide cut joints, expansion joints, and movement joints per the Contract Documents
and must include, but not be limited to the following locations:
a. Tiles & natural stone on beams, floors, and walls
b. Coping, natural stone fields, and interior finishes
3. Provide isolation joints as per the Documents without exception
4. Follow & observe the manufacturer’s recommendations & requirements without
exception.
a. Provide 2 rows of 1-inch x 1-inch [25 mm x 25 mm] of non-slip tiles (in white color)
on each side of the underwater, submerged, expansion joint materials (joint trench)
continuous on beam, floors, & walls.
b. Use of manufacturer-required primers are mandatory
5. Natural stone joints:
a. Test a small area with the joint sealant to ensure success (allow 24-hours) to observe
potential fluid migration and to verify results.
b. Finish joints with a “jointing tool” when complete for a professional finish. Proper
tooling of the sealant assures contact with the joint flanks.
6. Use closed cell backer rods or bond breaker tape to control the depth of joint sealants
or materials.
7. Observe all manufacturer-required curing times and temperature limitations when
installing jointing-materials.
K. BACKER RODS, BOND-BREAKER TAPE, & POLYPROP. EXPANSION BOARDS
1. Install in strict adherence to the manufacturers’ recommendations.
2. Install pre-approved polyethylene-based, closed cell backer rod or bond breaker tape in
joints subject to thermal movement to prevent three-sided bonding and to set the
depth of the sealant at a maximum of 1/2 inch, when measured at the center point of
the joint width.
a. The ratio of the joint width to sealant depth should not exceed 2:1 unless pre-
authorized by the sealant’s manufacturer.
3. Prior to the Contractor ordering, this Engineer must review & approve the closed cell
backer rod, bond breaker tape, or polypropylene expansion boards.
L. ADHESIVES & GROUTS

1. Install only epoxy type grout into finishes.

2. Observe the installation & recommendations by adhesive and grout manufacturers.
3. All surfaces must be clean, sound, free of oil, waxes, frost, curing agents, form release
agents or other bond inhibiting contaminants.
4. Prepare, and water blast surfaces
5. Follow ANSI specification A108.01-3.7 “Requirements for Movement Joints:
Preparations by Trades” or TCNA detail EJ-171 “Movement Joints – Vertical and
Horizontal.”
6. Exterior stone installations require the use of “LATASIL” at all joints.
M. CEMENTITIOUS WATERPROOFING & ADMIXES
1. Provide a water-tight, leak-proof structure.
2. Minimum waterproofing procedures:
a. Fill around each fitting and niche with a non-shrink, expansive grout.
b. Avoid honeycombing. Any honeycombing discovered must be chipped, cleaned, and
corrected as directed by The Architect and This Engineer.
c. Minor surface cracks or shrinkage cracks must be chip-expanded, cleaned, and filled
per the Drawing details and these specifications.
1) Fill with Sikadur Duoflex NS per manufacturer's instructions; www.usa.sika.com
3. Gunite ("shotcrete dry-mix") is disallowed.
4. Provide the shotcrete wet mix as specified herein. Note that underground vaults,
backwash-sumps, balance tanks, collector tanks, reservoir tanks, and surge tanks must
be poured-in-place, pre-cast cementitious structures (unless an alternate direction is
provided in the Drawings). Such installations must achieve a high-quality density,
consolidated structure via the use of vibratory tools.
5. Provide a thickened, reinforced basin shell behind underwater light niches and inset
steps placed in the basin wall.
a. Thicken the reinforced basin structural wall at each floor and wall sump, inset step,
and underwater light location area as indicated in the drawings.
6. Basins, vaults, tank, trench structures specified herein must include the waterproof
admixes specified herein.
a. Exception: For concrete-trenches & tanks only:
1) Apply Xypex Concentrate or BaseCrete on the interior surfaces of underground
reservoirs and tanks.
7. Cementitious Waterproofing System Coatings:
a. General:
1) A BaseCrete Representative must attend the initial application.
2) A minimum of 2 coats are required – refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
3) Conforming basin structures must require three coats of BaseCrete installed
without exception.
b. The surface must be clean and free from anything that would inhibit the bonding
capacity of the BaseCrete cementitious, flexible, waterproof bond coat.
c. Surface must be structurally sound and free of any bond breaking materials.

d. If the concrete was not placed using the specified crystalline admix within the
concrete mix design, then provide the initial Primary Pool Shell Waterproofing
(BaseCrete +) a penetrating, highly viscous concrete densifier as a required
prerequisite to the BaseCrete Bondcoat being applied.
1) Utilizing a low-pressure pump type sprayer, apply two coats in quick succession
removing the excess material immediately.
2) If the specified crystalline admix was placed into the concrete, basin(s) structure,
the application of the BaseCrete + is not necessary.
e. Cold joints, basin cracks, spalls, voids must be repaired prior to application.
1) Utilize the BaseCrete Mesh to build rounded coves in basin corners on all cold
joints.
2) Build up with the BaseCrete mix.
3) Utilize BaseCrete Mesh to fill in and bridge basin cracks.
f. Mix and prepare materials in completed compliance with the manufacturer’s
1) Do not add water to the mix. Use BaseCrete liquid to change the consistency of
the mix.
g. Do not apply to the frozen substrate or in conditions hotter than 105 deg. F [40.5
deg. C] or colder than 40 deg. F [4.4 deg. C].
h. Apply to a dampened SSD (Saturated Surface Dry) substrate by roller, brush, trowel,
or spray. It is preferred to apply the material and work sufficiently into the surface
filling pits holes and voids. Allow drying overnight.
i. Apply the second coat in the same manner as described above only perpendicular to
the first application.
1) A minimum thickness of 1/8” for each coat is required to create a waterproof
condition.
j. Allow curing overnight before further applications and seven days prior to water
testing on swimming pools.
1) Prior to proceeding, water testing is mandatory for fountains located on-
structure.
8. Concrete containing a Xypex Admix product may develop higher ultimate strengths than
plain concrete.
a. Application:
1) General:
a) Add Xypex Admix to the concrete mix at the time of batching.
b) Blend Xypex Admix throughout the concrete, care should be taken to verify
that a homogeneous mixture is obtained.
2) Concrete Batching & Mixing:
a) Coordinate mixing procedures with the batch plant.
b) Ready Mix Plant: Mix per manufacturer’s instructions.
c) Each delivery ticket must specify the amount / dosage of Xypex added

9. Pool / basin floors larger than 3,000 sf [278.7 sq. m], may use a concrete pump to
deliver the ready-mix materials to the applicators / installers. Walls and other vertical
placement of the pool structure must be via the described Shotcrete methods.
10. Wet-cure by placing the entire pool floor underwater within 24-hours of the concrete
placement or maintain it in a continually dampened status for a continuous 14 days.
a. Caution: If temperatures are less than 45° F [7.2° C] obtain prior approval from This
Engineer.
N. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1. Equipment must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions &
recommendations and the Contract Documents.
a. In the event of a conflict, notify The Architect and This Engineer in writing requesting
a written clarification.
2. Equipment must be new and in pristine condition.
O. EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE (XPS) INSULATION TYPE VI
1. Adhere to and observe the manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. For horizontal applications, always turn the print side down so the black print does not
show to the sun which may at times act as a solar collector, raising the temperature of
the foam under the print to an unacceptable level.
3. Provide a final finish covering or temporary white opaque covering to avoid possible
damage when dark (non-white) surfaces are used for insulation. Do not cover insulation
either stored (factory wrapped or unwrapped), or partially installed, with dark colored
(non-white), or transparent (non-opaque) coverings, or leave it exposed to the sun.
P. PIPING INSULATION & WATER-PROOFING VAPOR BARRIER INSTALLATION
1. General:
a. All below-grade, insulated piping systems must be a minimum of 18-inches below the
finish grade (measured to the top hemisphere of piping)
b. Below-grade piping insulation must be wrapped in a waterproof vapor barrier
jacketing.
3.02 SHOTCRETE WET-MIX EXECUTION
A. PREWORK VERIFICATIONS
1. The following applies to shotcrete and ready-mix concrete installations.
2. Before beginning any shotcrete wet-mix, confirm the Site meets the following:
a. Excavation has been performed as per the Contract Documents.
b. Excavation surfaces are clean, smooth, and without voids or irregularities.
c. Soil compaction / density tests have been completed and certified.
d. Sub-floor piping is in place (with constant pressure-test as noted herein)
e. Specified governmental piping inspections are successfully attained
f. Vapor barriers are in place.
g. Reinforcing steel has been installed per the Contract Documents.
1) Verify sufficient clearances exist to allow specified encasement.
2) Verify that reinforcing steel is adequately positioned and supported.

h. Adequate access to shotcrete wet-mix areas for screeding and finishing and to
permit uninterrupted application once the placement operation has begun.
i. Concrete forms have been installed and oiled per the Contract Documents.
j. Underwater expansion joints are located and formwork in place to receive the
underwater joints. Expansion joints are required for floors, walls, perimeter beam,
and coping.
k. Pool fittings (drains, inlets, skimmers, gutter fittings, etc.) have been placed per the
Drawings.
1) Note that drains, niches, & skimmers must be encased entirely with shotcrete
wet-mix during the shotcrete installation.
B. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOTCRETE WET-MIX
1. Do not begin shotcrete wet-mix application operations unless the following
environmental requirements are satisfied:
a. Affirm materials and surrounding air temperature are higher than 45° F [7° C] before,
during, and for 7-days after completion of shotcrete wet-mix operations.
b. As necessary, during freezing or near freezing weather, provide equipment and cover
to maintain a minimum of 45°F [7°C] and to protect work completed and work in
progress.
c. Any concrete damaged by freezing must be removed and replaced at no additional
cost to the Owner.
2. Suspend shotcrete wet-mix operations during high winds, rainy weather, or near
freezing temperatures when work cannot be protected.
3. Weather Conditions:
a. For flatwork being placed in either hot, dry, or windy condition, use of
monomolecular film (evaporation retardant) is recommended to control loss of bleed
water.
b. Cold-Weather Placement:
1) Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows.
a) Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could
be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
b) When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 Deg F [4
Deg C], uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a
concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 Deg F [10 Deg C] and not
more than 80 Deg F [27 Deg C] at point of placement.
i: Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not
place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
ii: Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
c. Hot-Weather Placement:
1) When hot weather conditions exist that would impair the quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified.

a) Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain the precise temperature at the

time of placement to below 95 Deg F [35 Deg C]. Mixing water may be chilled,
or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid
nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
b) Cover the reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so
that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature
immediately before embedding in concrete.
c) Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
d) Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.
C. PREPARATION
1. Remove obstructions and foreign debris from substrate surfaces.
2. Remove square external corners from the substrate by chamfering or applying a radius
to the edges.
3. Do not place shotcrete wet-mix or ready-mix concrete on surfaces that are frozen,
spongy, or where there is freely flowing or standing water.
4. Determine operating procedures for placement in close quarters, extended distances, or
around significant obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency may be
adjusted during application.
5. Clean and thoroughly wet cementitious or absorptive substrate surfaces before
receiving shotcrete wet-mix. Keep porous surfaces damp for a minimum of 2 hours prior
to placement of shotcrete wet-mix.
D. ALIGNMENT CONTROL
1. Provide alignment wire to establish thickness and plane of specified surfaces.
2. Install alignment wire at corners and offsets not set up by forms.
3. Tighten alignment wire sufficiently to prevent movement. Position adjustment devices
to permit additional tightening.
E. APPLICATION
1. Direct outlet nozzle perpendicular to the surface to confirm maximum compaction with
minimum rebound.
2. The build-up to a specified thickness in multiple passes of the nozzle to achieve layering.
Encase reinforcement with the first pass.
3. Basin structure(s) or sumps must be developed to a minimum shotcrete wet-mix
covering of 3-inches [75 mm] over steel reinforcing as specified on the Drawings.
4. Rebound is aggregate mixed with some cement, which ricochets off the surface during
the application of shotcrete because of collision with the hard surface, reinforcement,
or with the aggregate particles themselves, which amount varies with the position of the
work, air pressure, cement content, maximum size and grading of aggregate, amount of
reinforcing and thickness of layer.
a. Rebound materials may not be reused in any form of shotcrete work and must never
be worked into the construction by the nozzleman.

b. Remove rebound.
c. Discard salvaged rebound.
d. Remove trapped rebound at construction and expansion joints.
5. Allow each layer to take the initial set before applying succeeding layers.
6. Do not permit applied shotcrete wet-mix to sag, slough, or displace.
a. Collapsed, displaced, or fallen materials must be removed from the pool basin and
not reused.
7. After the initial set of the finished top layer, remove excess material outside of forms
and alignment lines.
8. Finish surface of the top layer with wood float finish.
F. CURING AND PROTECTION
1. The below-listed procedures are mandatory.
2. Dampened / wet: Total water spraying / immersion / moisture curing / thoroughly
dampened status is required.
a. Commence initial curing as soon as the free water has disappeared from the
concrete surface after placing and finishing.
1) Exception: Allow the initial 8-hours from placement for an initial set to occur.
b. Keep shotcrete wet-mix / cast-in-pace surfaces thoroughly dampened to assist in the
curing process).
1) Only frequent or intermittent wetting is unacceptable.
2) Sprayed-applied curing compounds are disallowed and must not be used.
3. Pre-approved curing methods:
a. Concrete wet-cure time of 14-days minimum at 45° F [7.2° C] minimum temperature.
b. Use continuous water fog spray or cover the concrete surface with absorptive cover
produced explicitly to wet cure concrete, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and
keep continuously wet.
1) Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with a
4-inches [100 mm] lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
c. The relatively constant temperature to be maintained for hydration of cement and
hardening of shotcrete wet-mix / cast-in-place concrete surfaces.
4. Protection:
a. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
b. In hot, dry, windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and
during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply per
manufacturer’s instructions after screeding and bull-floating, but before power
floating and troweling.
G. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Sound-test the applied material with a hammer for hollow-sounding and voids. Expose
hollow-sounding and voids then, at the Contractor’s expense, replace with new
shotcrete wet-mix ensuring 100% bond with contiguous work.

2. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Perform sampling and testing for field
quality control during the placement of concrete, as follows:
a. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C172, except modified for a slump to comply with
ASTM C94.
b. Slump: ASTM C143, one test for each load at the point of discharge, and one for each
set of compressive strength test specimens.
c. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when the air temperature is 40° F. and below
and when 80° F. and above; and each time a set of compressive test specimens is
made.
3. Test panels are required for Shotcrete Dry-Mix:
a. Prepare test panels (wire baskets) in accordance with ASTM C1140.
b. Perform tests on panels in accordance with ASTM C1140 and determine acceptability
in accordance with ACI 506.2.
d. The Contractor must pay for such additional testing as may be specified when
unacceptable concrete is encountered.
4. Provide inspection and testing for conformance to design mix.
5. Structural review and corrections required on the concrete basins prior to the
installation of the finishes.
a. It is anticipated that cracking may develop within the basins during construction. This
is not abnormal and is generally expected. The Contractor is responsible for the costs
related to the locating, correcting, repairing, and filling of each crack - fulfilled with
labor and materials - as needed to return the basins’ structures to a pristine,
waterproof condition.
b. Prior to the installation of the waterproofing and interior finish materials, the
Contractor must locate each crack and mark / record it in a scaled drawing / plan for
submittal to The Architect and This Engineer. Upon review of the recorded cracks,
The Architect and This Engineer must guide the contractor as to the recommended
treatment, remediation, and corrections / repairs needed to address the cracks.
c. The recommended repair of the cracks must involve at a minimum:
1) Chipping, trimming and cutting the crack to be approximately 0.5-inch [12 mm] in
width extending down into the concrete structure 0.5 inch maximum within the
cut.
2) The removal of concrete dust and debris (resulting from the cutting activities).
3) Utilizing the installation procedures from an authorized and recognized concrete
crack repair system, the Contractor must carefully re-fill the cracked area to be
flush with the adjacent surfaces in accordance with the manufacturers’
instructions & recommendations. The crack repair system must include primers,
filling materials, and crack-repair fabric as directed by the crack repair system's
manufacturer.
4) The Contractor must observe curing times as required by the selected
manufacturer and as directed and authorized by This Engineer.

d. The finishes’ installation installer (hired for and paid by the Contractor) must review
each crack repair and validate its condition prior to commencing with the installation
of the finishes for each basin.
e. Confirm, verify, and coordinate with the finishes installer that there are no conflicts
or physical incompatibility between the use of the specified waterproofing and the
finishes’ materials.
6. Protection of adjacent surfaces:
a. The contractor must take every possible precaution to protect adjacent concrete
surfaces, equipment, etc., from being damaged by overshooting concrete or
shotcrete wet-mix.
b. Overshot concrete and rebound materials deposited must be removed at the
Contractor's expense.
7. Mechanical injury free:
a. There must be no mechanical backfill procedures attempted until the 100% design
strength of the structure is achieved
3.03 CAST IN PLACE READY-MIX CONCRETE EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Refer to the SHOTCRETE WET MIX requirements above.
2. For pre-approved concrete curing methods, refer to CURING AND PROTECTION above.
B. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE READY-MIX TRANSPORT AND PLACEMENT
1. Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete," as specified.
2. Water may be added to the site ONLY if the ready-mix supplier has purposely withheld
water at the batching plant AND the amount of withheld water is clearly indicated on
the batch ticket.
a. If these two requirements are met, water may be added in the field up to the
amount that was withheld.
b. Record the amount of water added remotely (in the field) and who added it in the
testing report.
3. Place and thoroughly vibrate concrete to achieve consolidation leaving no voids or
honeycombing, taking care not to disturb or displace the water stop. Do not allow
vibrator to contact the water stop.
a. Apply approved vibrator at points spaced not farther apart than vibrator's effective
radius.
b. Apply close enough to forms to vibrate surface efficiently but not damage the form
surfaces.
c. Vibrate until concrete becomes uniformly plastic.
d. Vibrator must penetrate the freshly placed concrete and into the previous layer of
fresh concrete below.
4. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
a. Refer to 3.02 Environmental Requirements for Shotcrete Wet-Mix

b. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and
during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply per
manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power
c. Do not place concrete when the ambient temperature is below 45° F [7.2° C] and
falling without special, pre-approved protection.
d. Any concrete damaged by freezing must be removed and replaced at no additional
cost to the Owner.
3.04 SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX (GUNITE) EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. The use of Gunite (shotcrete dry-mix) is disallowed unless there is total compliance with
these requirements.
B. PREWORK VERIFICATIONS
1. The following applies to shotcrete dry-mix (Gunite) concrete installations.
2. Before beginning any shotcrete dry-mix, confirm the Site meets the following:
a. Excavation has been performed as per the Contract Documents.
b. Excavation surfaces are clean, smooth, and without voids or irregularities.
c. Soil compaction / density tests have been completed and certified.
d. Sub-floor piping is in place (with constant pressure-test as noted herein)
e. Specified governmental piping inspections are successfully attained
f. Vapor barriers are in place.
g. Reinforcing steel has been installed per the Contract Documents.
1) Verify sufficient clearances exist to allow specified encasement.
2) Verify that reinforcing steel is adequately positioned and supported.
h. Adequate access to shotcrete dry-mix areas for screeding and finishing and to permit
uninterrupted application once the placement operation has begun.
i. Concrete forms have been installed and oiled per the Contract Documents.
j. Provisions for underwater expansion joints for floors, walls, perimeter beam, and
coping are installed.
k. Pool fittings (drains, inlets, skimmers, gutter fittings, etc.) have been placed per the
Drawings.
1) Note that drains, niches, & skimmers must be encased entirely with shotcrete dry-
mix during the shotcrete installation.
C. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SHOTCRETE DRY-MIX
1. Do not begin shotcrete dry-mix application operations unless the following
environmental requirements are satisfied:
a. Affirm materials and surrounding air temperature are higher than 45° F [7° C] before,
during, and for 7 days after completion of shotcrete dry-mix operations.
b. As necessary, during freezing or near freezing weather, provide equipment and cover
to maintain a minimum of 45°F [7°C] and to protect work completed and work in
progress.

c. Any shotcrete dry-mix damaged by freezing must be removed and replaced at no

additional cost to the Owner.
2. Suspend shotcrete dry-mix operations during high winds, rainy weather, or near freezing
temperatures when work cannot be protected.
3. Weather Conditions:
a. For flatwork being placed in either hot, dry, or windy condition, use of
monomolecular film (evaporation retardant) is recommended to control loss of bleed
water.
b. Cold-Weather Placement:
1) Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows.
a) Protect shotcrete dry-mix work from physical damage or reduced strength that
could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
b) When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F [4° C],
uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete
mixture temperature of not less than 50° F [10° C] and not more than 80° F
[27° C] at point of placement.
i: Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not
place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen
materials.
ii: Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze
agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
c) Water curing is not permitted during freezing temperatures and temperatures
below 40°F [4° C].
c. Hot-Weather Placement:
1) When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of
concrete, place shotcrete dry-mix complying with ACI 305 and as specified.
a) Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain the concrete temperature at the
time of placement to below 95° F [35° C]. Mixing water may be chilled, or
chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent
of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to
cool concrete is Contractor's option.
b) Cover the reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so
that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature
immediately before embedding in concrete.
c) Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing shotcrete
dry-mix. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
d) Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,
low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to This
Engineer.
D. PREPARATION
1. Remove obstructions and foreign debris from substrate surfaces.
2. Remove square external corners from the substrate by chamfering or forming a radius in
the edges.

3. Do not place shotcrete dry-mix on surfaces that are frozen, spongy, or where there is
freely flowing or standing water.
4. Determine operating procedures for placement in close quarters, extended distances, or
around significant obstructions where placement velocities and mix consistency may be
adjusted during application.
5. Clean and thoroughly wet cementitious or absorptive substrate surfaces before
receiving shotcrete dry-mix. Keep porous surfaces damp for a minimum of 2-hours prior
to placement of shotcrete dry-mix.
E. ALIGNMENT CONTROL
1. Provide alignment wire to establish thickness and plane of specified surfaces.
2. Install alignment wire at corners and offsets not set up by forms.
3. Tighten alignment wire exact to the line. Position adjustment devices to permit
additional tightening.
F. APPLICATION
1. Direct outlet nozzle perpendicular to the surface to confirm maximum compaction with
minimum rebound.
2. The build-up to a specified thickness in multiple passes of the nozzle to achieve layering.
Encase reinforcement with the first pass.
3. Basin structure(s) or sumps must be developed to a minimum shotcrete dry-mix
covering of 3-inches [75 mm] over steel reinforcing as specified on the Drawings.
4. Rebound is aggregate mixed with some cement, which ricochets off the surface during
the application of shotcrete dry-mix because of collision with the hard surface,
reinforcement, or with the aggregate particles themselves, which amount varies with
the position of the work, air pressure, cement content, maximum size and grading of
aggregate, amount of reinforcing and thickness of layer.
a. Rebound materials may not be reused in any form for shotcrete dry-mix work and
must never be worked into the construction by the nozzleman.
b. Remove rebound that does not fall clear of work.
c. Discard salvaged rebound.
d. Remove trapped rebound at construction and expansion joints.
5. Allow each layer to take the initial set before applying succeeding layers.
6. Do not permit applied shotcrete dry-mix to sag, slough, or displace.
a. Collapsed, displaced, or fallen materials must be removed from the pool basin and
not reused.
7. After the initial set of the finished top layer, remove excess material outside of forms
and alignment lines.
8. Finish surface of the top layer with wood float finish.
G. CURING AND PROTECTION
1. The below-listed procedures are mandatory.
2. Dampened / wet: Total water spraying / immersion / moisture curing / thoroughly
dampened status is required.
a. Commence initial curing as soon as the free water has disappeared from the
concrete surface after placing and finishing.

b. Keep shotcrete dry-mix / cast-in-pace surfaces thoroughly dampened to assist in the

curing process).
1) Frequent or intermittent wetting is unacceptable. Wetting must be continuous.
2) Sprayed-applied curing compounds are disallowed and must not be used.
3. Pre-approved curing methods:
a. The concrete wet cure time of 7-days minimum at 45° F [7.2° C] minimum
temperature.
b. Use continuous water fog spray or cover shotcrete dry-mix surface with absorptive
cover produced explicitly to moist cure shotcrete dry-mix, thoroughly saturate cover
with water, and keep continuously wet.
1) Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of shotcrete dry-mix surfaces and
edges, with 4-inches [100 mm] of lapping over adjacent absorptive covers.
c. The relatively constant temperature to be maintained for hydration of cement and
hardening of shotcrete dry-mix surfaces.
4. Protection:
a. Protect freshly placed shotcrete dry-mix from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures.
b. In hot, dry, windy weather, protect shotcrete dry-mix from rapid moisture loss
before and during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply
per manufacturer’s instructions after screeding and bull-floating, but before power
c. See “ENVIRONMENTAL” section for additional protection requirements.
H. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Sound-test the applied material with a hammer for hollow-sounding and voids. Expose
hollow-sounding and voids then, at the Contractor’s expense, replace with new
shotcrete dry-mix ensuring 100% bond with contiguous work.
2. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Perform sampling and testing for field
quality control during the placement of shotcrete dry-mix, as follows:
a. Sampling shotcrete dry-mix: ASTM C172, except modified for a slump to comply with
ASTM C94.
b. Slump: ASTM C143, one test for each shotcrete dry-mix load at the point of
discharge, and one for each set of compressive strength test specimens.
c. Shotcrete dry-mix Temperature: Test hourly when the air temperature is 45° F. and
below and when 80° F. and above; and each time a set of compressive test
specimens is made.
3. Test panels are required for Shotcrete Dry-Mix:
a. Prepare test panels (wire baskets) in accordance with ASTM C1140.
b. Perform tests on panels in accordance with ASTM C1140 and determine acceptability
in accordance with ACI 506.2.

d. The Contractor must pay for such additional testing as may be specified when
unacceptable shotcrete dry-mix is encountered.
4. Provide inspection and testing for conformance to design mix.
5. Structural review and corrections required on the shotcrete dry-mix basins prior to the
installation of the finishes.
a. It is anticipated that cracking may develop within the basins during construction. This
is not abnormal and is generally expected. The Contractor is responsible for the costs
related to the locating, correcting, repairing, and filling of each crack - fulfilled with
labor and materials - as needed to return the basins’ structures to a pristine,
waterproof condition.
b. Prior to the installation of the waterproofing and interior finish materials, the
Contractor must locate each crack and mark / record it in a scaled drawing / plan for
submittal to The Architect and This Engineer. Upon review of the recorded cracks,
The Architect and This Engineer must guide the contractor as to the recommended
treatment, remediation, and corrections / repairs needed to address the cracks.
c. The recommended repair of the cracks must involve at a minimum:
1) Chipping, trimming and cutting the crack to be approximately 0.5-inch [12 mm] in
width extending down into the shotcrete dry-mix structure 0.5-inch [12 mm]
maximum within the cut.
2) The removal of shotcrete dry-mix dust and debris (resulting from the cutting
activities).
3) Utilizing the installation procedures from an authorized and recognized concrete
crack repair system, the Contractor must carefully re-fill the cracked area to be
flush with the adjacent surfaces in accordance with the manufacturers’
instructions & recommendations. The crack repair system must include primers,
filling materials, and crack-repair fabric as directed by the crack repair system's
manufacturer.
4) The Contractor must observe curing times as required by the selected
manufacturer and as directed and authorized by This Engineer.
d. The finishes’ installation installer (hired for and paid by the Contractor) must review
each crack repair and validate its condition prior to commencing with the installation
of the finishes for each basin.
e. Confirm, verify, and coordinate with the finishes installer that there are no conflicts
or physical incompatibility between the use of the specified waterproofing and the
finishes’ materials.
6. Protection of adjacent surfaces:
a. The contractor must take every possible precaution to protect adjacent shotcrete
dry-mix surfaces, equipment, etc., from being damaged by overshooting shotcrete
dry-mix.
b. Overshot shotcrete dry-mix and rebound materials deposited must be removed at
the Contractor's expense.
7. Mechanical injury free:
a. There must be no mechanical backfill procedures attempted until the 100% design
strength of the structure is achieved

3.05 NOT USED

3.06 PIPING & ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS EXECUTION
A. PIPING AND VALVING SYSTEMS
1. Install pool piping as shown in the Drawings per the size schedules in the Drawings.
2. Refer to “PIPING SUPPORT METHODS,” for general requirements for piping supports,
anchoring, and motion compensation.
3. Install Type 2 or Type 5 piping under and through the pool basin unless otherwise
specified.
4. The torque applied to the bolts per manufacturers’ standards and requirements. Install
accessories in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions & requirements, and
facility requirements.
5. Double-Walled Piping Containment Systems must be provided in accordance with
Spears® Double Containment Design & Installation Guide.
B. PIPING LAYOUT & EXECUTION
1. Examine piping layouts, locations, and dimensions shown in the Drawings. Verify piping
locations do not interfere with other equipment or construction before installation.
2. Piping must be installed as shown in Drawings and specified to make a comprehensive
system.
3. Pipes must be installed parallel or perpendicular to the walls or other exposed
construction unless a different layout is shown. Cut piping accurately from established
dimensions verified at the project site. Coordinate piping locations, routing, and
minimum clearances from other devices.
4. Install Clear Pipe, Sch. 80 (Type 7) in the following locations:
a. Flow meters’ piping placements:
1) Place a minimum 2-feet [600 mm] length at each flow meter.
2) Center the flow meter at the mid-point of the length of the transparent pipe.
3) Couplings / fittings connecting the specified pipe length must be Clear PVC, Sch
80.
4) Comply with flow meter manufacturers’ installation instructions for minimum
upstream and downstream straight-run conditions as well as all manufacturer's
a) Exception: Type 7 Clear Piping must not be placed outdoors or where it would
be exposed to UV rays.
b. Backwash / Waste:
1) Place a minimum 2-feet [600 mm] length on each backwash pipe.
2) Couplings / fittings connecting the specified pipe length must be Clear PVC, Sch 80
(Type 7).
a) Exception: Type 7 Clear Piping must not be placed outdoors or where it would
be exposed to UV rays.
C. PIPE SIZING
1. The pipe sizes indicated are required to meet the hydraulic requirements as set forth by
The Architect and This Engineer.

2. Do not deviate from the pipe sizes shown unless prior written approval is obtained from
This Engineer.
a. When size is not indicated, request judgment from This Engineer.
3. If interference with other equipment or the Architect requires relocation of pipes or a
layout different from that shown, notify This Engineer for further written instructions.
D. GENERAL EXECUTION
1. Preparation:
a. Before installation, examine piping and fittings for damage or defects. Discard
unacceptable units.
b. Clean pipe interior of debris, foreign matter, sand, and keep clean during installation.
The pipe must not be placed in standing water, or when the trench or weather
conditions are unsuitable for the work.
c. The trench must be excavated to allow 6-in [15 cm] minimum clearance in all
directions around the final O.D. of the system.
d. The bottom of the piping trenches must be graded to the design slope of the piping
and to provide uniform bearing along its entire length. Where wet or unstable soils
are encountered, such soil must be removed to a sufficient depth and the trench
backfilled with coarse sand or loose granular earth. This backfill must be compacted
to a density equal to that of the acceptable portions of the trench.
e. Where excavation of rock is required, the rock must be excavated to an over depth
of 6-in [15 cm] minimum below the specified trench depth. Over depths in rock must
be backfilled with loose granular earth or coarse sand and thoroughly tamped.
f. Keep water out of the trench until the pipe is installed and sealed. While work is in
progress, verify the open ends of the pipe and fittings are kept closed to prevent
trench water, earth, and other foreign matter from entering the piping system.
g. Caution: A fire or explosion may result if dry granular calcium hypochlorite is used to
disinfect plastic piping systems that are exposed to organic vapors found in solvent
cement, cleaners, or primers when a water solution is not used.
1) Calcium hypochlorite is a strong oxidizer and common in Pool & Spa chemicals
such as “pool shock.”
2) It is recommended to purify lines by pumping nonvolatile chlorinated water into
the piping system. Do not store or use dry granular calcium hypochlorite near
solvent cement, cleaners, or primers.
2. Installation Execution:
a. The following practices and quality control are required for the piping installation:
1) Comply with manufacturer’s requirements
2) Cut pipe “square.”
3) Remove pipe burrs (inside and out)
4) Clean pipe ends with a clean rag to remove dirt and moisture
5) Verify that a “dry-fit” is possible and manageable
6) Apply primer and cleaner per the manufacturer’s requirements
7) Flow solvent weld cement on each pipe and fitting with the appropriately sized
applicator
8) Work consistently when applying solvent weld cement

9) Do not “puddle” the cement within the fitting or allow the solvent weld cement to
“run-down” the interior of the pipe
a) Allow 10-seconds open time to lapse before inserting the pipe end into
fittings. Refer to the manufacturer’s requirements.
10) Assemble immediately by “bottoming” the pipe within the socket and twisting ¼
turn while solvent weld cement is still wet
11) Hold & secure the solvent weld cemented joint for a minimum of 60-seconds to
prevent “push out.”
12) The installer’s workforce must be increased for the installation of large pipe and
fittings using mechanical equipment as needed (follow the manufacturer’s
requirements).
13) Wipe off / remove excess solvent weld cement but do not disturb the joint for a
minimum of 10-minutes – no exceptions.
14) Comply with specified set times scheduled below
15) Place the piping within the trench to prevent damage
16) Snake the pipe within the trench (from side to side of the trench)
17) Shade the pipe with backfill; however, leave all joints 100% exposed until
successful water-pressure testing has been completed then verified by this
Engineer.
18) Curing period will be dependent upon:
a) Air temperature and humidity
b) Type of and size of pipe
c) Type of solvent cement
d) Dry joint tightness
19) Bring pipe to its scheduled operating temperature prior to backfilling and water-
pressure testing
20) PVC heat welding / bending is prohibited.
a) If custom angles on fittings are required, the Contractor must be responsible
for providing those as may be needed.
b. Initial Pipe Solvent Weld Cementing Set Times:
1) Comply with the following time periods after cementing pipe fittings.
a) Double times in damp or humid weather.
b) Field conditions may lengthen these initial set times.
c) For drying times at temperatures that differ from this, consult This Engineer:
PIPE SIZE AVERAGE INITIAL AVERAGE INITIAL

SETTING TIME SETTING TIME
Air Temperature: Air Temperature:

60° to 100° F [15° to 40° to 59° F [4° to 15°
37° C] C]
0.5 – 2-inches 5 minutes 10 minutes
[13 – 50 mm]

2.5 – 8-inches 30 minutes 2 hours

[63 – 200 mm]
10 – 14-inches 2 hours 8 hours

[255 – 355 mm]
16-inches [400 4 hours 16 hours

mm] & higher
c. Water-pressure testing:
1) Water-pressure testing requires that a minimum curing / drying time be
completed to allow the PVC solvent weld cement to cure and take a permanent
set. The following table sets forth the minimum drying period before the required
water-pressure tests.
a) This chart applies only to weather temperatures ranging from 40° F. to 100° F.
Double the noted times when in damp or humid weather. For drying times at
temperatures that differ from this, consult This Engineer:
PIPE SIZE AVERAGE AVERAGE

CURING TIME CURING TIME
Air Temperature: Air Temperature:
60° to 100° F [15° to 40° to 59° F [4° to 15°
37° C] C]
0.5 – 2-inches 12 hours 24 hours
[13 – 50 mm]
2.5 – 8-inches 24 hours 48 hours
[65 – 200 mm]
10 – 14-inches 48 hours 96 hours
[255 – 355 mm]
16-inches [400 72 hours 6 days

mm] & higher
d. Conduct hydrostatic water-pressure tests on the vacuum, gravity flow, pressure
piping, and underwater light conduits as specified in Field Quality Control.
1) Conduct water-pressure testing at:
a) For PVC materials (Type 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7) 60 PSI [413.7 kPa] or at 150% of the
maximum operating pressure (whichever is greater) with no loss of water.
b) Exception: Main drain assemblies and related gravity flow / open channel flow
piping systems must be water-pressure tested for a continuous 24 hours at a
minimum 10 PSI [68.9 kPa] water-pressure test with no loss of water.

i: All collector, reservoir, and surge tanks’ water-pressure testing assemblies

must be left in place allowing the water-pressure testing to be
continuously maintained until the decking is completed.
c) Caution: Pressure testing via the use of compressed air is prohibited.
e. Equipment room located pipe sizes of 3-inches [75 mm] and greater must have
flanged connections unless otherwise specified.
f. Pipe sizes less than 3-inches [75 mm] may have NPT threaded connections unless
flanged connections are necessary to adapt to other devices (valves, etc.).
E. PIPING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1. The piping diagrams, placements, and layouts are shown in the drawings must be
followed without exception unless written authorization from This Engineer.
a. Exception: Piping indicated to be shown in a diagrammatic view only. This allows
installation with discretion to meet the site conditions.
2. Place pool perimeter piping as close to the pool beam as possible.
3. Place piping below-grade as detailed in the Drawings and as noted below (refer
questions to This Engineer):
a. Backfill cover depth: Minimum 18-inches [455 mm]
1) Exception: Install Cold-Fog system stainless steel tubing, encased in Type 6
(Schedule 40, galvanized steel sleeve) piping and buried 24-inches [610 mm]
minimum below finish grade
b. Above-grade piping and piping within building structures must be rigidly supported
and suspended as detailed and specified herein.
c. Refer to the Drawings for established frost-line pipe depths required for cold
climates.
1) Only metallic pipes (Type 5 and Type 6 may be located above frost line elevations
2) The top hemisphere (uppermost) quadrant of non-metallic, petrochemical and
plastic piping must be a minimum of 6-inches [150 mm] below the established
frost line elevations
4. Piping located beneath and passing through the basin structures must be Type 2 or
better, and piping and fittings within the mechanical equipment space must be Type 2
or better.
5. Piping passing through more than one adjacent layer of concrete must be Type 5.
6. Piping in parallel or crossing must have 4-inches [100 mm] minimum clearances to other
piping.
7. Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, and Type 4 piping passing beneath buildings, footings, roadways,
and any piping subject to other structural load forces must be installed in metallic, steel,
HDPE, or Type 9 pipe sleeves rated at a minimum of 175 percent of the designed crush
loads. The sleeve must extend a minimum of 12-in [305 mm] beyond the limits of the
footer.
8. Climatic conditions must govern the designated pressure-rating capability of the piping
systems. Refer written inquiries to This Engineer for clarification.
9. Provide piping, fittings, reducers, braces, hangers, supports, isolation joints, and
expansion equipment specified for the complete, functional installation.

10. Excavation and backfill procedures must comply with:

a. State applicable trench and safety legislation
b. OSHA standards for trenches and excavation
11. Place piping on a compacted, engineered-soils base that has been verified and tested to
be a minimum of 95% of the optimum, modified Proctor test.
a. Exception: If the required backfill and compaction cannot be attained, then piping
must be strapped to the basin with the following maximum horizontal spacing:
Pipe Size [inch]: 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 6 8+
Max Spacing [feet]: 4 4 4 6 6 6 8 8
Pipe Size [mm]: 25 40 50 65 80 100 150 200+

Max Spacing [m]: 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.4
12. Backfill & compaction of soils above piping, and operation of heavy equipment near
piping:
a. Backfilling around piping systems must not be allowed until the required water-
pressure tests are successfully completed with no loss of water nor pressure.
1) Critical Note: The water-pressure tests must be left intact to all piping systems.
a) All water-pressure tests must be monitored continuously as a necessary
method to detect potential underground piping damage during construction.
b. Backfill materials: Utilize only engineered fill for piping trenches and excavations. No
organic material, clay, or topsoil is permitted or allowed within backfill materials.
c. Compaction must be verified and tested to be a minimum of 95% of the optimum,
modified Proctor test without exception.
d. Do not operate heavy machinery or equipment around or above below-grade piping.
1) The Contractor must monitor the continuous water-pressure test specifically
while heavy equipment is near any below-grade piping.
2) Piping damaged is the total responsibility of the Contractor, and immediate
repairs are mandatory including new, verified water-pressure testing.
13. Pipe slopes:
a. General:
1) At no point, must the piping change slopes allowing an air pocket, trap, or dip to
occur.
b. Piping must be placed on an appropriate grade around the basin, so it will drain
entirely by gravity. In instances where gravity drainage is not provided, the
Contractor must provide drain valves and sump assemblies so that piping can be
drained completely.
1) Provide specialized blow-out plugs, niches, drainable junction boxes, drainable
conduits, nozzles, and such drain pipes with valves into the gravity sump
(equipped with a sump pump for automatic draining).
c. Pipe Slopes’ Table:

Pipe Source / Destination Continuous, Remarks

Description Minimum Pipe
Slope (maybe
more)
Gutter Basin to Surge (or 2% Gravity / open
Collector) Tank channel flow
Basin Floor Basin to Surge (or 2% Gravity / open
Drain Collector) Tank channel flow
Therapy Air Air vent to therapy 2% Insect screen w/
Supply nozzles 65% open area
required
Static (for Basin to equipment 2% Per fill system
auto-fill area manufacturer’s
sensor) requirements
d. Remove air from the piping system especially when filling the piping for water-
pressure tests.
1) Remove air via valves; corporation stops at the high points of the line or other
means.
2) Caution: entrapped air may create unacceptable surge pressures (water hammer)
in the piping system causing a piping failure.
14. Only Type 5 piping may be installed into air plenums.
a. Ground and bond metallic piping at 20 feet [6.10 m] intervals on center. Utilize only
UL-listed ground lugs.
b. Insulate plenum-located metallic piping and related system components with closed-
cell pipe insulation.
15. Install a 1-inch [25 mm] Type 1 pipe or better, cold water supply pipe from the handicap
anchor deck box to the potable water supply at the equipment room.
16. Bolt flanges together in accordance with recognized standard practice.
17. Valve and check valve Installations
a. Locate check valves a minimum of 10 pipe diameters downstream of any pump or
another source of turbulence.
b. The maximum water velocity allowed through plastic-type valves (or check valves)
must be 5.0 fps [1.524 mps]. Valves located in locations or positions with water
velocities that exceed 5.0 fps [1.524 mps] must be metallic and manufacturer rated
for those flow velocities.
c. Check valves must be installed with the valves’ flow arrow pointing in the direction of
the water flow.
d. Check valves must not be placed in a downward water flow condition.
18. Pipe material transitions:
a. Material transitions must be above-grade, flange to flange connections and include
ribbed EPDM type rubber gaskets.
b. Dielectric unions must be used when joining dissimilar metallic pipe materials.
c. Install dielectric fittings at ferrous and non-ferrous metallic piping.

d. Below-grade materials transitions are prohibited.

19. Place pipe couplings, with the welded-water stop plate, into position before placing
concrete around such water stop couplings.
a. Install water stops, waterproofing, flashing flange, or sleeves as detailed, on each
floor or wall penetration.
b. Coordinate water stop couplings installed at the cast-in-place penetration of the pool
basin and each penetration of concrete equipment room walls and floors.
20. Closed-cell insulation on above-grade chilled water, heated water, and air-blower piping
and fittings.
a. Insulate valves and equipment components (pumps, filters, UV systems, injector
points, collector/ surge tanks, heat exchangers) with closed-cell insulation per the
insulation manufacturer's requirements.
21. Air-Blower & Regenerative Blower Piping: Provide closed–cell insulation on “equipment
room located” air-blower piping.
22. Do not install low-mounted suspended / hung piping less than 7 feet [2.13 m] above the
FFE, without This Engineer’s written approval.
23. Install Type 3 or Type 5 piping within 6 in [150 mm] of self-priming pumps.
24. Use only flanged joints, unions, or roll grooved couplings where disassembly is at
temperatures above 110°F.
a. Do not use PVC for threaded connections at temperatures above 110°F
Temperature De-Rating
(degrees F.) Factor
73 1.00
80 0.88
90 0.75
100 0.62
110 0.51
120 0.40
130 0.31
140 0.22
F. WELDED PIPE CONNECTIONS

1. Weld symbols shown must be interpreted in accordance with ANSI/AWS A2.4. When no
weld symbols are specified, welds must be of 100% depth and fulfilled with adequately
prepared pipe ends in the standard fashion.

2. Refer to the applicable Specifications for PVC pipe welding. At a minimum, perform PVC
pipe welding via hot-gas welding method using a 600° F [315° C] tip temperature
providing a temperature of approximately 500° F [260° C].
3. Weld Cold-Fog system stainless steel piping/tubing per manufacturer’s instructions &
recommendations, complying with the latest ASTM requirements for stainless steel
welding.
G. NON-WELDED PIPE CONNECTIONS
1. Equipment room–located pipe sizes 3-inches [75 mm] and greater must have flanged
connections unless otherwise specified.
a. PVC piping under basins and other concrete slabs may use solvent-welded
connections regardless of size unless otherwise indicated.
2. Pipe sizes less than 3-inches [75 mm] may have NPT threaded connections unless
flanged connections are necessary to adapt to other devices.
H. FLANGED PIPE JOINTS
1. Bolt flanges together in accordance with recognized standard practice.
2. Provide manufacturer’s authorized synthetic non-degradable gaskets at flange joints.
I. THREADED PIPE / FITTING JOINTS
1. When threaded pipe joints and fittings are used, fittings must be minimum Type 2.
2. Assemble threaded joints with Loctite “PST” pipe thread sealant per Loctite instructions.
No more than three pipe threads are to be exposed after the joint is made up tight.
3. Do not thread Sch 40 PVC pipe. Thread only PVC Sch 80 or heavier-wall piping.
a. Threading requires a 50 percent reduction in pressure rating stated for plain end
pipe @73°F.
4. Female plastic pipe threads must only accept plastic male fittings. In the case of male
pipe threads of a metal pipe, a metal female fitting must be used. Female metal pipe
threads may accept plastic or metal male pipe threads.
J. PIPING ISOLATION FROM CONCRETE FLOORS AND WALLS
1. Install vibration isolators on the suction and discharge piping systems at each pump.
2. Install required Link-Seals with the corresponding Century-Link sleeves at each pipe
penetrating equipment room walls, floors, and collector / surge tank concrete for a
waterproof seal. Refer to the Drawings for additional details.
3. When Link-Seals are described in detail in the drawings, there must be no substitutions
allowed.
K. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL & WATER-PRESSURE TESTING
1. Perform the following piping system hydrostatic water-pressure testing:
a. Provide necessary pumps, pressure plugs, caps, gauges, and other instruments and
devices necessary to perform the hydrostatic (water) pressure tests specified.
1) Maintain the continual water-pressure test on the piping system throughout the
backfill, compaction, deck placement, and during any construction activities
around the piping.

2) Comply with pipe / fitting manufacturers’ requirements when preparing for

water-pressure testing of a piping system.
a) Air must be removed from pipes & fittings prior to water testing.
b) Caution: Do not use compressed air pressure on PVC piping or fittings.
b. Hydrostatically water-test each total piping system to a minimum pressure of 150
percent of the system working pressure except as noted below.
1) Typically, water-pressure test all piping at 60 psi [413.7 kPa] with the following
exceptions.
a) Exception: Perimeter overflow (gutter) piping, drain outlet gravity piping, and
other gravity drain piping: 30 psi [206.8 kPa].
b) Underwater light conduits: Water-pressure tested to be leak-proof at 20 psi
[137.9 kPa].
i: Note: Light conduit water-pressure testing is mandatory since such
conduits are required to contain pool water in a leak-free condition.
2) The Contractor must provide certified, photo & written documentation upon the
completion of these water-pressure test.
a) The written certification must include words stating that “no water was
added” to the piping systems during these water-pressure tests.
c. Initial water-pressure test duration: Minimum 24 hours of constant water-pressure
without additional pumping or addition of water.
1) Prior to the water-pressure test being considered satisfactory, the water-pressure
testing must include a visual check of 100% of EACH joint by the Contractor and
The Architect and This Engineer to assist in verifying that there exists no water
leaks / water loss.
2) All piping must be maintained in a pressurized condition until all work near the
piping is completed. Once the decking is in place over, near, and around the
piping systems, a final verified observation of the intact water-pressure testing
must be confirmed and recorded, only then may the water-pressure testing may
be removed from the piping systems.
1 Only after the decking is placed must the water-pressure test assemblies be
withdrawn from the collector, reservoir, and surge tank.
2 At that time, the manufactured-provided valves and related equipment must
be installed inside each collector, reservoir, and surge tank.
d. The contractor must be responsible for discovering water leaks and making
necessary repairs. Water leaks must be repaired and repeatedly tested until leakage
or infiltration is corrected, resolved, and the approval by This Engineer.
e. The contractor is required to provide coordination and adequate protection as
needed for external services (i.e., ducts, pipes, cables) that run throughout the
project site. Plumbing must be located and placed to prevent damage during and
after the construction of traffic loads above.
f. The Contractor must ensure that there is a minimum of 7-feet of clearance height
between the room’s floor and overhead piping, valves, hangers, mounted
equipment, etcetera.
L. PIPING SUPPORT, EXPANSION, PROTECTION

1. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor,
supervision, and services to completely execute the pipe hanger, and supports as
described in this specification.
2. Provide bracing, fasteners, bracing, hangers, supports, and related hardware.
a. Piping and major components to be adequately supported to avoid placing excessive
strain on either piping, building structures, or major system components (piping
manifolds, pumps, and valves).
b. Piping must be adequately supported, isolated, and installed to allow for expansion,
vibration, and noise reduction.
c. Piping must be supported to prevent sagging. Without exception, the piping must
slope as noted herein.
3. No excessive movement by the piping is allowed.
4. After installation, metallic parts must be coated / painted with a primer and an exterior
metal coating
a. Provide means of preventing dissimilar metal contacts such as plastic-coated
hangers, copper-colored epoxy paint, or non-adhesive isolation tape- B-Line Iso-pipe.
5. The piping support details shown in the Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the
general arrangement and methods for providing proper support for piping systems.
6. Due to the small scale of these Drawings, it is not possible to show elbows, and flexible
connections specified to allow for expansion and pipe movement; however, the
Contractor must verify that adequate expansion and flex capability is achieved while
maintaining sufficient supports to avoid placing excessive strain on the piping, building
structures, or system components.
7. Install expansion joint assembly units on the suction and discharge of each pump rated
at 5 hp [3.72 kW] and larger
a. Refer to the Drawings for quantities and sizes
b. Install pipe supports and bracing for piping manifolds.
c. Install compression sleeves and extension rods
d. Pipes located within mechanical equipment spaces or within structures (with no soils
support) will require pipe-support units.
e. Comply with local codes and manufacturers’ requirements for maximum spacing of
hangers and support. Both the pipe manufacturer and the supporting manufacturer
are to be consulted for requirements.
f. Support vertical piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Support
vertical pipes on every floor. Wherever possible, locate riser clamps directly below
pipe couplings or shear lugs.
g. Individually support valves and heavy fittings to avoid stress on adjacent piping or
fittings.
h. Do not support any equipment from the adjacent piping systems.
i. Do not over tighten pipe in supports, preventing the anticipated movement. Install
clamps, supports, and straps that hold pipe away from the adjacent framing as part
of the base bid.
8. Concrete Inserts:
a. Provide inserts for placement in formwork before concrete is poured.

b. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of
reinforced concrete beams.
c. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, the contractor must provide inserts to
be flush with the slab surface.
d. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over
4-inches.
9. Drawings do not indicate exact-required support details; however, complete piping
support is a performance responsibility assigned to the Contractor. Piping and
equipment support must be provided as required by the forces and loads and as
determined and directed by This Engineer.
a. The Architect and This Engineer may recommend additional supports to be installed
once the equipment is placed into operation. Such additional strapping, supports and
other such bracing identified by the Engineer must be provided by the Contractor at
no additional costs to the owner.
b. It must be the Contractor’s responsibility to thoroughly support piping at valves,
pumps, equipment, over head-clearance areas, and changes in direction.
c. Pipe larger than 12-inches diameter requires floor supports using stainless steel (or
alternative approved materials) support bracing columns.
10. Install additional pipe supports and expansion compensation devices as This Engineer
may deem necessary.
M. HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORTS
1. Refer to the Drawings and these Specifications for the recommended method of support
for horizontally run piping when supported from wall-mounted hangers, floor supported
hangers, or ceiling mounted hangers.
2. Install wall mounted pipe supports at gutter piping around the pool to prevent sagging
or dropping of the piping. Refer to the applicable drawing details.
a. Exception: If the gutter piping is encapsulated within the structural beam, pipe
supports are not necessary.
N. VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS
1. Refer to Drawings for vertical pipe support details.
2. Supports for vertical pipe runs must be independent. Install a minimum of 2 supports at
each vertical pipe run. Install vertical pipe runs prior to connecting to the horizontal
runs.
O. FLOOR MOUNTED PIPE SUPPORTS
1. Refer to the Drawing details for the floor supports for horizontal pipe runs.
2. For floor construction, other than concrete, a base plate must be installed and fastened
to the floor with sufficient fasteners and spacing appropriate for the floor construction.
P. PIPE RUN ANCHORING FOR DYNAMIC LOADS
1. Install a minimum of one thrust block anchor on each equipment room or vault straight
run as close as possible to the downstream elbow. This is not necessary for buried PVC
pipe.
Q. NOISE REDUCTION

1. Special noise reduction procedures:

a. Isolate piping penetrations from the structure via the use of Link-Seal Penetrations
b. Clearances around each pipe at the concrete floor juncture.
1) Utilize a No-Leak Flange (Type 2 piping)
c. Install expansion joints / couplings before and after each pump greater than 5-hp or
as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Install neoprene equipment mounts (for pumps more massive than 5 hp [3.73 kW])
except when their use is contrary to the pump manufacturer's installation
requirements.
R. COMPRESSED AIR PIPING SYSTEMS
1. Install only welded metallic fittings and metallic flanged fittings designated explicitly for
operations with compressed air.
a. Caution: CPVC, PVC, and other Petrochemical type piping systems may not be used
for compressed air systems unless expressly authorized in writing by the specific
manufacturer.
2. Conduct a 24-hour air-pressure test on compressed air metallic piping systems at 150%
of the capacity of the receiver tank and that of the air compressor.
a. The air-pressure test must be applied to the CO2 systems
b. The air-pressure test must be applied to the fog/mist systems
c. The air-pressure test must be applied to the compressed air pipe systems
d. Maintain the air pressure testing until all surrounding work near the air pipes is
completed. Provide necessary safety covers/safety mesh to accommodate potential
explosion failure of air piping system.
3. During installation, maintain piping systems in clean conditions allowing no debris or
water to enter the piping. Install and maintain temporary piping plugs and threaded
caps at the end of each work session.
4. Install metallic piping systems in compliance with the air compressor and receiver tank
manufacturers’ requirements.
S. COMPRESSED AIR FLEXIBLE TUBING SYSTEMS
1. All tubing for compressed air must include the following documentation from the
manufacturer or distributor:
a. That the tubing is designed to handle compressed air
b. A minimum pressure rating based on 125% above the operating temperature. The
tube pressure rating must be more significant than what the compressor is rated to
deliver, and the rated-temperature must be in excess of 125% of the maximum
service temperature
c. If installed outdoors, that the tubing is UV-resistant
d. The type of connections (barbed, compression, or push-to-connect) which are best to
be used with that tube
2. All points of connection to the tubing must be of a type (barbed, compression, or push-
to-connect) that is approved by the manufacturer or distributor of the tubing.
3.07 FINISHES & COPING EXECUTION

A. GENERAL
1. Any mention of tiles must also refer to designated finishes, natural stone finishes,
plaster, eco-Finish tank liner, stainless-steel finishes, vinyl liners, screed, and similar
materials. Contact This Engineer for written clarifications as needed.
2. The inset step treads, ladder step treads, horizontal surfaces on open gutters & shallow
end steps, and floors (less than 5 feet [1.52 m] deep) on pools must have a slip-resistant
surface finish.
3. In all cases where two tiles are installed in a protruding, perpendicular condition
resulting in an approximate 90-deg (or similar corner) edges being evident, the installer
is required to provide at least one of those tiles having a bullnose trim.
4. The tile edges (using bullnose trim tiles) located at gutter lips and step edges are typical
details, examples, and are applicable and indicative of all similar tiled conditions.
5. Refer to the Landscape Architect’s and Architect’s Drawings for additional finish
selections, and requirements.
B. PREWORK VERIFICATIONS
1. Before commencing any basin interior finishes work, confirm the Site meets the
following:
a. Concrete work has been performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
b. Basic basin geometry and dimensions are achieved and allow the clearances required
for the interior finishes installation.
c. Shotcrete surfaces have been wood floated smooth and are ready to accept the
designated finishes.
d. Sounding tests have been completed and any discovered areas of non-binding or
voids.
e. Concrete has been cured and allowed to set.
f. Screed layers are in place, and expansion joints / cut joints of the structure remain
exposed.
g. Movement joints must be placed with consideration of the structural joints and to
guide the dimensional placement of the movement joints. Refer to the maximum
separation between movement joints below.
C. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS DURING FINISH INSTALL OPERATIONS
1. Do not commence basin interior or deck finish applications operations unless the
following environmental requirements are satisfied:
a. Affirm that materials and surrounding air temperature are higher than 45° F [7° C]
before, during, and for 7 days after completion of tile work operations.
1) Refer to the manufacturers’ requirements and installation procedures
b. If necessary, during freezing or near freezing weather, provide equipment and
environmental covers and heaters as needed to maintain a minimum of 45° F [7° C]
and to protect work completed and work in progress.
c. In the event of inclement weather (high winds, rainy weather, or near freezing
temperatures), This Engineer recommends that a suspension of the finishes’
installation work occur.
D. PREPARATION

1. General
a. Prepare tile work, grout, mortars, and plaster per these Specifications and
manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Any discrepancies between these Specifications and the Manufacturer’s Instructions
must be immediately brought to the attention of This Engineer for written
resolution.
c. Refer to these specifications for Field Quality Control requirements
d. Cut & trim plumbing pipes entering the basin(s) flush with walls and floor surfaces
(allowing for the thickness of the new finishes).
e. Remove internal blanking disk or pressure plugs after basin construction is complete,
but before interior finish work is installed.
1) Prior to the removal of the blanking disc or pressure plugs, verify that the
specified pressure test was in place per the requirements of these specifications.
f. Mechanically water-flush plumbing pipes entering the basin(s) with chlorinated
water before acid washing the pool(s). Remove chlorinated water prior to
proceeding.
g. Wash the entire interior of the basin with a 25 percent solution of muriatic acid and
75 percent water. Brush-apply to remove any foreign matter and debris.
Mechanically scrape the interior of the basin as needed or specified.
h. Repair “weeping” or lesion areas of the pool basin before applying interior surface
plaster or tiles.
i. Water “weepers” or voids around penetrations in the basins’ structure must be
sealed with authorized hydraulic, non-shrink cement at least 7-days prior to cleaning
and acid-washing the basin structure.
j. Prior to the application of the waterproofing & interior finish materials and after
minimum 28-day curing, dewater, clean, acid-wash, pH-neutralize, thoroughly water
rinse, and pressure washing of the entire basin structure’s interior surfaces in
accordance with the interior finish manufacturers' instructions.
1) Thoroughly pressure-wash the basin’s interior surfaces by utilizing a Turbo-Tip
nozzle powered with a minimum water spray of 3,500 psi [24.13 mPa].
2) Scrub basin surfaces with the neutralizing agent to verify acid residues are
removed.
2. Coping, Deck, Tile, & Natural Stone Finishes
a. Follow & observe tile manufacturer's instructions & recommendations, and
requirements.
b. Surfaces must be adequately prepared and suitable for installation per Tile Council of
North America (TCNA) guidelines. Substrate leveling should be completed before
installation of mosaic-type finishes. Do not attempt to re-level or plumb the vertical
surfaces during the mosaic-type finishes’ installation process.
c. If the basin’s interior surfaces are natural stone or tile, a minimum 2-inches [50 mm]
leveling layer is required over the structure (refer to the Drawings).
d. Movement joints for finishes:

1) Mandatory movement joints are required in horizontal and vertical planes for the
various installations of coping, natural stone, racing lanes, wall & gutter tiles, and
similar finishes.
a) Exterior stone installations must have LATASIL sealant (with its appropriate
primer) between each stone unit (in each joint)
b) Underwater tile contraction / expansion / movement-accommodation joints:
i: Required a minimum of 10 feet [3.04 m] on center except as noted below.
ii: Movement joints must extend through the screed / setting bed
iii: Place movement joints at structural contraction, control, and joint
expansion locations.
3. Exposed aggregate pool finish (quartz-type plaster)
a. Visually check the interior of the basin to determine smoothness and adequacy. If
any voids or irregularities are discovered or if any areas are found that will require
more than 0.375-inch [10 mm] of pool plaster, such areas must be filled with
multiple coats of BaseCrete, followed by treatment, acid washing, and neutralization
as specified by the manufacturer. Follow the BaseCrete manufacturer's requirements
for applied thickness.
1) Because concrete containing Xypex Admix forms a relatively smooth surface and
the resulting crystalline formation fills the concrete pores thereby reducing
suction characteristics of the concrete, it is mandatory to carefully pressure wash
and then use a suitable bonding agent for proper bonding of cementitious
systems.
a) The entire interior basin surface must be blasted with the pressure-washer
operating with a Turbo-Tip nozzle at 3,500 PSI [24.13 mPa].
b. Do not proceed to plaster installation operations until This Engineer has observed
the BaseCrete installation and verified specific dimensions.
1) The BaseCrete must act as a bonding agent, scratch coat, and waterproofing.
c. Apply two coats of BaseCrete flexible waterproof BondCoat system (or approved
authorized equivalent) to achieve a minimum 1/8-inch thickness prior to the
application of the interior finish plaster material.
d. The Basis of Design for quartz-type plaster: KrystalKrete exposed-aggregate quartz
pool finish by C.L. Industries, Orlando, FL.; www.clindustries.com
e. The Basis of Design for BondCoat: BaseCrete Flexible Waterproof BondCoat system
by BaseCrete Technologies, LLC, 6148 Clark Center Ave., Sarasota, Florida 34238;
941-312-5142; www.BaseCreteusa.com
4. Single Layer EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system
a. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that substrate conditions are suitable for
installation of the EVA-rubber copolymer wet area surfacing system.
b. Do not proceed with installation until unsuitable conditions are corrected.
c. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the Life Floor® surfacing system.
Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the poured system in
affected areas, and void the warranty.

d. Surface Preparation: Ensure that the concrete, metal, wood, tile, or fiberglass
substrate is level or uniformly sloped since surface variations will be telegraphed
through to the rubber tile surface.
e. Proper drainage is critical to the longevity of the Life Floor® surfacing system.
Inadequate drainage will cause premature breakdown of the system in affected
areas, and void the warranty.
E. APPLICATION
1. Do not apply interior finishes unless the pool fence and gate system are completed,
there is a supply of potable water for filling, and permanent electrical power is
connected to the filtration system.
2. The interior finish application workmanship must comply with the high-quality, excellent
workmanship as set forth in the Drawings and these Specifications.
3. Install work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Manufacturer’s
4. Any discrepancies between these Specifications and the Manufacturer’s instructions
must be immediately brought to the attention of The Architect and This Engineer.
5. Follow manufacturer-directed environmental limitations and curing periods when
applying the interior adhesive, finish, and setting materials (an example is air
temperature restrictions, rain, and curing times).
6. Tiles and natural stone:
a. Install only frost-proof tiles in locations in which freezing temperatures may occur.
b. Smooth exposed cut edges.
c. Observe and comply with the manufacturer-stated minimum and maximum
limitations concerning grout-joint sizes during the installation of finish materials.
1) The nominal center line of joints should be accurate, straight, and of even width
with due allowances for hand-molded or rustic tiles.
2) Finish floor and wall areas accurate, level, and plumb with no variations exceeding
¼-inch [6.3 mm] (a maximum of 1/8-inch [3.15 mm] lower to 1/8-inch [3.15 mm]
higher) in 10 feet from the required plane.
3) The grout joint must be three times the size of the tiles facial dimensional
irregularity. Contact This Engineer for further clarifications.
7. Exposed-aggregate quartz plaster finish:
a. Towel and finish with a smooth, dense, impervious, waterproof surface, free of stains
and uniform in color and consistency.
b. The basin’s interior surfaces must be plastered in one day. Employ necessary
workforce to accomplish this requirement.
1) Multiple rows of 2-inches x 2-inches [50 mm x 50 mm] non-slip, separation tiles
may be installed in the interior of the basin to be utilized as a joint for the plaster
application if the Installer believes that a one-day completion is impractical while
maintaining exceptionally high-quality installation practices.
c. The installer may install the joint separation tiles in the basin after prior written
notification, and submittal requirements are approved herein.
d. Basin floors and horizontal surfaces must have a slip-resistant finish and texture.
8. Single Layer EVA-rubber copolymer tile wet area surfacing system

a. Contact the manufacturer for all installation work. Only manufacturer’s certified
installers may install this material.
F. PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
1. Maintain and protect finished Work in a like new condition until the date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Do not permit applied work to damage adjacent surfaces.
3. AquaBRIGHT® pool finish must not be applied until all work in the pool area has
4. been completed, and the filtering system is completely installed, including all plumbing
and electrical
5. work, and is ready for water fill and start-up.
G. TILES / DEPTH MARKERS / COPING / FINISH REQUIREMENTS:
1. General:
a. Each horizontal depth, "NO DIVING," and “NO ENTRY” markers located on the deck
surface must be 6-inches X 6-inches [150 mm x 150 mm] (or as detailed on the
drawings) and be made of a slip-resistant material. Tile lettering must be a minimum
height of 4-inches [100mm] and be a contrasting color to the background.
b. Install a 2-inches [50 mm] full, dark contrasting, slip-resistant tile marking at the
following locations:
1) gutter lips at upper perimeter of the beam
2) gutter lips and along the horizontal and vertical edge surfaces of steps & riser
3) along the horizontal and vertical edge surfaces of underwater bench seats
4) at lap lane floor/wall tiles and targets
5) around the perimeter edge of each inset wall step
c. Refer to the finish detail and schedules for sizes and color.
d. Slip-resistant finishes are required at:
1) Coping surfaces
2) Horizontally placed finishes
a) Caution: Bullnose type tiles are prohibited unless specifically approved by The
Architect and This Engineer.
2. Depth Markings:
a. Place permanent tiled depth and “NO DIVING” markers in accordance with the
Drawings. Additional markers must be positioned to maintain a maximum of 25 feet
[7.6 m] spacing between tiled markers or as specified by the LGA codes. Horizontal
markers at the basin’s edge must be within 2 feet [610 mm] of water's edge.
b. Deck level perimeter overflow systems:
1) Additional Depth markers must be provided on adjacent fencing or walls, large
enough to be recognizable from inside the basin.
2) Horizontal depth markers on the deck must be within 3 feet [915 mm] of water's
edge.
3) Vertical depth markers may be at the top of the pool wall just beneath the water
level. Contact This Engineer for clarifications if needed.
c. Depth markings must be located to depict the basin’s water depth within 3-inches
[75 mm].

1) Measure the water depth at a location which is 3 feet [920 mm] horizontal from
the vertical wall depth marking.
d. The depth at the basin’s deepest point (drain assembly grate) must not deviate more
than 3-inches [75 mm] from the side wall depth markings at that location.
1) Symmetrical pool designs with the deepest-water depth located at the center
must have a dual marking indicating depth at the wall and at the deeper position,
followed by feet (FT), inches (INCH), or meters (M).
2) Metric Depth markings must have an accuracy of 2 decimal places to assist in this
requirement.
3) The only authorized abbreviations for "feet," and "meters" will be "FT," and "M"
respectively.
3. "NO ENTRY" markings:
a. Required at the perimeter of each water feature or fountain not intended or
approved for swimming or bathing, in accordance with the drawing details.
b. Required at locations around the pool perimeter where entrance into the basin
water is disallowed.
H. COPING
1. Coping Joints:
a. Coping edges must comply with the Local Building Codes and the following minimum
standards:
b. Jointed concrete coping must be "square-shaped"; however, no poured in place
concrete coping length must exceed 125% of the coping width.
1) Exception:
a) Pre-cast coping units are exempt from this requirement.
c. Provide expansion / movement joints (0.5-inch [13 mm] wide minimum – or as noted
explicitly in the Drawings) no more than 20 feet [6.09 m] OCEW. Do not span
expansion joints with reinforcing materials. This applies to coping installations.
Protruding and angular turns must have expansion joints.
1) Additional requirement:
a) When the coping is cast-in-place materials:
i: Locate cut joints (25% of the concrete thickness) no more than 5 feet [1.53
m] OCEW (execute the placement of cut joints within 1-hour after coping
placement).
ii: Install plastic tile separation strips between the poured-in-place cantilever
beam coping and the uppermost portions of the tiles.
2) Extend the expansion / movement joint through screed / setting materials
d. Isolation joints (0.5-inch [13 mm] wide minimum – or as noted explicitly in the
Drawings) must be installed between each basin beam (coping) and the adjacent
pool deck and paver units.
e. Expansion joints must be installed with approved primer and closed-cell backer rods
(or the specialized Emseal [or Willseal] Joint).
2. For re-entrant corners, provide:

a. 2 - #4 [13M], Grade 60 [420], 30-inches [760 mm] long rebars in the new decking
prior to placement
1) locate one rebar 2-inches [50 mm] from the re-entrant corner
2) Locate one rebar 5-inches [125 mm] from the re-entrant corner.
3) Provide a minimum 2-inches [50 mm] radius on all protruding coping edges.
b. 45-degree positioned rebars 2-inches [50 mm] deep within the concrete coping (as
the concrete is being placed).
c. A cut-joint between protruding, 90-deg (or higher) corners and the closest deck-
located expansion / cut joint.
I. GRATING
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Install grates after danger of damage from construction traffic is passed.
3. Attachment of the grate frame units must not have a solid-surface, constant-angle
(slotted openings are mandatory) SST to assist in allowing water to pass around and
through the grating.
4. A gap space target of 0.375-inches (unless disallowed by the Drawings) is required
between the outermost basin wall structure and the grate framing to assist in allowing
water to pass through and around the grating.
a. The Contractor must provide stainless steel spacers at the grating perimeter to assist
in ensuring a uniform installation spacing gap.
5. Grating frames and attachments must be sized to minimize water splash without
exception.
6. Pool-edge plastic type grating must be of the parallel type without exception.
7. The grates must be lockable and not removable by unauthorized persons.
8. Clean promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Do not use harsh cleaning materials like an acid wash that could damage products.
J. CONCRETE TOPPINGS, RESURFACING, AND REHABILITATION
1. Surface preparation
a. Follow manufacturer's instructions & recommendations, and requirements.
1) Areas to be repaired must be clean, sound, and free of contaminants.
2) Loose and deteriorated concrete must be removed by using mechanical means.
3) Mechanically prepare the concrete substrate to obtain a surface profile of +/-
1/16-inch (CSP 5 or higher as per ICRI Guidelines) with a newly exposed aggregate
surface.
4) Areas to be patched must be a minimum of 1/8-inch [3 mm] in depth.
b. Refer to these specifications for procedures specified if reinforcing steel with active
corrosion is encountered
2. Mixing and application
a. Placement Procedure:
1) At the time of implementation, the substrate should be saturated surface dry with
no standing water. Scrub mortar or concrete into substrate filling pores and voids.

2) While the scrub coat is still plastic, force material against the edge of repair,
working toward the center. If repair area is too large to fill, and while the scrub
coat is still wet use Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem in lieu of scrub coat (See Spec
Component SC-200); www.usa.sika.com.
3) After filling, consolidate, then screed. Allow mortar or concrete to set to the
desired stiffness, then finish with trowel, manual or power, for a smooth surface.
Utilize a soft-broom, burlap, or similar technique-drag to create a textured
surface.
4) Areas, where the depth of the repair is less than 1-inch [25 mm], must be repaired
with polymer-modified Portland cement mortar. In areas where the depth of the
repair is more significant than 1-inch [25 mm], the repair must be made with
polymer-modified Portland cement concrete.
a) Per ACI recommendations for Portland cement concrete, curing is required.
b) To prevent from freezing, cover with the insulating material.
c) Setting time is dependent on temperature and humidity.
3.08 BASIN & SITE EXECUTION
A. BASIN STRUCTURES:
1. For basin structures that are larger than or equivalent to 3,000 sf [278.7 sq. m], the
basin floor must be poured-in-place with shotcrete walls.
2. For basin structures placed as an integral unit (no joints), then verify that the wall / floor
radius complies with the radius transition table below:
Water Depth Radius transition to

(feet) [m] floor (inches) [m]
3 [0.91] 6 [0.15]
4 [1.22] 9 [0.23]
5 [1.52 12 [0.30]
6 [1.83] 18 [0.46]
8 [2.44] 24 [0.61]
3. Basin wall – vertical nature:
a. Basin wall must be within 5-degrees of vertical for at least 2.5 feet [760 mm]. The
radius joining this upper section of the floor must not exceed the following.
1) If the upper part of the wall is in a basin area that is greater than 5 feet [1.53 m]
deep, then the walls must be vertical within 5 degrees to the commencement of
the radius scheduled.
2) Maintain vertical wall angles (within 5-degrees vertical) for a minimum depth
equivalent to the basin depth minus 2 feet [610 mm] for the start of the radius to
the floor. Refer to the Drawings for additional dimensions.
4. Remedial procedures for concrete & structures:
a. System Description
1) Install reinforcing steel dowels, threaded anchor rods, and inserts into concrete
with injectable adhesive.
2) Use only injection tools and static mixing nozzles supplied by the manufacturer.

3) Install per manufacturer's instructions.

5. Install pool accessories and fittings in accordance with the component manufacturer’s
instructions, and with the Contract Documents.
6. Refer to the Landscape Architect's and the Architect’s drawings for additional:
a. shower details
b. deck finish & installation details and its drainage
c. planter details
7. Pool Basins Only:
a. Minimum vertical clearance above water and deck is 7 feet [2.14 m]
b. Protruding corners and edges
1) The inward and outward protruding coping edges, basin wall edges, corners, step
risers, benches or shelves, and ledges must have a minimum radius of 2-inches
[50 mm].
c. Wall / floor / step / bench requirements:
1) Except for "zero-depth" entry pools and sun shelves, the minimum pool water
depth is 3 feet [915 mm]. Unless otherwise noted, the minimum water depth for
the deep end of a pool must be 4 feet [1.22 m].
2) Pool corners angle: minimum 90-deg. angle.
3) Underwater bench or ledge dimensions:
a) Width: minimum 14-inches [355 mm] and maximum is 18-inches [455 mm]
b) Depth: 20-inches [500 mm] and maximum 22-inches [560 mm] below the
water line
4) Step edge / bench edge nosing tiles must consist of non-slip tiles that are a
Munsell color value from "zero" to "four," contrasting with the interior of the
pool (and gutter) surfaces. Refer to Drawings for the configurations.
5) Install step risers with uniform dimensions indicated on Drawings. A maximum of
0.25-inch [6.3 mm] (from the highest elevation to the lowest elevation)
construction deviation is allowed.
a) Exception: The Contractor must verify that the applicable Building Codes do
not require more stringent requirements.
6) Minimum step-tread width: 12-inches [305 mm] or as dimensioned on the
Drawings. Treads, horizontal surfaces, and nosing edgings must be slip-resistant.
d. Maximum basin water depth at which underwater benches or ledges may be located
is 4 feet -11-inches [1.5 m].
e. Standard basin operating water levels:
1) Skimmer basins: 4-inches [100 mm] below the top of the waterline wall tiles or at
the middle of the skimmer’s throat opening.
a) coping edge must be within 9-inches [230 mm] of the pool water line
2) Perimeter gutter basins: Level with the tiled gutter-lip edge.
a) Maximum gutter level deviation allowed is 0.25-inch [6 mm] (from highest
point to the lowest point).

f. Infinity edges, trims, and weirs: Contractor must provide in a “performance-based

means & methods” excellent water-appearance & water-level sensitivity, water-flow-
sensitive infinity edges, trims, and weirs. These surface-edges must be precisely level
to create and deliver consistent, smooth water appearances & water-flows with
minimal water-splash.
1) Caution: Critical Contractor-responsibility requires excellent supervision and
workmanship at all infinity-surface edges, infinity-trims, weir surfaces, drip-strips,
and related unit joints.
a) No irregularities are allowed at the weir, unit weir-spacing joints, or the grout
joints.
b) Corner joint-splices are critical on all such surfaces and frequently cause
unacceptable water flow creating water splashing at the basin or grate
surfaces due to dangerous or irregular joint geometry.
g. Basin floor slope change requirements:
1) Any transition in floor slope must occur at a minimum water depth of 5 feet [1.53
m]
2) Floor slope-transitions must have a black color, non-slip tile as noted:
a) Tile size: minimum 2-inches [50 mm] to maximum 6-inches [150 mm] wide
provided across the bottom and extend up both sides of the basin walls.
3) Provide a blue and white safety rope line mounted located as noted:
a) Rope diameter: 0.75-inch [20 mm]
b) Rope location: 2 feet [610 mm] before the slope change (toward the shallow
end)
c) Each safety rope line must have multiple floats located a maximum of 7 feet
[2.14 m] apart
4) The minimum floor slope: 1 foot [305 mm] of depth change for every 60 feet
[18.28 m] of horizontal distance.
5) The maximum floor slope: 1 foot [305 mm] of depth change for every 12 feet
[3.65 m] of horizontal distance for ADA compliance.
6) For a zero-entry pool to comply with the Americans Disabilities Act (ADA) current
edition or local/state accessibility codes
a) Floor slope: maximum 1 foot [305 mm] of depth change for every 12 feet [3.66
m] of horizontal distance.
b) Flat landing area: Incorporate minimum 5 feet long x 5 feet wide [1.53 m x
1.53 m] landing area.
i: Water depth for landing area: Minimum 24-inches [610 mm] and
maximum of 30-inches [760 mm]
ii: Floor slope continuation: Floor slope may then continue to the water
depths indicated in the drawings.
iii: Wading pool floor slopes must continue to the deepest-water portion of
the pool.
7) Deck / floor slope of a "wet deck" or "interactive water feature" must be 3
percent toward the drains unless This Engineer provides specific written approval.
All such wet-decks must have a slip-resistant, textured surface.

B. BASIN FLOOR DRAINS, RELIEFS, & SUMPS EXECUTION

1. General:
a. Protect the finish surfaces quality appearance of all equipment and components to
provide to the Owner in new & pristine condition.
2. VGB grates for sensors, static fitting, & equalizers:
a. Locate the wall static fittings, sensors, equalizer fittings at least 12-inches [305 mm]
below the water level.
1) Cover with a VGB compliant grated-fitting at the basin wall juncture (refer to the
Equipment Schedule).
3. Drains – Grates & Sumps
a. The basin drain system must be sized to allow 100% of the design flow through the
piping system.
b. The drain assemblies, quantities, and sump models / sizes specified herein must be
provided by the Contractor.
c. Each drain assembly grate must be securely fastened (per the manufacturers'
approved installation requirements).
d. Compliance with VGB is mandatory.
C. BASIN PERIMETER GUTTER, SKIMMERS, & INLETS EXECUTION
1. General:
a. Protect the finish surfaces quality appearance of all equipment and components to
provide to the Owner in new & pristine condition.
b. Gutter grates placed over a void or formed channel or pipe opening directly into the
beam structure are prohibited.
c. Gutter drain fittings must be positioned as indicated in these sheets, but must not
exceed a maximum of 10 feet [3.05 m] of separation.
1) Note that the number of gutter fittings specified will also impact the sizing of the
related gutter piping.
2) The back of the gutter drains must be located within a maximum 3/4-inch [20
mm] and a minimum 1/4-inch [6 mm] of from the tiled, back vertical wall of the
gutter, where the gutter is deepest and must be flush with the surrounding
surfaces or be recessed no more than 3/8-inch [9 mm].
d. Gutter and Rim-Flow systems must be sized to accommodate 100% of the
recirculation filtration flow.
e. Unless noted otherwise, locate a minimum of one air vent connected to the gutter
piping system. Refer to the drawings for the location and quantity of the specified air
vent(s).
2. Open Gutter:
a. Install to be a minimum of 12-inches [305 mm] wide (critical).
b. Slope down 2-inches [50 mm] (critical) from the lip of the gutter to the gutter drain
fitting elevations. Gutter slope must be reduced to only 1-inch [25 mm] in the areas
of shallow-end steps.

c. Bottom of the gutter must be level and finish flush with the gutter fittings. No "dips"
or irregular surfaces will be approved at the gutter fittings' junctures with the
interior finishes.
d. The gutter area nearest the top step locations must slope 1-inch [25 mm] from lip of
gutter to the back of the gutter trough and gutter drain fittings. The Contractor must
provide a 24-inches [610 mm] transition distance from this slope.
3. Recessed Gutter:
a. Minimum 4-inches (102 mm) deep and
b. 4-inches (102 mm) wide.
c. No part of the recessed gutter must be visible from a position directly above the
gutter sighting vertically down the edge of the deck or curb.
4. Deck-Level, Rim Flow:
a. Horizontal surfaces surrounding the grating must be slip-resistant / non-slip
b. The grating must be lockable in place and served by stainless steel hardware.
c. Colors Selected by Owner.
d. Fiberglass parallel trench grating: Prior to the placement of the structure, place the
trench within the concrete pool beam structure, connect gutter piping, and extend to
the collector / surge tank.
e. Rim-flow (deck level gutter systems) require that an overflow fitting (draining to
waste) be placed a minimum of every 30 feet [9.14 m] to assist in preventing
excessive water spillage to the deck.
1) Rim flow systems require a surge tank with excess capacity (refer to the Drawings)
to minimize the loss of displaced, surge water.
2) Overflow fitting(s) must be mounted must in the gutter at an elevation 0.50-inch
(12mm) above the operating water level.
a) Unless noted otherwise, extend the drain piping from each overflow fitting to
the authorized wastewater outfall.
3) Occurrences such as bather-induced splashing/waves, windy conditions, and
similar events will result in pool water spilling onto adjacent decks.
5. Skimmer installation requirements:
a. Refer to the Drawings for details
b. At least one skimmer unit must be provided for each 400 sq. feet [37 m2] of pool
surface area (or a significant fraction thereof) as specified by the drawings.
1) The design pattern for pools with skimmer must be 100% water flow through the
drain system, and 80% water flow through the skimmer system.
2) For each skimmer installed, provide one wall inlet on the opposing pool wall
(within a maximum of 20 feet [6.10 m] of the related skimmer unit).
c. Refer to the Drawings for construction details of the thickened pool beam specified
around each skimmer and concealed vacuum unit.
1) To further assist in leak prevention and longevity, the Contractor must provide a
steel rebar connection and total concrete encasement of each skimmer unit.
Refer to the Drawings.

2) The skimmer throat must be recessed 6-inches [150 mm] minimum from the
inside pool wall. The skimmer throat opening must be 18-inches [455 mm] wide
minimum at the pool wall. Refer to the Drawings
d. Provide tiles around each skimmer throat as noted
1) 3-inches [75 mm] minimum tiled around the skimmer face opening at the pool
wall juncture.
2) 100% tiles around and covering the entire skimmer throat.
6. Deck-level grating, waterproof channel trenches, & deck-boxes:
a. Refer to the Drawings and Equipment Schedule for geometric sizing, pipe
connections, water-proofing provisions, crack-resistant qualities, etc.
b. Concrete formed and poured trench channels are not acceptable due to the
propensity to crack and leak.
7. Indirect / concealed vacuum assemblies:
a. Refer to the Drawings for detailing.
b. Install a skimmer lid (or approved similar part) at the deck level opening.
c. Provide a 2-inches [50 mm] equalizer pipe from each concealed vacuum fitting
assembly to the basin wall and terminate the pipe with an equalizer / safety drain
cover.
1) Locate this equalizer at least 12-inches [305 mm] below the water level.
2) Provide a VGB compliant safety cover over each equalizer pipe outlet as noted in
the Equipment Schedule
d. In the event of multiple vacuum assemblies, obstruct the water flow to units not in
use via bulkhead fittings.
e. Provide a filtered, chemically-treated water piping connection (per the drawings) to
the concealed vacuum unit to assist in preventing stagnant water.
f. Piping connection towards the vacuum pump must originate within the concealed
vacuum assembly body. Direct connections between the vacuum pump and wall
inlets or fittings are disallowed.
8. Inlets / nozzles:
a. The inlet piping system must be looped to ensure continuous, closed water
recirculation ensuring that the inlets will demonstrate equal / similar water flow
operations.
b. When only wall inlets are specified, they must be spaced no more than 20 feet [6.10
m] apart (or as indicated in the drawings).
1) Exception:
a) Some manufacturers have developed specialty wall inlet fittings that distribute
filter water far out into the pool body. Those fittings are permissible with the
joint agreement of the local health department.
b) The water flow & performance for these specialty fittings will be determined
by the individual manufacturer(s).
c. Each wall inlet must be directionally adjustable and located 12-inches [305 mm] min
below the water level.

d. Each inlet / nozzle must be installed level and flush with the adjacent floor, wall, or
deck surfaces. No sharp edges or irregular surfaces are permitted.
e. Each floor inlet must be equipped with a method for flow adjustment.
f. Maximum water exit velocity for pool-related nozzles and inlets must not exceed 20
feet/s [6.096 m/s]
D. RAILS, LADDERS, ACCESSIBLE LIFT UNIT, & ANCHOR INSTALLATION
1. General:
a. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions & recommendations, and This
Engineer's Drawings strictly.
b. Stainless steel equipment must be installed no more than 30-days prior to filling the
c. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to protect the finishes and appearance of the
d. Each grab rail, handrail, ladder, lift unit (ALU), and rail (these items are hereafter
referred to as “rails”) must be new and pristine in appearance.
1) Rusty, damaged, stained, or discolored rails must not be accepted.
2) No rail installed in a distressed or "crooked" manner must be accepted.
3) The contractor must replace such rails as directed by The Architect and This
Engineer.
e. Install each rail or ladder in an exact vertical and horizontal (level) manner per the
requirements of the drawings.
f. Install rails with manufacturer’s compression anchor sockets.
g. Fill the first 12-inches [305 mm] of each rail with non-shrink grout. Secure deck
anchor with a concrete-anchor mass of 3,000 psi [210.9 kg/cm2] or as detailed on
Drawings.
h. Equipment must be installed secure, with no “play” or movement when shaken.
2. Handrails:
a. Handrails must be anchored on the deck and the lowest pool step. Handrails longer
than 9-feet [2.74 m] must have additional vertical rail supports.
3. Ladder:
a. Install the ladder between 3-inches [75 mm] and 6-inches [150 mm] of the pool wall.
b. Install multiple 6-inches X 6-inches [150 mm x 150 mm] white tiles at the juncture of
the basin wall and ladder bumpers.
c. Ladder treads must be non-slip.
4. Grab Rails & Inset Steps:
a. Construct inset-steps to be flush with the interior pool wall. No inset-step
protrusions into the basin areas are allowed
b. Inset step treads must be non-slip.
5. Rails – Other:
a. Install volleyball rails, sports’ rails, diving-related rails, and stanchions per the
Drawings’.
6. Accessible Lift Unit (ALU):

a. Provide sufficient deck-space for the ALU rotation as detailed on the Drawings and
from the ALU manufacturer.
b. Anchor rails and ALU equipment to the decking. Install with approved compression
anchors or sleeves as recommended by the rail / ALU manufacturer.
c. Install each ALU’s cold water supply pipe into a valve deck box equipped with a
lockable cover.
d. Extend ALU lift unit’s pipes to the mechanical pool room per the Drawings and
connect to the potable cold-water supply.
E. SAFETY EQUIPMENT, SIGNAGE, AND POSTS
1. Safety equipment:
a. Refer to the Drawings’ Equipment Schedule for Contractor-provided safety
equipment & signage.
b. Securely attach the safety throw rope to each life ring unit.
c. Attach life hook to the 16 feet [4.87 m] long pole with stainless steel hardware.
d. Mount safety equipment items onto a pressure-treated post or wall-mounted
hangers with stainless steel hardware as indicated in the Drawings.
e. Install a 2.5-inches [63 mm] diameter, with a UV-protective coating, Type 2 pipe for
safety pole mounting. Install with stainless steel brackets and hardware at locations
shown on Drawings.
f. Provide crushed stone 6-inches [150mm] deep at finish grade around each
equipment post.
1) Compact soils around and beneath posts to a 95 percent modified Proctor
standard.
2. Safety Signage
a. Install rules and regulations signage for bathers near poolside, visible from each pool
and pool deck area. Each safety sign must be illuminated with a minimum 3 foot-
candles of lighting levels. Refer to the Architect for illumination design.
b. The contractor is responsible for providing & installing safety signage without
exception and must ensure:
1) Governmental-required rules are incorporated into the signage.
3. Restroom directional signage
a. Install restroom directional sign at the location indicated on Drawings.
3.09 NOT USED
3.10 PUMPING SYSTEMS EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Comply with the manufacturer’s installation, commissioning, and start-up instructions
as well as those with the Drawings and these Specifications.
2. Install the specified hair/lint strainer upstream of each pump unless noted explicitly in
the Drawings.
a. Not required for vacuum D.E. filter pumps.
3. All hardware must be 316L.

4. Self-priming tubing: Install a 0.25-inch [6.4 mm] diameter stainless steel tubing from the
suction side of each pump to the water discharge side of each Marlow self-priming
pump with a check valve located immediately after the pump or to any self-priming
pump with a motor larger than 3 hp. [1.49 kW].
5. Install pumps to meet the following:
a. Mount perfectly level.
b. Provide for significant equipment, reinforced concrete housekeeping bases / pads
poured directly on structural floor slabs (or as required by equipment manufacturer)
6-inches thick minimum; unless noted otherwise on Drawings, extended 6-inches
beyond machinery bedplates.
c. Provide templates, anchor bolts, vibration isolators, and accessories required for
mounting and anchoring equipment.
d. Anchorage system must be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's
specifications and local code requirements. Consult with equipment manufacturer
for length and installation of anchor bolts.
1) Grout equipment into place in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements
unless required otherwise.
e. After the placement of a 90-deg. elbow or another directional change fitting, a
minimum of 5 pipe diameters of piping must be provided on the suction (upstream)
side of the pump unless an upstream strainer rated as a flow straightener is
provided. Refer to the Equipment Schedule on the Drawings for the specified
minimum requirements
f. The supply piping must be arranged / installed / mounted so that no air locks can
occur
g. Install eccentric reducers with the "flat" side up
h. Deviations to the above may void manufacturer's warranty.
6. Install rubber expansion joints on the upstream and downstream piping at each pump 5
hp or greater [3.73 kW].
a. Comply with manufacturers' requirements.
b. Align pumps with the attached piping prior to installing expansion joints.
7. A designated manufacturer’s representative must examine and validate the installation
of Marlow, Armstrong, and similar large pumps.
a. The certification must specifically address chemical feeder placement, proper pump
alignment, the anchored supply piping, pump / motor lubrication, piping on the
upstream side of the pump (with eccentric reducers), and VFD-rated electrical motor.
1) Contact This Engineer for clarifications if needed.
2) Refer to the Contractor's certification section herein.
B. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
1. Install piping and equipment within the equipment room as shown in the Drawings and
as specified herein. All equipment must be in new and pristine condition.
2. Position and install equipment per the Details indicated in the Drawings.
3. Equipment must be provided per Manufacturer’s instructions & recommendations as
well as the Contract Documents (to include the Drawings & Specifications).

4. Confirm dimensions, based on actual equipment dimensions, before the start of

installation.
5. Unless noted otherwise by the flow meter manufacturer, position the flow meter (and
sensor probes) to be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and as
indicated below:
a. Located in the upper quadrant of a horizontal-located pipe
b. Installed according to manufacturer standards for +/- 5% accuracy:
1) Installed with a minimum 5 pipe diameters of clear, straight-pipe distance on the
upstream side (no fittings, valves, or check valves must interfere with the
required, stated clearances).
2) Installed with a minimum of 2 pipe diameters of clear, straight-pipe distance on
the downstream side of the flow meter.
c. Installed with the Type 7 minimum piping.
d. Sized to accommodate 150% of the design flow rate.
6. Install NEMA 3R panel enclosures in equipment rooms unless otherwise noted in the
Drawings.
7. Do not add chemicals to the piping system or collector/ reservoir / surge tanks prior to
the pumps or filters (unless noted otherwise in the Drawings).
8. Label / I.D. equipment components as specified herein.
3.11 STRAINER ASSEMBLIES EXECUTION
A. CLEARANCES
1. Provide a minimum 2 pipe diameters of connected piping size within 3 feet [0.9 M] of
each strainer. Maintain this adjacent pipe clearance both upstream and downstream of
each strainer.
2. Demonstrate that a full rotation of the adjacent valves closest to the strainer is possible
and causes no hindrance to the routine disassembly of the strainer, cleaning of strainer
basket or screen, and the viewing of the interior portions of the strainer.
3.12 FILTER SYSTEMS EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Only a single pump must provide the specified filtration flow into a single filter system.
2. Install the filters in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation and operating
manual.
3. Filter air compressor piping must be stainless steel piping, tubing, & fittings and must be
securely affixed to adjacent surfaces.
a. Provide dielectric unions to prevent dissimilar metals from contact.
b. Secure the air compressor to Contractor-provided housekeeping pad
4. Ground / bond components & units including the brass / stainless piping for air
compressor
B. TYPE 7 CLEAR PIPE PLACEMENTS
1. Provide a minimum length of 2 feet [0.6 M} (or 3 pipe diameters – whichever is greater)
of clear Type 7 pipe on the downstream side of the filter in the following locations:

a. Filter pre-coat pipe

b. Filter waste pipe
c. Downstream of the flow meter (within 3 pipe diameters of the meter).
3.13 TANK & CABINET EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Unless noted otherwise, each tank must have signage indicating its contents and
purpose.
2. No field-performed penetrations are allowed.
3. Install tanks in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as well as the
Engineering Drawings to assist in preventing damaging hydrostatic uplift forces.
4. Locate and position all tanks strictly as indicated within the drawings unless This
Engineer expressly provides written authorization to relocate.
5. No heavy equipment must be operated near below-grade tanks.
6. Observe the manufacturer’s requirements during the installation.
7. All fiberglass floor surfaces must be installed to easily gravity-drain to a floor drain or
manufacturer-provided grate.
8. Any fiberglass-type damage must only be corrected/repaired by the Manufacturer of
the Tank/Cabinet assembly.
B. CHEMICAL STORAGE TANK EQUIPMENT
1. Installation
a. Place the MSDS and a content label on each chemical storage tank. Encase the label
within a waterproof, transparent container for protection.
b. Vent each chemical tank to the atmosphere in accordance with the manufacturer's
requirements. Extend ducting/vents to locations that will not expose chemical fumes
to persons, materials, and equipment. The vent pipe must be a minimum of 1-inch
larger in diameter than the most substantial pipe penetration.
c. Tanks may be placed inside specific chemical cabinets or inaccessible areas as
certified by the manufacturer.
d. Securely-anchor buried chemical tanks against hydrostatic uplift pressures.
e. CO2 low-pressure bulk tank and tank/fill/venting/monitoring accessories with related
stainless-steel hardware must be provided and coordinated by the Contractor.
2. Field Testing
a. After installation, the tank must be water tested. Fill the entire tank with water,
monitor the tank and fitting connections for a minimum of 72 hours with no loss of
water recorded.
1) Exception: CO2 low-pressure bulk tank must be filled and charged with CO2
a) CO2 fill is to be provided by the Contractor
b) CO2 tank must be given/provided to the Owner in a full, filled status when the
substantial completion is achieved.
b. Correct leaks and re-test as above.
c. Empty all tanks after successful field testing.
C. SURGE TANK INSTALLATION

1. General:
a. Pilings are required below each tank. Refer to the Drawings.
b. Observe all manufacturer’s installation instructions without exception.
c. Observe the directions of the Geotechnical Consultant. Refer to This Engineer’s
Drawings for additional requirements. In the event of a conflict between the
manufacturer’s instructions, the geotechnical consultant’s recommendations, and
This Engineer’s Drawings, issue a written inquiry for written clarifications prior to
proceeding.
d. A minimum of 12-inches [305 mm] of well-drained, gravelly backfill material (#57
crushed stone) must be installed around the entire perimeter of the tank. A
polypropylene geotextile filter fabric must be provided between the crushed stone
and the earthen backfill to assist in preventing soil infiltration into the crushed stone
materials.
1) Overlap the filter fabric a minimum of 24-inches [600 mm] and install in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
2) Provide 12-inches [305 mm] sod staples as needed (per the manufacturer’s
requirements) to assist in preventing movement of the fabric.
e. Provide sock-covered perforated PVC slotted drain pipes to aid in preventing the
accumulation of groundwater around the tank. Extend all drain pipes to the nearest
storm sewer structure (or another noted outfall per the Drawings) in coordination
with the project’s civil engineer. Slope all drain pipes at a consistent downward
slope at a minimum 1% toward the storm outfall.
f. Fill the tank 25% full of potable water prior to commencing backfill. Place the filter
fabric as a separation between the crushed stone and the backfill soils to match the
elevation of the water within the tank.
1) Hand compact (with hand compaction equipment) all soils to a 95% optimum
modified Proctor and secure written verification from the testing engineer. Refer
to the backfill and compaction requirements with These Specifications.
a) Caution: Mechanized backfill and large-equipment compaction are prohibited
near the tanks to prevent potential collapse damage/peril to the tank.
b) Caution: No heavy equipment must be operated within 4-ft [1.22 m] of the
perimeter limits of any tank.
2) Continue filling the tank with an additional 25% of potable water and continue to
match the backfill as noted above.
3) Continue until the tank is filled entirely with potable water and backfilled with the
crushed stone liner and the filter fabric separating the stone and soils.
g. Note that a reinforced, concrete ballast mass anchoring system is required on each
collector/ reservoir / surge tank. The reinforced tank foundation must extend 3-ft
[0.91 m] beyond the exterior vertical tank walls.
1) Refer any questions on collector/ reservoir / surge tank installation to This
Engineer prior to the start of construction.
2) The addition of chemicals blended into the collector/ reservoir / surge tanks is
disallowed.

h. Install overflow drains on each collector tank and discharge into an authorized outfall
(via a 4-inches [100 mm] minimum air gap) or other outfall location per the
Drawings. The contractor must observe local environmental code requirements for
water containing chlorine.
i. Install a lockable enclosure on tanks located outside of the equipment enclosure or
equipment mechanical space.
1) Caution: Collector tanks must have a secured non-metallic grate safety platform
installed (unless it is enclosed within a lockable cabinet).
j. No modifications or alterations to the tank and its piping systems or installation
directions must be made without the express written authorization from This
Engineer.
k. Observe all manufacturer's instructions for installing, backfilling & compacting
around and over the top, lifting, & setting pre-fabricated tank(s).
l. Noted forced air ventilation, area sump pumps, gravity-flow supply pipes, suction
piping, overflow drains, and the specified air-vent-to-atmosphere pipe must be
connected and operating per the Contract Documents prior to commencing with
backfill procedures.
m. Tanks must be vented to atmosphere without exception. If the air-venting is via an
air pipe, extend the uppermost portion of the pipe to be a minimum of 8-inches [200
mm] above the served basin's water level.
n. Prevention of external pressures on the tanks’ structure from vehicular traffic,
mechanical backfill, and compaction activities around tanks are the total
responsibility of the Contractor.
o. Connecting piping must be braced and supported prior to permanent connection to
the tank to not create external forces onto the tank.
p. For reservoir & surge tanks: Prior to the decking being placed, the Contractor must
verify that the piping systems are still holding a valid water-pressure test as noted
above. Only after the decking is placed may the Contractor remove the water-
pressure testing assembly per the tank manufacturer’s requirements.
q. Label / I.D. collector tank components as specified herein.
2. In-ground tanks:
a. Provide 1 cu yd. [0.8 m3] of ballast concrete (minimum) around the base of each
fiberglass surge tank and below-grade chemical tanks per every 200 gallons [0.8 m3]
capacity.
1) Incorporate a thickened, reinforced, ballast floor slab with sufficient anchoring to
the collector, below-grade chemical, reservoir, and surge tanks as needed to
offset hydrostatic uplift loads.
b. Concrete tanks are designed to anticipate a groundwater level as identified in the
Geotechnical Report for this project.
1) Critical Caution: Contractor must ensure that the site drainage is sufficiently
sloped away from the tank to prevent a flooding or a moat-like effect occurring
around the tank(s) which may increase hydrostatic uplift forces.

3. Install collector/ reservoir / surge tanks in the locations and positions shown on the
Drawings. Unless otherwise detailed, the tank elevation must be set to achieve a static
(non-operating) water level at a dimension of no less than 6-inches [150 mm]
(minimum) below the uppermost portion (referred to as the “Lip”) of the surge tank.
a. Collector tank: A tank that is open & vented to atmosphere and has a static water
level the same as the basin to which it is attached.
1) Install non-metallic grate covering or other lockable, vented enclosure / hatch on
each collector tank as scheduled.
2) Mount collector tanks a minimum 6-inches [150 mm] above the top of decking or
coping immediately adjacent to the pool.
b. Surge tank: A tank that has a maintained water level that is lower than the basin’s
static level to which it serves. The surge tank must be vented to atmosphere.
1) Supply piping to the surge tank must slope toward the tank as denoted in the
Drawings.
a) Absolute minimum pipe slope toward the tank must not be less than 2%;
however, a higher slope may be stated in the Drawings
2) Utilize open-channel flow calculations to determine the quantity and size of
sloped, supply pipes and their termination elevation being above the static water
level within the tank.
3) Surge tanks will have maintained lower water levels controlled by field installed
proportionally controlled electrically actuated butterfly valve(s).
a) Field adjust the proportional control Main Drain Modulating Valve control and
its related water level sensor with the 4-20 mA control board to achieve
proportional valve operation and surge tank operations.
b) The installer must provide complete testing and fully-documented integration
relating to the operation of the Main Drain Modulating Valve control to assist
in maintaining an acceptable water level in the surge tank.
4) Surge tanks located in below-grade equipment rooms must be equipped with a
Normally-Closed (N.C.) solenoid valve on each water supply pipe.
c. Reservoir tank: an in-ground type of tank containing a minimum quantity of water
that is filtered continuously and sanitized while being a source of water for a
grouping of nozzles.
1) Unless noted otherwise, the reservoir tank must have a minimum water capacity
exceeding 3x the total flow (filtration + feature).
4. Leak-test each tank (for documented waterproofing) as noted:
a. Concrete construction:
1) Utilize extreme caution to ensure that no exterior loads are placed upon the tank
prior to the reinforced concrete achieving full strength and a minimum of 28 days
after concrete placements.
2) Place the specified pipe Link-Seals (with Link-Seal Century Line sleeves) into the
formwork prior to placing the tanks’ reinforced structural concrete. Allow the
concrete tank to cure a minimum of 28 days.
3) Apply Xypex Concentrate to interior tank surfaces. Observe and follow
manufacturers’ instructions & recommendations.

4) After curing the applied waterproofing, demonstrate the adequacy of the

waterproofing by filling the tank with water and monitoring it for 72 hours with
no loss of water recorded.
a) If leaks are discovered, drain the tank, correct the leaks, re-fill, then re-test as
needed.
D. ABOVE-GRADE WATER TANKS
1. Installation
a. Tanks must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
b. No field penetrations are allowed.
2. Tank Inspection and Commissioning
a. Comply with AWWA D121-12 requirements.
b. Inform and train the operators of the routine maintenance procedures concerning
the tank.
3. Leakage Test
a. Comply with AWWA D121-12 requirements.
b. Once assembled, the tank should be slowly filled with water. Adjust and tighten
mechanical portions of the tank in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
c. If leaks are discovered, drain the tank, make corrections specified per the
manufacturer's instructions & recommendations, and retest.
3.14 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION – FLOW & PRESSURE EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Install gauges, sensors, & switches per manufacturer’s instructions to the drawings for
specified gauge, sensor, & switch types.
2. Install unions and flanges as detailed to facilitate removal.
B. GAUGES & SENSORS
1. Refer these specifications for the required identification tags for gauges.
2. Gauges, Meters, and Sensors:
a. Connect thermometer and flow meter electrical probes/terminals to the equipment
mechanical space / chemical controller control panel.
b. Install the electronic sensors, digital instrumentation, and gauge mounts as detailed
in the drawings.
C. INDUSTRIAL LIQUID FLOW SWITCH
1. Observe the minimum and maximum flows as determined by the manufacturer.
2. Observe the upstream and downstream minimum clear pipe space requirements as set
forth by the manufacturer
3. Coordinate with the electrical installer to verify that the switch has a minimum 2-minute
safety operating period prior to activating the flow switch.
3.15 CHEMICAL SYSTEMS EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Equipment must be installed per Manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Label / I.D. chemical components, tubing, and hoses as specified herein.

a. Provide a minimum of 2 labels on each length of chemical tubing. Labels must state
“CHLORINE,” “SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE,” “ACID,” “MURIATIC ACID,” or similar type
wording.
3. Coordinate additional chemical wiring and electrical work with Electrical Documents.
Interlock the power supply to any chemical feed equipment with the recirculation
pump. However, the power to the chemical controller or sensor should not be
interlocked this way.
4. Install and position chemical equipment, CO2 feeders, chemical controllers and sensing
devices including tubing, piping, and fittings in the pool equipment packages or rooms
as indicated by the manufacturer(s), as on the Drawings, and as specified herein.
a. In the event of a difference in the installation requirements from the specific
manufacturer and The Engineer, contact This Engineer for written clarification.
b. Provide with required GFCI receptacles, junction boxes, probes, sensors, saddle
connectors, electrical connectors and control relays, control logic, conduits / pipe
sleeves, conductors, check-valves, and rate-of-flow indicators.
5. Provide chemical solution crocks marked to indicate contents. Locate and arrange as
shown in Drawings
a. MSDS (within clear water-tight protector covers) must be affixed to each chemical
container / crock.
6. Provide chemical dilution and solution crocks with lids.
a. Do not puncture any chlorine / acid / or alkaline chemical crock lid.
7. Locate / position the chemical equipment that emits corrosive fumes into a separate,
designated room. Air from the chemical room must be mixed or blended with any other
room.
8. Provide the total ventilation / exhausting of air from within the chemical room to be a
minimum of a 20x/hour or as certified by the Project’s Prime MEP / HVAC consultant
9. No chemical feeders must “add / dump / mix” chemicals into a collector/ reservoir /
surge tank.
a. Chemical addition methods (upstream of the main equipment components) may void
manufacturer warranties on specific devices. tapping
b. Chemical injections are to be directly into pressure piping via the use of pipe saddles
that are located after (downstream) of the primary equipment locations. The water
flow must flow toward the basin or reservoir tank as indicated on the Drawings.
1) Note: Drilling and of chemical tubes directly to piping materials are disallowed.
Only chemical connections via pipe saddles are allowed.
2) The minimum separation distance between Chlorine and Acid injection fittings
must be 2-Ft [0.61 M].
10. Chemical hose/tubing installation minimum requirements:
a. Examine the hose/tubing for any noticeable damage. If the hose/tubing is damaged,
do not use it. Examples of damage may include slices of the cover, broken braid, and
crushing of the hose (can reduce life and pressure rating).

b. Accurately cut / trim the connecting hoses for each chemical feeder system so that
no confusion or incorrect hose attachment to improper chemical equipment would
occur in the future.
1) Critical: The use of Sulfuric Acid is prohibited
c. Encase tubing transporting chemicals in a UV resistant, flexible chase or Type 1
piping with 90-degree sweeps. Tubing must be TYGON Chemical to accommodate 45
psi [3.1 bar] and vacuum rated to 29.9-inches [759 mm] of mercury; all @ 73-deg F.
[22.7-deg C].
d. Do not position hose/tubing over another container (having a different chemical
stored).
e. Do not allow severe bends nor twist (torque) assembly along centerline during
installation.
f. The minimum separation distance between Chlorine and Acid injection fittings must
be 2-Ft [0.61 M].
g. The piping conduits/sleeves shall be secured via wall-mounted supports, ceiling-
mounted hangers, or floor-mounted supports in a workmanlike manner acceptable
to the judgment of This Engineer.
h. The spacing for the supports shall be sufficient to prevent drooping, movement, &
vibration while not exceeding the maximum separation distance as noted for water
pipes in these Specifications.
B. SALINE CHLORINATION SYSTEMS
1. General:
a. Install the automated saline electronic monitor, controller, and related components
per the manufacturer’s instructions.
1) Include all by-pass and isolation valving in accordance with the Drawings.
2) Pre-mount system on an aluminum backboard.
b. All electronic connections to the generator and its control equipment must be
electrically-interlocked with the filter pump’s operation.
1) Manufacturer-supplied components must be wall mounted, connected using the
supplied power cables, supplied individually, and require field assembly.
2) Refer to the Manufacturer’s instructions, installation recommendations, and
operator-use documents.
3) The system must be bonded / earthed via the bonding lug to the local shared
bonding grid.
2. Piping requirements
1) Chlorine generator equipment is not suitable for subsequent water-pressure
testing and must be valved to be off-line during subsequent water-pressure
testing.
3. CHLOR SM specifics:
a. The basin and related piping must be certified to be leak free prior to installing a
saline chlorination system.
1) The certification is mandatory for basins that contain an elevated saline content
necessary for the operation of the saline generator.

4. NEX-GEN specifics:
a. The NEX-GEN plumbing of the production tank and accessories must be done at the
time of the installation.
b. Pre-wire system, ready for field connection of power inter-connected to the pool
pump and control circuits. Plumbing of the cell must be done at the time of
installation.
c. When using the ChlorKing® NEX-GEN, the basin salt-content may be zero (no saline
required within the basins’ water).
5. Chemical supply: The contractor must provide the bulk salt to fill the salt tank for the
commissioning and initial service period. Upon substantial completion, the contractor
must refill the salt tank to capacity.
3.16 NOT USED
3.17 ELECTRICAL POWER & ELECTRICAL CONTROLS EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
2. Coordinate with Division 26 Electrical
3. Maintain a 48-inches [1.22 m] minimum, unobstructed clearance in front of each panel,
motor starter, control panel, underwater lighting, automation panel, VFD, power supply,
transformers, and other NEC & IEC required disconnects and switch boxes.
4. Underwater lighting conduits are a familiar source of water leaks in a pool. The conduits
serving underwater lights are designed to fill with chlorinated pool water, but water
should not leak from them to the surrounding area or structure. After an initial fill of the
pool, but prior to startup of equipment, visually inspect exposed conduits, including
fittings, serving underwater lights for potential water leaks. Repair as needed, then re-
test.
B. COMPLETE BUILD SCENARIO
2. Install the panels, control systems, control panel systems, lighting control systems,
power wiring, circuit breakers, disconnects, rigid & flexible conduits, and control wiring
features necessary for the operation of equipment specified in the drawings as a
complete build scenario. Consult all manufacturer’s installation guides and refer to the
Specialty Designated Electrical Engineer for inquiries.
3. Install electrical/control wiring, & control panels, including components, connectors,
equipment, and materials for entirely operational systems in full coordination with the
selected fountain/water feature/timing controls’ manufacturers and distributors to
ensure complete compatibility with the logic and peculiarities for such components,
connectors, electrical interlocks, automated operations, and suitable programmability.
a. The electrical interlock must be provided to deactivate chemical feed systems when
there is no water flow in the recirculation system.
b. Provide Solid State Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Interrupting Relays for each basin-
located submersible pump assembly.
1) Mount each Industrial GFCI unit within the Control Panel System.

4. Install grounding and bonding for each metallic component as required by the NEC with
products and materials certified for such purpose and in accordance with the
requirements of the manufacturer(s). The successful operations of the grounding,
earthing, & bonding systems must be the responsibility of the Contractor as a Complete
Build Scenario.
C. BONDING, EARTHING, AND GROUNDING INSTALLATION
2. Install the bonding, earthing, and grounding of electrical components located within the
basins before any concrete work. Include equipotential bonding per the requirements of
NEC 680.26 to provide compliance and these requirements.
3. Electrically bond, earth, and ground each metallic device within and around the exterior
of the pool basin’s perimeter with a #8 solid, bare copper ground wire in accordance
with the NEC requirements and local codes).
a. Exception: Grounding/bond/earthing conductors that are immersed in water must
be coated/insulated (with an insulation-listed immersion rating as water-proof) while
all exposed copper & grounding lug attachments must have the specified UL Listed
potting compound installed.
b. Exception: If the body of water is not intended for use by people, the bonding wire
size may be reduced according to Table 250.122 appearing in the NEC.
4. Apply the UL Listed potting kit at each grounding lug, connections to the primary
grounding electrode system, equipment attachment, and rebar juncture. Each ground
wires' connections must be UL listed -type or exothermic weld in compliance with NEC.
a. The material Potting Compound must be packaged in the two-part plastic composite
closed mixing pouch. The resin must be mixed within the closed mixing pouch by
merely separating the barrier between the two parts of the bag and working the
contents back and forth within the bag.
b. Exceptional workmanship is required to prevent the spilling of the potting materials
onto adjacent surfaces. If potting materials are spilled, the Contractor must
thoroughly remove it and correct all contamination/damage.
c. Exception: Grounding/bond/earthing conductors that are immersed in water must
be coated/insulated (with an insulation-listed immersion rating as water-proof) while
all exposed copper must have the specified UL Listed potting compound installed.
5. Secure required conductor under the perimeter surface 4 to 6-inches [100 mm to 150
mm] below the subgrade.
a. At least one minimum 8 AWG bare solid copper conductor must be installed.
6. Grounding Loop: Install one #8 solid, bare copper ground wire continuously around the
exterior of the pool basin and associated structures between 18 – 24-inches [455 – 610
mm] beyond the perimeter of the pool and building slab edge, buried 4 – 6-inches [100
– 150 mm] below grade. Include bonding, earthing, and grounding connectors with the
central grid, and verify total continuity.
a. The conductors and ground loop (on the exterior of the basin) must follow the
contour of the pool basin’s perimeter surface and the contour of the building (or
slab-on-grade).

7. Attach bonding/earthing/grounding connections to pool's structural reinforcing steel to

a minimum of four (4) points uniformly spaced around the exterior perimeter of the
pool basin.
a. For stainless steel basins, install grounding / bonding connection/jumpers every 6.5
feet [1.98 m] around the basin’s exterior perimeter without exception.
8. Install grounding/earthing/bonding jumpers (or lugs) to rebar and to lights, hydrants,
deck anchors, handrails, ladders, ADA lift units, nozzles, competitive equipment, sports,
and other similar metallic components within the basins. Extend the
ground/earthing/bonding loop connection to the adjacent building's central grounding
electrode system.
9. Install grounding/earthing/bonding jumpers (or lugs) to rebars for adjacent deck
showers, deck receptacles, and other metallic equipment within 15 feet [4.57 m] of the
pool’s water edge.
10. Extend the ground/earthing/bonding loop connection to the pump, filter, metallic
components / piping within the mechanical room, heater, shower, and chemical
equipment at each basin. Verify grounding/earthing/bonding wire conductors are
securely fastened to the adjacent piping, structure, and equipment.
11. For pools with non-conductive reinforcing steel, refer to the ADE Drawings for additional
requirements.
12. Once all basin-perimeter metallic equipment is installed, the installer must perform
bonding/earthing/grounding continuity tests/verifications via the use of audible
sounding / bell ringing devices, or other pre-approved equipment.
a. Achieve a satisfactory “sounding” continuity verification between each metallic
equipment item at the basin’s deck edge perimeter
b. Achieve a successful “audible-sounding” continuity verification between each
metallic equipment (at the basin’s deck edge perimeter) and the metallic equipment
located in the mechanical room.
c. Once all the “sounding” is completed and successful, an observation from This
Engineer is required.
d. The Contractor must pay for the manufacturers’ representatives to observe and
certify the proper installation of the underwater lights, splicing connectors, push-
connectors, the junction boxes, the potting kits, all in accordance with the
manufacturers’ requirements and recommendations without exception. Provide all
written certifications to This Engineer.
1) Each manufacturer must provide a written certification confirming the successful
installation procedures were achieved without exception.
D. ELECTRICAL EXECUTION/INSTALLATION
2. Install main power supply to each load center. Supply 120 vac power to the underwater
LED light low-voltage power supplies / transformers (located around the decking
surrounding its perimeter). Confirm the available voltage and electrical supply with
electrical engineer prior to connecting equipment.

3. Install the control panel and lighting panel systems (with related componentry) in
accordance with the NEC. Refer to the Specialty Designated Electrical Engineer for
Drawings, schedules, and inquiries.
a. Control panel must include all necessary controls including the Industrial GFCI for
each basin-located submersible pump assembly.
b. Each control panel and lighting panel must be installed so that the bottom of the
enclosure is a minimum of 8” above the highest possible water level within the water
basin is serves.
c. No conduits from the basin must enter the enclosure except through the enclosure’s
bottom-most portions.
d. Provide UL-Listed sealants at each conduit/enclosure juncture to prevent moisture
and corrosive fumes from entering the enclosure.
e. Wire-Nut type connectors are disallowed; utilize only Wago Splice-Connectors without
exception.
4. Conduits must be rigid Type 1 (or better) placed a minimum of 18-inches [455 mm]
below grade. Coordinate the following with Specialty Designated Electrical Engineer:
a. Conduit size providing power to the various subpanels
b. Conductors' quantity and sizes
c. Maximum / rated circuit breaker panel loads
d. Connectivity and full operations from all control panels and lighting control panels.
5. Unless noted otherwise or required by the equipment manufacturer, bonding / earthing
/ ground wires are not to be placed within conduits
6. Refer to these specifications and the Specialty Designated Electrical Engineer for
mounting material requirements and further installation procedures.
7. Pools / basins for swimming or human use:
a. No overhead wiring must be placed within 10 feet [3.05 m] horizontal of the inside
edge of the pool wall.
1) Install one GFCI-protected receptacle located a minimum of 10 feet [3.05 m] and a
maximum of 20 feet [6.1 m] from each pool water's edge (applies to pools,
wading pools, outdoor spas, and interactive water features). Coordinate GFCI
receptacle locations with the architectural and landscape architectural drawings.
a) Exception 1: In the event of an indoor spa, the GFCI-protected receptacle must
be located a minimum of 5 feet [1.52 m] and a maximum of 10 feet [3.05 m]
from each spa water's edge.
b) Exception 2: Such receptacles are not required for non-swimming water
features / fountains / lakes.
2) Electrical junction boxes must be located at a minimum of 4-feet from the pool
basin walls.
8. Spas or heated pools with therapy pumps:
a. The Contractor must install electrical work (GFCI's, power supplies / transformers,
timer switches, clocks, emergency cut-off switches, and grounding systems. The
therapy pump timer switch must only operate the therapy pump for a maximum of
15 minutes.

9. Filtration pumps for basins and feature pumps must be equipped with an emergency
safety cut-off switch.
a. Install the emergency safety cut-off switch to deactivate all pumps (including
filtration, feature, and therapy pumps) including relays, bather-operated safety
switch, and a related 80-decibel alarm into a NEMA 3R enclosure (or higher).
1) If the emergency safety cut-off switch is depressed, then pumps are to be
deactivated and the alarm sound and flash continuously until an authorized
person re-activates the safety cut-off system.
E. MOTOR STARTERS AND VFD’s
2. Comply with motor starter and VFD manufacturers’ installation requirements.
F. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS
2. Refer to the wiring schematics for associated circuitry with Circuit Breaker Panelboards
(CBP) and branch circuits shown in each panelboard schedule.
3. Identify the voltage / phase and is 60-Hz [50 Hz] on the front surface of each panel.
4. Size phase, neutral, and ground wires for the 100% amperage shown. Size conduits for
the complete wire bundle consisting of 3 conductors. When multiple conductors or wire
bundles are placed within the same conduit, increase the size to comply with minimum
allowable space requirements per NEC, Chapter 9, and Table 3C.
1) The junction boxes quantity and sizes shall anticipate that Wago slice connectors and
terminations are incorporated.
5. Amperage ratings indicated on the Circuit Breaker Panel (CBP) schedule are for each
circuit breaker. Size conductors for 100% of the amp rating for the overcurrent circuit
breaker unless other secondary protection is specified.
6. The CBP schedule indicates the 100% -Load Amperage (FLA) rating on each circuit.
Wiring and conduits must be sized for the 100% circuit breaker rating for each branch
circuit.
7. The CBP schedule identifies the (FLA) on each leg of a 3-phase circuit. On 1-phase
circuits, the branch circuit must be connected to the phase leg shown to balance the
Phase loading within 10 percent.
G. WIND ANOMETER / VELOCITY SENSORS
1. Install wind sensor heads, mounting pole, and related wind controller as detailed.
a. Provide parts as specified in the drawings with a custom cable and required length.
b. Utilize to reduce the operating RPM of the related feature pumps to pre-set smaller
rotational speed values.
3.18 NOT USED
3.19 NOT USED
3.20 VALVING SYSTEMS EXECUTION
A. VALVES

1. Install valves per manufacturer’s instructions to the drawings for specified valve types.
Install unions and flanges as detailed to facilitate removal.
2. Refer to these Specifications for the required identification tags for valves.
3. Install butterfly valves on each side of each pump and as detailed in the Drawings.
4. Check Valves:
a. Check valves must be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions &
recommendations.
1) Check valves may be installed in horizontal lines with the disk hinge pin in the
vertical position or in vertical lines with the flow "up."
2) Do not install check valves on vertical pipes with downward water flow.
b. Install 5 pipe diameters of clear pipe space upstream and downstream of each check
valve. Flow straighteners may be fitted in lieu of explicit pipe space. The designation
of “flow straightener” must be determined and identified by the manufacturer of
that component.
3.21 NOT USED
3.22 NOT USED
3.23 MAINTENANCE & PRE-COMMISSIONING EXECUTION
A. GENERAL IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
1. Each major item of equipment must be identified by stenciled marking, which must read
the same as the identification shown in Mechanical or Electrical Drawings.
2. Stencil letters must be uppercase (capital), not less than 1-inch [25 mm] high, and
painted with white or contrasting color Effecto Enamel.
3. Label chemical containers and crocks with minimum 2-inches [50 mm] large letters
indicating the stored chemicals for each tank. Use "Black text on Orange" colors.
Additionally, place warning labels (minimum 1-inch [25 mm] high lettering) instructing
the proper chemical dilution methods authorized for these systems.
4. I.D. tags and labels: Use the following colors guide for labels and tags except for
chemical / corrosive piping and valves:
5.
Basin Name (use the Valve Tag & Label Color Assignment
actual name of basin)
1 White text on Green tags / labels
2 Black text on White tags / labels
3 White text on Gray tags / labels
4 White text on Black tags / labels
5 Medium Blue
B. PIPING AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION

1. Main color bands in the form of pressure sensitive tape must be placed on each
pipeline-type.

a. Main color bands must be 3-inches [75 mm] in width, placed at a minimum 10-feet
[3.05 m] intervals along pipe runs, immediately preceding the passage of the line
through a wall, ceiling, and floor, and at each equipment connection or line valve.
The following piping ID colors must be utilized:
Piping Name / Purpose Identification Color Assignment

Suction / Gravity Drain Green
Filtered water Light Blue
Waste / backwash Brown
Heated Yellow
Chilled Medium Blue
Chemical / Corrosive Orange
Liquids
b. Adjacent to each color band, an abbreviation of the name / purpose (as listed
immediately above) of the pipe / valve function must be placed.
1) Letters must be 0.5-inch [13 mm] high upper-case, applied with pressure sensitive
tape.
2. I.D. Tags specified on valves (to match the Valve ID chart).
3. Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor must provide one (1) copy of each
laminated valve chart 18-inch x 24-inch [455mm x 610mm] sealed to the rigid
backboard, placed under glass, and framed, and must be hung by the contractor in a
conspicuous location in the equipment room.
C. PRE-COMMISSIONING
1. Prior to the commissioning events, provide, test, and confirm that control wiring
connections are in communication with each other.
a. Includes but not limited to:
1) filtration system controls
2) pump controls & emergency safety cut-off system with relays
3) VFD operations
4) chemical controller operations
5) flow metering, level sensing / controls, wind controls, and pressure operations
6) saline chlorination system operations
2. Provide the following for each pools’ mechanical equipment spaces:
a. Mount valve identification charts, guides, and equipment operating instructions in
laminated protective sleeves set in a stainless steel or PVC frame.
b. Completed installation of ID labels, placards, ID bands on each component (i.e.,
valves, check valves, pumps, filters, strainers, and chemical components).
3. Chemical system operations to be completed
D. ROUTINE CARE AND CLEANING

1. Routinely wipe down the surface finishes of each significant component within the
equipment room.
2. Maintain surfaces finishes being pristine, easily maintainable, free of dirt, dust, and
other miscellaneous debris.
3. Care of Stainless Steel:
a. Weekly lightly polish the exposed stainless-steel surfaces with a mild coating of clear
Mineral Oil (or similar product) to maintain these finishes and surfaces in a pristine
condition.
b. To remove light scratches from the stainless steel, hand-buff the stainless with flour
to lightly scour the surfaces. Eliminate the flour with a damp cloth and then a dry
cloth. Finally, then apply the oil mentioned above.
c. The Basis of Design: Johnson’s Baby Oil, high-grade olive oil, or similar equivalent
products.
3.24 NOT USED
3.25 NOT USED
3.26 NOT USED
3.27 NOT USED
3.28 NOT USED
3.29 MISCELLANEOUS EXECUTION ACTIVITIES
A. INDIRECT VACUUM ASSEMBLY WITH VACUUM PUMP
1. Refer to the Drawings for installation details.
B. DECK SHOWERS / WATER SUPPLY / WASTE WATER INSTALLATION
1. Provide a 0.75-inch [18 mm] potable water supply pipe at deck shower, ADA compliant
approved drinking fountain, foot rinse, and hose bibb. Refer to the drawings for the
deck shower design and location.
a. Unless otherwise noted, anchor the deck shower assembly with a reinforced
concrete mass anchor. Refer to the Drawings for additional details.
b. If visible when completed, the mass anchor’s top surface must match the color of the
adjacent deck as approved by This Engineer.
2. Hose bib(s) must be provided to facilitate flushing of the deck areas and installed with
anti-siphon devices (vacuum breaker) without exception.
3. Provide both auto-fill and manual fill valves on each water-fill system. Provide a
minimum 4-inches [100 mm] air gap below the water-fill system’s terminus.
4. Provide backflow preventer and water hammer/shock arrestor devices as located within
the piping diagram and in accordance with their manufacturers’ instructions.
5. Provide the backwash sump and related waste pipes to transport the pool filter
backwash outfall, deck shower assembly water, and deck drainage water to their
authorized outfalls to the sanitary sewer as detailed (maintain a minimum 1.5% slope
for each gravity flow waste pipe).

a. A minimum 6-inches [150 mm] air gap is specified for each filter backwash pipe
draining into the sump unless noted otherwise in the Drawings. The elevation of the
backwash waste pipe must be a minimum of 24-inches [610 mm] above the Finish
Floor.
b. Waterproof concrete backwash sumps with Xypex Concentrate or an approved
equal.
c. Extend backwash sump and equipment room waste piping to the sanitary sewer in
compliance with local codes. Size waste-water line to accommodate the specific filter
/ backwash 100% flows in a gravity-flow condition.
d. Pool overflow (commonly caused by rain events) must be piped to the authorized
outfall in accordance with local environmental requirements.
6. Non-metallic tubing and piping exposed to sunlight and UV rays must be protected with
UV inhibitors or applying an ultraviolet resistant coating (for piping & fittings only) as
required on the drawings.
7. Install scheduled Type 1 piping reducer bushing to act as a funnel. Provide a separate
overflow and waste line from each pool (in the event of multiple pools).
8. Install the various potable water fill connections and fittings within equipment room
enclosures and at the various deck locations as indicated on the drawings.
a. Protect fill systems with contractor-provided water hammer arrestors and backflow
preventers as specified and detailed.
C. WATER LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEMS
1. Provide water level control systems as specified in 2.16, Manufacturer’s Instructions,
and as follows.
a. Route 2-inches [50 mm] static lines from the pool basin into the specified Mechanical
Areas (collector tanks mounted level with the basin water level). Caution: This static
pipe(s) must continually slope toward to the level sensor at 1% minimum to assist in
preventing air-locks.
b. Install potable water service in the Mechanical Equipment Room or Area as specified.
Fit with isolation valve and backflow preventer.
c. Install a potable water supply manifold to each static line location.
1) Provide valving for manual and automated fill operations as detailed.
d. Adjust the water level control device only after water flow adjustments to
subsystems have been completed.
e. Label / I.D. water-fill components as specified herein.
D. FLOOR ACCESS DOORS:
1. Examination
a. Examine substrates and openings for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation
only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. Installation
a. Install products in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved
submittals. Locate units to be level, plumb, and in proper alignment with adjacent
work.

1) Test units for proper function and adjust until the proper operation is achieved.
2) Extend drain piping to the storm sewer per the Drawings. Slope piping away from
the access door at a minimum 2%.
a) Critical: The water discharge from the hatch drain piping into the vault is
disallowed.
3) Repair finishes damaged during installation.
4) Restore finishes, so no evidence remains of corrective work.
3. Adjusting & Cleaning
a. Clean exposed surfaces using methods acceptable to the manufacturer which will not
damage the finish.
E. DECK PEDESTALS
1. General:
a. The installer must adhere, follow, and observe the manufacturer’s guidelines,
instructions, recommendations, and requirements.
b. Deck pedestal supports specified to be for use for pedestrian traffic only.
c. Perimeter Walls and Containment
1) It is critical that pedestrian decks be restrained by perimeter blocking or walls on
all sides. Lateral movement greater than 0.125 inch [3.7 mm] is unacceptable.
d. Features supported by legs or feet are unacceptable because of the consequences of
point loading.
e. Any feature that creates vibration must be provided for in appropriate consultation
and written agreement with the pedestal manufacturer.
f. All wet-decks must be designed not to exceed the design capacity of the pedestal.
g. The substrate immediately below the pedestals must provide positive drainage.
Refer to the Architect for such drains.
2. Project site conditions:
a. Deck surfacing tiles or pavers must sit above the integral waterproofing flashing and
counter flashing. In situations where the perimeter of the deck encounters the
flashing material, protective wall covering must be specified the Architect. Do not
proceed without the Architect’s express written approval.
b. Heavy Roof Top Features.
1) Flat bottom features such as planters, large benches, IWF basins, pool basins,
water features, etc. always require individual support that is in addition to the
deck pedestal system. Refer such conditions to the Architect prior to proceeding.
2) A minimum of one additional pedestal support must be installed for every 500 lbs.
[226.7 kG] (or portion thereof) of static loading. These additional assistance
pedestals must be installed directly under the decking and evenly spaced
immediately below the feature locations. One additional pedestal must be placed
in the corner of any rectangular feature.
c. For applications over roofing and waterproofing membranes Bison, Innovative
Products recommends that a 12-inches x 12-inches [305 mm x 305 mm] piece of the
same type of membrane be installed as a separate protection slip sheet underneath
each pedestal.

d. Decks over roofing and waterproofing:

1) Pedestal Installation: Pedestals must be mounted on surfaces with a minimum 40
psi [275 kPa] bearing capacity.
e. Decks on Grade:
1) Any substrate soil that is to receive pedestals must be adequately compacted and
have a positive drainage slope
2) Bison Floating Foundation Bases (FFB) must be used beneath all on-grade Bison
Deck Support decks. Level the surface and install directly on grade as a base.
3) A wall or perimeter containment on all open sides is required. Install structural
perimeter containment that restrains the entire decking system.
F. EQUIPMENT SPARE PARTS
1. Obtain a signed receipt from the Owner and copy This Engineer for spare parts and attic
stock deliveries turned over to the Owner.
2. Mount / hang or store the provided spare parts within the equipment room, on plastic
shelving or wall-mounted on a pegboard covered wall space.
a. Small spare parts must be placed in a clear, sealable bag or container with a printed
description of its contents.
3.30 NOZZLE SYSTEMS EXECUTION
A. CLEAN PIPING & FLUSH SYSTEM PRIOR TO NOZZLE CONNECTION
1. It is critical that the contractor must clean the pipe interior of debris, foreign matter,
sand, and keep clean during installation. Flush the pipes sufficiently so that no foreign
debris must encounter the nozzle assemblies. Pipes must not be placed in standing
water, mud, or when the trenches or weather conditions are unsuitable for the work.
B. STAINLESS STEEL COMPONENTS
1. Stainless-steel equipment must be installed no more than 30-days prior to filling the
C. SWIVEL ATTACHMENTS
1. Install one swivel unit for each nozzle, sized for each individual nozzle.
2. Aim, calibrate, and adjust the elevations of each nozzle when started and again as
needed to provide the visual appearance desired by the Owner / Client.
3.31 UNDERWATER LIGHTING EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
1. Stainless-steel equipment must be installed no more than 30-days prior to filling the
3. Comply with the NEC requirements for installing wet-rated conductors, wires, and
cabling within under-deck, underground, and underwater conduits.

4. Observe and follow precisely the installation procedures and recommended

requirements of the manufacturer of the products utilized without exception.
5. Locate the power supply and transformers a minimum of 9-inches [200 mm] above the
maximum pool water elevation. Verify the designated location with the Landscape
Architect.
6. Install the following electrical components with the underwater lighting system:
a. One photo-cell (outdoors near the filter area).
b. One 24-hour time clock (Intermatic T-104R or equal) and relays, wired to operate the
underwater lights in conjunction with the required photo-cell.
c. Bonding & Grounding connections to UL listed (or equivalent certification) ground
lugs or connectors.
7. It is critical that underwater junction box installations include only Re-Enterable
Compound: 3M™ Scotchcast™ 2123 as manufactured by 3M Electrical Markets Division.
a. Photo-documentation is required for each junction box (without the cover being
installed) when the Re-Enterable Compound has been installed.
B. UNDERWATER LIGHTING SYSTEMS
1. Install RGBW underwater LED lights with a low-voltage power supplies / transformer
and step-up power supplies / transformers.
a. Pools and water features / fountains: 45 Watts LED
b. Spas: 26 Watts LED
3.32 NOT USED
3.33 NOT USED
3.34 NOT USED
3.35 NOT USED
3.36 NOT USED
3.37 TESTING, STARTING, & COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS
A. PIPING TEST
1. Refer to these Specifications for hydrostatic test (water-pressure testing) requirements
for the water piping systems.
2. Refer to these Specifications for test (air pressure testing) requirements for only
compressed air piping systems.
a. Critical: NO air pressure testing is allowed on water piping systems.
3. Refer to “Quality Control,” for additional requirements during testing. The Contractor
must submit a Certificate of Completion of each water piping test and each compressed
air test. Refer to “Submittals” for additional info.
B. ADJUSTMENTS
1. Continue to adjust and regulate the system under actual operating conditions until
specified water quality levels are achieved and can be maintained.
2. Adjust as required to assure water flow rates are attained.

C. CONCEALMENT
1. No piping work, fixtures, or equipment must be concealed or covered by any means
before they have been successfully water-pressure tested, flow tested, and inspected by
the local governmental authority having the authority and observed by one of the
following:
a. Architect
b. Engineer
2. Work must be installed and tested as required by These Specifications and the code
requirements and must be leak tight before the regulatory inspection of the work stage
requested.
a. If leaks are discovered, make repairs and re-test.
D. BASIN & PIPE FILLING
1. Do not fill basins until structural curing times and 28-day strengths of the basins and the
below list have been achieved. This is applicable to:
a. Basin structural basin
b. Tile adhesive and grouting products
c. Contraction and expansion joint materials and fillers
d. Similar products
2. Water addition to the basin: Fill the basin with clean, potable water from the deepest
end. Use a dampening device attached to the fill hose to assist in the prevention of
erosion or staining on the basins’ finishes.
a. Do not cease the filling operation until the water level is at the waterline tiles.
3. The fogging of the basin’s walls and floor plaster finishes are the responsibility of the
Installer:
a. Assist in preventing the basin’s interior plaster finishes from drying too rapidly by
“fogging” (applying small spray droplets of water) the natural stone / plaster / tile
surfaces during the filling process.
1) The installer must provide all necessary workforce requirements for this
operation’s success.
2) Thoroughly water fog entire interior surfaces every 60 minutes
4. The filling, start-up, and water chemistry implementation of the pool must be in
accordance with the written procedures within the book, "POOL SURFACES - PROBLEMS
AND SOLUTIONS," 7th Edition, by Techlines, Inc. and Randy Dukes.
E. COMMISSIONING & OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT
1. Coordinate the initial startup and operational period, installation, electrical,
commissioning, and chemical completion activities.
a. Oversee, perform, adjust, and supervise the operation of the equipment and be
responsible for the proper functioning thereof.
b. Make such changes, adjustments, or replacement of equipment as required for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
c. Replace equipment, materials, & parts found to be defective.

F. CHEMICAL ADDITION / WATER TREATMENT

1. Maintain water within the newly filled basin with a pH of 7.2 for a minimum of 3 days
(with regular brushing at least twice daily of the entire pool surface) prior to adding pre-
diluted chlorine.
2. Provide daily service (including specified chemicals and filter media) for the basin until
the governing regulatory agency has issued a temporary operating permit or Owner’s
acceptance, whichever comes first.
3. Notify the Architect and This Engineer of System Startup forty-eight (48) hours in
advance. Before startup, corroborate sub-systems and safety features (including
electrical circuit protection) have been tested and operate within parameters of the
Contract Documents.
4. Chemical Operational Parameters: Attain and maintain the following chemical
operational parameters at the time of startup, thru the 90-day maintenance period, and
Substantial Completion.
DISINFECTANT LEVELS MIN. IDEAL MAX.

a. Pool Free Chlorine, ppm [mg/L] 2.0 3.0 4.0
b. Combined Avail. Chlorine, ppm [mg/L] 0.0 0.0 0.2
c. Total Available Chlorine, ppm [mg/L] 2.0 3.0 6.2
d. Bromine (when utilized) 2.0 3.0 4.0
e. pH 7.2 7.3 - 7.5 7.6
f. Total Alkalinity, ppm [mg/L] 80 100-120 130
g. Total Dissolved Solids, ppm [mg/L] 0 0 1200
h. Calcium Hardness, ppm [mg/L] 150 200 - 250 300
i. Copper, Silver, Iron ppm [mg/L] 0 0 0.1
j. Cyanuric Acid (Stabilizer), ppm [mg/L] 0 25 - 35 50
5. Provide a balanced water quality via the implementation of the “Langelier Saturation
Index” (LSI). The LSI must be maintained between 0.0 and +0.3.
6. UV Equipment Commissioning:
a. Commissioning by a qualified factory trained technician is a prerequisite to a
warranty-issuance for the Ultraviolet Chamber and Control Panel.
b. Supervise installation of the electrical and control cabling connections.
c. Provide training for the daily operation and maintenance during the commissioning
process. Video training session. Submit the recording per Division 01.
d. Demonstrate the operation of the UV sanitizer including controls to de-activate the
filtration pump(s).
7. Saline Chlorination Systems' Project Commissioning:
a. Commissioning by a qualified factory trained technician is a prerequisite to a
warranty-issuance for the Saline Chlorination System and its Control Panel.
b. When a saline chlorination system is specified, it is critical that no salt / saline
solutions are added to the basin water for a minimum of 28 days after the basin’s
filtration system was commissioned, and water chemistry parameters are
maintained for the minimum 28 days.

G. OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION

1. Provide experienced pool operator-instruction by a certified pool operator.
2. Instructions must be provided for each operating pool shift. Each shift’s instructions
must be for a period of not less than three (3) days (two (2) full day’s operations and
start-up, and one (1) full day shut-down assistance) after the pool has been filled and
initially placed into operation.
a. During these periods, the Owner's designated representative(s) for operating shifts
must be thoroughly instructed in phases of the pool's operation, including start-up,
and emptying procedures.
b. Prior to this instructor leaving the site, the instructor must obtain written
certification from the Owner's designated representative acknowledging that the
instruction periods have been completed and necessary operating information was
provided.
3. Provide a DVD documenting training and operational requirements, including start-up,
filtration operations, chemical handling operations, and emptying procedures.
H. CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
1. After the work of Section 13 1100 has been completed, clean-up work areas and remove
equipment, excess materials, and debris. Protect pool(s) from damage until substantial
completion. Remove and replace equipment, finishes, and materials that are chipped,
cracked, abraded, improperly adhered, otherwise damaged, or deemed unacceptable by
This Engineer.
I. MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATES OF INSTALLATION
1. Obtain written manufacturer’s installation certificates stating the manufactured
equipment is installed in accordance and compliance with the manufacturers'
instructions & recommendations and Contract Documents.
2. The following minimum listing of equipment must have manufacturer’s certifications:
a. Strainers
b. Pumps
c. Automated filters
d. Chemical feeders
e. Chemical and mechanical space controllers
f. VFD's
g. Automated nozzles
h. LED lighting including power supplies and potted junction boxes
i. Heaters and heat exchanger systems
j. ADA approved accessible lift unit devices
k. Compressed air systems
l. Saline chlorination systems
3. The Contractor must certify the following minimum listing of materials:
a. Non-slip tiles (for certified slip-resistance) on sloped and flat surfaces
b. Field-installed non-slip surfaces (for certified slip-resistance)
c. Tile adhesives (for specified shear strengths)
d. Epoxy-type adhesives and grouting (to assist in preventing efflorescence)

END OF SECTION 13 1100

HR Aruba Adult Pool Project Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

HR Aruba Adult Pool Project Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

PROJECT MANUAL

Issued for Construction

Hyatt Aruba Adult Pool

Palm Beach, Aruba

Division 01 - general requirements

Division 02 - existing conditions

Division 06 - wood, plastics, and composites

Division 07 - thermal and moisture protection

Division 13 – special construction

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Hyatt Regency Aruba: Adult Pool Construction.

1. Project Location: LG Smith Boulevard #85, Palm Beach, Aruba.

B. Owner: Hyatt Development.

1. Owner's Representative: Brad Marman.

C. Architect: BLUR Workshop, LLC as consultant to EDSA.

1. Mechanical, Electrical Plumbing: Beach Engineering Solutions Team.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by

C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by

1.6 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Weekend Hours: As arranged with Operations team.

F. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on

G. Employee Identification: Provide identification tags for Contractor personnel working on

1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

1. Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual.

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 012500

SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 3

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS